James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 17, 2018 22:21:49 GMT
[Part I] Chapter One – Beginnings October 1976: During the second presidential debate, President Gerry Ford almost puts his foot in his mouth but stops himself from saying something that might come back to haunt him later. He recalls a pre-debate brief with his chief-of-staff, the young Dick Cheney, about Soviet Domination over Eastern Europe. There naturally was, and Ford confirms that there is during the debate. He adds that he wishes to see that end one day so that the Poles, the Czechoslovaks and others too no longer feel dominated by the Soviet Union. November 1976: Ford wins the presidential election. He takes Ohio and Wisconsin by tiny margins after his campaign has continued to improve since a bad start. Jimmy Carter actually wins the popular vote, but Ford wins the only game in town: the Electoral college vote. There is surprise yet everyone agrees that Ford has won fair-and-square. January 1977: Ford is sworn in for his second term. He is term-limited in 1980 but before then aims to do much domestically and abroad. The president keeps his pre-election cabinet and most senior appointments too. Dole is his VP, Kissinger at State, Rumsfeld at Defence, Simon at Treasury and Bush at the CIA. Critics claim more of the same though Ford declares that there will be positive change with his administration. June 1977: Soviet General Secretary Leonid Brezhnev has a fatal slip-and-fall on the steps in his apartment building in Central Moscow. He cracks his head and bleeds out before anything can be done. The jokes inside his country will say that the weight of his self-awarded medals helped bring the heavy man down. July 1977: A peaceful struggle for succession to replace Brezhnev sees the KGB Chairman get the nod: Yuri Andropov. His colleagues in the Soviet leadership restrain his powers as the new general secretary though those restrictions are something at once seen as challenges to be overcome by Andropov. He has no intention of being an equal with those on the Politburo. One immediate (non-fatal) casualty of Brezhnev’s demise is his hanger-on Chernenko: he is shown the door. November 1977: Talks between Panama and the United States over a renegotiation of the status of the Panama Canal come to an abrupt halt when General Torrijos – Panama’s ‘Maximum Leader’ – walks out in a huff. Kissinger denies claims afterwards that Panama was offered nothing as Torrijos says was the case. The US Senate is pleased; Ford is too for his own party especially, but the whole Senate as well, doesn’t want to see the transfer of the Panama Canal to Panama led by a military strongman. January 1978: Violent clashes between religious students and security forces in the Iranian city of Qom. A newspaper of the government of The Shah had published an article defaming the exiled Ayatollah Khomeini: a man whose son everybody ‘knew’ had been murdered by government agents a few months past. Sources differ on the number of killed in Qom, those being anywhere from two according to the government and up to seventy from what it said by senior religious figures. February 1978: The forty days process begins in Iran. Following traditional customs, forty days after the death of those martyred there will be memorial services for them: Khomeini has called for blood. The first series of memorials see riots nationwide with Qom and Tabriz erupting in violence. The Shah has the army send in and they do a terrible job of containing trouble… they effectively cause more. The riots target symbols of ‘the West’ too. Deaths occur with the numbers officially at six, unofficially in the hundreds. The Shah tries to concede to the demands of what is starting to become an organised opposition by firing members of his intelligence services but differing over a further, real response. March 1978: Once forty days is up, the memorials-cum-riots start again. Over fifty cities, including the capital Tehran, are hit by trouble. The army is present again, so too are organised rioters. New non-lethal riot control equipment sent by the United States for the soldiers has been misappropriated in the notoriously-corrupt Iran. The use of the army comes alongside promises from The Shah of liberalisation and an end to corruption: this seems to anger everyone. Meanwhile, hundreds are reported dead again by the opposition with the government downplaying the numbers below ten in a ridiculous falsehood. May 1978: The forty days are up again. Back come the protesters who fast riot and are met by the police then the army. You can set your watch by this now. It is nationwide and cannot be stopped. As to the latest round of riots, they are as vicious as before. The death toll is huge. There is an anti-Western / anti-American tone to the protests which is prominent among the ringleaders. In this round of violence, there are shots fired at the house of the prominent religious leader Ayatollah Shariatmadari – a rival of Khomeini who is across in Iraq – and one of his students is killed. Kissinger had been due to visit, sent by an anxious Ford who was concerned over Iran’s stability, but The Shah wavers back and forth over the impact of that and the US Secretary of State doesn’t come. Andropov, still with one foot in the door at the KGB when he isn’t supposed to, instructs his successor Chebrikov to pay more attention to Iran for any opportunities which might arise to protect the Soviet Union by the possible spread of influence to Iran. June 1978: The mood in Iran seemed to change come June. The ‘scheduled’ protests were meant to happen in the middle of the month but the opposition – religious and secular both – had been meeting with the representatives of The Shah. Shariatmadari had been among the leaders and there had come an apology for that shooting of one of his students. When the protests did occur, there was little of the previous violence. Khomeini was furious but he was abroad and not on the ground where he could direct events. Under Bush’s directorship, the CIA makes it’s later infamous pronouncement to the White House that Iran ‘is not in a revolutionary or even a pre-revolutionary situation’. The Shah was telling his friends in America that everything was fine: this was believed by those who wanted to hear such a thing. Kissinger came to Tehran for his visit with The Shah yet Iran’s leader still had the time to talk with the opposition and make further concessions to them. Across in neighbouring Iraq, Soviet Foreign Minister Gromyko pays a visit to President Al-Bakr and met with the powerful Vice President who was Saddam Hussein. Tensions over the brutal treatment of the Iraqi Communist Party were eased over somewhat. In addition, to further help Iraqi-Soviet relations, Saddam accepted a request from Gromyko when it came to refusing the pleas from The Shah to have Khomeini thrown out of Iraq: Saddam was told this came from Andropov personally who wanted the Iranian exile to stay in Najaf rather than go aboard. July 1978: The Shah authorised his government to further treat with the opposition and allowed them to present their case. The secularists – with Sanjabi prominent among them – were given the opportunity to express what they wished to see as the future for Iran with changes made as to how it would be governed. Shariatmadari too was given a voice that Iran’s prime minister had instructed to listen too and treat with respect as the voice of the religious opposition was heard too. Others in Iran – such as the communists – weren’t treated the same way and those that were allowed to air their grievances were promised nothing in return. In Moscow, the KGB was given express permission by the Politburo to take a more active role in Iran despite the apparent winding down of protests there in the country. There were indications that the Islamic movement was more powerful than suspected and this was seen as an area of concern for the Soviet Union should they manage to do the impossible and bring down The Shah. Andropov had worked to convince his colleagues of this and they prepared to agree for support to be given to the Iranian communists, the Tudeh. Risk on this matter was something seen as of little concern and any fallout from failure would fall upon the Iranians themselves. Security of the Soviet state was at this time the only interest of the Politburo as they aimed to maintain the geo-political balance of power should Iran collapse into chaos. August 1978: The pendulum swung back the other way. The troubles across Iran restarted due to unconnected events creating a perfect storm for a month of violence. The government had cut spending and this had the effect of releasing many young men from employment who were angry and ripe for recruitment by extremists to express their anger. There were protests underway in the city of Isfahan over the detention of a local religious leader who attracted many of these new recruits to an element of the religious opposition not linked to Shariatmadari. Tudeh protests too gained some of the disaffected willing to cause trouble and ultimately give the communists a bigger role in the future of the country with numbers that couldn’t be ignored. Then there came the cinema fire in Abadan. Over four hundred died when arson destroyed the building, a symbol of Western culture subverting Iranians, and killed those inside when the doors were locked. At once, the cries of deliberate murder of those inside by ‘agents of The Shah’ came from Khomeini: any suggestion that it was rather convenient for him and his cause apparently had no substance to it. He called for their vengeance from across in Iraq where his voice wasn’t just heard by the faithful there but fast spread by word of mouth and audio recordings into Iran. Those being corrupted by the ideas of the West were now martyrs. Iran was getting a new government and The Shah had more focus on that. He brought in an old hand who at once cracked down on corruption and promised that there would be democracy: the people would prosper. Sanjabi and Shariatmadari were given more room to have influence by the new prime minister including on how and when elections should commence; once their ideas came to The Shah though, he wasn’t that sure and dithered over whether such things should be carried out. September 1978: Summer heat, angry disadvantaged youngsters, long-standing widespread political discontent and agitators wanting a conflict with the forces of the state. Put them all together and what do you get? Answer: a country up in arms and revolution in the air. The early part of the month saw a series of big marches in Tehran eventually turn violent as their daily presence caused an unauthorised use of force by the local commander in the city. The protesters were shouting for Khomeini, calling for his return from exile. A general disobeyed The Shah’s standing instructions that martial law didn’t mean what it did and had his men open fire when they ‘reacted’ to shots fired against them. They would call it Black Friday. As before, declaration would come afterwards inflating the numbers – Khomeini picked the number four thousand seemingly from the sky – but there had been a lot of killing done regardless of lies. In response, more marches were planned to protest those deaths and The Shah reaffirmed his orders that they would be ignored so he could continue his process of talking with the opposition. As had been the case all year, this was done through intermediaries as The Shah was an ill man. That was hidden and those engaged in talks with his government were unaware of that. The problem was though that this would all be for naught because following Black Friday, there began the outbreak of strikes. First they were in the oil industry, export revenues which had made Iran rich, then among government workers. These were uncoordinated and only partially effective in the short-term: that wouldn’t be the case if they continued and there was a uniting of common cause. Soviet interference in Iran’s affairs was now becoming significant. There were KGB spies watching Khomeini in Najaf – which Saddam knew about; he wanted to know what they knew as that was how the game of intelligence affairs was done – while the KGB had its locally-recruited network inside Iran expand and connect better with the Tudeh. Those communists weren’t Moscow-aligned (who needs perfection?) but they would do for now. Information was shared with them and weapons supplied: the latter being stolen Iranian ones, not direct Soviet arms. October 1978: President Ford had been most-displeased at the turn of events in Iran. He had been assured by the CIA and then Kissinger had given him an indication too – though the Secretary of State hadn’t committed himself there like Bush had – that the situation earlier in the year was getting better. Then it went worse than before. With revolution in Iran before being impossible and now looking possible, Ford was concerned. He met with his advisers and spoke with foreign leaders. There was consensus everywhere that things were doomed for The Shah but no one had ‘the answer’ to solve all of this. Contact with Iran’s leader itself was never the best too: the crazy man saw foreign conspiracies everywhere, especially from those whom had previously before interfered in Iranian affairs… like the United States. The inability to act in any meaningful way along with trying to deal with an unreasonable supposed ally frustrated the president. The Shah declared an amnesty for exiles abroad, Khomeini included. No one in Iran seemed to care. He too ordered the army and the police not to break up strikers nationwide who were now coordinating despite geographical and political differences into a country-wide general strike. His latest idea was to wear them down. Concessions had been given to the opposition leaders and he believed that would satisfy them; with the strikers, they would go back to work soon… just because. Some of those strikers, like many of the unemployed, were joining with extremists though. There were also deserting soldiers: the Iranian Army was bleeding them, many who left with their weapons. Those extremist organisations growing in strength were religious radicals committed to the idea of Khomeini (his true motives not revealed) and the Tudeh. There were secular, constitutional and student groups as well, those opposed to the rule enforced by The Shah on principle and they were gaining support, yet nothing like the numbers of the preceding two. Opposition to Iran’s leader as multi-faceted and the only thing they had in common was to be rid of him. Supposedly keeping a check on all of this was the Iranian secret police. Where were they? The SAVAK had been hit with supposed reforms and been a political football that included a marked weakening of its previous power in some matters yet an unreasonable strengthening elsewhere. As with everything, The Shah was incapable of deciding anything firm on them and what he wanted from the SAVAK now. Far away, unrelated to events in Iran, but with significance elsewhere to many, a new Pope was elected. The Polish national chosen to be the head of the Catholic Church after the unexpected death of his predecessor took the name John Paul II. His country was under Soviet Domination. He would want to do something about that in the future. The Soviet Union would later pay attention to him like they were with another religious leader at the moment: one being discussed much in Moscow. November 1978: A Persian Trotsky. That was the official KGB view of Khomeini following the reports which came from their intelligence activities within his immediate circle. A panel of experts had then brought those reports together and other information to come to the conclusion which KGB Chairman Chebrikov presented to the Politburo in Moscow. This man, the elderly politicians were told, was not just a threat to the rule of The Shah. He was a threat to other regimes in further Middle Eastern nations. He was a threat to the Americans with their position in the region. Above all of that, he was a threat to the Soviet Union too. His public statements on Iran were one thing; what was more important were his long-term goals. He was a fanatic, a man rooted in his religion that was fundamentally opposed to anything but his interpretation of what his God wanted for his fellow Muslims. Those people Khomeini wanted to act on the behalf of – professing his goal wasn’t power for himself; as if that was the case, really? – were spread all over the world including those in Moscow-aligned Afghanistan which neighboured the Iran from where he was exiled yet also those of the faithful in the parts of the Soviet Union where religion had never been fully stamped out. Once the presentation was finished, the Politburo considered their options. Ignore him? Have the Iraqis keep him in Najaf and unable to leave? Work to discredit him? Meet his challenge head-on? Or… get rid of him? These options were discussed. Andropov pushed for one of those options with the support of Chebrikov but the others weren’t so sure. There was thinking on this matter to be done and consideration having to be taking for the unwanted effects that might cause. How to solve a problem like Khomeini, if he truly was such a problem, would take some time to work out. Down in Iran, whose borders with the Soviet Union were long and of great significance for the Soviets, the violence continued unabated. Student opposition groups fought with the authorities and the army after arming themselves. They ran riot (literally) inside Tehran, joined by mobs of teenage boys infused with religious zeal but also caught up in events, and attacked symbols of the hated ‘West’. Among those were the embassies of Britain and the United States: the former being burnt down and the latter being lucky not to suffer the same fate. Large parts of the Iranian capital were left on fire. This caused The Shah to fire his prime minister and appoint a military government. It was a step meant to project strength. The military lacked the authority to act though. In Tehran, they hadn’t responded to the rioters following those standing orders to not do so because the country was under martial law in name yet not in reality. That obeying of orders there had come when the army were under extreme duress when being attacked with petrol bombs and gun-shots. Elsewhere in the country, protests in support of the continuing strikes and the calls for the return of Khomeini weren’t matched by official armed interference either. The Shah spoke to his people. He told them he would lead the revolution, not oppose it. He was also ordering arrests of those who were corrupt and once more made his promises of equality to all Iranians as part of his process of engaging with the opposition to him rather than fighting them. To Iranians, he looked weak, powerless and clutching at straws to save himself. To outsiders, it seemed like he was delusional and had finally lost control. Khomeini – who The Shah had promised last month could return from exile – instructed all Iranians to overthrow their ruler instead, sending the message through intermediaries while also trying to figure out a way out of the prison which Saddam was trying to make Iraq for him. Unable to have direct dealings with Khomeini, who there was great distrust for yet also a secret yearning to have influence like his, the secular opposition which had formed into the National Front approached Shariatmadari. That religious leader had no interest in uniting with the political figures who were already disillusioned with The Shah and had turned that into a realisation that he had no interest in the future for Iran which they saw. Sanjabi at the head of the National Front had contacts made with the non-extremist student groups, including those promoting women’s rights too, and also reached out to the Tudeh. He was looking for an understanding, not an alliance. There were those Iranian communists thought of as moderates. Maybe they could all work together? There were fundamental disagreements in some areas yet agreement in others. Everyone wanted the same thing: The Shah to step aside from his leadership role. Should that happen, the thinking was that order could return to the country and that would rob Khomeini of his interest and his ability to keep stirring up trouble. This goal was something seen as possible… if only Khomeini was out of the picture. The KGB’s contacts within the Tudeh passed that thinking of those who wanted to be their allies and give them an opening onwards to Moscow. December 1978: Protests inside Iran against the rule of The Shah had been undertaken by a large number of people yet the vast majority of the population had stayed away from them. Their support for their ruler or wish for him to be gone wasn’t publicly expressed by them taking to the streets. That changed in December. The people came out onto the streets. There were millions of them now where there had been tens of thousands beforehand. Even if the security forces and the army had been ordered to turn on them, they wouldn’t have been able to, not with those numbers. As to that army, the figure who were deserting was previously alarming but now outrageous. Men walked away from uniformed service, some killing their officers first. Like the street protesters, their political views and the future which they wanted for their country were multiple but they were united in the cause of opposition to The Shah. He himself – who had declared last month that he would lead the revolution rather than oppose it – tried desperately to maintain his position as he made more concessions to the demands of the opposition leadership with political prisoners released and promises made on elections; he once again was seeking a new prime minister too with his deck-chairs on-the-Titanic approach. What troops were still in the streets were ordered back to let the demonstrations continue so there was only very little trouble between them and the people. Some soldiers were given flowers by the people to show no ill intent. The protesters chanted for Khomeini, a man who was all things to all people. He was still stuck in Iraq though when the mass protests started at the beginning of the month and so inside Iran it was another religious leader, this time Ayatollah Taleghani (Shariatmadari still refused to take any leadership role), who along with Sanjabi from the secularists formed that united front as they professed to lead the people… all the while with the communists from the Tudeh snapping at their heels to be allowed to play with the big boys. Iran was bulwark against communism for the United States. The country was an ally of the Americans with relations on regional security, the global oil trade and vital military contracts too. President Ford had been coming under pressure for months from within to first not let The Shah fall then later to help get rid of him because his continued presence put the stability of Iran in a dangerous situation. To abandon The Shah wasn’t that much of an issue for Ford himself yet it was for others though such as his secretary of state Kissinger. The CIA were now doing the opposite of what they had previously been doing and saying that the country was past its revolution and heading for civil war if something wasn’t done as the various opposition groups were arming themselves ready to fight if they had to. It would only take one spark… However, Ford couldn’t make a decision on the matter when it came to actively supporting The Shah or turning on him. There were all sorts of theories about the motives of Khomeini and also the influence that outside forces such as the Soviet Union might have in all of this. The only thing that Ford could agree to do was send an aircraft carrier to the Persian Gulf and to also warn American military personnel in-country – those contracted to maintain the expensive equipment which supposedly projected Iranian military strength – to be prepared to leave if ‘the unthinkable’ happened and civil war did come. In Moscow, General Secretary Andropov had convinced his colleagues of the danger from the Persian Trotsky that was Khomeini. It had then taken some talking and deliberations for them to decide that he must be dealt with before he endangered them all. There had been rumblings from some of ‘adventurism’ and this drew back into the ill-feeling among certain Politburo figures of that taking place now in Iran after it was already occurring in Central America: Soviet arms and money, used by Cuban surrogates, was keeping the fight going against the American-backed regimes in Guatemala and Nicaragua. Chebrikov kept on feeding the reports though from Najaf of what Khomeini was supposedly planning and Gromyko told his colleagues of how the West had no interest in getting involved in Iran as long as there was nothing to point to a direct, overt Soviet interference that they could identify easily. A decision was taken to see the end of the threat from the Persian Trotsky. Days before the New Year, The Shah appointed his newest prime minister, a National Front colleague of Sanjabi in the form of Bakhtiar and struck an agreement with him where the royal family would take a vacation from Iran. It was a vacation which The Shah wasn’t intending to be returning from. He was running away, he knew the game was up. The people wanted Khomeini and SAVAK told him that Iraq was letting the exile leave and helping him return to Iran. Sanjabi had told The Shah though that they in the opposition would make sure that they had Khomeini under control. Now as to Khomeini, he arrived in Tehran on December 31st. He was met by adoring crowds… and a bullet too. He died in Iran at Iranian hands with the gunman being identified as a supporter of The Shah. The shocked and outraged mob killed the assassin before he could talk. The Shah had always spoken of the all-powerful KGB being active in his country though this he, nor anyone else for that matter, could have been foreseen as something they would do. Iran would now erupt into civil war.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 18, 2018 19:39:43 GMT
Chapter Two – The Wars of ‘79
January 1979:
Everyone in Iran knew who had murdered Khomeini. He had been slain on the orders of The Shah. Beyond that, there were conspiracy theories upon conspiracy theories on who else was involved ranging from the CIA, the British, the Zionists, the Soviets and the Iraqis: they all had their motives for helping The Shah do this but what was important was that he was the one responsible. Those who had little regard for Khomeini all went along with the narrative that the man was a martyr afterwards because it made sense: it had been Khomeini who had been trying to bring down The Shah and The Shah had then played along with pretending that he was giving in and saying he would be exiling himself all the while planning to murder Khomeini at the last minute. That was reinforced too by the behaviour from The Shah following the killing of the returning exiled ayatollah when he at once went back on the promises made to the National Front leadership – they weren’t in fact promises, he said – and decided to stay to take charge of the situation following the assassination. Prime Minister Bakhtiar was asked to resign and when he refused, standing up to The Shah who wasn’t used to dealing with such behaviour, he was fired then arrested. Sanjabi complained about this: another arrest. The leading religious figures in the form of Shariatmadari and Taleghani were both targeted for arrest too with The Shah claiming that they were supporting the mass of rioting Iranians who were tearing the country apart. They couldn’t be found though. The SAVAK agents sent after them reported back that both men had vanished… there was no suspicion in The Shah that he wasn’t being told the truth on that matter nor that with Sanjabi his arrest had been done in the manner ordered. The Shah was no longer leaving and stayed in Tehran while around him the city was in chaos like most of the country.
The news of the assassination rocked the Iranian people into action. The murder of such a man as Khomeini was too much. They no long protested, they fought. Anyone who wanted to stand in their way regretted it. Almost all of the army shared the mood of the people on this and what members didn’t desert, stepped aside and let the people take out their anger day and night for almost a week. Every symbol of the regime to be found was trashed. Every symbol of the West got the same treatment. They went for the American Embassy – the den of spies – and burnt that down after storming it at night and the Iranian police leading the Americans there away to safety with the crowd in such a state where the lives of the diplomats were in mortal danger. Residences of The Shah were attacked soon enough too with his palaces being looted then burnt out as well. He watched from a helicopter – like he had done through the troubles of last year – when the Niavaran Palace went up in flames. The Shah went to a military base outside of his capital and tried to govern by issuing emergency decrees that no one was taking any notice of. The guard force there started slipping away and there were more SAVAK secret policemen brought in. Every city, every province was in revolt against The Shah and there was no one who wanted to fight for him. He kept on saying that the anger would burn itself out and he would make his case to the people in time. There were politicians he would appoint who would fix things so that the people knew that their ruler had their best interests at heart.
After six days of delusion, and a country in ruin where no one – politicians or religious figures had been able to stop that – was able to stop what happened, there finally come the moment where The Shah was removed from power. The opposition were brought into see him by those among the SAVAK whom he had considered loyal to him personally. The Shah hadn’t before dealt with such people in person due to the effects of the cancer ravaging him and therefore his appearance, but he was made to. They saw the state he was in and there was some compassion… just a little. However, meeting with Sanjabi and Taleghani was something he was forced to do and they told him that he had to abdicate. He could do so in favour of his son or leave the Peacock Throne empty. Either way, he was done. The country had to be saved and it couldn’t be with him there. Go, man, just go!
The Shah took the former option and departed from Iran the next day, heading for Egypt from where his queen hailed from. He left behind quite the mess which wasn’t something that anyone was going to be able to fix with just the news that he was gone, really gone this time.
January 1979:
There was a power vacuum in Iran which came with the departure of The Shah. Sanjabi attempted to fill it with his National Front government where he planned to bring in religious figures too but his authority was challenged from many quarters along with his legitimacy. His position of that of acting prime minister was supported by elements of the SAVAK, the military and what other elements of the government was left: none of these had the support of Islamists, the Tudeh and other small opposition groupings though. Moreover, the people wanted change and the secular National Front wasn’t it. Iranians wouldn’t give their backing to the secularists who were seen (unfairly) as more of the same. To rule Iran, others challenged for that leadership of the country in armed clashes across January.
The army wouldn’t fire on the crowds of people who now came out in support of the extremists. The numbers of protesters weren’t as strong as they had been in December and what was left was generally the hard-core supporters of religious and communist movements who shoved aside moderates, reformers and such like to oppose the military in the few instances when they did stand their ground and instead go after the other side. This was done through the use of armed militias. There were the Islamic Marxist People’s Mujahedin (MEK) who were the biggest but split themselves between support for the Islamists and also non-Tudeh communist groups. The Tudeh had co-opted the Fedai Guerrillas to their side. The Maoist-inspired EMK wanted nothing to do with either of the two big extremist groups and fought them both plus government forces. There were Kurdish nationalists and Kurdish communists. Street thugs were being organised by the Islamists too though they had little organisation and zero discipline. Apart from the latter, who had rather serious dedication to fight in memory of Khomeini, these groups all had access to arms from domestic & foreign sources as well as an established network of support from years of being underground. Their ranks had swelled with army deserters and they fought.
Mid- and late-January saw Iran tear itself further apart with death and destruction. Urban areas saw much guerrilla fighting though across the provinces too there was a lot of trouble. Much of Iran’s oil infrastructure was left in ruin, so too its military capabilities. Human rights abuses were widespread and death squads operated. The government tried to fight fairly and this left them with one hand tied behind their back against others who had no concept of acting in good faith nor following the laws of warfare. Sanjabi himself found himself targeted in an attempted coup d’état which went wrong when certain military officers tried to topple him but when their bomb missed him, they went after each other. Meanwhile, the rebel militias took territory and fought each other while pushing aside government forces who continued to haemorrhage their own numbers. The MEK leadership did an about-turn soon enough and came out in support of the Tudeh when promises were made by the new leader of Iran’s communists in the form of Kianouri who had returned from exile in Eastern Europe: the former Tudeh general secretary Eskandari – who had been opposing Soviet ‘aid’ for some time now – was pushed aside after he wanted to do a deal with the National Front when left aghast at all of the killing. As to the Islamists, their street thugs and what parts of the split MEK they had couldn’t fully fight off the communist militias plus also the Maoists in the EMK who were trying to carve out their own piece of the pie. The Tudeh pushed its nationalist message and this alienated much Kurdish support which could have come their way yet the Kurds fought with the Islamists rather than them.
There was a tilt towards the Tudeh in the support of the people not caught up in the fighting directly. Away from that, where the communists had control, they started to do what The Shah had promised and what the National Front had said they would do too: bring about equality and punish those whose actions were caused injustice to the people. The communists were quick in the propaganda war here as they oversold what little they did but they were doing something where all that had come before had been empty words. Sanjabi was making his statements from Tehran about what he would do, and the Islamists had their own ideas, but the Tudeh were already in action. This mattered. It mattered in so much as there was a near dearth of internal opposition in areas under Tudeh control – that wasn’t the same elsewhere – and when the state military lost soldiers from its ranks, those deserters quickly went over to the communists rather than to anyone else. Unless something dramatic happened, the Tudeh were on course to win.
January 1979:
If Iran had been invaded by an outside force – i.e. the Soviet Union, maybe Iraq – then the United States could have directly intervened. Iran had been undergoing a revolution before the civil war erupted though. President Ford wasn’t about to get his country involved in another internal conflict abroad. The Vietnam War had ended only four years beforehand and the public mood wasn’t there. There was deep concern about Iran’s future, especially with the rise of the communists when before the Islamists had been seen as the danger, but getting involved was off the table. From afar, all that took place was watching with an inability to act to any effect. Kissinger approached the Sanjabi government and asked about the future of Iran under the National Front while also talking of a visit: the latter would be a very bad idea, the US secretary of state was told. There was a rise in oil prices that came with the conflict in Iran, starting back in September, that only got worse when news broke that much of the oil industry had been fought over and what trickle of exports there had come were to cease. As to Americans in-country, the majority of those from the burnt-out embassy departed for Turkey leaving the ambassador and a very small staff at a temporary location in Tehran. Further Americans had left already, including all of those military contractors, as the anti-Western atmosphere inside Iran was deadly for the unlucky. Representatives of arms manufacturers inside the United States had already been bugging congressmen and senators about the future of their contracts for maintenance of existing equipment and the supply of further orders. Arming Iran had been good for many companies and the money tap was certain to be turned off if either the communists or Islamists won. Nothing could be done though by the Ford Administration.
A communist Iran would be good for the Soviet Union. The Politburo was impressed at how far the Tudeh came in such a short space of time. The leading position which they took – supported as they were by KGB assistance in terms of intelligence support and ‘advice’ – happened very fast. Those old men in the Kremlin started to look upon Iran as their revolution, one which they had created by getting rid of the Persian Trotsky who had been Khomeini. Taking credit like they did, they wanted to do more to ensure the signs of success being shown paid off. Earlier hesitancy was pushed aside. Iran offered countless opportunities to ensure the security of the Soviet Union as well as the spread of Soviet influence elsewhere in the Middle East now that Iraq had shown a friendliness too. There was still concern over America and whether they would get involved but there were no signs that they would do so. A panel of economists submitted a requested report to the Politburo when it came to what the future would hold in regard to oil exports and how those would fill state coffers following events in Iran. The Politburo was pleased. The Soviet Union was already on its way to becoming a leading exporter of hydrocarbons – oil and gas – to fill the needs of the greedy West who paid in hard currency. Now with the damage done in Iran but also fears of Western shipping in the Persian Gulf despite that stretch of water having not seen violence, the West would want more. The demand was there and there was the oil available. However, the Politburo questioned the right method to fill that demand. Was it wise to keep giving the West what it wanted at a low price when they wanted so much? Surely it made better sense to charge them more and gently restrict the flow. Not too much of either, just a little. That was something to think about. These would usually be the concerns of the despised capitalists but the communist leadership in Moscow was starting to think like them too.
February 1979:
It was all about pragmatism. What was left of the forces of the state had forced out The Shah when he tried to stay in Iran. Those in uniform, the army and the secret police, came to the same conclusion when it came to abandoning Sanjabi and his National Front in favour of the Tudeh. The country was being destroyed by those in charge and this just had to come to an end. By going over to the communists, the intention was to assist them in finish off the last of the opposition from the Islamists and put an end to the civil war. February 3rd saw SAVAK agents arrest Sanjabi – once again! – and detain his ineffective ministers. There were snatch and/or kill missions against several leading figures in the Islamist movement too with military leaders from there being sought as well rather than their political masters. For years, The Shah had used the SAVAK against the Tudeh and they had been ruthless in their crushing of the communists. Now, the secret police were on their side. Information had been passed from Tudeh figures on the Islamists as well for them to act. As can be imagined, this didn’t sit too well with many in the SAVAK as they were smart enough to realise the links between the Tudeh and the KGB with this. There were fears over their own personal future under the communists with not all trusting the promises made to cement the alliance when the threat of Moscow loomed. Some SAVAK personnel had links with other intelligence organisations abroad such as the CIA and Mossad: there were physical defections and defections in-place where these concerns were passed on to those abroad of how the revolution and subsequent civil war had been covertly subverted from Moscow.
The fighting inside Iran continued with the communist militias taking it right to the Islamists as they got their government off their back and well as more propaganda moves. The message of nationalism – long a Tudeh strategy – was pushed and pushed again. There was talk of a referendum with the participation of the people in deciding the future of Iran with regards to its government and the departed monarchy once the Tudeh had won… there were only a few questions on how that was supposed to be impartial! Jobs were promised for all of those in Iran out of work and land reform was to come too. The influx of soldiers and especially heavy weapons when the army went over to the communists allowed them to score many more victories against the Islamists. More importantly, it allowed them to scatter that opposition and leave areas not under communist control with the inability to support each other. They would be picked off one by one like this.
Outside of the country, there was the continued international crisis with regards to oil prices. The disruption from the Iranian civil war was mainly one of panic and perceptions rather than reality. Iran was a big exporter yet other countries were producing oil. The actual gap in the market was small. However, the fear was there that the prices were going to keep going up. This was being taken advantage of by the unscrupulous too. In the United States, there were memories of 1973 and the oil shock then. The country had price caps for domestic consumption and there was no need to panic, Ford told the American people when speaking on the subject of Iran, yet far too many did and there was panic buying in places. Elsewhere, Western Europe wasn’t happy either with leaders from Britain, France and West Germany – Prime Minister Callaghan, President d’Estaing and Chancellor Schmidt – meeting in a summit on Iran and agreeing to halt another oil crisis from hitting the Continent as had been the case six years before. Measures were to be taken to calm the panic in the short-term and in the long-term diversify sources of oil for domestic consumption. There was an agreement too that they didn’t want to become reliant on Soviet oil too because even while that may be convenient, there were political considerations on that matter. Whether Western Europe would remain committed to this line on dealing with Soviet oil in the future, was another matter though.
February 1979:
A further conflict in another part of the world erupted at the same time as the civil war in Iran was ongoing. This came in South East Asia where Chinese demands that Vietnam withdraw from Cambodia were ignored and so China rose to the challenge presented by its smaller southern neighbour. China’s Paramount Leader, Deng Xiaoping, informed Kissinger that the ‘naughty children need a spanking’ and that the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) would be the ones to give them that. The resulting conflict was about more than just that though. China’s hostility towards Vietnam came with the latter country’s occupation of islands within the South China Sea which the former claimed as their own as well as the ties between Hanoi and Moscow which aggravated tensions between Beijing and Moscow following on from the Sino-Soviet Split ten years beforehand. Deng wanted to show the Vietnamese that Moscow couldn’t protect them and believed that that could be done with an armed conflict.
The PLA went over the border into the northern part of Vietnam. Chinese soldiers marched onwards into Vietnamese territory and engaged defending forces. There had been a rise in tensions preceding the incursion and much of Vietnam’s professional forces had pulled back leaving behind them militia units. PLA attempts to steamroll this defence worked in some ways but not in others. The Chinese got a bloody nose as they drove onwards and reinforced their initial forces with follow-on troops. Difficult and bloody fighting took place with the Chinese eventually making the breakthrough which they wanted to though at a high cost. By the end of the month, they had started to close in upon Hanoi with the threat presented to the Vietnamese capital. Deng was waiting for Vietnam to withdraw troops from Cambodia to come northwards to defend their capital. China had the manpower to fight them when they came forward though there was no intention to actually go into Hanoi or make a deep strike far inside Vietnam. The conflict had limited goals for Deng which were linked to what was going on along the long border between China and the Soviet Union too.
The Soviets were informed of the Chinese intention to attack Vietnam and practically dared to do anything about it. The PLA had mobilised and deployed more than a million troops along the Soviet frontier. Deng informed Andropov that China would fight the Soviet Army if it crossed over the border: the PLA had done so in 1969 and would do so again. When the Politburo’s sub-committee that was the Defence Council met to discuss Deng’s behaviour, there was a lot of anger and a willingness to rise to the Chinese challenge. However, Andropov found himself angry soon enough at another matter: the inability of the country’s armed forces to rise to the challenge that China presented along the border as well as down in Vietnam. Soviet forces were able to fend off a Chinese attack, he was told, but to go into China would mean making substantial mobilisations and take a long time to prepare for: a war in China would be costly… to put it mildly. As to assisting Vietnam, that was difficult to do. Soviet forces weren’t directly able to assist in defence and while there was an ability to send supplies and military hardware, it was a long journey which would take too much time to see any impact made. Deng had outfoxed Moscow. He’d stalked out his position and struck at the right time with plenty of consideration going into what he had done. To do anything about this at the minute was impossible. It was going to be a lesson learnt though, one with far-ranging considerations for the future. Meanwhile, the fighting in Vietnam continued.
March 1979:
Deng had been clever though not clever enough. The Soviets were wrong-footed in response to him having the PLA go into Vietnam but the Vietnamese weren’t. The Third Indochina War didn’t go exactly as planned. Vietnamese regular troops stayed outside of Hanoi and back from the fighting leaving it to forward, lighter militia units. Deng wasn’t willing to send the PLA onwards into an even more bloody fight than had already been encountered. An announcement was made that the mission had been achieved, the gates to Hanoi were open and China had done in Vietnam what it intended to do. A withdrawal was ordered and the PLA started pulling out. Their retrograde manoeuvre took them back north towards the border though they came to a stop inside small slivers of territory long held by Vietnam and what China had always claimed to be their own. Now that claim was enforced with PLA troops encamped there. Vietnam claimed a victory had been won and the country defended. The invasion had been repelled and the Chinese had been beaten like the French and the Americans before them. Much was made in announcements from Hanoi of the deliberate ruin caused by the PLA’s scorched earth policy that was adopted during that ‘retreat’ made too with infrastructure levelled, livestock taken and punitive destruction.
The Soviets hadn’t been able to help Vietnam in time though afterwards, starting in March, they begun the process of establishing themselves inside Vietnam to help protect their fraternal socialist state in the future. Cam Ranh Bay, the air and naval facility on the coast, was opened up to Soviet forces. This was a facility built by the Americans during their stay in what was then South Vietnam: the Soviets now took over, grateful for all that the United States had done here. Early work started at once to make it a fully-fledged Soviet military base. Aircraft would be flying from here and warships based at the Cam Ranh Base for many years to come.
March 1979:
The Islamists had several centres of continued resistance inside Iran and the city of Qom was the largest of those. Qom was where Khomeini had been heading after his arrival in Tehran – where he met with those bullets – with the belief being among many that he intended to set up a Vatican-style city state there: the KGB had known different though. The Persian Trotsky was dead and his followers were fewer in number than they had been before the civil war started. Army deserters to their side had dried up and many of their fighters from the breakaway factions of the MEK had gone back to their parent organisation when that long-establish guerrilla group had fully sided with the communists. What defenders Qom did have were motivated enough to fight though there was a chronic lack of real military leadership. KGB advisers with the Tudeh suggested that focus should be directed towards Qom now rather than elsewhere to other scattered areas of Islamist resistance. The propaganda value of taking it would be immense.
So to Qom the war came. Army units assisted with heavy weapons employed – artillery mainly though some tanks – though the real fighting was done by MEK and Fedai militias joined by men from the newly-raised Revolutionary Guards. It took two and a half weeks to root out the last of the resistance. Casualty numbers were over twelve thousand including many civilians caught up in the fighting. When it was over, Qom was in the hands of the Tudeh-led government. Other pockets of opposition across the country, those held by Islamists and the Maoists in the EMK, plus Kurdish areas too, would be next on the list to be overcome unless they were willing to accept the new order in Iran.
April 1979:
Qom was the centre of Islamist resistance inside Iran. After that was dealt with in such a brutal fashion as it was, the communist militias and with the army in support of them, not the other way around, moved onwards elsewhere throughout the north-central and north-west parts of the country to crush other sites of opposition. Emissaries went out ahead though – religious figures who’d seen the light said some; turncoats others called them – to try to avoid further battles where possible. There was success with some of those missions, though not all. Stretching down from Qom along the road towards Yazd, there were further hotbeds of resistance which were bloodily put down through April. The nearby city of Isfahan had seen street battles between communists and Islamists through last month though there was an understanding come to before that fighting could continue this month. Isfahan was a major coup for the Tudeh and from there much could be achieved of stamping out that other resistance as it was a centre of communications and home to many MEK & Fedai fighters freed up.
Where there was fighting and deals struck in those areas, alliances were sought elsewhere with further combatants in the Iranian Civil War. The majority of Kurdish resistance came to an end with local autonomy offered within the national state. Many Kurds were wary, not trusting the Tudeh at all especially since it was standing with the SAVAK and what was left of the army, yet others were convinced that it was in their best interests to give up the fight. They had mainly been engaged in combat with Islamists anyway and there was little bad blood with the communists. Azeris groups had been silent throughout the past few months and they took the deal offered by Tehran too of autonomy. Sunni forces in the southwest didn’t. There was a nationalist drive to their leaders who hoped to pull their people with them into an independent state based on oil wealth. However, the destruction which had come there when fighting the government though had robbed them of that ability to offer any sort of long-term sustainability. There had been some previous contact with Iraq but now they found that Baghdad was deathly cold to any more overtures of encouragement. Tudeh and government forces were still far away and fighting on the other side of the Zagros Mountains. That wasn’t going to last though. Their leaders started to do some soul-searching… while thinking of their own necks.
As to Iraq, across there in Iran’s neighbour, those who had previously fled into Iraq remained held in refugee camps guarded by the Iraqi Army. Those inside came from all backgrounds in Iran from high-level officials of the regime of The Shah – the Iraqis had taken their bribes for freedom but kept them in captivity – to Islamist & Maoist fighters to ordinary people who wanted to get away from the civil war. President Al-Bakr made an agreement with Tehran in late April, pushed towards that by his vice president and also the Soviets too. Though they were yet to know it, those refugees were soon to return to Iran: all of them. Saddam was behind this as he curried more favour with Moscow while increasing unnerved at his president’s plans for the future when it came to another neighbour.
April 1979:
When the gun-running throughout Central America to various rebel groups before the wave of successful revolutions overthrew those country’s governments was exposed, the US Congressional hearings would call what went on starting in 1979 the ‘Panamanian Connection’. The smaller, more stable Central American nation which was Panama was instrumental in funnelling Soviet weapons elsewhere all the while with the pretence to the United States of friendly relations. The Soviet Union and Cuba had both been working hard to assist rebels in Guatemala and Nicaragua first before that was expanded to El Salvador next and also the small Caribbean island of Grenada as well: though with the latter that was after the coup d’état which took place there in March 1979. Torrijos was doing this in what was at first revenge against the Ford Administration for his belief that they had reneged on a handshake deal with regards to seeing the return of the Panama Canal to his country. As it continued though, Panama found itself more and more drawn into a web from which there would ultimately come a final showdown. That was far off in the distant future though. For now, Panama was a conduit of weapons that Andropov and Castro were seeing sent to those fighting against American-backed governments across the region. Torrijos enriched himself during this too, personally and not for the benefit of his country. Those hearings in future years would look at how the number two man in his regime, Noriega, was involved too… and how he had kept a lid on what was going on for so long while at the same time supposed to be an asset of the CIA. It would appear that Noriega – who also took a piece of the pie which was cash too – had been playing a very clever game with those in the CIA foolish enough to trust him.
Ford had continued decades of United States foreign policy in supporting regimes across Latin America in the fight against communist insurgency. This dated back to the Eisenhower Doctrine and it didn’t always matter if those rebels combatting the regimes were exactly, wholly, truly communist: just that the governments could have a case to make that they were. Moreover, since Castro in 1959, there had been the fear in Washington that rebels such as he had once been might not be communists when they were fighting against the ruling regime in their country, but they might be soon enough afterwards. Why take the chance unless it was absolutely obvious that they weren’t? In relation to American foreign policy towards Latin America, there had always been this approach taken and it couldn’t be imagined that when Ford was gone, whomever the next American president would be might take another approach.
The civil war inside Guatemala kicked into high gear during April. There were various guerrilla groups active for more than a decade fighting the series of military strongmen who used fraud and violence to install themselves as the country’s leaders. They fought for democracy, social & economic equality and also the ideas of socialism too. The mix was there and the lines were often blurred. They were all communists, the military would say, a line repeated by the current president in the form of Lucas García. He was just the latest in a long-line of seemingly never-ending generals who took power and worked to crush opposition in whatever form it took. Forced disappearances were the newest method being employed to deal with resistance: such people didn’t die or give in, they just vanished from the face of the earth. The various rebels had been the victims of this for a long time. However, more weapons were now flooding into Guatemala and put into the hands of men who actually knew what they were doing. A rural guerrilla group, one with socialist leanings known as the Guerrilla Army of the Poor (the EGP, who had the image of Che Guevara on their recruiting posters), had recently sent some men aboard – they’d been to Cuba though no one was meant to know that – and received much training there in leadership as well as the use of better weapons that they already had. They started to take the fight to the dictatorship, hitting then where they lived in a symbolic strike best referred to a propaganda of the deed: a good old-fashioned anarchist tactic. They got volunteers (unlucky fellows) into Guatemala City who set off bombs and made gun attacks on high-profile government targets. The physical damage wasn’t that dramatic and most of the volunteers were dead before they could do too much damage, but that wasn’t what the aim was. The EGP had struck a famous blow against the government. Fall-out was expected and actually welcomed too: the aim was to have the government send the army straight back at them and into their held territory throughout the central highlands of Guatemala. Then the EGP would bring the Guatemalan Army to battle.
May 1979:
Negotiations with the Soviet Union over the SALT II treaty had been ongoing throughout Ford’s presidency and the talks where the United States would agree with the Soviets on the future of strategic arms were of utmost importance to the White House. This was something regarded by Ford as being a key part of his legacy when he left office in less than two years time. Recent events in Iran where KGB activity had been uncovered along with difficulties elsewhere such as in the Caribbean with regards to Soviet covert measures were important, but in no way held any comparison to averting the threat of nuclear war. Limiting the number of first-strike weapons and curtailing the development of newer (and more-deadly) missiles trumped everything else. There were those at home, in the Senate especially, who argued that the Soviets couldn’t be trusted on a matter like this when everything else was going on but the position of the Ford Administration was that Moscow had stuck to SALT I and would do with a subsequent treaty. They too wanted to lower the risk of the ending of humanity in a nuclear conflict and wouldn’t cheat: such was his view on this. He went to Vienna in the middle of the month and met with Andropov where the two men along with their staffs exchanged pleasantries and put their signatures to the treaty. There were celebrations afterwards and warm words of trust exchanged. The Soviets would have no problem with their rubber-stamping of the treaty back in Moscow though it was well-known that to get politicians in Washington to agree was going to be quite the challenge. Ford was still going to try though with a back-up plan to see the terms implemented regardless of what the Senate said unless they expressly forbade such an approach with legislation. Ford was committed to this method of maintaining détente with the Soviets on this and nothing would assuage his view that this was the right thing to do.
The Iranian Civil War was coming to an end. There was still some ongoing fighting, among Maoist groups who wouldn’t give in when they really should have as well as the last of the Islamists, but the conflict was nearly done with. The Tudeh had won. The communists had taken control of most of Iran and their fighters were now just mopping up. Kianouri had now established himself as president in Tehran in all but name as there was still a hasty referendum to organise to make Iran a republic: the Tudeh was set to win that, their victory was assured due to public support but more so being the ones organising it. That was taking some time though, as were a lot of things Kianouri discovered. The civil war might have been won but now there was the peace to win. Iran was in a mess: revolution and civil war will do that to a nation. The Provisional Administration set about fixing some things and making changes. It was decided that a key priority was a reset of international relations. The United States was informed that the emergency government was abrogating bi-lateral agreements on security and military affairs. At once, as expected, there came strong American complaints and statements made that such moves broke diplomatic behaviour etc. but Iran pushed on with its cutting of ties. This was a new Iran, not the old Iran. That new Iran started to officially improve ties with the Soviet Union plus Iraq too: Iran’s neighbours who had been of great assistance to the Iranian people in helping them liberate themselves. Part of the agreements made with the Soviets concerned immediate security and military assistance. These replaced what had been provided by the Americans, strengthened those in fact. In secret, Soviet advisers and volunteers arrived in Iran to help Iran rebuild. Both the KGB and the GRU had personnel among those ‘advisers’ and ‘volunteers’.
May 1979:
The regime of Somoza in Nicaragua had been being given much support from the United States throughout the presidency of Gerald Ford. Ford wasn’t directly involved in that matter and left it to the CIA under its director George Bush. Bush in turn left the nitty gritty details of the support given to those below him; he was a ‘big picture’ thinker – focusing on the Soviets – and was also in the process of beginning an exit from the CIA so he could attempt to fulfil his political ambitions, ones hurt though by recent events in Iran. Therefore, what exactly happened down in Nicaragua wasn’t something directly overseen by those above them in positions of ultimate responsibility yet it would be Ford and Bush who would ultimately get the blame. The rule of Somoza was opposed primarily by the Sandinista guerrilla movement and with CIA assistance, the war had been taken to them in the past few years with quite the ruthlessness employed. Nicaraguans got their hands dirty in that as they targeted Sandinista leadership figures who were identified and tracked by the CIA. Hitting military leaders was more difficult than the political leaders and so the deaths fell upon the latter. Nicaraguan death squads eliminated key thinkers and intellectuals within the Sandinistas to inadvertently leave behind a hard-core of fanatics who were hell-bent on bringing down the Somoza regime without compromise, without mercy and without rules. Ortega rose and rose in prominence with his hatred of Somoza matched too by his personal detest for long-standing American influence in the country.
The Sandinistas couldn’t and didn’t take the targeted killing without getting their own back. They too went after politicians from the Somoza regime and struck at the president himself, going through his family not him personally as he was too difficult to get to. Somoza’s eldest son was assassinated in late May after months of trying. Sandinista gunmen got lucky and filled him full of holes in an ambush. This was the heir to the dynasty, who was meant to be the third Somoza to become president of Nicaragua: that was no longer going to happen.
His father didn’t take it well. Somoza knew that the guns which killed his son had been provided by Cuba and that the gunmen had been trained in that country from where Castro was an implacable enemy of his. The CIA had already long provided him with the proof of what he had always known: for years now, Cuba had been involved in supporting the rebels in Nicaragua like they were elsewhere in Central America though now with extra impetus provided by the Soviet Union. Cuba was responsible and he vowed revenge. He was soon provided with a method to help get that revenge as the CIA worked to assist him with authorisation coming from senior figures in that organisation though not the very top. The Director of Central Intelligence, normally a very dedicated man, was distracted by politics and would pay dearly for that distraction. Somoza sent his own gunmen to Cuba with the CIA helping them on their way.
June 1979:
Pope John Paul II arrived in his native Poland and kissed the ground at the airport upon landing. The crowds had come out to cheer for their native son and they would follow him wherever he went throughout the country. Three million Poles attended the open-air mass he gave in Warsaw: three million was ten per cent of the population! He was home and the Polish people were glad to see him, most of them anyway. The Polish Government wasn’t. They had their intelligence people watching his every move and everyone he met with. They had riot police on standby ready to move in against the crowds should they detect trouble as occurring or ready to occur. The leadership in Warsaw was gravely concerned about the potential for protests and rioting that may come with the Pope’s visit and believed that they were ready to respond to that. There was no trouble though. The Pope’s visit went off smoothly. He was soon to depart and there were smiles in Warsaw once he had left. Their fears had been misplaced. They told themselves though that it was down to their preventative measures that had made sure that nothing had happened though and gave themselves a pat on the back.
The Soviet Union had watched with interest too at the visit. The ‘Polish Bishop’ was a source of irritation for Andropov, Chebrikov and some others on the Politburo for his past statements on human rights and religious freedom across the Eastern Bloc. Others in the Soviet Government weren’t as concerned by the Pope though, he was just a nuisance and any ideas of dealing with him like the Persian Trotsky had been were dismissed as unnecessary. The KGB had monitored the visit just as the Polish secret police had done and were likewise interested in who had met with John Paul II though not really concerned with faces in the crowds as the Poles had been. Still, the KGB also had been expecting some troubles to occur with protests against the Polish Government speculated as being likely. The Pope was linked in the minds of the KGB to much of the underground – non-violent – Polish resistance as he was regarded as the latest inspiration for keeping that alive. Back in 1976, when Poland had erupted in riots over food prices, that political opposition had begun. There were sympathisers with that cause though no real active support. That could change though. The KGB feared a spark coming from somewhere could see the regime in Warsaw in trouble like it had been then. That wasn’t wanted. Polish internal security would remain a focus of Soviet interest after the Pope had left. That spark had yet to come but there was a real concern that it eventually would.
Weeks later, across in Western Europe, the commander of NATO forces on the Continent (SACEUR) was assassinated in Belgium. General Al Haig – a political general to many of his detractors – was slain when the West German terrorist group known as the Red Army Faction (RAF) blew his car up with him inside. There had been warnings that something like this was likely and those warnings had been ignored. SACEUR took the same route to work at NATO headquarters every day, his security detachment gave in too much to his wishes for comfort & ease and there was evidence too that an attack like this had been scouted out by the RAF. They got lucky yet so much of that luck had been gifted too them.
The RAF were domestic terrorists inside West Germany. They operated in a cell-like structure and had access to modern weaponry. Their intelligence information often came to them from outside. No matter the denials made, the RAF were supported by the intelligence agencies of the Eastern Bloc: the East German Stasi primary but the KGB from afar. Those ties were deliberately indirect and thus hard to prove but they were real. The RAF didn’t do what it did because they were puppets of the East Germans and the Soviets yet they wouldn’t be able to operate as they did without that foreign support. The attempt made to kill SACEUR was known about and not openly opposed by the friends of the RAF across the Iron Curtain.
The purpose of the RAF assassination was to strike a blow against the Americans with their military presence in West Germany. Killing Haig certainly did that. The RAF wanted a propaganda coup too. That they also got. Moreover, it also caused a major war scare in Western Europe for several hours afterwards. That wasn’t visible to the public for what it was but it was very real. Before the perpetrators were identified, the assassination was interpreted by some as possibly being the opening strike of a war. A blot from the blue attack didn’t come though. NATO signals analysts and intelligence personnel saw no sign of an invasion. The crisis passed quickly. National leaders weren’t evacuated to bunkers, fighter jets didn’t fill the skies and missiles weren’t readied to fire. Still, there had been a lot of alarm. Once the RAF had been behind the killing of SACEUR, not a Soviet Spetsnaz commando team, calm returned. The after-affects when it came to the direction which the RAF would take with what they would do next were of more significance than that war scare.
June 1979:
Fidel Castro had been someone whom the CIA had long tried to kill. There had been many innovative methods tried to assassinate the Cuban leader. Some rather bizarre and quite silly methods had been tried too. Somoza sent gunmen to Havana and they did more than the CIA were ever able to do and put bullets into the man. He refused to die though. Three times he was struck – once in the shin, a second time in the left hand and a third time in the gut – but Castro stubbornly lived. His bodyguards engaged the hit team before and after they opened fire on Castro and killed four of the six while two more were shot and left injured. One of the latter managed to swallow the capsule containing poison given to them all to avoid torture and/or talking to the Cubans though the other wounded man couldn’t bring himself to do it. The Cubans were fast to retrieve the poison and whisk him away for medical treatment just as they did with Castro. With the latter it was because they wanted to save his life, with the former it was so that the wannabe assassin could be interrogated before his life was then taken from him. He talked. Everyone talks with the right amount of pressure applied. Cuban intelligence learnt everything that they could from the man and then he was pushed aside for his fate to be decided by Castro when he was ready to deal with that Nicaraguan.
Castro’s shin injury was the result of a ricochet and had been a grazing shot. It was painful but not damaging. The bullet which hit his hand was a through-&-through. That really did hurt. He would never fully regain the use of his left hand. Castro would also for many years afterwards be seen wearing gloves. The third bullet which hit him did the most damage. It was another ricochet – the gunmen had been given the smallest of windows of opportunity and were under fire at the time – which had hit Castro at slow speed and got stuck in his belly. The doctors who treated him had a difficult time in getting the bullet out and keeping Castro alive. Outside of the operating room, Fidel’s brother was waiting. The doctors had feared what Raúl Castro would do to them should they fail to save el presidente. Cuba’s leader came through the surgery though to remove that bullet and put his insides back together. It was a close-run thing despite what the later announcements would say of the whole matter.
Nicaragua, with the help of the CIA, had tried to murder Castro and come very close to doing so. Naturally, he took this as quite the personal affront. Who wouldn’t? Following his brush with death, a lot of things would change with Castro. There were personal and public differences in his behaviour where he paid more attention to family and was less visible to his people. More importantly than that, Castro would fully shift the attention of Cuba’s foreign policy away from Africa and the wars of liberation there – which had granted him a lot of international prestige but not much else – to the wars of liberation in Central America instead. A suspicious man, someone rather paranoid might suspect that this was the intention of the Soviet Union as there had been efforts to get Cuba to do this. It wasn’t though. In fact, for some time afterwards, Moscow would believe that Castro was going too far when he did what he did in Central America. They wanted him to do what he did yet when he did, it was considered too much. He antagonised the United States to the extent that war was feared, a war which the Soviets didn’t want to see for the fear they would be dragged into it. Alas, such was the way of things when it came to Castro. That ‘too much’ would soon begin in Nicaragua and spread from there.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 18, 2018 19:54:06 GMT
July 1979:
Cuban exile media based in Miami initially reported that Castro had been killed. There had been jubilant celebrations across the country through much of the Cuban-American community at such news. Disappointment quickly followed when it had become apparent that Castro was alive. Some would still believe that he had been killed though for years afterwards, certain that an imposter made those public appearances and that there was a big secret being kept that only they knew of. Talking of big secrets, the exposure of one – a real one, not paranoid delusions – started in the United States during July. The covert wars being fought by the CIA but increasingly US Armed Forces ‘advisers’ too had long been regarded by some in the know as just begging to be exposed. These were being undertaken without the wholescale knowledge of the American people and elements of what was going on was not all known to select members of committees in Congress when it was supposed to either. The CIA had also assisted in the attempted assassination of Castro as well, something not meant to be done anymore by that organisation. Exposure came. There were revelations made by American domestic whistle-blowers of the scale of American involvement in El Salvador, Guatemala and Honduras where dirty wars were being fought. The connection to the Havana shooting was revealed too.
In all honestly, most Americans didn’t care. Their government was fighting communists in some country which they hadn’t heard of? Good. The CIA had helped plan and aid the near killing of such a man as Fidel Castro? Good. Those who leaked what they knew believed that when they did there would be universal outrage and Things Would Change. They didn’t expect the near non-reaction that they got. There were more important things going on though with the economy in the mess that it was in and the continuing energy crisis. Only a very few people really did give a damn, one of those was someone planning to run for president next year though who had not yet declared that publicly.
Senator Ted Kennedy denounced the ongoing secret wars being fought without the public’s knowledge. This was wrong and he demanded that it stop. He said that it was the latest in a long line of such occurrences undertaken without the American people knowing or being consulted about too. He was joined in making his comments from outside Congress by Senator Frank Church; the latter spoke of the recommendations in his report only a few years before and the executive order that Ford had signed banning assassinations of foreign leaders from taking place by the CIA or with American assistance. Kennedy gave a proper speech on the same issue a week later and expanded upon his initial remarks when more details had been revealed of what was going on down in Central America in further damaging leaks had come out. There had been some public reaction though not as strong as he had hoped. Regardless, Kennedy would carry on down this path and when CIA Director Bush resigned at the end of July, there were those who gave Kennedy credit for spotlighting this issue leading to real change being made when Bush departed: the fact that it wasn’t all down to Bush was lost in the narrative. Kennedy would stay on this issue for the coming months and all the way up to the presidential election in November of next year. He had yet to formally make an announcement, but everyone knew he was running when he pushed this issue as he did. Bush’s resignation too – firing some rumours said; either way it killed his political ambitions more than the ‘failure’ over Iran did – changed the opening moves in their campaigns by those who would be opponents of Kennedy (also yet-to-declared) in that upcoming election with talking points about Central America propping up when the whole thing had been off everyone’s radar. The next sixteen months were going to be interesting.
July 1979:
President Al-Bakr was deposed by his vice president in a non-violent, peaceful manner. Saddam took power from his aging mentor and had Al-Bakr moved into a comfortable retirement. There was no opposition to this inside Iraq: it happened seamlessly and without any form of protest. Saddam was now the president of his country and he intended to remain so until the day he died too, however many long years off that was. This change in leadership had been done for several reasons. Saddam had his ambition and his ego. Both had been stoked by recent events in neighbouring countries. With Iran, Saddam had assisted the Soviets in bringing about a change of government there and promised much in return for doing so. As to the other neighbour, Syria, Al-Bakr had been talking with his fellow Ba’ath Party president in form of Assad about a union between the two Arab countries. Assad would be president of whatever name Iraq-Syria took with Al-Bakr as vice president… and Saddam being nothing. Nope, Saddam had not been willing to accept that and, with support from friends and allies inside Iraq and also abroad, he did what everyone was telling him was the mark of a strong and powerful man: seize power.
Saddam’s first move after packing off Al-Bakr peacefully and meeting no resistance from elsewhere was to begin a purge. It would be a bloody purge too. Saddam had found traitors within the highest ranks of the Ba’ath Party and they would meet the fate that traitors deserved. A purge made him look strong too, he was certain of that. What he wasn’t so sure on though was how relations were going to turn out with the Soviet Union when within days of taking power – there had been encouragement from their envoys to do this – there was a (polite) rebuff from Moscow when it came towards Saddam’s desires towards Iran. He spoke with the Soviet ambassador straight after having all of those traitors arrested, when he was in a bombastic mood. Negativity had come when Saddam had made mention of those promises on the autonomy of Iran’s Sunni-dominated southwestern regions and the ideas on joint (Iraqi-controlled) oil exports from Iran once the industry was up and running again there. The ambassador was polite and spoke with full diplomatic respect, but it was clear that the Soviet position had changed. Saddam read the refusal to seriously consider what he was saying as one pre-planned. Instead, the ambassador spoke of a strong and stable Iran being what was best for that country and the proposals put forward by Saddam would only harm such a future. Saddam spoke to one of his friends from the Soviet Union, one of their unofficial envoys in the form of Primakov: a man who held no official diplomatic nor government title. Primakov repeated the ambassador’s position though was softer with Saddam on this. There was also talk of how a stable and prosperous Iran could only be of benefit to Iraq too.
Saddam put his mind to thinking on this. Something was up. He hadn’t done anything wrong and he had kept his promises. He asked himself why weren’t the Soviets keeping theirs? Was it something to do with that ‘stability’ that he was told twice was important for Moscow when it came to Iran? Because from what he understood, the civil war there was over but there was no stability. It seemed that the Soviets had put the wrong kind of communists in power in Iran. Now… maybe if he could help correct that, then Moscow might be more agreeable to his ideas. He held himself back and waited. The right moment would come.
August 1979:
As Saddam believed, there were the wrong type of communists in-charge in Iran as far as the Soviets were now concerned. Everything with the Tudeh had been done in a rush, that adventurism that Andropov’s opponents were concerned about but had been unable to halt. While the general secretary was no dictator and unable to act unchecked, the Politburo was increasingly coming under his control was opposition ebbing away all the time. Recent events in Iran threatened that. The communists there were too used to acting independently, as should have been expected from the underground movement which they long were, and continued to do that now that they were in power. What Tehran said wasn’t being followed far from the Iranian capital. There was the strong influence of Islam in many of the members, especially the new ones who’d hitched themselves to the bandwagon when the Tudeh moved towards the power that it now had. Revolutionary justice being implemented in Iran was getting out of hand. The firing squads were being given far too much latitude to shoot whomever offended them today. Efforts by the new government to build a functioning state, one which Moscow wanted to see, were being disrupted by all of this killing: much of it seemed to be to do with personal grudges and also ethnicity rather than ridding the country of ‘enemies of the people’ as was supposed to be the case. There were also many of those who had come into the government who weren’t communists and had attained their position with bribes to get them to stop fighting in the civil war: these influential figures were working to bring down the Tudeh from within and possibly replace them because the number of true communists was very small and they were divided themselves on countless domestic issues. Kianouri faced an attempted coup d’état – including a serious effort made to murder him; he was Moscow’s chosen man to lead Iran – and the reaction from the Iranians themselves to address the causes of that plus find those really responsible, those who were behind it in terms of the plotting, was unsatisfactory to the Soviet Union.
At the urging of Chebrikov, supported by Ustinov who too had people in Iran and was getting some negative feedback from there like the KGB head, the Politburo commissioned a panel of experts to deliver them a report on the situation in that country. There was already an ongoing effort to do the same with neighbouring Afghanistan. Academics, theologians, diplomats and senior intelligence people were working together on what was first two reports but which soon became one due to the similarities between both nations on what was going on internally in each. That was linked to how internal matters would affect the relationship that the Soviet Union had with each country. The report was compiled throughout the summer. The Politburo waited for it to reach them with the idea then to reflect on what was said before doing anything rash. There was already a thinking from many that something would have to be done with regards to solving the problems in the two countries on their southern border but they waited to have that spelt out to them. There would need to be recommendations too, measures suggested to be debated. Once the report was finished though.
August 1979:
Castro’s redirection of his attention away from Africa towards Central America was watched by the United States. Satellite imagery, signals intelligence and physical reports from inside Cuba depicted the sudden burst of activity in transporting weapons and supplies to rebel groups across to the other side of the Caribbean. What had been hidden before was now out in the open. The Cubans were no longer making clandestine transfers across to the fighting in Guatemala and Nicaragua. What the Americans wanted to know was whether Castro was sending troops: that would be a real gamechanger. Kissinger was in full-on Hawk mode. He came to the White House and was talking like it was early 1976 when Castro had started sending troops to Angola: he used the words ‘smash’ and ‘clobber’ with regard to Cuba once again should they do that this time with Central America. The secretary of state asked rhetorically when would be the right time to stop Cuba. Should it be when they moved onwards next from Guatemala and Nicaragua to Costa Rica, to Panama to Mexico… Rumsfeld came to see Ford too with the defence secretary having discussions with the president on the matter of Cuba focused on presenting outlines of military options if the president wanted to see them. Airports and harbours in Cuba could be hit with American air power to shut down the surge in activity even if there were no troop movements spotted. In addition, the acting director of the CIA – Ford was looking for a replacement for Bush and had appointed Bush’s deputy in an acting role – came to the White House and brought with him something else gained from the increased satellite overflies of Cuba. The Soviets had troops in Cuba, a brigade-strength force. It would later be discovered that this unit (the men rotated through Cuba) had lain undiscovered on the island for the past sixteen years. Sixteen years! What else had been missed?
Surrounded by Hawks, Ford acted like a Dove though. There were no Cuban troops moving to Central America. If they had been, it would be a different matter entirely. This wasn’t the time and there wouldn’t be enough political nor public support. Kennedy was still attacking the Ford Administration and his tirade against the revelations about the dirty wars being fought in Latin America plus the attempt on Castro’s life were being joined by others. Some critics had called for impeachment: they were voices in the wind, but Ford decided not to strengthen their sails at this moment. The situation would be closely monitored but no move would be made. As to Central America, Lucas García and Somoza had information passed to them on the movements of Cuban aid to the guerrillas in their country. In return, they asked for extra assistance. There was none that could currently be sent though, not in this political climate. Kissinger made sure that the leaders of Guatemala and Nicaragua were told that they still had United States’ support but there needed to be a quiet period for a little while. It would all die down, the storm would pass. No, it wouldn’t: not there in Central America nor in the United States either.
September 1979:
Cuban troops were sent to Central America. American intelligence efforts missed their deployment due to a little bit of subterfuge on the part of Raúl Castro – Cuba’s defence minister – in how they were deployed. Cuban special forces went to the fight against Somoza via Panama and then moved across Costa Rica up into Nicaragua. When inside Nicaragua, they wore the uniforms of the Sandinistas and were limited in their activities away from where Cuban intelligence said that Americans could be encountered. Small but lethal attacks were made by them against government forces where they hit isolated garrisons and wiped them out as well as running ambushes against patrols. Overall, their impact in the fighting was minimal yet it was important though for they were the first wave of many more to come afterwards, those who wouldn’t be under such stringent conditions when they arrived of where and who they could fight either. Information was brought to Somoza through his own sources and from the Americans through the month of what was going on with the seemingly brilliant successes being had by the Sandinistas. There was a strong suspicion that this was Cuban activity. No proof was available though. That was then sought as both the CIA and Nicaragua’s own intelligence agents went looking for it. What they needed was to capture one of these Cubans, alive preferably. The challenge was difficult though not regarded as impossible, especially if they got lucky. Then, with a live Cuban prisoner, evidence could be presented to the Ford Administration of direct, undeniable Cuban involvement with troops inside Central America: the lack of such troops was what those down in Nicaragua were being told was the reason why the United States had yet to overtly act against Cuba.
Across in Guatemala, it wasn’t the Cubans involved in the upsurge in fighting there but rather those Cuban-trained guerrillas with the EGP. The Guatemalan Army attacked the rebel-controlled areas and won a major victory through the highlands. The few guerrillas who knew what they were doing couldn’t make up for the lack of capability nor inability to stand in the face of Guatemalan fire-power when caught by them in open battle as was the case with the rest of the rebel force. There were American advisors with the Guatemalans though also some others from abroad too including fellow Latin American countries such as Argentina and Chile. A retreat was made afterwards by whatever guerrillas were left and the army moved in to begin an orgy of repression through the areas where the EGP had taken under temporary control. As usual, that repression was brutal. Civilians bore the brunt of the activity from the soldiers who robbed, raped and murdered their way through the countryside when they were meant to be pursing their beaten enemy. Such was the Guatemalan Army’s fight against rebels. Away from that battle and its aftereffects, inside the country’s capital of Guatemala City, Lucas García was facing a different kind of conflict. There was a lot of dissatisfaction with his rule by others of influence within the country. The landowners who held most of the nation’s wealth along with corrupt military officers (who held most of the rest) were fed up with how their president was putting them all at risk. They had no intention of giving into the rebels or anything silly like that. What they wanted was someone who could deal better with guerrillas and also secure further support from the Americans. Lucas García was tainted as far as they were concerned. They wanted a strongman who could also negotiate better foreign support than Lucas García was bringing. They plotted and searched for such a figure.
September 1979:
The panel of experts delivered their report to the Politburo regarding Afghanistan and Iran. There was a verbal presentation which contained a summary though the written report was delivered in long-form and given to the Soviet leadership to digest properly. Some took an interest in what was said, others already had their mind made up on the matter regardless of what was said and written. The report stated that the internal situation in both communist-led nations on the Soviet Union’s southern border was only going to get worse. There was widespread lawlessness and the security situation was out of control. Divisive political factionism had reared its ugly head alongside a growing religious fundamentalism. This not only spelled trouble for the future of those regimes in Kabul and Tehran which were aligned to Moscow, but for the Soviet state itself due to the proximity of those countries to a population within areas of the Soviet Union neighbouring them being ripe for the wrong sort of influences which were likely to come across the frontiers soon enough. As specified in the instructions for those compiling the report, recommendations were given as to how to solve the problems which had arisen. It was those which caused quite the debate within the wider Politburo and also the smaller Defence Council too.
The first recommendation presented was one that the Soviet Union should effectively hope for the best and wait for the situation to correct itself. The second was that there should be an active effort made using the services of the intelligence organs to directly influence events within each country so that there was a correction in Afghanistan and Iran. Then there was the final recommendation: intervene forcefully in each control and impose Soviet guidance in leadership upon the regimes of each, replacing them if need be with more cooperative leaders using military power.
Washington had its hawks and doves, so did Moscow. There were those among Andropov’s colleagues who pushed for all three options individually or a mixture of two of them. There were criticisms made of the experts which were coded attacks upon the ministries and organisations which they worked for and therefore rivals within the country’s leadership. Not all of the arguments made for each recommendation were thus made in good faith. Whilst the debates were ongoing, there were developments on the ground in the countries whose fate they were discussing. In Afghanistan, there was a successful coup d’état where Taraki was overthrown and Amin came to power. Meanwhile, there was news that came up from Iran that what was left of Iran’s oil industry was suffering from unexplained and fatal sabotage from suspected Maoist guerrillas who were all supposed to be beaten by now: the Soviet Union had geo-political plans for Iranian oil which were now going to have to be binned in a costly fashion. As the report told them, this was all getting worse. Still, they argued the issue though with no decision being yet made on what to do.
October 1979:
Amin had Taraki murdered. Afghanistan’s new leader decided that it would be the most prudent thing to do with the man he had deposed last month. He professed his friendship to the Soviet Union before and after killing Taraki, someone tied completely to Afghan-Soviet relations. Across in Iran, Soviet paratroopers protecting intelligence personnel going over American-supplied combat aircraft that had ended up in Tudeh hands when The Shah departed needed protecting themselves when Doshan Tappeh Airbase came under attack. Unfortunately, there was no immediate help available and almost a dozen Soviet personnel were killed in a guerrilla attack while nearby Iranian Army personnel remained in their barracks. The regimes in Kabul and Tehran had already earned the displeasure of Moscow and with these acts – the latest in a long line of other failings – they secured their own fates, such a fate as being soon to be deposed by Soviet force of arms. Enough was enough, the Soviet Union would act in response.
The Defence Council made the decision to invade Afghanistan and Iran on October 11th. This followed a series of previous strong disagreements about what to do over the matter of disorder in both and whether the threat posed by them to the security of the Soviet state was as bad as the naysayers said it was or whether the optimists were correct in their view that it would all blow over. Chebrikov and Ustinov were at last supported by the ideological chief Suslov in calling for an armed intervention with Andropov weighing in at the end. The strong opposition from Kirilenko and Kosygin – both soon to be on their way out after finding them on the wrong side here but in other previous matters too – was no longer reinforced by foreign minister Gromyko who jumped ship to the intervention side. His concern had been over increasing tensions with the West, but in the end he finally came around to coming out in support of what was proposed by the others: Gromyko was certain by October that any American response would be negligible.
In three weeks, Soviet forces would move into those two neighbouring countries. The way ahead for them would be opened by special forces from the military and elite KGB paramilitary units. There would be use made of friendly locals too, more use made of those locals tricked into helping something that they weren’t fully aware of. A perfect plan was put together, one designed to limit direct heavy fighting during entry and exploitation. For the sake of international diplomacy, Soviet forces would be invited in to help restore the peace. It would be a repeat of Czechoslovakia in 1968 with that in terms of local political figures making a plea for Soviet troops. However, once they were inside, then Soviet forces would deal with the troubles in each country, help install proper governance and then withdraw as soon as possible. In addition, there were options on the table to establish military bases at key locations. The Soviet Navy needed a warm water port and there was the Persian Gulf at the bottom of Iran. The plan was perfect, and it was all expected to work with the invasions and what would come after them. What could go wrong?
October 1979:
The US Senate had the power to refuse to ratify international treaties signed by the president. Ford had been told that the SALT II treaty with the Soviets wouldn’t gain the ratification of the Senate. He had pushed ahead regardless, sure that he could win the senators over. No, he couldn’t. The Senate wouldn’t budge on the issue. The chamber had the Democrats in the majority with the minority being Republicans. From both sides, the latter Ford’s own party, there was stringent opposition to SALT II. The whole thing was a mass Soviet deception as far as much of the Senate was concerned. Senators pointed to Soviet missile development elsewhere and how they were just getting around the restrictions imposed by SALT II by that; meanwhile, the United States was restricting itself. Chief among the opponents in the Senate, who represented a wider view elsewhere across the country, were Democrats John Glenn and Henry ‘Scoop’ Jackson along with the Republican majority leader Howard Baker.
SALT II wasn’t the only issue that the Senate, the House of Representatives and others not in such bodies had taken issue with the president with over how he dealt with the Soviets. The Soviets were arming themselves with new nuclear weapons like the SS-20 missile and plenty of conventional weapons as well as they engaged in a military build-up. They were expanding their geo-political influence worldwide and sponsoring proxy wars elsewhere. What was Ford doing to counter this? Nothing. Grain was being supplied on favourable terms to the Soviet Union so they could feed themselves and therefore didn’t have to spend the export revenues which they gained by selling oil to the West – only recently had the Soviets become an oil-exporting nation – on that instead of military hardware. Soviet expansion into Iran was another serious issue which Ford had failed to address. Despite the denials, his political opponents lined up to level accusations that the US Government knew long in advance of the influence by Moscow in the Iranian Revolution and did nothing to stop that either with the end result being the fall of an American ally and its immediate subsuming into the Soviet orbit.
The Ford Administration’s military programmes were another source of contention. There was debacle after debacle there. Not all of these criticisms were valid as politics came into play but there was a pattern of attack present. The MICV programme to build a new series of armoured infantry vehicles for the US Army was delayed and delayed again. The B-1A bomber was sure to be a white elephant. Then there were the new series of air- & ground-launched cruise missiles with both seen as costly mistakes. When it came to the latter, those cruise missiles designed for nuclear use, some of the same critics who argued that their development was flawed still questioned while even after that, they weren’t forward deployed. Many governments in Western Europe wanted them there to help defend their countries when the Soviets had their SS-20s. What was the Ford Administration doing about this? All of that came alongside the continued attacks made from different directions about the dirty wars in Central America that were still ongoing with allegations made that United States support for regimes with no regard for human rights continued unabated.
The last year of Ford’s presidency, where had hoped to be cementing his legacy, was going to see more of this coming especially with the twin storms of the Middle East and Central America. Some of his opponents were speaking in good faith, others not so much. There was political manoeuvring going on for the race to win the White House next year and other nationwide races too. Ford’s own vice president was getting ready to make a presidential bid – Dole would most likely be faced Reagan; the latter long a thorn in the president’s side – and his fate would be tied to the actions of the president… plus his perceived failures. There would be no let up in the politics at home in the United States, especially as further troublesome developments happened abroad.
October 1979:
Should the Nicaraguan National Guard give up the fight with the Sandinistas, there was a widespread belief among those conscripts that the revenge from the guerrillas would be to kill them and their families as well. This had already happened, they had been told that. Captured prisoners and deserters had faced the vengeance of the rebels, with their loved ones suffering too. The only thing to do was to fight and keep fighting. Defeat meant death. So they carried on the fighting, getting even more brutal than before. Captured rebels were executed on the spot and villages which had been supporting the Sandinistas were given a good going over. There was no indication in any members of the National Guard – the low- and middle-ranking members rather than those at the top – that they had been manipulated on this issue with clever lies and careful propaganda used to keep their morale up. The guerrillas were truly taking the fight to the Nicaraguan military now while supported as strongly as they were from aboard: everything was being done to avoid defeat by Somoza and his regime.
That everything included making a serious effort alongside the CIA to capture a live Cuban solider. Those few Cubans active in the country were sought so that one could be taken prisoner and shown to the White House as proof of overt, direct Cuban involvement in Nicaragua. There was a red line that Ford had on that issue, such was how it was understood down in Nicaragua, and once Cuba could be shown to have crossed it, then things would change. The hunt was ongoing. The hunters lost men during it too with several Nicaraguan commandos killed and one of the CIA paramilitary officers – a man ‘lent’ by the US Green Berets – later dying from wounds inflicted in a firefight. Still, it went on. The Cubans weren’t ghosts, they weren’t going to stay invisible for long. Eventually, they would be caught up with.
Across the Caribbean far from Nicaragua, there was Cuban involvement beginning in the island nation of Grenada too. A violent seizure of power had taken place back in March by insurrectionists who proclaimed a People’s Revolutionary Government. Grenada was led by power-mad militarists not to the exact political tastes of neither Havana nor Moscow. Regardless, there was an opportunity seen by Castro – still recovering from his wounds in that botched assassination – to have an impact there. The future direction of Grenada could be beneficial if things were done right.
Castro had sent a diplomatic team to Grenada last month and now he sent his brother. Raúl was treated like a visiting king though was rather alarmed at some of the harsh measures taken by his hosts to suppress opposition. Grenada was still rather chaotic but much of what he was told about was unnecessary. He politely explained to Maurice Bishop that there was a better way of doing things; Bishop in turn spoke of crushing counter-revolutionaries before they knew that they were counter-revolutionaries. That issue was pushed aside for time being. There were other matters, those of cooperation between Havana and St. George’s, which Fidel’s brother came to talk about. Raúl spoke of opening up connections between Grenada and the rest of the world, the socialist world in particular. What would be the best way to do that? That would be by expanding the transport links of Grenada first. St. George’s had a viable port but only a small airport. Cuba could help with developing the latter.
November 1979:
There was a delay imposed of one day at the last minute when it came to the opening of the armed interventions into Afghanistan and Iran. Really, more than just one day was needed yet there were so many wheels in motion that any further delay would put the whole planned success of the operation at serious risk. Little could be fixed in that space of twenty-four hours when it came to sorting out the logistical difficulties that had cropped up in the late stage of the preparations, but what could be done was. Instead of on October 31st, the invasions of those two countries by Soviet and Iraqi forces commenced on November 1st.
The invitations from Kabul and Tehran issued for the entry of foreign troops into each nation helped smooth the way along with the sudden surprise assault that caught both Afghanistan and Iran completely unawares. All of a sudden, armoured columns were crossing their borders while deep inside their countries there were airheads established to fly in more troops and armour too. Special forces assaults took over key communications points and also neutralised the elements of the political leadership sought out.
Afghanistan was far easier for the Soviets to take over than its bigger neighbour Iran. There had come the pre-invasion activation of the Soviet 40th Army which took command of the operation: part of the field army had been pre-deployed months beforehand near to the border when the now-deceased Taraki asked for their presence if not inside Afghanistan then on the border ready to come in should they been needed. The 40th Army undertook the border crossing operations and the Kabul airhead (outside the Afghan capital at Bagram Airbase where there were already Soviet forces) mission too. Kabul was taken and then two main drives swept Soviet armour through the country with a destination of Kabul as they took looping routes. Organised Afghan resistance was near non-existent. The Soviets were coming to help, was the belief of so many duped into believing this fallacy. There problems which the 40th Army faced rather than the Afghan Army came from the terrain, the weather and navigation. Afghanistan wasn’t a large country yet neither was it small either. The transport network was a mess and there were few locals who were fast to offer help. The invasion objectives were achieved and at a remarkably low cost but it wasn’t as easy as foreseen. Something else that wasn’t foreseen was how very fast Afghan rebel groups who were fighting the government which the Soviets deposed were able to swing their attention in an instant to fighting the invaders. Afghans started to unite and unite fast, all against the Soviets. With immediate effect, following guidelines set for what to do when facing the expected minimal resistance – rather than what the 40th Army actually got – Soviet forces unleashed strong counterattacks against opposition. They blasted away with immense fire-power at all who dared stand in their way or turn their guns on them. The beginning of the long war in Afghanistan had commenced.
Mobilisation problems within the Trans-Caucasus and Turkestan Military Districts had brought ire down from Moscow where Marshal Ustinov had relieved the commander of the former from his duties and would ensure he was brought up on charges of dereliction of duty & corruption; the commander of the second district would face the same charge months later. It took far too long for the standing 4th Army and the newly-raised 32nd Army to get ready for combat operations to go into Iran. Soviet advisers with the Iraqis informed Moscow that Saddam’s soldiers were prepared to move first if necessary. That might or might not have been true, but, regardless, there was a lot of controversy over the Soviet Army’s internal delays. Thankfully, when they went into Iran, the 4th & 32nd Army’s had little opposition standing in their way. The Iraqis had a far tougher time and boasts from Baghdad turned out to be only true on how fast they could move, not whether they could fight properly. The Iranians were taken completely by surprise and couldn’t stop the Soviets in any meaningful way nor repeat any of the successes which they had with the Iraqis. The Tehran and Tabriz airheads taken by Soviet paratroopers and then expanded upon when airmobile units arrived threw their rear areas into chaos. Soviet tanks raced southwards to link up with those but also take over much of the country. Spetsnaz units helped them (hitting the homes of commanders to kill them in the hours before hostilities opened), more so did the wholescale inability of the Iranian Army to do anything after the devastation in numbers & morale with the revolution. Iranian militias aligned to the regime brought into that umbrella Revolutionary Guard organisation were those who opposed the Soviet Army at first yet they too were paralysed when KGB officers struck deals with them… ones which the Soviet Union had no intention of honouring.
Iraqi troops crossed the western border and took the time to fight Kurdish forces there more than Iranian militias. Their most success was in the north, rather than where it was meant to be down in the southern part of the border area. Iraqi airborne forces did overrun the port of Bushehr and get troops to other harbours along the Persian Gulf: this was their major success which the Soviets were eventually happy with. They were joined in these naval operations by Soviet troops flying to Bandar Abbas the long way around (through Iraq then over the water) to get there and secure the southern access route to Iran should there come any idea of American interference. Deep inside the cordon thrown around Iran, Soviet forces overran the country. It wasn’t easy. They had to resort to the heavy use of fire-power when they encountered small, disorganised but dug-in Iranian resistance. Civilians fled from them but irregular forces like those infernal Maoists made attacks, especially in the rear once the main body of Soviet troops had passed. They were deadly in places yet the Soviets were more-focused on shutting down resistance from Islamists groups before they could rise. Those hadn’t been killed off by the Tudeh regime that Moscow now brought down. Instead, they had just gone quiet after countless defeats in open battle and were beginning an insurgency. Soviet troops were here in Iran to eliminate that early on. Where met – or suspicion of it was encountered – the response was extraordinarily harsh. There was no aim for a long war here in Iran, just a brutal crushing of dissent which the Soviets began early on.
November 1979:
The long-standing United States policy when it came to Iran – starting under presidents long before Ford – was that the country would be defended against outside threats: the Soviet Union in effect. The Shah had faced internal troubles and told the Americans that he didn’t need their help. Then he changed his mind and said he did need help: that wasn’t an external threat though, the Soviets weren’t rolling into Iran. By that point, Imperial Iran was finished anyway. The new revolutionary government cut ties with the United States after the revolution. Tehran moved towards the Soviet Union and the communists denounced any relations with the Americans. Soviet forces were then ‘invited’ into Iran with a flimsy excuse given and they very quickly overran the country. The United States did nothing to stop this invasion because it came on the back of the series of developments in Iran over the past year. In addition, there was nothing that could be done short of a full-scale war with the Soviet Union.
Back home, the president and his administration got it right in the neck. Opponents of all stripes savaged the inaction and also how this situation had been allowed to come to pass too. There had been enough warnings. Why had nothing been done before? Why was nothing being done now? Newspaper editorials & opinion pieces, commentators on the television & radio news programmes and politicians making statements kept on coming throughout the month. The Soviets had been joined by the Iraqis and there was the invasion of Afghanistan as well as Iran. The whole of the Middle East was under the threat of Soviet tanks! Meanwhile, in the White House, ‘Ford the Fool’ did nothing. When Kissinger went to the UN up in New York and made a statement there before the General Assembly where there was a (non-binding) motion to condemn the twin invasions, his words were meant to stop the attacks on the Ford Administration. They didn’t. No one cared what the secretary of state had to say. He had lost his relevance in the eyes of so many. It had been him who had been at the forefront of détente with the Soviets and Moscow had shown what it thought of détente. Ford asked Kissinger to fall on his sword. They parted on good terms personally though Kissinger wasn’t about to forget what happened and how it actually wasn’t his fault… in his opinion anyway. Meanwhile, the Soviets overrun Iran and the United States could only watch from afar with impotence.
USS Ranger, a US Navy aircraft carrier, was in the Arabian Sea during November along with her battle group plus a flotilla of amphibious ships laden with US Marines. This deployment followed one earlier in the year by another carrier which had been active near to Iran. In an off-the-cuff remark to a journalist, Secretary of Defence Rumsfeld said that the Ranger’s air wing could destroy Soviet and Iraqi naval forces in the Persian Gulf ‘in thirty minutes’. That was an exaggeration but the thinking behind it was true. Should the political will come, the US Navy could clear the waters off Iran of the ships there which supported the invasion. Naturally though, such a move would open up a Soviet reaction elsewhere in the world where the United States wasn’t as strong. Moreover, those warships weren’t of great importance in the invasion of Iran and nor were they doing anything else such as threatening neutral shipping through the Straits of Hormuz – where the Persian Gulf met the Arabian Sea – where all of those tankers carrying oil were moving. World oil prices suddenly went through the roof due to the fighting in Iran though that was a vast overreaction. Iranian oil had been cut off for some time now and the supply of oil from elsewhere in the Middle East was unmolested.
Pakistan neighboured Afghanistan and the former had long been supporting the insurgency inside the latter. Pakistani interference in Afghanistan had predated Taraki and his communists too, going back into the mid-Seventies. Weapons and training were given to anti-Kabul rebels and a safe refuge offered back inside Pakistan. The CIA had been involved through mid-1979 when there had come moves to hurt Soviet regional expansion through Taraki: Afghan insurgents had lots of indirect supporters though had to do everything themselves. Now Soviet tanks rolled into Afghanistan and there was air support for them. Those MiGs were soon present in the skies near to the Pakistani border and Pakistani aircraft couldn’t match them in capabilities when there were (non-shooting) incidents with Soviet direct intimidation. That came alongside a message sent to Islamabad at the end of the month delivered in diplomatic terms but one full of menace too. Stop supporting rebels in Afghanistan, Pakistan was told, or else. ‘Or else’ wasn’t specified, but Pakistan had to take note of the extraordinary strong Soviet forces inside Afghanistan along with a sudden upsurge in Soviet-Indian relations that they perceived as all part of the intimidation against them. Islamabad went running to the Americans for help, giving dire warnings of what could come their way. Help us!
November 1979:
A Cuban paratrooper was caught alive in Nicaragua after a shoot-out with Somoza’s special forces. He was wounded but patched up fast and flown to Managua where, under armed guard, his injuries were treated better. The prisoner was also given a different kind of ‘treatment’ by the Nicaraguans too so that he would talk: CIA personnel were not present as they had left the room when that happened. The Nicaraguans found out what they wanted. Undeniable proof was given of Cuban participation with troops in the Nicaraguan Civil War by what the prisoner said after torture. That civil war continued elsewhere in the country with Somoza having ordered a major offensive against the Sandinistas throughout the month. Finishing off the rebels was desirable though it was understood that that was unachievable at this time. The Americans were yet to throw everything they had at the fight – Somoza hoped that would change once Ford’s red line on Cuba was shown to have been crossed – and the intention was to display to them that Nicaragua was committed to this and just needed them to come in and help bring about a final victory. It wore down the numbers of the National Guard as Somoza gambled on this strategy of winning by bringing in full United States involvement. He believed that his approach was justified now that he had met the conditions set by what he was told were what Washington wanted: there was a certainty that Ford would hold up his end of the bargain.
Up in Guatemala, the fight against the rebels had died down after the big victory which the Guatemalan Army had won. The war with the guerrillas wasn’t over, it had just gone away for some time. Meanwhile, the military fought amongst themselves. Lucas García was deposed in a bloody coup d’état by his defence minister, General Guevara, though Guevara had been pushed into that by his junior officers and had hesitated many times before doing it. Days later, a counter-coup took place. Ríos Montt – a failed presidential candidate in self-imposed exile – made a return to Guatemala and the violence with the first strike against the country’s leader was exceeded by that against the interim replacement with triple the death toll inside Guatemala City when Ríos Montt made his move. Ríos Montt was back, all Guatemalans would discover his revenge for how he had been mistreated (in his eyes) before. He had a long list of opponents – the Catholic Church, the country’s Mayan minority and many military officers – with the guerrillas at the bottom of that list.
One of early acts by Ríos Montt after his initial bloodlust was that Guatemala was for the time being to step back away from its regional leadership role. Guatemala, pushed by Washington on this through the years, had taken a guiding role in aiding its neighbours across in El Salvador and down in Honduras with their fights against guerrillas too… Nicaragua was a different case with Somoza not a man to listen to his fellow Latinos. From out of El Salvador came Guatemalan troops and more left Honduras too: in the former they were there to fight while in the latter they provided technical support. Generals Romero and Paz García were told for the time being that they were on their own. Guatemala had its own needs. Ríos Montt had no idea of the long-term implications of this with his neighbours but his mind wasn’t on those countries, it was on his internal revenge upon his enemies.
December 1979:
When the news came from Nicaragua that there was a Cuban soldier in captivity, there was a non-reaction in the White House. Ford still didn’t have a new CIA director and nor did he have a replacement for Kissinger either. What was happening in the Middle East was what the president was focused upon. That had more importance at the moment and Nicaragua was not ignored, just not given the attention it deserved. It was the same with Guatemala too. This was in addition to Cuban activities elsewhere in the Caribbean. In later years, the mistake would be seen for what it really was yet at the end of 1979, the Middle East took all prominence.
Pakistan’s president – General Zia-ul-Haq; a man who it was alleged had murdered his democratically-elected predecessor – impressed upon Washington the need for assistance when there was a Soviet menace to his country, a country which was meant to be an ally of the United States. Zia didn’t go about the whole thing in the right way. His pleas for aid were full of exaggeration of the threat to his country. Soviet intimidation had gravely concerned him especially since they continued to make use of his own fears about India too. Zia didn’t know he was being played like he was yet those in the KGB with that scheme didn’t foresee just how strongly he would react and run to the Americans like he did. All the Soviet Union wanted was for Pakistan to cut off aid to the rebels. When it was realised how far Zia was going, asking for American troops, the KGB corrected what they saw as their own mistake with the worry that maybe he would be paid attention to in Washington. They backed off a little. Zia kept on crying wolf but there was no wolf that the United States could see about to make an attack. Pakistan’s leader discredited himself and everyone in Washington just wanting him and his emissaries to shut up. It was an ongoing and confusing situation but regardless of what was said, Pakistan wasn’t about to be invaded. The Soviets had enough on their hands inside Afghanistan and Iran while the Indians wouldn’t be party to such a thing either no matter how many times Zia said they would.
Ford and his advisers watched and listened to the news which came out of the two countries where the Soviets had flooded troops into. There were plenty of sources of intelligence though the veracity of some of them would later be questioned. At the time, the Ford Administration wasn’t aware just how much the Soviets were making use of their favoured game – maskirovka – to cover up their activities. The deception was being done not just to keep the Americans unawares but also to shut down opposition inside Afghanistan and Iran by flooding them with disinformation: United States intelligence sources were part of this in different ways. The way that it was explained to the president was that the Soviets had won everywhere and crushed all organised opposition to them. The lies over the apparent invitation where the Soviet Union was assisting fraternal allies were recognised as lies by most in Washington though not everyone, that was more true with Afghanistan more than Iran. All of that aside, what the Soviets had done was recognised as a clear act of international aggression even if they had made the effort to get a fig leaf of so-called legitimacy. The question became what to do about it. From the moment the Soviets started moving their troops, back last month, any form of outright military action on the part of the United States was ruled out at the highest level. There were those who didn’t agree, but that was the way it was. Ford wasn’t about to take his country to war with the Soviet Union over such countries as Afghanistan and revolutionary Iran. Other measures were considered instead: those being diplomatic and economic. All the while, fighting continued in the Middle East. It was a different kind of fighting than expected by anyone from the outside. Afghan resistance had swung easily to fighting the Soviets now instead of their government while in Iran, after false starts, domestic resistance got going there too.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 18, 2018 23:53:42 GMT
Chapter Three – The End of Détente
January 1980:
Ford announced that the United States would be talking ‘stern measures’ against the Soviet Union due to their ‘illegal aggression’ in Afghanistan and Iran. Those actions included the scaling back of many diplomatic ties away from the direct ambassadorial-embassy level and also the continued support of both UN and Islamic Conference condemnation of Moscow’s actions. Economically, there would be restrictions placed by Washington in certain areas. Ford came out strongly against the Soviet gas pipeline connection Siberian gas fields with Western Europe that Moscow was trying to get West Germany to fund: everything possible that could be done to stop that, would be done. In addition, there would too be a grain embargo against the Soviet Union. American domestic suppliers wouldn’t be able to sell grain to the Soviets away from the bi-lateral US-Soviet agreement of 1975 that was unaffected by this. On this issue, like with the gas pipeline, there had been extensive lobbying done within Washington with the grain pressure coming from the Farm Bureau who were quite influential and regarded this as quite the coup: they could now sell that grain across the country at a higher price and not abroad at a low rate previously ‘encouraged’ by the US Government. They didn’t see that mistake coming.
There were other measures that Ford didn’t take though. He had been lobbied to announce an Olympics Boycott for the upcoming Summer Games in Moscow but chose not to do so at the moment. Renouncing the SALT II treaty – something he was proud to have signed – wasn’t on the table either. That really didn’t matter though: it was already dead before Afghanistan and Iran were invaded. Something that the president did do though was to get agreement from NATO partners in Western Europe to deploy GLCM missiles to several countries. NATO leaders there had been long pushing for this and Ford had taken flak at home for delaying that while he conducted arms talks with the Soviets. Now, those cruise missiles armed with nuclear warheads could go across the North Atlantic. It was going to take some years to get them in-place and there was also domestic opposition ready to ramp up in Western Europe in response, but the decision was made. Dole and Rumsfeld were behind this with the vice president (according to a later leak to the media) pushed into this by the secretary of defence who wanted this as a guarantee of his support for Dole’s presidential bid: Rumsfeld also intended to stay on at the Pentagon too, so said the leaks… if they were true that was.
As to the race for the White House, the campaigns by various candidates kicked into high gear in January when the first official contest took place in the Mid-West. The Iowa Caucuses were now becoming a tradition as the official start of presidential elections; they would be followed the next month in New Hampshire with a standard primary competition there. The point of caucuses and primaries was for each of the political parties to select their candidates later in the year to go into the election after campaigning nationwide (most of the country anyway) in the preceding months. 1976 had shown how vital it was to start early, start with Iowa, for candidates rather than trying to jump into the race late. Delegates for conventions needed to be won plus there was also an extraordinary amount of media attention. Iowa and New Hampshire were where the action was and where the candidates came to.
The race to the White House was open with Ford unable to run again. For the Republicans, three major candidates emerged and made strong campaigns in Iowa. There were others but none had the attention that the leading trio did. Vice President Bob Dole ran against US Senate minority leader Senator Howard Baker and also the former governor of California in Ronald Reagan. This was Reagan’s third attempt after failures in ’68 and ’76. Baker was ready to step aside from his Senate leadership duties to fully focus on his presidential bid though that depended upon how well he did in the opening races; some rumours said that his heart wasn’t truly in this race. As to Dole… Dole wanted the presidency as much as Reagan did and was determined to have it. The Democrats had minor candidates and four main ones. After Carter’s defeat in ’76, there were no Southern Democrats at the top table. Senator Walter Mondale who had run with Carter last time around was running and so too were other veterans of the ’76 race in the form of Governor Jerry Brown (this time entering early) and Senator Henry ‘Scoop’ Jackson. And then there was Senator Ted Kennedy too… hush now, let’s not mention CHAPPAQUIDDICK! With Brown, Jackson and Mondale in the race, many Democrats were looking at an ‘Anyone But Kennedy’ candidate but the party had yet to decide upon which one they liked. In Iowa, that choice wasn’t that of the party establishment though.
Reagan won the Republican contest with Dole finishing far behind and Baker alarmingly close to him as far as the vice president was concerned. As to the Democratic race, it appeared that Chappaquiddick meant little here in Iowa: Kennedy won (just though) with Brown behind him then Mondale in third while Jackson trailed far back. To New Hampshire the candidates went with some elated, others depressed and a few confident that the voters in the North-East would be more open to them.
January 1980:
Guatemalan rebels took the fight back to the streets of Guatemala City once again. The main ranks of the EGP were still decimated by the heavy fighting up in the highlands and there was much reorganising to be done as well as recruitment of new fighters… the EGP always had problems gaining membership so had to force anyone they could into service. Those in the country’s capital were professionals though, dedicated fighters who had much experience and plenty of motivation. They had been preceded months beforehand in striking in Guatemala City by fools yet those mistakes were corrected by the return of gunmen on a rampage. They arrived in the middle of a city-wide march by civilian protesters that government forces had attacked after such an event had been declared illegal. The gunmen used that event in late January as cover and there were agent provocateurs within the crowds of demonstrators no matter what the denials from the EGP said. Doing what had been done in the past – before the EGP suddenly was given a shot in the arm by the Cubans –, those gunmen targeted symbolic people accused of corruption and mistreating the people as well as important figures in the regime. They couldn’t get anywhere near Ríos Montt but others in his sham government were targeted for outright murder and then there were the economic oppressors of the people who lived in Guatemala City whose homes were invaded and they were snatched to be dragged away into the countryside. Such people were later given trials for crimes against the people. These took place in the countryside among rebel encampments and there was only one conclusion from such attempts at providing justice for the people to hear about: that being the death of those kidnapped and found guilty.
Better attempts at legality were being tried by the rebels down in Nicaragua. The Sandinistas were still in no position to win the fight against Somoza anytime soon. They needed external help and while Cuba was willing to do so, there were demands made of Ortega and what was left of the FSLN leadership. The guerrillas needed legitimacy for the outside world to see, even if that was a sham. A provisional government was declared with the allegation that those in Managua no longer represented the Nicaraguan people. The new government requested recognition and support from aboard. Cuba recognised that government, so too did Grenada. There was hope that other countries, those recently freed after being engaged in a revolutionary struggle, would do so too. Aid would come to help the provisional government and that aid would include Cuban troops no longer disguised as volunteers. The Cubans told Ortega that the Soviets wouldn’t recognise them at first and would drag their feet on the issue because of their relations with Americans, but this was the start of the process. As could be expected, there wasn’t much recognition from elsewhere. North Korea and Vietnam offer partial recognition by no one else was willing to yet, not with Somoza still in control of most of Nicaragua and his government being internationally agreed to be the legitimate one. The Cubans also didn’t at once send troops either. They were waiting to see how the United States would react. Moreover, up in Cuba, away from its people down in Nicaragua with the Sandinistas, there were domestic troubles that Castro was having that needed attention first too. Be patient, the Sandinistas were told. In reality, Havana was trying to get a read on the reaction of the United States before fully-committing to Nicaragua.
General Romero had refused to beg Guatemala not to pull out from El Salvador but he had been close to it. However, his pride wouldn’t allow him to do that. Even if he had, it wouldn’t have mattered anyway. Guatemala’s new leader had withdrawn his troops and left Romero in the lurch. It had been those who departed to had been keeping a lid on things in El Salvador by giving Romero the fire-power to go after opposition rebels with numbers. When they left, Romero had turned to his CIA contacts and also gone through the US Ambassador too: he was told that at this moment, the United States couldn’t directly help. The bastards betrayed him. Romero unleashed his death squads again, those to go out hunting for and killing resistance whether they were guerrillas or political opponents. Cutting the head off the snake was what he called it. This was all that could be done. He was feeling the pressure from within, among other military officers, and, after seeing what had just happened in Guatemala, didn’t want to share the fate of the former president there. Some of his death squads also committed some acts under the disguise of acts undertaken by the rebels too – they weren’t very well organised and incapable really – in murdering Romero’s internal opponents, real and imaginary. El Salvador lost some of its brightest and best in this deception, those who knew what they were doing when it came to combatting rebels and would be mighty useful now that the Guatemalans had departed. Romero was only concerned with the here and now though.
February 1980:
Marshal Ogarkov, the Soviet Army’s chief of the general staff, came to Iran in February. His aircraft was among those which came under mortar attack when on the tarmac less than half an hour after landing and while Ogarkov had already departed, he was well-aware of that attack on a supposedly secure airbase soon enough. The rebels were still active inside Iran, long after they were all meant to be disposed of. This visit wasn’t about the rebels though, those whom the KGB was meant to be dealing with via ‘trust’ operations and complicated psychological warfare means. Ogarkov came to Iran to visit those in military uniform undertaking a study of how the invasion had gone when it was made last November. The defence minister had commissioned a report and Ogarkov was meant to supervise that from afar though thought it best to pay a visit to Iran too. The study concerned how the invasion had gone from a military point of view. Up for discussion during his visit were the mobilisation and logistical difficulties faced as well as navigation problems by invading troops. There were successes looked at too though: those big airmobile operations and the amphibious landings on the shores of the Caspian Sea in the north & in the south around Bandar Abbas. Ogarkov enquired after the progress of the ongoing troop rotation now where the men and units involved in the invasion were being replaced by others who had been readied for their deployment to Iran after a harsh training regimen and were moving in. Those replacements were to remain in Iran and fight the guerrillas which had sprung up everywhere. As chief of the general staff, Ogarkov had been told late last year that the entry of Soviet troops into Iran was designed to overcome internal Iranian rebels. The Politburo had told him that they wanted that done quickly. They hadn’t expected then that four months later there would still be a large number of Soviet soldiers inside Iran: they had thought that the numbers would be heavily reduced by this point. Ogarkov had promised them nothing then nor did he now either. There appeared to have been a miscalculation there among the politicians. Ustinov was in the dog house with his colleagues over this and so too was Chebrikov; Andropov was displeased with them and therefore so too were the rest of the Politburo. Ogarkov had stayed out of that. The mortar attack was later followed by shootings and bombings which Ogarkov witnessed while in Iran. His focus was meant to be on the report on previous military operations with a design to look at what could be learnt from that for the future. While he was in the country though, Soviet troops under his command were dying when they weren’t supposed to be.
Saddam had rotated out the troops he had sent into Iran too. The professional Iraqi Army had been heavily-committed last year in crossing over the border. There had been much done well and a lot more done in a disastrous manner. Saddam had proclaimed victory anyway, had a big military parade in Baghdad but also one in the Iranian city of Ahvaz too: that being at the centre of Khuzestan Province. Those soldiers were replaced with the People’s Army. These paramilitaries were loyal to him, unlike the perceived shaky loyalty of the country’s military, though were officially part of the Ba’ath Party. They undertook internal security duties inside Iran like they did back across in Iraq yet inside Iran they came under determined attack. The Iraqis weren’t prepared for this. They suffered unsustainable losses… unsustainable for anyone but Saddam though. He kept sending in more ‘volunteers’ to fight and gave orders that battle was to be taken to the rebels rather than the People’s Army staying defensive. The paramilitaries were instructed to do the impossible and fight a war beyond their means with the result of a continuation of immense casualties taken. Saddam had no intention of pulling them out though, nor his intelligence and political operatives he had inside Iran as well. There were opportunities inside Iran that he still wanted to exploit, especially in what he deemed ‘rightful Iraqi regions’: those being neighbouring provinces such as Khuzestan where there were fellow Arabs but also other minorities there among the Persian inhabitants too. The Iraqi president had many grand ideas for these areas, the oil rich parts of Iran where there were Iraqi paramilitaries in particular, and no one was going to stop him from carrying them out. Tehran and Moscow were distracted, and so Saddam took advantage.
February 1980:
Ted Kennedy and Ronald Reagan won in New Hampshire. They took first place in the (respective) Democratic and Republican primaries at the end of February. Within each contest, there was plenty of infighting among representatives of both parties when it came to support for their candidates with allegations of smears and others dirty tricks. Neither Kennedy nor Reagan were the choice of their party establishments for various reasons though it went beyond them personally elsewhere within the party races with other candidates. The 1980 New Hampshire primaries would be remembered long afterwards for the bitterness of the politics there.
Kennedy’s margin of victory was cut from that in Iowa but a win was a win. The movement for Anyone But Kennedy failed. Mondale placed second, a strong second, with Brown in third and Scoop Jackson trailing yet Kennedy was out ahead. He had connected with the voters in New England. They listened to the liberal war-horse and cast their ballots for him. There was the Kennedy magic on show and his fellow candidates couldn’t match that. Mondale had a message of his own that wasn’t too different from Kennedy’s while Brown kept pushing a message of change: he had some rather outlandish ideas but a strong personal touch with some voters. Jackson was yet another liberal though he spoke much also of national security and anti-communism plus the need for a defence build-up too. Still, Kennedy stole the show with media attention on him while the other three fought among themselves over the nitty-gritty of specific policy positions. Their campaign staffs briefed against Kennedy too – ‘Chappaquiddick’ being the only word needed to be said – as attempts were made to stop him. It didn’t work though. What sold better to the public were the stories about Brown’s private life (his rock star, counter-culture girlfriend and his live-in, weird aide), allegations against Jackson taking bribes (for defence contracts from Boeing) and jokes at Mondale’s expense (outright fabrications about an affair where he still lacked the desire needed for that, a reference to 1976) in the face of a Kennedy.
Within the Republican contest, Dole was favoured by much of the party higher-ups and if not him, then Baker: Anyone But Reagan wasn’t organised but the feeling was there. There was still hostility left over from ’76 with Reagan where he had challenged Ford and upset many within their party. Regan had what Dole and Baker didn’t have though: a connection with voters. He wasn’t a Kennedy, yes, but he had more personality as far as ordinary people and the media were concerned than the vice president and the Senate minority leader. Dole’s staff were accused of playing dirty tricks by spreading lies about Reagan though also Baker too. Reagan left surrogates to attack Dole by tying him to Ford the Failure while he himself tried to stay aloft. Poor Baker was left near ignored. When the results came, Baker was far behind Dole and Reagan and an afterthought it seemed. That was at the time though. It was Baker who had raised the issue during the New Hampshire primary of a return of the US military draft. He mis-sold the idea and his words were twisted then forgotten for the time being. Baker hadn’t been calling for immediate conscription of America’s youth, just that there should be the infrastructure in terms of a national register for males fit for military service. Post-Vietnam, that had been done away with following the political impact of the draft then. With what Baker called Soviet international aggression, something that Reagan had been speaking about too – allowed by Ford the Fool… with Dole at his side –, the idea of a national register seemed the most prudent thing to do. Well, it didn’t work out as Baker tried to make it an issue. There was hostility to that idea and Baker’s idea was trashed from Reagan when Dole spoke in support of it; over in the Democratic camp, Kennedy and Brown were opposed to that with Mondale uncommitted and Jackson all for it. After New Hampshire, Baker’s idea here wouldn’t come up again in the campaign in a major manner. Years later it would though.
Days before the announcement of the winners and losers in New Hampshire, across in upstate New York there had been the ‘Miracle on Ice’. The US men’s ice hockey team had won a famous victory against the Soviet team (they won the gold medal later and the game against the Soviets wasn’t shown live; two later misconceptions in the cultural phenomenon which was that victory). The 1980 Winter Olympics were being held in Lake Placid and the surrounding area, and Ford had been there to open them. He hadn’t attended that game though, nor had the presidential candidates with so much else going on. After the victory where American amateurs beat Soviet professionals in true underdog fashion, there was a lot of national pride. Those who didn’t follow ice hockey nor Olympic sports were suddenly interested. The presidential candidates all had something to say too. It made a lot of people feel good, sticking it to the Soviet Union like that.
It came against a background of a country that many said was demoralised: was the American dream over? The United States was still suffered from economic malaise with high fuel prices and uncomfortable inflation. There was a distrust of big government post-Watergate; now there were continuing allegations about American involvement in Central America’s dirty wars that wouldn’t stop. The US military was seen as weak along with the country’s role in the world fading when faced with a seemingly dominant Soviet Union on the ascendancy with its powerful armed forces that had just swept across the Middle East. Many latched onto the Miracle on Ice, others to what different politicians running for president were saying about their vision of a future for America.
March 1980:
Loss of control over urban areas was what would bring down the regime in Guatemala in the end. The army could fight against and win conflicts in the countryside & jungles against rebels, but when guerrillas were able to strike inside the capital and the big towns, the government was unable to stop them. The blows struck against the regime weren’t that strong in a physical sense, but they were significant in their symbolism. What was left of support from the people for the government evaporated with the weakness shown and there was also internal anger with the military too at the inability to stop these attacks. Like February, March saw gunmen return to Guatemala City with shootings and kidnappings taking place. In addition, the EGP fought as urban guerrillas where they took over parts of the city for short periods of time before they were blasted out by the security forces. When they had those areas under control, they acted as if they were there to stay too and tried to connect with the impoverished people. Whether their words had anything behind them was a different matter, but it seemed as if they did. Then the government send in troops. Neighbourhoods were levelled and hundreds killed. Guatemala City was the worst affected though there were similar scenes on a smaller scale in Quetzaltenango, Chimaltenango and Escuintla too. The government got the blame for the deaths caused, not the rebels. There were desertions from the army as well, men who left with their weapons and if they didn’t make it back to their home towns & villages, ended up oftentimes with the rebels (not it must be said by choice: fight with us or die was what they were told when they ran into EGP fighters). There was a flight of refugees as well. Those who could leave the affected urban areas could leave. This included many important, well-connected and rich Guatemalans. They feared for their own lives and that of their families – the rebels had been snatching and killing ‘exploiters’ – but more so saw that the good times for them were coming to an end. Ríos Montt wasn’t making life in Guatemala safe for many with his massacres of opponents and his paranoid revenge against those who had wronged him in the past. He was able to do what he was doing because the army was on side and feared the alternative – the rebels would surely shoot military officers, probably all of them – if they didn’t. However, if they could be convinced that the alternative wasn’t that… well, then things might be different. For now though, hundreds died every day in Guatemala as the country was torn apart with the civil war in its sixteenth and, as it happened, its last year.
Romero across in El Salvador was killing his countrymen too. Forced disappearances, something learnt from the Guatemalans though perfected with knowledge passed on from Argentinian and Chilean advisers to the country, was the preferred method of doing this. Anyone who opposed the regime would disappear. Those were enemies real and imagined, it didn’t matter. There were no bodies and no questions. Fear was the design behind this, the terror of the loved ones of those who opposed the regime in San Salvador. The army wasn’t reliable enough to fight opposition directly and so Romero had the forced disappearances increase. He did so at a time when the various rebel groups, often at each other’s throats and never able to have a true leader emerge due to such people vanishing, were trying to consolidate. Romero’s Latin American friends, plus his CIA advisers, told him that if the rebels could unite, the country was in danger. Everything that could be done to stop that happening was being tried: ‘everything’ being killing, killing and killing again with the corpses vanishing to terrify everyone else.
Nicaragua now had two governments. There was the internationally-recognised one which was in Managua and led by Somoza. Alongside that, there was the other one which was on the run in the jungle and led by a committee which now had three countries that had switched recognition after North Korea had joined Cuba and Grenada in supporting the Sandinistas officially. The second government was attempting to gain more legitimacy internationally though stronger efforts were being made inside Nicaragua among the people. The FSLN was appealing to the people with social programmes – interrupted by the guns of the Nicaraguan National Guard – and a heavy dose of propaganda about a ‘new Nicaragua’. Managua and other urban locations were raided in armed attacks though most Sandinista activity remained ongoing in the countryside. The Sandinistas guerrillas were still fighting the army and they were now being joined by more fighters coming from aboard, professional soldiers in fact. Those were Cubans in-country still unofficially though far larger in number than before. The Americans hadn’t reacted when one on their number was caught and Cuban activity exposed. Would it be the same when the Cubans finally stepped out of the shadows?
Cuba had a hand in the guerrilla activity in all three of these countries: Nicaragua far more than Guatemala and Guatemala far more than El Salvador. Castro was still gambling that the Americans wouldn’t intervene. In the end, a victory in each was foreseen and a fait accompli hoped for with all three, plus others later too, led by regimes friendly to Havana and opposed to Washington. Castro was doing this though while there was trouble at home throughout Cuba.
There had been protests among ordinary Cubans over economic factors that had led to anti-government activity. Some had taken refuge in the grounds of embassies in Havana with those of Peru and Venezuela being invaded by those fleeing from Castro’s security forces. Such events had caused a breakdown in diplomatic relations with those countries. Castro had yet to firmly move against those who were beyond his grasp and was deciding what to do on this matter. He, naturally, blamed the norteamericanos. That there was anything wrong with how Cuba was governed and the plight of its people was either beyond his comprehension or deliberately ignored. Who knew what was in his mind on that matter? Fermenting unrest and civil wars abroad while faced with opposition at home should have been a fatal combination for most regimes. Castro was a survivor though.
April 1980:
The Soviet Union hadn’t long been an oil exporting state. The entry into the oil export market had come after the 1973 Oil Crisis and continued since then. Along with natural gas, oil was being sold to hungry consumers around the world at a tremendous rate of supply. The hydrocarbon exports were seeing a flood of money coming into the state coffers. Oil and gas wasn’t traded in rubles when it was brought by the West but instead in US dollars, UK sterling and West German marks. This foreign currency – far more valuable that rubles on the international markets – was then used by Moscow to purchase grain, technology and consumer goods from aboard. There was the usual Soviet corruption, pilferage and shoddy standards, but the money kept rolling in. It was then spent just as fast too. The revenues earned were of vital importance to the state. The Soviets were now addicted to the income gained and what they could buy using it. Oil and gas kept on being supplied to the capitalists and in exchange there was all of that money put to good use. Moscow didn’t want it all to stop and couldn’t imagine a scenario where it ever would. Yet, threats to this money tree were growing near and far.
In response to the revolution in Iran, OPEC had raised oil prices. The members in the Middle East but also other nations part of that oil cartel (in South America, Africa and Asia) had decided to cash in on fears in the West about shortages. A decision had been made in Moscow to adopt a wait-and-see approach on copying that and instead for the time being gain new customers when the West saw ‘the Arabs being difficult’. The West hadn’t done as anticipated though. Market forces and innovation had come into play as well as government measures taken. New sources of oil were sought, including those already discovered and previously not opened up due to them not being cost-effective: the Alaskan fields, North Sea oil and Mexico being examples of this. Governments pushed for the use of alternatives instead of oil as well. Oil was still being purchased from Soviet sources, more than before in fact, just not in the quantities what the predictions had said it would. Oil price speculators – some of the worst excesses of capitalism as far as Moscow was concerned – interfered too, affecting Soviet exports indirectly as well in something that couldn’t be controlled.
The Soviets wanted that revenue. They wanted the money to keep coming and for it to increase as well. The threats to the money tree were to be taken on. More news was leaked from Iran – using disguised sources – to suggest that the destruction that was even worse than it actually was… and that was pretty bad regardless. Saddam in Iraq and the Emir of Kuwait, those with friendly relations with Moscow, were contacted and requests made when it came to their influence with OPEC to keep oil prices high from there: the two countries would benefit from that and the Soviet Union would benefit in a different way. There were anti-nuclear power movements in the West, many of them desperate for assistance in spreading their message of the dangers from that: funds would be sent to them, also from disguised sources. Moscow couldn’t play the games that the capitalists played – there was a belief that this was all being controlled by nefarious cabals – but they could play their own. They wanted the West to keep buying their oil. If these measures didn’t work, others were a possibility in the long-term. One of those being spreading instability in rival oil producing countries. If everything went wrong, if the West cut back demand and the revenues dried up, that could only spell disaster for the Soviet Union so that scenario would be avoided at all cost.
One of those games played by the capitalists was the talk of what some were calling the possibility of an ‘oil glut’. That idea was rubbished in Moscow. There could be no such thing considered as possible because that would contrast with the belief that Soviet oil should be sold in quantity to the West to make the state richer. The system didn’t allow for contradictions against state policy.
May 1980:
The Nicaraguan National Guard was a reasonably good counter-guerrilla army. They hadn’t managed to beat the Sandinistas yet had inflicted enough defeats upon them to keep them under control. The National Guard had problems with morale and faced losses from desertion too. Idiotic political decisions from Somoza kept them from overcoming the rebels when several times victory was almost near. Still, the National Guard shouldn’t have been able to be defeated by the Sandinista guerrillas as long as there was American support with arms, equipment and intelligence. The Cubans were a different matter though. There was a brigade of professional Cuban soldiers in Nicaragua now and the United States hadn’t lifted a finger to stop Castro from deploying them to Central America nor sending them into battle: diplomatic moves and strong statements from the White House hadn’t deterred Castro. During May, the Cubans joined with the Sandinistas in engaging the National Guard in open battle and won a series of engagements through the western side of the country, its most-populated part. Managua was far from the frontlines, yet it was eventually threatened by the successes that Somoza’s opponents had. The National Guard couldn’t stop the advance and the rate of desertion increased exponentially. Worse, there were mid-ranking commanders who were persuaded to not defect to the rebels, but to declare their neutrality. Neutrality in a conflict like this!? It happened regardless. Many saw now that the end was near. This fight was no longer worth it for so many who decided that they would take their chances with the rebels – most would regret that – and led their men out of the firing line.
Even at such a late stage, Somoza was still convinced that the United States would step in at the last minute to save him and his regime. He imagined that American troops would arrive, smash the Cubans and roll over the rebels too. Instead, as the month wore on, the few Americans in-country started pulling out. Many of the CIA personnel along with the Green Berets too were pulled out. The ambassador and embassy personnel stayed – did they start to feel worried! – as Washington hadn’t completely given up yet the writing was truly on the wall when it came to Somoza’s rule over Nicaragua. Finally, on May 30th, after Managua’s airport was violently taken in a surprise Cuban assault using helicopters laden with airmobile troops (rumours that there were Soviet ‘advisers’ involved in planning this, even taking part in the assault, couldn’t be proved), Somoza finally saw what everyone else did. His capital was doomed when the airport was lost. Where would the American troops come into the country from if it wasn’t through the airport? He contacted Ford directly and asked him that question. Ford told him that the United States wouldn’t be intervening.
The next morning, during the early hours, Somoza fled. He reached a CIA airstrip near the town of Mateare from where most of their supporting aircraft had already departed. There was an aircraft waiting for him though a smaller one than planned: mechanical troubles had caused the larger one to be unable to reach the airstrip… even then, the runway was rather small and such a flight would have been dangerous for that aircraft. Somoza had his entourage with him along with a significant portion of the state treasury. There wasn’t room for the last of his loyal followers and his ‘luggage’. People were left behind, not the riches he was fleeing with. Another aircraft would come and save them soon, very soon. Somoza gave his word on that. His word no longer meant anything in Nicaragua though. He was soon flying out of his country – his – and on his way to Honduras first then Miami afterwards. Behind him, Somoza left a country where the war hadn’t really been fully lost and there were still those fighting and dying for him. He was gone though. However, Castro hadn’t forgotten about the man who’d come so close to killing him: the end of that story was yet to be written.
June 1980:
Did the Loss of Nicaragua have an effect upon the presidential primaries taking place in the United States? Yes, it did. A late effect and one difficult to exactly explain in how voters reacted but one certainty. So did many other things though. There were effects coming from other wars in Central America, the situation with a Soviet presence in Iran and then all of the domestic issues as well. The last of the primaries were on June 3rd and with Somoza running for his life only days beforehand, by that point most Americans had already either cast their ballots in those primaries or made their minds up on how they would vote in the final round of nationwide voting for the Democratic and Republican primaries. Moreover, the final winners were already de facto victors anyway at that late stage. Kennedy and Reagan only needed the formality of confirmation votes by delegates in the upcoming party conventions.
For Kennedy, Iowa and New Hampshire were the start of a winning streak that took him all the way to the final wins he made in early June taking the delegate-rich states of California and New Jersey. That was what the primary race was all about: winning delegates for the convention. He had had other big wins in the race – Massachusetts, Connecticut, New York and Texas chief among them – as well as many smaller victories as well. His popular vote count beat his competitor’s numbers too by a significant amount. Scoop Jackson had dropped out of the race in early April after no victories and finally running out of money; Brown and Mondale stayed in until the end even when it was mathematically-impossible to win because they desired to peg Kennedy back some and allow for a contested convention. Mondale had won rewarding victories like Florida, Pennsylvania and Ohio while Brown’s most success had been with Maryland. None of those mattered in the end though because along with California and New Jersey in the final round, Kennedy took five more wins that day and proclaimed victory in the whole race. The media agreed with him. The party establishment was still unhappy at Kennedy’s campaign statements along with part – though not all – of his ideological outlook, but they had by now finally recognised that he would be their candidate for president. Brown and Mondale weren’t going to get support in making it a contested convention.
It was a similar story with Reagan. His opening victories in the first, attention-grabbing contests were followed by further victories. South Carolina was a major early win and then Reagan ‘swept the south’ by taking Alabama, Florida and Georgia in one swoop. His appeal was shown to be nationwide when detractors had said previously that it wasn’t. Dole took victories in Massachusetts and Illinois (the latter where Reagan was born; everyone saw Reagan as being from California though) before the vice president was able to eek out the narrowest of wins in Pennsylvania. Maybe at that point, Reagan’s campaign wobbled somewhat because Dole had come very close to winning in Wisconsin weeks before and there was also some polling giving Reagan high negatives. Baker dropped out after Pennsylvania to endorse Reagan: he hadn’t won a single race by mid-April. Texas, Indiana, Tennessee (where Baker campaigned for Reagan), Michigan and Kentucky all went to Reagan though. Dole dropped back, far back. His comeback had been nothing of the sort. There were nine Republican contests on June 3rd and Reagan won each and every one of them, California included among them where his victory party was held. The next day, Dole conceded.
Unless something unexpected happened, it would be Kennedy versus Reagan in November with the winner becoming the fortieth president.
June 1980:
Somoza’s sudden departure had left a power vacuum in Nicaragua where the Sandinistas were fast to take advantage. There had been an attempt by the National Guard to form an emergency government but Cuban-supplied vehicles allowed Sandinista guerrillas to fast get into Managua in number and they took over the capital city. The ranks of the military no longer had the heart in them and there were plenty more mid-ranking officers who declared their neutrality. The high-ranking National Guard officers had no one to fight for them. They tried to flee like Somoza had. A few got away, most didn’t. Nicaragua was now in the hands of the former rebels… who didn’t wish to see new rebels rise-up.
The Sandinista fighters were part of the wider FSLN movement, which had started out as an opposition umbrella group. Many of the leading members, especially the political figures, had lost their lives in recent years when CIA advisers had pushed National Guard gunmen – or maybe US Green Berets if the rumours were true – towards them with assassinations undertaken. The FSLN was no government-in-waiting nor was it no longer a grouping of many voices all united in opposition to Somoza as it had once been. There were three key people at the top, all hard-core ideological figures who had extensive ties to Cuba and an obsessive hatred of the United States after all that it had done in their country. The brothers Daniel and Humberto Ortega Saavedra were joined by Tomás Borge Martínez in a power-sharing troika. Everyone else – Cruz, Pastora, Ramírez and Wheelock the better known of so many more – were dead. The Ortegas and Borge found the switchover from being guerrillas to running a government difficult. Thankfully, they had friends and allies who were willing to step in and help. Those friends being the Cubans, and also the Soviets too though acting from afar.
The Nicaraguan Revolution commenced. Daniel Ortega was heading the government as president with Humberto the defence minister; Borge was tasked with interior affairs. Those ‘interior affairs’ were the killings which became the Red Terror. The revolution demanded blood, Borge declared, and there was plenty of that spilt. Enemies of the people were murdered with abandon. These enemies came in all forms. Borge was able to root them out and defend the Nicaraguan Revolution with all of the killings that took place. Former figures connected to the Somoza regime were first on the list (including those fools waiting at Mateare for Somoza to send them an aircraft to join him) though right behind them were many connected with other aspects of opposition within Nicaragua which had no real allegiance to what was left of the FSLN leadership. Guerrilla gunmen were busy with executions. Soon enough, joining the mass of growing corpses, were military officers from the National Guard. The top-level officers had been dealt with early on but now the shooting moved to the mid-ranking ones who had declared their neutrality in the final stage of the fighting. The Sandinistas shot them too with the troika in power ignoring Cuban advice when it came to keeping them around to build a new army with their experience. Their experience was that of killing Sandinista fighters and oftentimes their families too; it didn’t matter if individually some were technically innocent of that, they were part of the Somoza regime and the Sandinistas were having their revenge.
On that issue, Cuban concerns were brushed aside though with other matters, the troika needed their help. Nicaragua was dirt-poor after years of civil war and Somoza wasn’t the only one who’d fled with what little wealth there had been left. Basic human needs needed attending too if the Sandinistas weren’t to face resistance. Moreover, despite the bloodlust against enemies, there was still plenty of ideological commitment to the cause which they had all joined to begin this: they were rebels with a cause. The Nicaraguan Revolution was more than the Red Terror. Cuban advisers – backed by Soviet financing – would help provide healthcare and education across the country. Food was needed and so too immediate land reform. More Cubans would show up soon enough to bring all this about while Nicaragua got back up on its feet. Fraternal assistance it would be. Fraternal assistance came in other forms as well. The Cubans would help the Nicaraguans build themselves a new army in the future while in the meantime, the Cubans helped the Sandinistas with foreign relations. Countries across the world started recognising the new government and there was sponsorship for entry requirements into international organisations that the Cubans themselves were part of. In addition, there was the issue of addressing Sandinista anger towards what was going on at the United States embassy in Managua. Borge spoke of ‘taking over’ the facility and ‘making the blood run’ there as well. Raúl Castro came himself to Nicaragua and told Borge and the Ortegas that that couldn’t happen. American diplomats & citizens who were crowded in there along with Nicaraguans seeking refuge were to be unmolested. That would bring down on Nicaragua what Somoza had been unable to get: United States military intervention. The embassy situation would be addressed with diplomacy. If the opponents of the new regime who’d managed to get in there (which was causing political problems in Washington) had to be allowed to leave, then they could do so as well. The troika were pretty miffed at this bossing of them around by Cuba’s #2 strongman yet eventually backed down. Cuba was giving them everything else they needed. Fidel Castro had also promised them Somoza too.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 19, 2018 0:02:16 GMT
July 1980: Romania was the Soviet Union’s most difficult ally within Eastern Europe. Their position in that was secure with Ceauşescu building his dynasty there. Right behind though were the Poles. The Polish government in Warsaw often refused to listen to Soviet demands dressed up as advice and through 1980, as Poland was hit with economic woes, there were increasing displeasure shown in Moscow by the Soviet government at the Poles. The East Germans, the Czechoslovaks, the Hungarians and the Bulgarians (Romania did its own thing) all followed Soviet advice in dealing with unhappy workers when it came to price increases and wages stagnation. Yet, the Poles wanted to do things their own way. Trouble was coming in Poland due to this, the Politburo was informed, and that was a perfectly correct prediction in terms of occurrence though not in the manner in which that trouble came to Poland. It begun in the industrial town of Lublin, down in southeastern Poland near to the Soviet border. The price of meat for lunch at one of the many factories there overnight came with an immense increase. The worker’s wages hadn’t gone up in a long time and there were other price rises elsewhere, but nothing like this. Objections were voiced and the workers told there was nothing that could be done. They decided that there was. In one part of that factory, workers stood idle next to their machines. Throughout the rest of the afternoon, word spread across that one factory and everyone else did the same. There was no protest in the streets, no demands for political freedom or anything else like that which might have been expected. Instead, the workers refused to work. Over the next few days, the strike spread throughout Lublin. All of the other factories and then the transport network came to a halt too. Again, it was a simple strike with workers showing up for work but refusing to do their work. There was organisation with spokesmen nominated yet apart from that, the acts and demands were simple: bring those prices back down and increase our wages. Sympathy strikes popped up in nearby smaller towns too despite efforts by the government to keep the news contained of what was happening in Lublin. Polish security forces were all over the town and standing ready for riots to erupt. There was none of that though, even when pressure was exerted. The striking workers stuck to their non-violent approach and waited for the government to blink. Warsaw did blink in the end. The striker’s demands were met. The price of food would come down and there would be an increase in wages. The terms of the settlement from the government were quite generous too. There were multiple reasons for the concession. First, Warsaw believed that the problem would go away with Lublin settled rather than spread elsewhere across the country. The strikers were being – sort of – reasonable as well in their demands as they hadn’t moved to political issues. Further than these two domestic reasons, there was the intervention of the Soviets too behind the scenes. When the strikes went beyond Lublin itself, one of those sympathy strikes hit the nearby town of Deblin. This was a military town for the Poles and a major rail transport link for the Soviets between their western military districts and the Group of Soviet Forces in East Germany. Those links were shut down only for a short while but bit hard. The Politburo feared a spread elsewhere and were concerned over nationwide rail strikes that would isolate East Germany and effectively Czechoslovakia too if all of Poland’s rail workers went out on strike. The news would travel if the strikes continued, Moscow foresaw, even beyond Poland. Both the Polish and Soviet governments weren’t happy with the concessions made but they were given to the Lublin strikers with the intention of nipping this all in the bud. That was a forlorn hope. August 1980: The Poles were given an inch and they took a mile: such was the view in Moscow. Suslov was at the head of the condemnation among his Politburo colleagues on what the workers in Poland had done after they had been given those concessions. The next round of strikes were treated as an insult, as a direct challenge to not only the Polish government but to their fraternal allies in the Soviet Union. Such a viewpoint came about because of how fast the Poles organised and their outrageous demands. Miners in Silesia had gone on strike straight after Lublin had been resolved and then there had come strikes on the Baltic coast starting with the Lenin Shipyard. From there in Gdansk, those strikes among workers in the shipbuilding industry spread. The Politburo was given a full breakdown of the exact reasons as supplied by the Poles and confirmed by the KGB with their independent sources (what was causing the strikes plus how the actions of Western banks were behind the economic problems Poland was having) but that really didn’t matter to those who again listened to Polish complaints. These strikers wanted and did more than those in Lublin too. There were demands for their own trade unions, freedom for so-called political prisoners and for a role to be granted in government policy-making: the 21 Demands were an affront to Moscow. They protested in the streets rather than standing idle in factories and other places of work; in addition, they were actively spreading the word of their strikes as far afield as they could. Poland’s leader, General Secretary Gierek, wanted to give into some of the demands and thus mollify the strikers somewhat so that they would go back to work. From the Politburo, the response was nyet. The Soviet Union had just hosted the very successful Moscow Olympics. The games had been an immense propaganda coup for the country and the benefits of the socialist system of government. One only had to look at the medals won by Soviet athletes and those from other socialist nations who attended. The games had been well-organised and the security had been excellent at the event & elsewhere throughout Moscow. What visitors hadn’t seen was the ‘cleansing of vermin’ beforehand with vagrants & petty street criminals either arrested or expelled from the Moscow Oblast during the games. Cultural events had taken place in addition to the sport and there were ambitions for some of those as well as the sport to bring about diplomatic advances from them. No one had been talking about Poland during the Olympics and there had only been a few voices with complaints about the fighting in Afghanistan & Iran. The second round of internal Polish troubles came on the back of all of this success which the Politburo, naturally, congratulated themselves upon bringing about. The actions from the Polish workers were unwelcome. Their strikes had attracted the attention of the West and their demands were made in a manner which reflected badly on the Polish government (who didn’t need much help with that), socialist systems of government in the Marxist-Leninist model and thus the Soviet government. Poland’s strikes were seen as having the potential to destroy the goodwill given to the Soviet Union with the Olympics. However, the plan by Geirek to cave once again to his people and therefore bring them to an end wasn’t what Moscow wanted to see. Concessions would only bring further demands – that had just been proved – and show the world that there was something wrong that needed correcting. Taking the opposite approach, cracking down hard upon the strikers, was discounted too though by the Politburo. Andropov and his colleagues debated both courses of action and didn’t want either. They instead pushed for Warsaw to take a third option, that being to not give in nor move against the strikers but to wait them out. Geirek was told to do just this when Gromyko went to Warsaw along with Marshal Ustinov as well. The visit by the Soviet defence minister wasn’t done for no reason at all. Behind the scenes, the Politburo agreed to act in different ways that the Polish government wouldn’t be told about. There would be alternatives looked for to replace Geirek and other identified weaklings in Warsaw. Furthermore, the KGB would be allowed to undertake certain ‘actions’ in Poland with Chebrikov given full support from Andropov plus Suslov as well to do these. Those actions were to smash the troublemakers in a clandestine manner. August 1980: Guatemala City was a war zone. There was fighting all over the city through August with urban guerrillas fighting the government alongside a wave of protests against the regime that took place while criminal gangs ran riot. The hated National Police joined with the army in battling the threats to the rule of Ríos Montt as well as law and order. A lot of the trouble was caused by deniable actions undertaken by agent provocateurs sent not just by the rebels in the EGP but also military intelligence as well. It was a complicated situation and a brutal series of fighting in the city and through its outskirts including the industrial Villa Nueva urban area to the south. Guatemalans had fled the city yet others had come into the national capital too when escaping violence in rural areas. Too many people were in a small area. As control was lost, the government overreacted and alliances were formed along those taking the forefront of their bullets. Bullets soon became heavier weapons though. In outlying regions of the city, long neglected by the government and effective slums, there was the use of artillery and aircraft-dropped bombs to smash apart dug-in rebel enclaves carved out. Casualties, especially among the innocent caught in the cross-fire, were horrendous. The EGP took action in response when the government went that far by using special strike teams to hit the Presidential Palace and the international airport in more propaganda attacks. The seat of government went up in flames while the airport was bracketed with mortar and rocket attacks. Attention from afar was already on Guatemala City with foreign journalists present and also often gunfire near to the various embassies. Those only increased that concern. With the diplomatic representations, most cut back staff numbers to leave only key people. There were deaths among the journalists, those who didn’t get the unsaid message that the whole city was falling apart and that this was the end of the regime. Other foreigners were caught up in the violence away from the city. Out in the countryside, Ríos Montt implemented the start of a genocide against his opponents which saw both the unintentional and intentional (it depended upon the circumstances) killings of those in the wrong place at the wrong time: these were American, Canadian and Spanish citizens on aid & religious missions. The president had his enemies and those enemies were to be eliminated. There were massacres, forced starvation, torture and war rape. Guatemala under previous leaders had long been successful with their forced disappearances and ruling by a reign of terror that way, but Ríos Montt decided that that wasn’t bringing about the desired results. The army was instructed to kill and kill again. Parts of the army went about this with much gusto and enjoyed themselves killing the helpless and especially the Mayan minority. Others refused to do so either overtly or lied to the president when he demanded news on how many were being killed. The military was splitting down the middle and actively looking to get themselves out of this situation with what many regarded as a genocidal, religious maniac in charge. There had been rumblings among senior officers before about deposing Ríos Montt with many of those men being ‘killed by rebels’ or ‘fleeing abroad’ but this second time around the numbers were widespread and many mid-ranking officers joined them. They were all looking for someone else to lead them, be it one of their number or someone from the civilian opposition. The communist rebels in the EGP were out of the question in regards to giving into them but anyone else would do. Anyone else but Ríos Montt. September 1980: Between a quarter and a third of Poland’s workers were on strike. The number grew daily and those refusing to work were active in protest movements nationwide. The protests hadn’t seen violence come with them though there had been some rather close calls with that. Rumours swirled among the people that there were efforts being undertaken by the government to incite trouble so that they could have an excuse to unleash the riot police, soldiers would probably follow them including ones from Poland’s eastern neighbour. More rumours among Poles striking and those watching them in support said that there were also underhand moves being made to disrupt the organisation behind the strikes too. Accidents, suicides and disappearances were taking place among key people. There were also smears with wild allegations spread about important figures among the leaders of the strikes nationwide. These rumours were spread by word of mouth and were inflated as they went though there were also other stories going around as well saying that this was all lies. The falsehoods were being spread by the government, people said, even ‘the Russians’. The fate of some people where they crashed their cars, were electrocuted in the bath or decided to visit distant relatives never to be seen again were also the work of those trying to break the will of the strike. Keep strong, keep firm and keep united. This message was spread by those of influence, a number which slowly diminished and led to the rise of voices from others… those who were calling for restraint and a possible compromise with the government. The KGB was involved fully in the Polish strikes. They had Poles helping them though most of those were useful idiots being manipulated into helping them without fully understanding what was going on in regards to the big picture. Other Poles caught on, well-aware of what the Soviets would do, though they struggled to get their message out to their fellow Poles. The KGB then doubled down: they spread more rumours, some even claiming interference in Polish affairs by themselves yet also ‘Germans’ (East Germans) and the Polish government. Moreover, the KGB started targeting those who were trying to expose them with efforts made to discredit them through framing them for murders or planting evidence that pointed to them working to bring down the strikes. Trust went out of the window from Poles of many of their fellow countrymen. Still, there were some who could see what was going on. When Lech Walesa had his fatal accident, there was the recognition that the Soviets were showing no restraint here and weren’t going to stop even when exposed. A trickle of Poles managed to leave the country and headed for the West. They brought with them news of what was going on in Poland and hoped that by telling their stories, it would stop. The West already knew. KGB killings, lies and disinformation might have fooled many ordinary Poles but it didn’t get past the majority of the professional intelligence agencies in Western Europe and North America. The Soviets played a very clever game with Poland yet left too many fingerprints on their actions. There was a lot of haste from the KGB. The CIA, MI-6, the DGSE and Mossad all had connections within Poland, even small ones, and Soviet manipulation was spotted, especially when these agencies talked with each other as they exchanged information. The news was shared with political masters. President Ford made a strong statement on Poland in mid-September where he praised the efforts of ‘brave Polish workers’ who used peaceful protests against the regime before he turned to criticise the ‘Soviet interference’ there. He warned (in more diplomatic language than his criticism of the KGB) the Soviet Union that the United States wouldn’t stand idly by if what had been done to Afghanistan and Iran was done to Poland. Gromyko was at the United Nations building in New York the next day where he accused the United States of fermenting international tension plus also interference from Washington into internal Polish affairs. Allegations of Soviet interference were called lies: the ‘worse kind of base fabrications’ coming from a ‘confused and tired president’. The Soviet foreign minister then went on the attack with whataboutism when it came to American involvement in Guatemala too. Gromyko was at the UN because there had been an American-sponsored motion there to try to bring aid to Afghan refugees in Pakistan that the Soviets were trying to kill with diplomacy. They had a veto on any Security Council resolution if it came to that but the intention was to stop the process early by using behind-the-scenes diplomatic arm-twisting first. Any UN effort to assist those who had fled into Pakistan would draw more attention to Afghanistan than Moscow wanted. There were already other avenues being explored with Pakistan to convince them to bend to the will of the Soviet Union when the United States had shown no desire to protect them yet this UN attempt by the Americans threatened that. If the Pakistanis were emboldened by the UN paying attention, then that could unravel the covert diplomacy being used against Islamabad. Gromyko did what he came to New York to do. He and his staff managed to kill the move to send help to Afghan refugees. It cost the Soviet Union little in terms of secret deals with other member nations. What it did too was leave the United States looking isolated and their president embarrassed. He was on his way out and another one incoming – neither of which Moscow favoured – but for now, this was what was important. Poland was another matter and the Soviets were confident that should that be brought to the UN, it could be handled in a similar manner. September 1980: The first part of the plan went perfectly. Half a dozen captains and majors in the Guatemalan Army entered the sleeping quarters of Ríos Montt in the early hours after his bodyguards had been dismissed. They shot him when he was woken up, hitting with at least fifty bullets. He was dead, really dead: they made sure of that. Next, the corpse of now former president of Guatemala was whisked out of the building, into a truck which then raced to a nearby airstrip. The remains of Ríos Montt were thrown in there and the light aircraft took off. Twenty minutes into the flight, high above the jungle, Ríos Montt’s body was pushed out of the cargo door after being stripped naked. That door was pulled shut and the aircraft returned to the airstrip. The two-man flight crew, like the truck driver, had no idea who they had gotten rid of. They had done tasks like this before and weren’t told whose body it was. The captains and majors said nothing on the identity of the corpse. They were too busy afterwards meeting with the representatives of whom was supposed to replace Ríos Montt. It was there with the second part of the plan that it all went wrong. The Guatemalan Army had decided to turn leadership of the country over to the opposition. They had established contacts with a recently-formed coalition representing democrats, business, the unions and the Catholic Church. A handshake deal had been done with proper negotiations to follow before Ríos Montt was deposed. However, things outside their control had occurred with more extreme violence in Guatemala City and further massacres in the countryside. Worse (from their point of view), Ríos Montt had betrayed them all with his actions where he was killing their own and had humiliated the Guatemalan Army: the pullouts from El Salvador and Honduras had been a blow to their pride after Guatemala had recently become a regional power only to suddenly give that up. There was border spillover as well into those countries plus Mexico too (which Ríos Montt couldn’t have cared less about)… with that latter country enraged and possibly looking likely to start a war with Guatemala if it continued. The military officers were nervous of their civilian contacts talking among themselves where they could be overheard by military intelligence spies. They acted with haste and hoped for the best. That was a mistake. The opposition group hadn’t been fully vetted, those who would have at once seen the glaring trap which the plotters were about to fall into weren’t in on the plot for fear that they would tell Ríos Montt. There had been several among the opposition representatives who weren’t only allied to the communist guerrillas in the EGP but their Cuban backers too. The army plotters handed over their country to their foremost enemy after they had been duped like the fools they were by those who couldn’t believe their luck. As with so much of what had recently been going on in Guatemala, the exact sequence of events in late-September with the change of government was rather confusing to most people. Only a very few people knew everything, many knew some truth & some lies, while many more knew nothing at all. The fighting stopped though. The Guatemalan Army stayed in their barracks and the National Police were confided to their stations too. A new government was announced and they were supposed to be there to represent all people in Guatemala. Peace and stability would come. There would be no recriminations for all that had happened before. The people would be fed, educated, given medical attention if needed and gain housing as well. There would be freedom from oppression and freedom to have their voice heard. Guatemala was now a utopia… and those who knew what a utopia was, knew that it never was that because it couldn’t exist. Guatemala had fallen to the communists after a serious error of judgement and without the final, bloody showdown that might have been expected. It would take most Guatemalans some time to realise that and it wasn’t something that could be changed afterwards. The second domino in Central America had tumbled over. Others would follow in the coming years. October 1980: Another complicated clandestine plan was undertaken by other state actors a few weeks later. The exiled former president of Nicaragua, Anastasio Somoza DeBayle, was kidnapped whilst fleeing from the United States with his destination being Paraguay. Miami was unfriendly to him and he had faced an attempt at assassination there. There were legal troubles threatening with lawyers trying to bleed him dry to fight them after the White House had given Somoza the (ice) cold shoulder when it came to protecting him as a former head of state. Somoza wasn’t being told the complete truth on the dangers he faced yet there was enough of a concern to his life and liberty that was apparent even with the manipulation used to get him to run from American soil. From Paraguay, the dictator Stroessner there – a long-term ally – offered Somoza safety and comfort. Asunción wasn’t Miami, but it was better than a shallow grave or a prison cell. Like he had fled from Managua, Somoza left Miami in the middle of the night and boarded an aircraft which was laden with stolen treasures. That took him across to The Bahamas where he was to meet a bigger aircraft wearing the colours of the Paraguayan Air Force complete with a military crew and protection. The connection wasn’t made though. Somoza’s aircraft landed on the wrong little island. Armed men in balaclavas and with professional speed took over the one which Somoza was on. Him (and his treasures too) were bundled onto another aircraft. That one headed directly south, destination Havana. Castro was waiting for Somoza. He intended to let him know personally that his revenge would be a dish best served cold. Somoza had tried to kill him and Castro would make sure the same was done to Somoza, though not at Cuban hands. The dictator who had fled for his life from Nicaragua would return there and face revolutionary justice. Castro was looking forward to it, he still carried the physical and mental scars of the bullets from Somoza’s failed assassins. When that plane landed in Cuba though, there was a problem. Somoza was dead. Three years beforehand, Somoza had had a heart attack. He was an ill man and was taking medication. His kidnappers – Cuban DGI agents backed up by a detachment of commandos – were briefed on his condition and were told to be gentle (as gentle as could be anyway) when kidnapping him. They were as well. One of the spooks made the mistake of not confiscating Somoza’s pills he was carrying on his person as his personal doctor had been left behind in Miami: room was tight on that first aircraft, especially with the suitcases full of cash and gems. Among Somoza’s pills for his heart condition there were others that would only do harm. Somoza had acquired some cyanide as he feared being kidnapped. He had been subsequently kidnapped and believed he was going straight to Nicaragua rather than being aware of the ‘surprise!’ Castro wanted to give him. Somoza took that cyanide on the way to Cuba. He had no intention of given those waiting for him the satisfaction of killing him themselves. Castro was furious and relieved the whole mission team (spooks and commandos) of their duties. Several key DGI people lost their jobs as well, all which eventually preceded a shakeup of the DGI long coming with Somoza’s death only being the spark to see that erupt. As to the dead man, his body was flown to Nicaragua. The Ortegas and Borge were sent Castro’s apologies. They wouldn’t now be able to have their show trial. Yes, they were busy building the new Nicaragua, but would have liked to have given Somoza their revolutionary justice. As to Somoza’s stolen treasures, they were lost in transit: some people in Cuba had good fortune regardless of the misfortunes which befell others. October 1980: The race to the White House was in its final stages for the candidates left to replace Ford as president. There was election campaigning every day with public events, fundraising dinners and behind the scenes politicking. Kennedy and Reagan were dead tired and so were their campaign staffs plus the army of surrogate speakers they had working for their bid to be elected early next month. Everything was thrown at the race by both candidates to win more votes and that included many dirty tricks which were always denied in public and if admitted to in private, blamed on overeager junior staffers. Dirty tricks were a feature of the campaign with neither Kennedy caring much for Reagan nor Reagan having much regard for Kennedy either. It was personal, even more than political. They let their staffers spread lies in all sort of imaginative ways to influence the voters directly or indirectly. Money kept coming in as well. Presidential races were all about the cash flow. More was needed all of the time. Advertising needed to be bought, sometimes favours too. Democracy in action this was. The campaign saw televised debates between the presidential candidates, a trio of those events, as well as a separate one between their prospective vice presidents too. The first presidential debate was in September with the following two (plus the one for the vice presidency) being in October. It would come out a couple of years later that political operatives affiliated to the Reagan campaign managed to gain access to confidential information on Kennedy’s talking points before the second debate. The media would afterwards generally agree that Reagan won that debate after losing the first: he did seem rather quick off the mark with his counters to Kennedy’s points in the opinion of many. During the third debate, viewers at the time who weren’t armed with foreknowledge of what happened were treated to Reagan seeming to tie himself in knots when countering Kennedy and the senator informing the former governor that wasn’t what he had said. It was all very strange and was revealed in following years to have been a case of Reagan’s campaign getting false information ahead of the third debate and their candidate being flummoxed somewhat when Kennedy didn’t stay ‘on script’. The vice presidential debates between John Glenn and Howard Baker – running alongside Kennedy and Reagan respectively – were less interesting for the viewers and the history books too. That issue aside, the debates focused on matters such as domestic policy, the economy and foreign affairs. Both Kennedy and Reagan were experienced politicians who knew how to look presidential and aimed to present that when at each stage. They traded barbs, yes, but there was also quite a bit of serious politics which went on where each set out their vision for the four or eight years they could be in office. Change was the theme of both men and neither was tied to the sitting president nor to any administration before them. They each promised to do what was the right thing for the American people and the country as a whole. There were big promises there that sounded great yet were really quite meaningless overall. When talking foreign policy, each candidate held some things back that they had already decided that they would do once in office yet weren’t ready to talk about that before they were elected. Both stated that they would stand up to Soviet aggression abroad, in the Middle East especially, and the two men also spoke about the situation in Central America as well. Reagan tried to push Kennedy into speaking openly of his opposition to nuclear weapons, especially the Ford Administration’s introduction of new nuclear missiles into Western Europe: this had been done throughout the campaign as it was an area identified as something which wouldn’t go over well with the voters if pushed in the right manner. He was unable to get Kennedy to go there though. More success was had by Kennedy in linking Reagan to ideas called extremist when combatting the spread of international communism, trying to make Reagan look like he wanted a return to the way the Cold War was fought in the Fifties. Still, Kennedy took heat on the issue of the Panama Canal though and the allegations about his desire to see that returned to Panama. When the last debate was done, and the election finally soon to come, the polls were all over the place. It was neck-and-neck in one poll, another had Kennedy out ahead while another would say that Reagan was going to win a landslide. There were a lot of undecided voters. The campaign rolled onwards towards November 4th. Who would win? Panama was mentioned late in the campaign because Torrijos came to the United States late in October. The Maximum Leader of the Panamanian Revolution – Torrijos was never de jure president though he was the de facto ruler of his country – went to the UN and also Washington too. This wasn’t an official state visit though there were those in the United States in position of influence with whom he met. The Reagan camp alleged that he met with Kennedy while in the country; Kennedy’s spokesman denied that at the time and Kennedy did himself during the debate where Reagan brought it up. Torrijos was only in the United States for one reason and one reason alone: the Panama Canal. Panama was willing to negotiate but wanted what Torrijos claimed was rightfully its. No one was willing to give it to Panama, not while Torrijos held the overt power that he did. He had been told this before yet this time he listened. Upon leaving the country, his mind was made up that there was a better way to get control over the little strip of his nation held by Americans in colonial fashion than demanding it again and again as loud as possible. He would make changes – cosmetic ones but still changes – and negotiate with the Americans that way. Torrijos expected the next president (he favoured Kennedy over Reagan on this) to be fair and reasonable as long as he made the effort to give the Americans what they wanted with being able to pretend to see Panama as a democracy. November 1980: Ted Kennedy won on November 4th. He beat Reagan in the general election and would be the next President of the United States to replace Ford. Once the final votes were in, there would be a transitionary period in the American government. President-elect Kennedy would have to wait to formally enter the White House and take up the reins of government. During that time, some things were going to happen abroad by those taking advantage of this situation where America wasn’t helpless and would still defend her direct interests, yet not necessarily willing and able to do what it normally might do elsewhere with regards to other interests. These were interesting times indeed. November 1980: Ustinov had ordered an emergency test of the Soviet Union’s conventional warfighting capabilities back in September with a no-notice mobilisation drill sent to the command staffs of the Baltic, Belorussian, Carpathian and Kiev Military Districts (those on the western borders) as well as a drill for Groups of Forces spread across Eastern Europe as well. The results had been rather disappointing. Even after the debacle which was the for-real mobilisation late last year in the Trans-Caucasus and Turkestan Military Districts – where commanders had been fired and there had been major staff replacements there – those elsewhere in the Soviet military hadn’t gotten the message that there were to be no more lies and they needed to get their house in order. Ustinov had done this in reaction to the ongoing events in Poland and believed that the results wouldn’t be that bad; he had even resisted the urge to ‘cheat’ by giving some forewarning of what was coming so he could really see afterwards where the problems were. Those problems were everywhere. If the alert had been for real, if NATO had attacked and sent West German panzers along with American fighter-bombers eastwards… That didn’t bare thinking about. He hadn’t been happy. Neither had been his Politburo comrades. The falsified readiness reports, the no-shows with staff officers and the lies told for so long about practised mobilisations had all seen those found guilty in subsequent court martials punished harshly. The Politburo had wanted this done because at that time there was the need to see if it was possible to go into Poland with Soviet troops and correct the issues there with a country on strike. Ustinov hadn’t been eager to see that happen and neither had Andropov either who didn’t think it would work. Others had believed that it was best to see if it had been possible and to also tighten the screws on the Polish government as well by letting them know that the Soviet Union was serious. Ustinov had previously been to Poland himself, to ‘inspect’ Soviet troops there, and the news of the mobilisation was passed onto the Poles… though not its failures, naturally. Still, even with that and all that the KGB was doing inside Poland to eliminate those behind the troubles in creative manners, the situation there hadn’t been resolved. Warsaw’s current politicians couldn’t fix the problem. A different solution was tried in the end, once the Americans had had their sham election, one which didn’t involve compromising with the demands from counterrevolutionaries nor using Soviet troops to impose Moscow’s will. Poles would deal harshly with Poles instead. A few days after the US presidential election it began in earnest. Poland saw a change of government late on the Friday night with Geirek and his own politburo detained by Polish soldiers following KGB guidance. The disgraced Stanisław Kociołek made a return, supported by the guns of troops directly under the command of generals Jaruzelski and Siwicki. Kociołek was infamous in Poland for how he had dealt with striking workers years beforehand and the only viable Pole to do what needed to be done as far as Moscow was concerned; the two generals were political soldiers who had ambitions above their station but would following guidance from the Soviet Union. The bloodless coup d’état was followed by a weekend of consolidating power by the new regime using the weekend as cover when those subject to arrest were at home and the strikers weren’t involved in their at-work sit-in. Resistance to the change in government was near non-existent, especially since very few people knew what was going on. Then came the Monday morning when the workers across Poland on strike – close to forty per cent of them by now – showed up to their places of work to continue their protests. ZOMO riot police, ORMO communist party militia and also Polish Armed Forces soldiers in the background moved against them preceded by Polish intelligence officers. Examples were made. Trouble was sought. There were too many strikers and not enough armed men to take them on, plus likely other civilians who would probably get involved. The attacks by the state on their own people were targeted. Factories around Warsaw, the shipyards on the Baltic coast and the coal mines in Silesia were where the peaceful protests were made no longer peaceful. It was a day of bloody violence. Cordons of soldiers stayed back to surround areas where they knew nothing of which was going on inside as hyped-up militia and professional head-crackers went to work. The 10th of November was a bloody day indeed. So was the next day too, elsewhere in the country at other selected sites. It was then that the newspapers and state television & radio informed the country of the new leader of their nation. Promises were made by Kociołek to the Polish people – vague ones though – of a new way of doing things with the Polish state which included wage increases and the lowering of prices on many necessities. Further job opportunities were announced to help build a ‘new Poland’ and Kociołek asked his people to support and aid him in that. There was no mention made of the crackdown taking place that was coming with a great loss of life. Word-of-mouth would let the people know about that, including lies spread about what had happened to induce fear but also obedience in the Polish people. As can be expected, there were reactions outside Poland. Ford condemned the self-coup and denounced the violence with American intelligence picked up the details of (though not exactly what occurred as the KGB had been busy muddling the waters) almost straight away. Kennedy had something to say too, as did other American politicians. Across Western Europe, leaders were outraged at what they were hearing. Attention was focused upon Warsaw though and Kociołek. Condemnation of Moscow, which was behind this, came second as the new Polish leader was the face of it all and already a known quantity as someone with a history like he had. However, from Rome, Pope John Paul II didn’t follow the lead set by those politicians. No, instead he laid the blame for the events in his native land with the Soviet leadership. He made quite a big deal out of it as well with no intention of talking about it once and then moving on. Just as he wanted them to be, his words were heard in Moscow. December 1980: Castro took the opportunity to act as well during the lame-duck period of the last months of Ford’s rule. The belief in him was that actions such as the ones he took wouldn’t be punished by the incoming Kennedy Administration as long as they took place before January 20th. It was another risk in a long line of recent risks. Castro kept getting away with it and was determined to keep pushing the norteamericanos as far as possible. He told his brother and the few others he chose to explain himself too – plus Moscow’s frequent enquires – that he was only maintaining Cuba’s security in doing this and not out to start World War Three. At home, Castro ordered a nationwide crackdown on all forms of dissent. This had been ongoing all year in various forms including those invasions of embassy grounds but also protests against his government’s policies. These had been dealt with using a softly-softly approach while Castro was distracted by Nicaragua then Guatemala as well as still recovering for the wounds from the attempted assassination by Somoza. He had had enough though. There were those in the streets but also those in his government who he decided were against him… even if they didn’t fully realise that themselves. They would move against his rule in the end if he allowed them to escape his ire and the time was right to strike first, especially with his opponents off-guard thinking he was weak. The crackdown took place over the space of a week with care taken to get the ‘big fish’ first and then move down the chain. It wasn’t as if there was much opportunity for armed resistance nor the ability to escape from Cuba. Cuba was a police state too with the authorities knowing who and where those targeted for arrest could be found. Cuba’s jails were to be filled. Abroad, Castro sent troops to Guatemala. Assistance was required from the new regime there in bringing a final end to the power of the Guatemalan Army. That organisation’s wings had been clipped yet its craws were possibly soon to be drawn if the rumblings heard by spies in the pay of the EGP government were correct. An uneasy truce in that country, with the recent history of violence, couldn’t be maintained. The numbers sent weren’t that large but the important bit was to send them to the right places against the right people who had no ability to stop their arrival. There was only a little fighting in Guatemala when it came to that. The Guatemalan Army was actually weaker than thought since the end of the civil war and in no state to resist the mass arrest of officers taking place by junior men supported by Cubans. The detainees weren’t locked up by their own countrymen but instead the Guatemalans took the same approach as the Nicaraguans had done in shooting them en mass. This time Castro didn’t complain for he had seen how well that was working out for Ortega in helping build a new army when starting from scratch. Guatemala was drawn fully now in the Cuban sphere in Latin America alongside Nicaragua as well as Grenada too. Across there on that little island, Castro sent more soldiers. These weren’t combat troops but rather engineers and construction soldiers. The progress on the big airport being built was accelerated. Work would begin too on port facilities as well. There was still the façade of these being civilian works for the benefit of the people. In reality though, the airport and the harbours under construction were there for military usage. In Grenada, just like elsewhere, the Americans hadn’t lifted a finger to stop Castro before so he carried on as he continued enhancing Cuba’s security in this manner. [End of Part I]
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 21, 2018 23:32:28 GMT
[Part II] Chapter Four – A New HopeJanuary 1981: January was a busy time in Washington with a new Congress to be sworn in, presidential appointments to be approved and the inauguration too. Back in November when Kennedy had beaten Reagan, there had been federal (as well as state and local) elections that day too. Representatives and senators were sworn in days into 1981 with Congress being back in session after the Christmas and New Year’s break. There had been changes in the composition of both the House and the Senate due to the elections with previous members having retired or lost elections. The Democrats remained in control of each, though with things far tighter than previously in the Senate: several Democratic senators had already vacated their seats – Kennedy and Glenn – after being elected to the presidency & vice presidency with later special elections needing to take place in Massachusetts and Ohio. Furthermore, others were expected to join them in taking various government roles. Before then though, there was a lot to do. Between his election and the upcoming inauguration, there had been several planned newspaper stories about Kennedy spiked by editors and boards. This was done for the good of the country. The people didn’t need to know everything, it was decided, and the journalists who uncovered certain things weren’t allowed to see their work printed and released to the public. One newspaper sat on a story that Kennedy and his wife had unofficially separated back in ’79 and were only maintaining a façade of a marriage which they intended to do once in the White House as well. Another story spiked was that alleging – though with some proof to it – that during the early part of the campaign, Kennedy had been conducting an extramarital affair with a campaign volunteer and boozing heavily when he wasn’t alone with her before he cut both out (for the time being anyway). None of this came out and the public was left in the dark. Journalists weren’t the only ones who knew these things – and others – about the personal life of the president-elect: several of those in Congress did as well. Everyone shut up, everyone was either focused on the Kennedy magic or waiting until they felt the time was right to use what they knew to their own advantage. Washington: what more needs to be said? Those whom Kennedy wanted to serve in his Cabinet but also in so many more roles across the government needed to be approved by the Senate. Hearings got underway. There had been pre-vetting and cases of potential appointees already dropping out before January. A lot of what was done now was for show. There were games being played to get concessions on other matters by some while others just wanted to delay and weaken Kennedy. Democrats joined Republicans in doing this too: Kennedy had opponents within his own party, many with strong personal animosity towards him. It was said that if Baker – following his vice presidential bid alongside Reagan – had remained in Washington late last year instead of being on the road campaigning, the Senate minority leader might have been better able to stop Kennedy getting more appointments through by whipping his Republican senators in-line to join with hostile Democrats. Alas, that didn’t happen. The Republicans weren’t organised enough and Democratic opponents of the president-elect not prepared to go all the way on many issues: sniping was done but final objections were missing in the majority of cases. Democratic senators were under pressure to follow the message of hope, a new hope, which came with a president from their party who was committed to many of their own causes even when there were issues with him on other matters. Treasury Secretary Birch Bayh, Secretary of State Walter Mondale and even the contentious Edmund Muskie for Secretary of Defence eventually got approval. With the latter, his appointment was opposed more strongly than any other, especially by the Republicans. Plenty of Democrats didn’t want him anywhere near the Pentagon either; the presence of Glenn as vice president tempered a lot of that though as he was seen as a counter to Muskie. Domestic affairs were meant to be the focus of Kennedy’s presidency anyway with assurances made that the economy would be fixed, getting the Equal Rights & DC Voting Amendments passed and universal free healthcare into law were seen as the priorities for the Kennedy Administration. Foreign affairs were important, very important all could agree, but the focus was to be on those issues for the president. The day before the inauguration, Secret Service agents and DC Police arrested a young man in the city. His name was John Hinckley Jnr. He was carrying a gun loaded with explosive-tipped bullets. He had a fascination with a certain film and an actress who stared in that. He had previously been detained – without a weapon – back in Michigan last summer when Ford had been speaking in his home state. Later, Hinckley would confess that he was only scouting for a later attempt to kill the president. He wanted to do so to impress that actress and win her over in that manner: if it had been Reagan instead of Kennedy, it wouldn’t have mattered to him because everything was about that actress. He was locked up and would be given the treatment needed. That troubled chap was one of several threats – though the most serious – identified by the Secret Service when it came to protecting Kennedy. He was a divisive man with fierce opponents in public yet determined others not so visible. Protecting him was going to be a lot of hard work. Everyone remembered his brothers Jack & Robert and what happened to them… there was also the silly Curse of Tippecanoe to consider as well when it came to the president-elect. On January 20th, Kennedy was no longer president-elect. The inauguration went off without a hitch. Ted Kennedy became the thirty-ninth President of the United States. The handover of power was completed without drama. Kennedy spoke to the nation as their president for the first time. He had a lot to say in a long speech which did drag on a bit. His themes of liberalism appealed to many and exasperated others, even disgusted some. The domestic-focused speech eventually moved at the end to foreign affairs and national security. Under the Kennedy Administration there would be no more secret, dirty wars. Nations who wanted American support and aid would be expected to respect the human rights of their citizens or face a cut in that backing. The United States only wanted peaceful relations with others. Bullies would be opposed though and aggression met when it rose. Kennedy then spoke of nuclear weapons: there would be a nuclear freeze on the development and deployment of new weapons as was set by the SALT II treaty signed by Ford. In addition, Kennedy would engage with the Soviet Union on further treaties to deal with nuclear weapons. To show his seriousness on this issue, the new president announced that he would be speaking to his NATO allies about ‘postponing’ the deployment authorised by his predecessor of GLCM cruise missiles to Western Europe: this is how they found out about this, being told in this manner. President Kennedy would start as he would go on, upsetting allies by doing things his way. The press would later call it the ‘Sinatra Doctrine’ (linking back to his history with his deceased eldest brother and that singer); others would call it ‘f***ing idiocy’. February 1981: Andropov had been appointed to head the Funeral Committee when Brezhnev died back in 1977 on the recommendation of the Soviet Communist Party’s second secretary Mikhail Suslov with the effective ideological chief therefore giving the then head of the KGB the nod to replace Brezhnev. The symbolism of that role at such a time had been important and showed the faith in Andropov from Suslov to afterwards become general secretary. Behind the scenes, the two of them had come to an arrangement with Andropov agreeing to collective leadership within the Politburo yet with him becoming the first among equals. Suslov had been there through the reign of Stalin, the aftermath of the death of that dictator, Khrushchev’s rule and the rise of Brezhnev. He had no wish to see a return to what he regarded as the mistakes of the past. The private agreement between the two men, with Andropov being somewhat of a protégé of Suslov, also covered the matter of Andropov leaving the KGB behind him as he resigned his position as chairman when he took up that role upon being in-charge of that funeral and then moving into the general secretary position. Andropov hadn’t made the direct transfer from the Lubyanka to the Kremlin… not officially anyway as for three weeks he had been in between the two. The replacement for Andropov had been Chebrikov and Andropov was meant to have no more influence there at the KGB. However, Chebrikov had his own arrangements with Andropov afterwards, ones kept from Suslov and the others, with his own support base built within the Politburo with Andropov’s help; the latter had wanted something in exchange and that was Chebrikov’s support. The whole of the Politburo was full of these secret agreements and alliances between members, those who’d been around a long time such as Gromyko and Ustinov had theirs too. Some of the alliances had been broken though with first Kosygin and then Kirilenko falling from power when those who’d previously supported them had withdrawn that. Andropov and Chebrikov were still allied in secret though. Meeting alone in mid-February before an official state visit to Bulgaria by Andropov, the general secretary and the KGB chairman discussed several matters that the two of them had been in routine contact on. These concerned foreign affairs and were what Andropov wanted Chebrikov to look for when it came for ‘opportunities’ which might arise when it came to using the KGB to aid the security of that state. As had been done before, Chebrikov discussed such opportunities with Andropov: significant ones in the past had been the idea of killing Khomeini and also making sure that Castro directed his attention correctly in Central America. Pakistan was up for the discussion in this latest meeting first. Chebrikov spoke of how the support for the rebels in Afghanistan had now dried up from inside Pakistan’s ISI – their state within a state which was their military intelligence – and the affect that was having in Pakistan with noses put out of joint there. Andropov poured cold water on one idea of Chebrikov’s when it came to dealing further with Pakistan though gave his backing to another. It was the same when it came to an opportunity spotted in Central America with El Salvador on the cusp of civil war: Andropov nodded at one suggestion and shook his head at another. When the Politburo would discuss such matters, the understanding between Andropov and Chebrikov on them beforehand would affect how they were presented there. Greece was then addressed. There was an upcoming election in that country later in the year with the opposition looking in a strong position. Some of its policy platforms, especially when it came to Greece’s role in Europe and NATO, would suit Soviet interests. Andropov nodded his head of his support for the encouragement by the KGB in making sure that the Greek opposition should not just win that election but also keep its promises too on what would be done once in power. Chebrikov said it would be difficult though not impossible; Andropov asked him to present the matter in more optimistic terms to the Politburo when it was brought to them. The two men moved away from opportunities spotted by the KGB. They spoke of Ustinov’s continued military build-up of Soviet arms and KGB support in acquiring (stealing) Western military technology. Soviet oil export revenues were another matter up for discussion with the latest private concerns between them that the money tap could be turned off if other exporters abroad – old and new – carried on with what they were doing. Chebrikov would bring ideas on that second matter the next time the two of them met though Andropov said that others on the Politburo were already thinking of exploring other angles when it came to overt diplomacy rather than covert actions. The general secretary would rather have both available to him and the KGB chairman – who longed to one day have Andropov’s position – agreed that that was the best idea. War with the West was to be avoided, they each were in unison about, but everything else was on the table. Finally, the two of them talked about the Pope. How many divisions did the Bishop of Rome have? Such was the rhetorical question attributed in legend to Stalin. None was the answer. Still, the man was a thorn in their side. Since the crackdown in Poland, one done by Poles to Poles and which seemed to have had the desired effect (for now anyway), he had continued to attack the Soviet Union indirectly as being behind it. The foolish man wouldn’t let it go. Chebrikov asked whether he should look at opportunities on that too. It was unsaid what he meant but it didn’t need to be. The Persian Trotsky who had been Khomeini, another troublesome religious man, had been an opportunity before his assassination for which others had been framed. Andropov said that Chebrikov should start to consider a measure to take against the attacks from the Pope. He was off to Bulgaria to meet with a regime he was friendly with. Andropov would think more about his latest opponent on the way there and when in Bulgaria. Maybe he would talk with someone he could trust in Bulgaria about it when he was in Sofia? March 1981: Republican prisoners in jails across Northern Ireland, and also the British mainland too, had been engaged in various protests for the past several years. Those serving sentences after being convicted of IRA and INLA terrorist activities had certain demands. They wanted ‘Special Category’ status, to be treated effectively as prisoners of war. The Labour governments of first Harold Wilson and then Jim Callaghan followed by Margaret Thatcher’s Conservatives had been dealing with this matter with successes and failures met. There had been so-called dirty protests – rather unpleasant – by male and female prisoners and then a hunger strike last year. Concessions had been made though there was bad feeling and a belief of dishonesty. Politics came into it as well, those spread beyond the jails where prisoners were held. Things had been coming to a head for a while now. At the beginning of March, the 1981 Hunger Strike begun at the Maze prison. It was just the one prisoner at first who refused food, a convicted IRA terrorist named Bobby Sands. Two weeks later, another IRA prisoner joined the hunger strike. This was deliberate with the timing chosen specially to maximise effect of dragging things out and keeping the news fresh. After another week, two more prisoners joined the first two: one each from the IRA and the smaller INLA (the two organisations were fierce rivals). Further prisoners from both groups were due to join them over the following months. There was to be a political campaign while this was going on to draw attention to the hunger strike across both sides of the dividing line on the island of Ireland, the British mainland and the wider world too. Initially, that attention was slow in coming. Then there came the death of an MP in Northern Ireland. A by-election would have to be held for his seat in Parliament and in the tense sectarian political environment, the attention that those involved in the hunger strike – at the forefront and behind the scenes – wanted came. After intimidation and behind-the-scenes deals, Sands would stand for the empty seat on a unity ticket for all nationalist and republican causes. He was in jail for terrorism but was legally able to take part in the campaign. The election would take place at the beginning of April. Ted Kennedy had an opinion on the situation in Northern Ireland. He’d expressed his beliefs before: he’d called Ulster ‘Britain’s Vietnam’, demanded a United Ireland and said that Unionists in Northern Ireland – those from the majority Protestant community – should go back to Britain. There’d been back-peddling on Kennedy’s part with some of these statements afterwards though his core beliefs on the situation remained even if the rhetoric was toned down. There were those who were in the right in Northern Ireland, the new president believed, and those in the wrong. All violence was regrettable yet some was explainable when done for the right reasons. Now in the White House, Kennedy had the position to see his notion on how to resolve the issues there put into practice. He thought he knew best on how to solve the matter. There were many others in the United States, politicians and the public alike, who either shared his views or whom wouldn’t oppose them because Northern Ireland was an emotional subject across America like it was in Britain too. St. Patrick’s Day was on March 17th: two prisoners were engaged in the hunger strike at that point with the other two March participants soon to join them and Sands now standing for Parliament. Speaker of the House Tip O’Neil, someone who shared many of Kennedy’s views, held an event in Washington for St. Patrick’s Day where the president was the keynote speaker. Kennedy expressed angst and exasperation at the situation beyond the prisoners ‘forced’ to go on hunger strike to the everyday ‘injustices suffered’ by the Catholic people in Northern Ireland. He wanted things to change. He called for dialogue. He urged for a solution to come about. He said he wanted to involve the United States in this issue. O’Neil’s follow-up comments were rather more inflammatory than the president’s. Like Kennedy’s, what his key ally O’Neil had to say was heard across the Atlantic in Ulster, the Irish Republic and Britain. There were some that were happy with what he said and others who were absolutely furious. March 1981: Secretary of State Mondale was in Brussels when the comments by Kennedy and O’Neil were made back in Washington. There was a NATO foreign minsters summit which he was attending, one called after the president’s inauguration remarks about his new vision on nuclear weapons deployments. Mondale met with Lord Carrington pre-emptively with immediate effect and sought to clarify the president’s words; explaining what the house speaker had to say wasn’t Mondale’s purview. Britain’s Foreign Secretary listened patiently and there was no personal animosity in him towards Mondale, yet he expressed his government’s displeasure at what had been said. Northern Ireland was an internal matter for the United Kingdom. Britain was firm on that and there was no room for manoeuvre: convicted terrorists would be dealt with according to British law and their blackmail not given in to. Rhetorically, Carrington asked Mondale how the American government would feel if Thatcher spoke of opening dialogue with Puerto Rican domestic terrorists or talking publicly of federal oppression towards Native Americans. Carrington bit his tongue and didn’t add some more stronger, sharper remarks that had come from his prime minister and the cabinet back in Whitehall especially when his words on Ulster were transposed by London onto the issues of Puerto Rico or Native Americans. It wasn’t Mondale’s fault that his president had said what he had: Carrington already had made that clear to his government. The new president was talking rubbish but there was no point in making things even worse by being unnecessarily rude. Therefore, Carrington told Mondale that United States help on the issue of Ulster was welcome… that being if it was coordinated with London, naturally because Mondale’s country had influence, especially when it came to the supply of arms to terrorists in Ulster, but otherwise it was an internal matter. Put politely, the president was endangering trans-Atlantic relations with such behaviour and Britain wouldn’t stand for it. Other trans-Atlantic relations were what the Brussels meeting was all about. Foreign ministers from across the fifteen countries in the alliance had come to Belgium’s capital to gather after the statements made two months ago that had caused disagreement since then. The surprise announcement made in such a shocking fashion by Kennedy that he was cancelling Ford’s deployment of GLCM missiles had created uproar across NATO. Why was there no warning given let alone any consultation with allies? The initial deployment announcement made by Ford was a NATO decision, not a unilateral American one. Kennedy’s withdrawal from that commitment wasn’t welcomed by anyone else, even those who were unsure on the deployment to start with but had supported it for NATO unity. This was not on. Mondale explained the president’s thinking on the matter of not deploying all of those new weapons. Kennedy wanted a reset in relations with the Soviets following the end of détente last year. The nuclear freeze from the Kennedy Administration was done openly to convince the Soviet leadership that it was a serious effort being made to cool tensions back to what they had previously been. The president believed that GLCM missiles were unnecessarily offensive. He agreed that the Soviet deployment of SS-20 missiles – made before the NATO move – was offensive too, there should be no error in thinking that Kennedy was mistaken on that, but he believed that with no American deployment, the Soviets would pull their missiles out of Eastern Europe like he had withdrawn his from Western Europe. With such weapons then removed by both sides, talks would commence on lowering tensions even further. Kennedy had thought it best to make the first move and show Moscow the seriousness of his intent. Very politely, and in diplomatic terms, those who listened to Mondale asked him if his president was out of his mind with such thinking? This was a Soviet Union led by Andropov, a KGB strongman. They had invaded Afghanistan and Iran before supporting Cuban moves to bring down the US-friendly regimes in Nicaragua then Guatemala. The Soviets were engaging in a military build-up and attempting subversion all over the place: NATO partner countries had all sorts of evidence of this including the West Germans who were watching the KGB-backed Stasi funnel weapons to Red Army Faction terrorists. Easing tensions! The Soviets were increasing them! Mondale was told that the United States was giving into Soviet intimidation and bullying. They wouldn’t withdraw their SS-20 missiles either, missiles that were pointed at population centres in Western Europe with flight-times of only a few minutes. Even if all of that was to be put aside, the pretence made that all of that didn’t matter, why didn’t Kennedy wait to do what he had and have Mondale or his defence secretary Muskie, even Vice President Glenn, speak to them first? It wasn’t fourteen-to-one. Mondale wasn’t pushed around and ganged-up upon. The other NATO foreign ministers – the French included with President d’Estaing sending François-Poncet to Brussels because technical matters over command aside, France was a member of NATO – represented opinions of different governments who had their own separate outlooks on the matter. Some were more vocal than others. Yet, no one else apart from Mondale held the same view on Kennedy’s behaviour. MacGuigan from Canada and Belgium’s Nothomb were more willing to listen than some of the others. West Germany’s Genscher tried to play the peacemaker role. There was a feeling expressed among a few more that Mondale himself didn’t believe in his president’s course of action and while he couldn’t say that, it would be something that wouldn’t see him last the full four years in the position he had. Still, it was the same overall from all when it came down to it: the United States was wrong on this matter. The Soviets weren’t going to withdraw their missiles nor engage with Kennedy in his ideas of a new hope for better relations with them. Later, there would be private discussions among their heads of government on what to do in reaction to all of this. No one would talk of a break with the Americans because they were needed in NATO, they were NATO’s strongest member, but the other members would start to think about improving their own cooperation in the face of such a – temporary – unfriendly ally that was the thirty-ninth president should he carry on with his madness. April 1981: Events at the Vatican held the attention of many throughout April. Early in the month there were stories which ran in several Italian and Western European newspapers which concerned the unexpected demise of the last Pope, John Paul I, Bishop of Rome for only thirty-three days. There had been rumours for some time that there was more to his death than seemed and the wild allegations had never before seen such treatment given to them as was the case now. It was all very odd. Within those stories, there was the implication that he had been murdered by those wishing to cover up a financial scandal of quite the magnitude where a lot of money had been stolen by various interests. In addition, the Vatican’s own bank had been used to launder money by Mafia and other criminal enterprises. It then seemed to be the case that it was open season on attacking the Vatican with further allegations being made of not just Vatican ignorance of the plight of European Jews during the Holocaust but instead active participation in that by the means of theft of some of the riches of those being killed by the Nazis in the 1940s. This was all lies, so many would agree, and being spread by those with an aim to smear the Catholic Church. There was a lot of apparent evidence presented though and some of it seemed to have substance to it. Questions were asked and responses which came were said to be the Vatican wanting to hide something. That attacks initially came from those with a clear ulterior motive though they were followed up by some who were genuinely concerned about what they were hearing then unimpressed by the attitude of the Vatican in addressing their concerns. There had to be something being hidden because of the secrecy being shown! Everything happened very fast with the torrent of allegations. Vatican reactions were to dismiss the claims and deny them oxygen of publicity by refusing to go any further than that. Such an approach didn’t work when the drip-drip effect of more and more claims were made. The Vatican didn’t have a strong public relations team nor spokesmen used to dealing with anything like this. Their approach was sloppy and left them open to have more mud slung at them. Some friends now had questions to ask of the Vatican whereas before it had only been opponents. Then there was the Great Vatican Fire of April 24th. Significant parts of the Vatican’s buildings when up in flames that night. There was an initial fire inside a building housing many archives, which then inexplicably managed to spread elsewhere through the complex in the heart of Rome. The city’s fire service was fast on the scene and were quick to begin evacuating people. John Paul II was soon out of danger though he demanded to go back in and help rescue more people: he wouldn’t listen to those who said it was dangerous. The Sistine Chapel and St. Peter’s Basilica – world famous sites – were saved by the efforts of Rome’s firefighters though the Vatican Museums took a lot of damage to them. In addition, there was much fire damage done to the Apostolic Palace: the official residence of the Pope and his predecessors. John Paul II led from the front a rescue effort to save some of the missing who were believed to be in there and wouldn’t brook no argument on that. He went in with other volunteers, right into the fire and refused to listen to the firefighters demanding that the volunteers stay back. However, soon afterwards the Vatican’s Secretary of State, Cardinal Casaroli, led most of those inside out through a rear exit as he saved many lives. The body of John Paul II, along with several other would-be rescuers, was found the next morning. The Pope had been overcome by the smoke. He had died a hero and Italy would grieve his passing, so too would much of the Catholic world. John Paul II, born in Poland as Karol Józef Wojtyła back in 1920, had seen his reign last two and a half years. One of the biggest investigations in Italian legal history commenced afterwards though there were those ready straight away to subvert that in all sorts of manners to hide the truth of it all. May 1981: Bobby Sands died on May 5th. He’d been elected to Parliament less than a month beforehand though, naturally, didn’t take up his seat as he remained in jail on his hunger strike. It was there in the Maze Prison that he died: legal arguments would commence over whether his death certificate should read ‘starvation’ or ‘self-imposed starvation’. Other prisoners would later die too though it would be Sands who would be remembered for his was the first striker, the first to die and the one elected to Parliament. That act of becoming an MP while on hunger strike in jail had brought international attention beyond what had already came and saw the worldwide reactions to his death. Those reactions were unwanted by the British Government though welcomed by others, those being the ones who’d been pushing for recognition of ‘the cause’. Soviet diplomatic statements were joined from those across the Eastern Bloc – including Poland which was seeking to distract their people from their mourning over the demise of the Pope – in criticising what was deemed an ‘imperialist conflict’ in Northern Ireland. State sponsored events were organised to commemorate Sands’ death with a major effort made to play up the propaganda effect when there had recently come negative comments on deaths in Poland and other allegations of restrictions behind the Iron Curtain. From communist-led Iran, the street on which the British Embassy sat, where diplomats hadn’t long returned to after leaving during the revolution and the Soviet invasion, was renamed Bobby Sands Street with signs saying Winston Churchill Boulevard removed. Libya’s dictator was quite moved by what he regarded as a sacrifice and praised the ‘struggle for freedom’ in public though wanted to see more before he would consider starting to send arms to the IRA again. Within Australia, France, Norway, the Palestinian occupied territories and Portugal, there were local events in protest against Britain and in commemoration of Sands. In many parts of the United States, there was condemnation of Sands and the IRA rather than Britain. Not all Americans were duped by IRA propaganda nor wanted to fill the cash buckets send around bars to donate money to ‘the cause’. Many more Americans wouldn’t want to give financial nor moral support if they were aware of many of the links the IRA but also other Irish Republican terror groups had with regimes around the world that were enemies of the United States. Regardless of the sensible behaviour of many, there came the idiocy from others. Sands got his martyrdom from plenty of Americans. The President of the United States was included among those. As before, he ignored established diplomatic protocol and went on the attack with a public statement that was quite inflammatory. He just couldn’t stop himself it seemed… though there might have been something more to that than initially met the eye. In a private message back to London, the British Ambassador made note of troubles that Kennedy was having getting his keynote domestic legislation through Congress. Lawmakers were sceptical of the universal free healthcare bill being pushed by Kennedy surrogates through the House of Representatives and even with Speaker O’Neill on side, that was still being held up. The ambassador speculated that Sands’ death might be rather convenient for Kennedy as a foreign distraction at times of domestic problems. This was the first time that something previously only speculated had been treated with such seriousness as to go in an official diplomatic communique: other ambassadors from various countries in the coming months and years ahead would say the same thing when it came to Kennedy make a big deal of foreign affairs when he faced domestic trouble at home, including his later personal scandals. There were some in Whitehall who wanted to tell the American president where exactly to stick his outrageous comments upon Sands’ death, that being where the sun didn’t shine. Those were private remarks though, not ones that left Cabinet. Thatcher brought her top-level of government together in response as they had an emergency meeting. Some ideas mentioned before when the hunger strike started were looked at again. Mondale had either passed on Carrington’s warning from their Brussels meeting that Britain wouldn’t stand for this to see it ignored by his president or he hadn’t done so at all. Regardless, fair warning had been given and it had been disregarded. There were other hunger strikers and Britain wasn’t about to cave into their demands. All indications said that Kennedy really didn’t give a damn about diplomatic niceties and would carry on with his attacks against Britain each time one of them died too. The Cabinet decided to act. There was a lot of risk involved yet the belief was that it was worth it and the response was something that a lot of thought had been put into. As an ongoing courtesy going back many years, the CIA station chief in London was invited to the weekly meetings of the Joint Intelligence Committee, an official government body. The next meeting after Kennedy’s statement saw the meeting moved to a new location at the last minute. There were some urgent repairs needed at the building where it was held which included workmen showing up in hardhats and standing around smoking or eating bacon & egg sandwiches. Didn’t the station chief get the message over a change in venue? He was taken out for dinner that night as a form of apology with a nice meal brought for him by the head of MI-6. That committee chairman, Sir Antony Acland, an experience diplomat with the FCO, showed up to the dinner towards the end and carefully explained the displeasure in Whitehall at Kennedy’s behaviour. The next day saw an interruption in communications traffic passed on between Britain’s GCHQ and the NSA at Fort Meade either direct or through intermediate stations across the UK. There were technical difficulties and apologies were sent for the delay which last exactly twenty-four hours and not a second more. GCHQ’s director flew out to Maryland afterwards to personally apologise for those technical difficulties yet also to get his opposite number to understand that Anglo-American relations were being put at risk by the American president. If only someone could talk some sense into him…? There was a lot more that could have been done. Carrington could have tried again with Mondale. The ambassador in Washington could have requested an audience with Kennedy. Thatcher could have personally called the president. Further ties could have been properly cut in the intelligence field and creative problems could have popped up in the defence co-operation field. Cabinet had discussed these options though discounted any successes from them. The idea instead was to get other Americans to talk to Kennedy themselves and remind him of the value of relations with Britain in a field that mattered to the United States more than anything else: British contribution to American intelligence-gathering. Kennedy wasn’t a fan of the CIA – he had less of an issue with the NSA and the other alphabet soup of agencies in the intelligence field – but the belief was that this approach would work. Whitehall also understood the significance of Vice President Glenn in the US Government and were quite sure that the heads of the CIA and the NSA would go to him first as he was someone already seen on their side: Glenn carried more weight with Kennedy than anyone British did. Doing anything more could cause a major break in Anglo-American relations and that wasn’t what Thatcher nor Cabinet wanted. They just wanted to remind Kennedy that Britain had influence and couldn’t be treated in this manner. This gentle approach tied into other important matters at the time that Britain didn’t want to see put into jeopardy by doing anything stupid (stupid as being the idea from one of those in Cabinet to have the National Grid enforce technical difficulties on the supply of power to an American airbase: such a thing was something seen as being very unfriendly) to destroy relations with the United States. Kennedy was temporary after all. Four years at least, eight years at the outset. There were so many others across the Atlantic who were long-standing friends of Britain even with this Anglophobe in the White House. Guatemala was showing further hostility towards Belize and the latter nation in Central America relied on British support. If push came to shove, if the now-communist Guatemala decided to forcibly annex Belize, they would have to fight British troops on the ground there. Maybe Guatemala might make that mistake if there were visible signs of open hostility between London and Washington? Furthermore, Cabinet was still looking over the proposals from Defence Secretary John Nott (not long in his post at the MOD) to restructure the UK Armed Forces in times of real economic pressure. His white paper was due to be presented to Parliament next month. With the Soviets acting as they were in leading aggression elsewhere in the world but in Europe, yet still with an almighty strong military force of theirs sitting across the Iron Curtain, the white paper reflected that with a recognised need for Britain to remained committed to NATO defences yet also be able to play a (limited) role elsewhere in the world. Money was tight, oh-so-very tight. American co-operation was needed for these twin commitments to be made. There was a deal in the pipeline – going back several years – for Britain to have access to the family of cruise missiles which the Americans had developed not just for ground launch with GLCMs but naval and airborne systems too. Ford’s Pentagon under Rumsfeld had pushed cruise missile work and Britain had been involved in that. The cruise missiles were soon to be built and Britain would get its share of them on favourable terms thrashed out initially between Callaghan and Ford. Pushing Kennedy too far could see that all thrown out of the window. Britain had to be careful. Kennedy seemed sometimes to act without thinking – that new speculation on motives was only speculation at the moment: not officially recognised – and why twist the tiger’s tail when it can just be tapped? June 1981: The United Nations had substantial offices in Geneva and Vienna as well as in New York. Much work was done in the Swiss and Austrian cities away from the hustle and bustle of New York. It was at the UN complex in Austria where Gromyko and Mondale met in June. The Soviet foreign minister – often referred to in certain Western diplomatic circles as ‘Mr. Neyt’ – and Kennedy’s secretary of state had an informal, face-to-face meeting where mutual concerns & interests were covered. The UN provided the service of interpreters and facilities, for the goodwill of all. The meeting had taken some time to set up but eventually the two of them sat down together to talk on behalf of their governments. Mondale explained the view of his president when it came to improving relations between the United States and the Soviet Union following the collapse of them last year. The end of détente was not something that his president regarded as a good thing. The tension was destabilising and brought with it the risk of accidents and misunderstandings which could lead to loss of life. The Kennedy Administration wanted a reset in relations between Washington and Moscow. There was a new hope within the administration which he served that events of 1980 could be moved past. Mondale spoke of the seriousness of intent in his president to achieve a re-stabilisation and raised the issue of the cancellation of the deploy of those GLCM missiles to Western Europe as well as the Kennedy Administration continuing to abide by the terms of the SALT II treaty despite ‘political issues at home’. He moved to praise the Soviet Union for its continued following of the Helsinki Accords signed back in 1975, agreements which Kennedy had much admiration for, despite the breakdown in relations elsewhere. Moreover, the recent notification of Soviet-led military exercises in Europe – the now ongoing Shield exercises in Bulgaria, August’s planned Bear war games in the Arctic and the Zapad exercises in the Baltic regions – was welcomed too. Following these examples of cooperation even at tense times, Mondale hoped for more. The United States was prepared to work with the Soviet Union to get past other areas of difficulty between the two countries. In response, Gromyko dropped his bombshell revelation. He gave Mondale – and thus Kennedy too – something they both couldn’t have dreamed of getting at such an early exchange. The Soviet Union was ready and willing to remove their SS-20 missiles from Eastern Europe, all of Eastern Europe beyond the borders of the Soviet Union. Gromyko didn’t explain the real reasons why this was the case (it was a Soviet internal matter with Andropov having decided there was a game to be played despite Ustinov’s objections and his love affair with the Soviet military industrial complex) and only said that his country was ready to remove those missiles. In fact, it was possible that after being redeployed out of Eastern Europe, such weapons might even be later destroyed too if there would be a treaty on such weapons. That was for later though, and the Soviet Union would be pleased to see something in return should things hopefully come to that, but for now, those missiles would be redeployed. Such remarks from Mr. Neyt – who hadn’t said no to anything but instead only yes before being asked – left Mondale stunned. He was pleased but shocked at such a concession. Gromyko made it clear that his commitment was firm and it carried the weight of the full Politburo. There would be no strung-out delays nor haggling. As long as his country had the word of Mondale and President Kennedy too that no nuclear-armed cruise missiles were coming to Western Europe, the intermediate-range ballistic missiles in Soviet service would be withdrawn soon enough. A handshake took place to seal the deal. This was agreed now though Gromyko suggested that at some point in the following months, Andropov and Kennedy should meet: there were other matters that they could clear up between them that maybe he and Mondale might not be able to get around. The UN representative in the room, sent by the secretary general to assist in any negotiations and help defuse arguments should any occur, was as stunned as Mondale and his State Department people were. The UN hadn’t been needed on this matter, which was both a positive and negative thing, it depended upon your point of view on how international diplomacy should go. What the diplomat did do instead was to first offer to help host any possible Soviet-US summit. In addition, afterwards he arranged for communications with home countries for the two men to share the good news then he offered to provide some entertainment for the evening. Vienna was a historic city with plenty of culture. They agreed to go to the opera. There were smiles all round as the only dispute in the room was over what to see. Everyone was friends! Mondale didn’t make it to the opera that night. He passed on the message of extraordinary cooperation back home and the news that the Soviets were pulling out their missiles. His president would be cock-a-hoop. Mondale knew that with such a ‘victory’, Kennedy would be able to silence his detractors (at home and abroad) on the matter of his way – the Sinatra Doctrine – of dealing with the Soviet Union. Mondale’s own joy at such diplomatic success was broken though when news came to Vienna that there had been a violent coup d’état in Pakistan. General Zia had been deposed by his fellow military officers. Through the rest of the night, into the next day and across the following days too the situation in Islamabad would be understood better. Pakistan’s military dictator – who’d taken power in ’77 then seen his civilian predecessor hung as a common criminal – was blown up when a bomb detonated in his private residence. Troops led by generals acting under instructions from the ISI military intelligence organisation had taken control over Pakistan’s capital and fought with those loyal to the dead Zia. Civilians had been caught up in the fighting that had gone on for nearly two days before the last resistance (mainly stubborn hold-outs in isolated spots) was overcome. A military council, one of national salvation no less, was in-charge. The generals were only in power for a temporary period, that was what they told their people anyway. As it would turn out, that was a lie. They had power and wouldn’t be giving it up for anytime soon. This military government would afterwards see the United States cut off aid and the last of friendly relations severed as the Kennedy Administration stuck to its stated policy on that matter once there came credible intelligence of gross human abuses following an internal crackdown. Islamabad didn’t suddenly switch camps in the Cold War and go over to the Soviets as some might have feared they could do: that was never a possibility despite a Soviet hand in igniting the coup but that hand had been pulled back afterwards. Instead, Pakistan was no longer interested in Afghanistan but rather facing down India and strengthening its relationship with China (Moscow hadn’t anticipated that later bit). The generals were no longer prepared to antagonise the Soviet Union over its actions in countries on Pakistan’s western borders – Iran neighboured Pakistan like Afghanistan did – as they focused on their eastern border with Pakistan’s most-implacable enemy there. It would be a cold conflict though, not one about to get hot.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 21, 2018 23:44:52 GMT
July 1981:
Saddam Hussein was the President of Iraq and the plaything of the KGB. For some time now, Soviet intelligence officers had been playing what was called ‘the game with Saddam’. He was useful to Soviet interests. Like a tiger, he had sharp claws and liked to bare them. Using them was a different matter, he’d only do so when he thought it was in his interest, but those claws had been unleashed against Iran already. When those claws weren’t in use, they remained something of a grave concern for others. The egotist that he was, Saddam couldn’t imagine that he was being played for all that he was worth. The KGB were weary of going too far, less he smarten up, yet he showed no sign of doing so. He was menacing the Middle East and fulfilling many geo-political goals of the Soviet Union… all while thinking he was the one in control, not those from the Lubyanka Building. The game was complicated though for Saddam was a complicated man. The KGB could nudge him in only the direction he wanted to go unless they put in a lot of effort to focus his attention somewhere that he had no interest in. Thankfully though, Saddam’s gaze fell far and wide.
Since he had deposed al-Bakr to take the reins of the presidency, Saddam had engaged Iraq in a dispute with Syria. It had been the proposed union between the two countries which had forced his hand (though given a nudge by the KGB) into getting rid of his predecessor on that matter. The Ba’athists in Iraq led by Saddam and the Ba’athists in Syria led by Assad had different ideas and their war of words over the influence each other had in the Middle East, in particular Jordan which neighboured them both, had escalated into military tension which had seen a few short and violent clashes. Those pushed both regimes into Moscow’s hands with requests for arms met and a dependency on that. Iraq was seeking to expand its role in Jordanian affairs continually and Saddam was challenged not just by Assad but the weary Jordanians as well. Any hint of Jordanian rapprochement with Israel and Saddam was up in arms. It was the same with Egypt as Saddam was always ready with a tirade of angry words towards Sadat whenever that was mooted. Saddam looked to Egypt as the strongest nation in the region and the one most capable of engaging the Israelis yet he was jealous of Egyptian strength too. Egypt refused to put that to use, to take on Israel by retaking the Sinai and then driving on Jerusalem. Saddam badgered them to do so: he planned for Iraq to have a major role in that but could only do so following Egypt’s lead. Saddam raged against Western influence – American and British especially – in Saudi Arabia and the Gulf Arab Monarchies. He called for Arab unity, Arabs dependent upon Arabs not the colonialist in Washington and London. Kuwait – one of those Gulf Arab Monarchies – was a frequent target for Saddam’s threats as he claimed that Kuwait was an historic part of Iraq stolen by Imperialists. The Kuwaitis were frightened in private though in public stood up to Saddam as they were sure that their friendship with the Soviet Union (longstanding ties) could rein him in. There was Iran too, still with territory occupied by Iraqi paramilitary soldiers there since the Soviet-led intervention. The government in Tehran had all the pretence of sovereignty over their own nation though there were both Soviet and Iraqi troops on their soil. Soviet troops kept the regime in power and were now winning the war against rebels but Iraqi troops protected Saddam’s political games to try and breakaway territory: Tehran wanted Iraq out of Iran before Saddam managed to breakaway Khuzestan and maybe more of the country. Finally, to the north, Saddam fought against rebels inside his own country in the form of not just the Kurds but Assyrians, Yezidis and other smaller minorities too. The Arabisation campaign of his had a knock-on effect through Iran, Turkey and Syria. Yes, Saddam had his attention everyone and in everyone’s business. He built up his armed forces, had major military parades and boasted openly of Iraqi strength. Much of it helped Moscow’s goal of Iraq being a menace to its neighbours and much of the Middle East too though the complexities of the game with Saddam were quite something. The overlap for Soviet interests, where Saddam helped some but threatened others, was difficult. The KGB tried as they might to get Saddam to do all that they wanted and nothing more: that was far from easy.
Beyond the Middle East, Saddam had been busy spreading the reach of Iraqi influence further afield. He menaced his neighbours with the threat of warfare – not an idle threat after how he struck at Iran; a great victory said Iraqi propaganda – though when it came to Europe, Saddam was seen as a friend. Before taking power he had been friendly with both France and with Spain led by Franco. The latter relations had become strained after Franco’s death yet France was still on good terms with Saddam. Italy was becoming more open to Saddam as well. These countries engaged with Iraq because Iraq had oil, lots of oil. While still an OPEC member and sponsoring the return of Iran into that organisation following its suspension, Iraq was selling oil at a discounted rate to France and Italy. In exchange, Saddam was equipping his military forces with items that the Soviets couldn’t or wouldn’t supply to him. OPEC had price & supply agreements yet Saddam was doing his own thing: Iran and Kuwait, both engaged in disputes with Iraq but following Saddam’s lead, joined with Libya as well in breaking OPEC agreements all to get favourable deals with parts of Europe in defiance of American restrictions imposed under their last president. The rest of OPEC couldn’t stop them. It was known that Saddam was behind this and there was a suspicion of Soviet involvement too but Iraq had become too powerful now to stop unless a major split was to occur within that oil cartel. The oil that flowed from Iraq was important for those countries who received it and they depended upon its free flow at favourable rates when other supplies elsewhere were more expensive. Furthermore, the French had sold Iraq a nuclear reactor for peaceful purposes: Saddam wanted that for anything but. When the Israelis were behind the sabotage en route of vital parts for that, the KGB had had warning of what was coming but not lifted a finger to stop an attack made… but they did tell him afterwards that it was Mossad who had acted in such a violent manner. Saddam had dreams of the potential from Osirak.
The KGB’s man dealing directly with Saddam on a regular basis, their frontman for relations with him away from the Soviet government’s ambassador and other diplomats, was one of the deputy chairmen of the Soviet Peace Committee. Yevgeny Primakov wasn’t officially a diplomat nor a spy really. He had a role within that internationally-focused body alongside his academic duties back home. Primakov made many trips to the Middle East and Iraq was the most frequent of his destinations. Peace wasn’t on the agenda come July. Saddam had been focusing his ire more and more on Kuwait for the past several months. The Kuwaitis had seen military exercise after military exercise take place near the land border between the two countries alongside airspace violations and naval incursions into its waters. Kuwait had complained to Moscow and also tried to engage with Saddam by supporting him with OPEC (and making some money themselves while they were at it). That was all to no avail. Saddam declared in a major public statement that Kuwait was part of Iraq, its rightful nineteen province. He wanted Kuwait for economic reasons really, plus the addition motive of securing his ego as head of the most-powerful country in the Middle East replacing what he increasingly saw as a weak Egypt.
When Primakov came to Baghdad in his July visit, he told Saddam that Kuwait was no more than a mere ally of convenience for both Iraq and the Soviet Union. Should Saddam see fit to correct a rightful historic injustice when it came to Kuwait, Moscow would have no objection. He hypothesised that many other countries would agree, chief among them nations such as Iran and Libya, maybe Jordan and South Yemen too. So much for a peace envoy! The KGB’s game with Saddam would now take a darker turn. The reason for this nudge? Economics, it was always about money for Moscow. A war in the region, a small one followed by the expected diplomatic mess in the reaction of the Saudis, their allies in the Persian Gulf and elsewhere in the world, could only be good for the Soviet Union financially. Saddam knew none of that reasoning. He wouldn’t have cared. His tanks would go into Kuwait next month.
July 1981:
The Red Army Faction had successfully assassinated Al Haig two years ago. Following that killing of the American general who was NATO’s operational commander in Europe, the West German domestic terrorist group had seen the full weight of the state come down upon them. The West German authorities had cracked down hard, pretty damn hard too. In addition, right before he resigned as Director of Central Intelligence following events in Iran, George Bush had authorised cross-agency actions to take place from the US Intelligence Community against the Red Army Faction too in response; his successor under Ford had continued that with Kennedy’s appointee not objecting to that carrying on either. There had come mass arrests by the West Germans against their own civilians who were part of or whom supported the actions of the Red Army Faction. The detentions had been long and with much made of what charges could be brought with bureaucratic delays imposed upon court cases too. As to American actions… there had been some mysterious deaths (not inside West Germany it must be said) of certain figures, especially those to whom Haig’s assassination could be tangibly connected. Those dead at American hands – often those of outsiders contracted to carry out America’s vengeance – were no longer a threat, naturally. However, many of those detained by the West Germans were slowly released from custody. West Germany was a state where the rule of law was paramount and the accused had access to very good legal assistance. The charges against many lacked real substance and a lot of the evidence against many wasn’t all that it was cracked up to be. Prisoners were released from West German jails. They went back to the business of terrorism soon enough. While they were away, the Red Army Faction had come under a lot of pressure yet at the same time, it was lauded by some for the act of killing Haig. For those who saw West Germany as a fascist state, those who saw NATO as an oppressor & the presence of foreign troops in the country as an occupation, the killing was a glorious act. Recruitment had soared to the Red Army Faction, especially in supporting roles. There had come a few moles too though not that many. Young deluded fools had been inspired by the Haig killing to join quite the ruthless terrorist group.
Throughout the year, as more experienced members were released from jail and newer recruits were given real tasks to carry out, the Red Army Faction increased its activities in West Germany. Their focus was on the state though with killings and bombings directed domestically. There were a few isolated incidents with terrorism directed against the Americans but those were generally unsanctioned acts by those still focused on the glory of killing Haig two years ago. The general theme of Red Army Faction action wasn’t to strike against the Americans, not at a time like this. If they did so, their contacts who supplied them with arms and safety across on the other side of the Iron Curtain, wouldn’t be so friendly to them. There had come congratulations from the Stasi officers who worked with the ‘anti-fascist freedom fighters’ inside West Germany for what they had done in July 1979, but a push made afterwards to not repeat that one speculator. The Stasi didn’t and couldn’t control the Red Army Faction but they held mighty sway over them. Why would the East German state intelligence authority care? Why would they stop such attacks? Because Moscow said that it wasn’t what wanted. If the Red Army Faction wanted to do such a thing, they were on their own.
The Red Army Faction carried on with what it did best. They undertook arson and bomb attacks against symbolic targets of capitalism and the fascist state. Judges were shot, including those who had been involved in the sentencing of those few terrorists convicted for their part in the Haig assassination. There were bank robberies made to finance their operations. By the end July, the death toll from their attacks starting in January reached twenty. Compared to other terrorism conflicts, for example Northern Ireland, that didn’t appear to be that significant. In West Germany it was though. The bombings and shooting didn’t always kill those whom were targeted. Bystanders and others – bodyguards and drivers – lost their lives too. Red Army Faction propaganda ignored these when possible or if not claimed that such lives were taken by the state. Recruits kept coming with fools deluded into thinking that there was a fight for something worth fighting for. There was the dream of the freedom promised, apparently more freedom than they already had. Despite all the efforts of the West German state – plus the Americans from afar too – the Red Army Faction continued their terror campaign. They were growing. Could they achieve their goals? No. But they could kill a lot of people while failing to do so and bring instability if matters came to a head. Meanwhile, the Stasi kept on sending them guns while Moscow nodded approval.
August 1981:
Saddam sent his army into Kuwait. It wasn’t the walkover expected. The Kuwaitis fought back and made the Iraqi Army pay for the victory which they eventually won. The Emir had his own armed forces on alert and even while outnumbered, with Iraqi forces all over them and certain defeat coming, the Kuwaitis still fought to defend their nation. Determination and bravery were one thing, concentration of firepower was something else. Where the Kuwaitis stood, the Iraqis flattened them. Adding to the barrage of shells, rockets and falling bombs, the Iraqis added the dimension of manoeuvre to the battle in a manner which Kuwait’s army couldn’t match. The Iraqis came not just direct across the frontier on land and from the air in assault helicopters. They attacked Kuwait from the flank and behind too with airmobile and amphibious landings staged from out of the Shat al-Arab and across in southwestern Iran. The Kuwaitis couldn’t defend against such an invasion done like that. There were Iraqi regular troops who made the initial incursions, with many units drawn from those involved in the invasion of Iran last year. The Iraqis had problems with navigation, communication and discipline. Saddam ‘solved’ those problems: those who failed him were shot. Regardless of such foul-ups – and there were many embarrassing episodes – Kuwait was overrun in two days through mid-August.
The Kuwaiti Army was partially mobilised though couldn’t stop the onslaught from coming on. Their tanks were good but outnumbered: Vickers Mk.1s & Chieftain Mk.5s fought T-55s & T-72s. Their fighters were capable but again outnumbered: it was A-4 Skyhawks & Mirage F-1s against MiG-23s & some Iraqi Mirage F-1s too. The Iraqis unleashed barrage upon barrage of artillery, mortars, rockets and tactical missiles against them. They pounded Kuwait. Saddam’s Tu-22 bombers, previously used against the Kurds in northern Iraq, dropped heavy bombs across the desert where Kuwaiti troops were trying to make a fight of it. The Iraqi Army kept on coming in the face of defensive fire and the Kuwaitis ran out of room to trade for time. Kuwait City was in Iraqi hands within the first hours of the war and there were Iraqi tanks down near the Saudi border as well. These were fatal blows in the rear and which also cut off any possible line of retreat. The Iraqis had the international airport in their hands – a daring parachute assault had taken that; one undertaken with the support of Soviet and East German advisers present (and fighting) – and from there the Iraqis were soon flying combat aircraft out of Kuwaiti soil. Those Mi-24 helicopter gunships which the Iraqis had used to open-up the frontier defences ranged far afield from the airport. They were crewed by more foreign advisers (from many countries) though wore Iraqi colours and were in support of the Iraqi Army. Sometimes they shot up Iraqi soldiers too. Friendly fire that was called… unless you were on the end of it.
Iraqi commandos hunted for the Kuwaiti leadership. There was a cordon thrown around Kuwait straight away to try to stop the royal family (in which power was vested) from escaping abroad. Saddam didn’t want them to get away with the nation’s treasures too for those would soon be in the hands of Iraq. Some princes fought and died, others fought and were captured. The Emir made a daring dash for freedom across the desert and towards Saudi Arabia. The Iraqis tried to pursue him but he was gone. Most of the royal family was caught, along with Kuwait’s national treasures – gold, lots of gold – but the Emir got away. Saddam was displeased. The men with the Republican Guard (a small force) who were involved in that hunt and had failed Saddam got the same treatment as the regular military officers who failed him too: more bullets. Within a week, the majority of the Iraqi Army forces which had gone into Kuwait left and rolled back over the border while the People’s Army came down to handle occupation duties. Kuwait was stripped bare of everything of value. Resistance in any form was brutally crushed. Howls of protest came from aboard but no one lifted a finger to intervene. Saddam kept aircraft based in Kuwait and moved in missiles too. He also had a tank division down on the Saudi border though kept those men in the desert rather than in the urban areas around Kuwait City. As to that city, the former Kuwaiti capital before the country was subsumed into Iraq proper, it was given a new name: Saddam City had a far better ring to it than its previous name in the mind of Iraq’s dictator.
September 1981:
The price of oil skyrocketed following the invasion of Kuwait. The markets reacted in panic when Saddam sent his tanks into his country’s smaller neighbour. There was some drawn back when it became apparent that Iraq wasn’t going to try to occupy Saudi Arabia and its oil fields too, though the oil price stayed high in reaction to the invasion as tension erupted across the Middle East in response to what Saddam had done. The Saudis and the Gulf Arab Monarchies were all in danger from the menace which was Saddam according to the experts /talking heads on the news. A wider war was certain to come to the region and oil supplies from those countries, maybe more, were at risk of serious disruption. Kuwaiti exports were cut off once the conflict started while at the same time other countries started imposing sanctions on Iraq in response to its aggression. There was plenty of oil available on the markets – analysts had been speculating that soon enough that matter was going to come to a head with a crash in the price – yet the reaction was almost the case that there was in fact soon to be none available. Buy, buy, buy! Traders did so and market speculators reacted to that. The crescendo of panic and foolishness hadn’t been seen since 1973. There were knock-on effects soon enough away from the trading floors with the excitable scenes there not repeated elsewhere in places where the sudden rapid rise bit hard among end users: consumers who faced retail price rises.
The blatant disregard for international law in this act of aggression made the world stand up and notice. So too did Saddam’s threats afterwards against more of his neighbours when they denounced his invasion and subsuming of Kuwait. The major shock on the international oil markets only added to the attention paid, in the West especially. The Soviets halted a US Security Council resolution condemning the act but governments around the world responded outside of that international body. Britain, Japan, West Germany and the United States all came out in condemnation. Parliaments were in their summer recesses but they soon returned to session following that break where everyone seemed to have something to say on the matter of the conflict in the Middle East and then the resulting military stand-off which followed. Trade with Iraq in terms of its oil yet also everything else was quick on the agenda: there would be sanctions imposed on Iraq. Saddam must pull his troops out of Kuwait or its oil wouldn’t be brought and nor would anything military-related (different countries had different views on what that covered) be exported to Iraq. Not all nations could agree either on how much further to react: this included pleas from Saudi Arabia for military assistance from its friends in the West.
In the White House, those pleas fell on death ears. Kennedy was not about to commit the US military to the Middle East to expel Iraq from Kuwait. The Saudis – and their supporters in Washington; no friends of the president – compared Iraq to Cuba in saying how a Soviet ally had just invaded a sovereign country. This time, the United States should respond with force. Cuba had got away with Nicaragua then Guatemala: Iraq shouldn’t get away with Kuwait. The way that the president saw it was that if Iraqi tanks went further than Kuwait, into Saudi Arabia or maybe using sea & air routes to invade Bahrain, Qatar or the United Arab Emirates (countries which most Americans hadn’t heard of), then it would be a different story. Saddam hadn’t done so. Kennedy was under no delusions about him for the brutal tyrant which he was and eagerly gave presidential approval to sanctions coming from Congress, but he wasn’t about to go to war with Iraq in a pre-emptive attack. Saudi fears weren’t worth American lives. After Kennedy made that clear, the talk was next that the United States should send military forces to the region to defend Saudi Arabia instead. There was a US Navy carrier in the Arabian Sea – it wasn’t going into the Persian Gulf itself – but no further commitment was to be sent. The attitude of the Saudis when it came to their demands infuriated the president. They wouldn’t come out and say they wanted American military support for reasons of pride and stated openly that they could defend themselves; in private they demanded troops and aircraft, all to be under their control too. The mission they proposed was insane: a line in the sand. Kennedy wouldn’t be doing as they wished. Saddam had pulled his troops back and was busy swallowing up Kuwait. Iraq’s armies weren’t marching on Riyadh or Mecca… especially not the Saudi’s oil fields. When it came to those oil fields, Kennedy’s economic agenda as president was being frustrated by the attitude of the Saudis with their oil exports. They led OPEC and were keeping oil prices high before Kuwait was invaded. That affected the American people and the national economy, all for their greed.
Kennedy’s disregard for Saudi concerns contrasted sharply with his attitude towards Israel. Israel was a friend of the United States, a country which Kennedy had an affinity for. They expressed their concern about Saddam and Kennedy listened respectfully to them. He agreed with Tel Aviv that Saddam was a threat to the general peace. Israel was ready to stand firm against Iraq and didn’t demand anything, especially not outright and with the attitude that the Saudis did. Kennedy would work always work with Israel. That approach there killed off some of the criticism about his attitude towards Saudi Arabia.
The president wasn’t the only one making the decisions when it came to the United States’ reaction to Saddam’s actions. In fact, he was making few while Congress was doing the most. Kuwait galvanised many senators and congressmen. Iraq had sided with the Soviet Union last year to help invade Iran and now was acting to attack other countries too on behalf of the Soviets. That was as clear as day to them. What was also apparent was that Iraq must be stopped. Saudi Arabia was certainly next if Saddam wasn’t halted in his ambition to take over the Middle East at the behest of Moscow. A joint House and Senate bill imposed United States sanctions on Iraq and next came a proposal to arm Saudi Arabia. The Saudis would pay for fighter jets and tanks while the manufacture of them would create American jobs. This would all be good for the United States at home and abroad. Kennedy initially opposed this but backed down soon enough as Congress got its way on sending arms – lot of them – to the Middle East. The president might not be taking things seriously but Congress was. This was a bi-partisan effort too with both Democrats and Republicans working together on something that was seen as above party politics. There was a confidence that in the end the president would agree and sign the bill went it went to him: if he didn’t, he would face further backlash from Congress than he was already getting on other matters.
Politicians in Washington weren’t happy at Kennedy’s self-declared success when he won his diplomatic coup in getting the Soviets to agree to withdraw their SS-20 missiles from Eastern Europe. That success, where he stated that he knew what he was doing in negotiating with the Soviets, had come at the cost of cancelling the GLCM deployment unilaterally and upsetting America’s allies in Western Europe. No consultation had come with Congress either before the president had done what he had. When he ‘won’, he revelled in his victory over Congress too. There was no magnanimity in the man. Kennedy was losing friends with more and more previous supporters in Congress – he’d won the Democrats the White House after a dozen years of Republican rule – turning against him. Advice was listened to by Kennedy… so he said anyway. But he refused to follow it. He knew best. Defence Secretary Muskie wasn’t as bad as some in Congress had feared he might be when in charge of the Pentagon yet Mondale was seen as a disaster: the feeling was that the secretary of state was in thrall to Kennedy’s ideas that deals could be struck with the Soviets, ones which they would honour when Congress knew they wouldn’t.
Congress got their own intelligence briefings. They knew about the fall-out with Britain and understood that while Kennedy had walked away from that now – so much for the IRA’s saviour! – he was going to hold that grudge against the Thatcher government. CIA, DIA and NSA briefings told senators and congressmen about Soviet, Cuban and Eastern Bloc military training teams in Central America with Guatemala and Nicaragua as they built new armies. Congress was also told about how Pakistan had been intimidated by Soviet threats into backing away from Afghanistan and therefore sealing the fate of the rebels there. They wanted to do something about all of this. They wanted to do something to stop Kennedy for doing more damage to long-term US interests worldwide. However, at the moment that was impossible. There was something they didn’t know though: a newspaper was sitting on yet another story about Kennedy’s private life – his zipper had come down again – which wasn’t being released. The president sure did like his distractions.
October 1981:
The clandestine work undertaken in Greece throughout 1981 and culminating in the subsequent upholding of election promises on foreign affairs by the winner of October’s election wasn’t that arduous for the KGB and the Bulgarian intelligence service which was the DS. The Greek people were ready to overwhelmingly elect the socialist PASOK party and Greece itself was willing to leave both the EEC and NATO too. Soviet and Bulgarian efforts to spread influential propaganda and then give accidents to some key opponents within PASOK against the party following such a line in foreign affairs when elected were all important but only to their respective agency heads who claimed credit after October 18th. Greece didn’t need the shove in the direction that it got. The effects of this foreign interference were minimal and even if they had been exposed, that wouldn’t have changed anything. Greece and its new leader in the form of incoming Prime Minister Papandreou were determined to get out of both institutions. There was a role for Greece to play in the world outside of the customs union which was the EEC and the American-dominated NATO. Papandreou was determined to take Greece into that brave new world and his people were willing to go along with it. Glowing reports to governments in Moscow and Sofia of the success achieved in shaping public opinion and removing troublesome people who posted obstacles were overstated in terms of their affect. Regardless, the spy chiefs patted themselves on the back and got praise from their political masters. Greece meanwhile did its own thing once PASOK won the election and started to form a new government.
Papandreou publicly told both organisations of the intent for a Greek Withdrawal from each. His country had only formally joined the EEC back in January yet PASOK had opposed that then and campaigned on a removal of the country once they were in power. The trading bloc wasn’t one which suited Greece and there had already been disputes between the last government and Brussels when it came to financial aid for Greece. Being part of the EEC was a restriction on Greece’s economy, as far as PASOK saw it, and would only damage the country. The ideas for a transformation in Greek society with the national adoption of socialism when it came to wealth distribution weren’t compatible with the EEC either: Greece would leave before it was punished by Brussels for doing so in a humiliation which Greece wouldn’t want to see. When it came to NATO, Greece had been a member since the Fifties yet there had always been a rocky relationship with that organisation and Greece when the country was under various governments: PASOK and its predecessor movements of socialist parties had been opposed to NATO from the start. It was the Americans mainly which upset the Greek people. They had supported the Regime of the Colonels which had led Greece from ’67 to ’74. It was their interference which had brought about so much pain and humiliation on the Greek people. Talking of humiliation, what had NATO done right before the dictatorship ended? They had taken Turkey’s side when the Turks had invaded Cyprus! Turkey was always the enemy for Greece no matter what. The last government had removed Greece from NATO’s military command structure afterwards though PASOK had long argued that there should be a full withdrawal from NATO as a whole. Greece had re-joined the command arrangement only last year and soon enough been humiliated again when Turkey was favoured over Greece by the rest of NATO, especially the Americans. No more would the Greek people stand for this. NATO was seen as a hostile foreign domination with its interference in Greek affairs, the military bases on sovereign Greek soil and the support it always had for Turkey.
Papandreou had been jailed during the dictatorship and was lucky to have not been killed: the senior CIA officer in Greece, who supported the Regime of the Colonels, had urged the dictatorship to do that but they hadn’t. Another American had saved his life and allowed for him to be exiled to Sweden before democracy returned to Greece. Papandreou knew America – he’d lived there – and knew that they weren’t the great evil as others might wish to portray them. Their interference in Greek affairs through NATO appeared to have no end in sight unless Greece left that organisation. The Turkish issue bothered him less than it did many of his people; what angered him about the Americans was how they tried to manage Greece’s foreign policy away from Europe and NATO. He had no delusions about the Soviet Union yet saw them just the same as the United States in how they wanted every country, Greece included among so many more, on their side or would deem that nation their enemy. Greece under Papandreou would do things differently. There were other countries around the world who Greece could work with. Greece First would come after Greek Withdrawal.
These promised actions from the new government in Athens had affects elsewhere. The EEC and NATO each had warning of what was coming and efforts were tried to keep Greece in both. Those were to no avail. Even if Western intelligence agencies had tried double what the KGB and DS claimed as successes, they couldn’t have kept the country in those alliances. Knowing that Greece under Papandreou would do when they won gave some time to prepare. The EEC made sure that it was ready to formally begin the process of letting Greece go once Athens made that official and support for a united front approach was made across Western Europe. Greece would get no special favours and in their leaving, they would do little damage to the EEC apart from prestige. NATO tried a similar approach. Greece was warned of the dangers of being outside of the defensive alliance in public; in private NATO leaders made preparations for that withdrawal as well as working to keep the rest of the member states of the alliance committed to mutual defence. What NATO failed to do though was to reassure the Spanish that NATO wasn’t an organisation soon to fail and therefore not one which Spain should join.
The Spanish were due to sign articles of accession to NATO in the New Year so they could formally enter the alliance in mid-1982. This was all part of the follow-up to Spain’s transition to democracy after the demise of Franco where they would join international organisations such as NATO first and then the EEC in the coming years. Opposition to both, especially NATO, was strong in Spain though. The country’s centre-right government looked likely to lose next year’s election to either the socialists directly or a coalition of socialists and communists. The intention by the government had been to join NATO regardless of that public opposition because they believed it could be shaped after joining. That election had yet to be lost, maybe it could be won… The Spanish watched as NATO argued with Europe on one side and the United States on the other. The Greek situation before the election there was monitored as well. In Madrid, the ruling UCD was a coalition rather than a lone party and from within there came fears of what the socialists in the PSOE – let alone the communists! – would do once in power. Maybe if Spain didn’t join NATO at this time, the UCD could stay in office? There was a public wait until the situation in Greece turned out like it did yet the decision was made beforehand in private. A week after the Greek election, Spain informed NATO that Spain entry into NATO was being postponed. Not cancelled, just delayed for the time being. Greece was out of NATO and Spain wasn’t coming in: the postponement from Madrid was cancellation no matter what was said.
November 1981:
Saddam learnt how important he was to Andropov and that wasn’t very much overall. The Soviets showed him how little they cared for Iraq when their own interests were affected: Moscow’s interests were paramount first and foremost. Iraq’s dictator was surprised by this. He shouldn’t have been yet he really was. Alas, it you lie down with a snake, you should expect to get bitten. Everyone else understood that. Saddam had thought he was special but he wasn’t. Once his swallowing up of Kuwait was complete and the former country returned to its rightful place as part of Iraq, Saddam sought to restore relations which had been cut with the West during the summer; relations with his fellow Arabs would be addressed afterwards. He found that Western Europe, parts of Asia and the United States all refused to buy Iraqi oil again until Kuwait was vacated by Iraqi troops and the Emir restored to his throne. They were united on this too. Saddam took that as an opening bargaining position for he knew they wanted Iraqi (and Kuwaiti) oil because they were dependent upon it. It turned out that both his beliefs there were false. He wouldn’t give up Kuwait and the West wouldn’t buy his oil. He went running to the Soviets. Do something about this, he told Primakov, make them buy our oil again. His Soviet contact asked him how Saddam wanted the Soviet Union to do such a thing. Force them, Saddam said; he was asked how Moscow was supposed to do that. Even France didn’t want Iraqi oil anymore and made the switch elsewhere like everyone else was doing. It had been an article of faith as far as Saddam was concerned that the weak and divided West would come around to recognising his control over Kuwait and come running back to their favourite oil supplier. How wrong he had been. Without oil revenue, Iraq was going to be in a difficult situation in the long run. That money paid for so much that Saddam needed to keep Iraq prosperous and (relatively) free from internal troubles. What was he going to do without it? The gold stolen from Kuwait could only be spent once. Then he found out afterwards that it was from the Soviets, his friends and ally who had helped persuade him to go to war, that many in the West were now buying their oil from if it wasn’t from the Saudis or other OPEC countries (Iraq ended up suspended from that organisation too). They’d stole his customers.
The Soviets then really turned on him come November. A formal request was made from Tehran that the Iranian People’s Democratic Republic wished for the removal of foreign troops from its sovereign soil. Like the Soviets, the Iraqis were inside Iran: Iran politely asked both nations to pull out their forces. The Soviets had fought alongside the Iranians across the Zagros Mountains through the summer and defeated the last of the rebel strongholds there. The Iranians were up on their feet and behaving like good communists, subservient to Moscow too. The request was followed by an acceptance by the Soviets where they openly announced that their 4th & 32nd Armies would be leaving Iran in a staged withdrawal through 1982… certain Soviet bases – joint facilities supposedly – would remain established on Iranian soil though. Saddam queried the request first with Tehran where he said that Iraq’s position was that Iran wasn’t in a secure enough internal situation and therefore Iraqi troops should remain to help secure the peace. The Iranians reaffirmed their request though this time phrased it in the manner of a demand. Saddam questioned this with Moscow: just who did the Iranians think that they were? The response came that Iran was a firm Soviet ally. Saddam had plans for the areas of Iran under Iraqi control, plans to make them part of Iraq. He informed both Moscow and Tehran than in the areas under Iraqi control, there was a will of the people there to remain under Iraqi control. That didn’t fly in neither the Soviet nor Iranian capitals. Both governments knew what Saddam wanted and neither was willing to see that occur. Saddam was paid a visit by Gromyko, not Primakov. Leave Iran starting in January, he was told by the Soviet foreign minister, while at the same time his military chiefs told him that outside Iraqi occupation areas there was the movement of Soviet troops elsewhere in Iran into what looked like attack positions. Saddam would have liked to have stood firm. He plotted and planned. The Iranians under Iraqi control could vote to become part of Iraq. He could work with other countries – but who? – to check Soviet pressure. He could offer the Soviets military bases. He could… There was nothing that would work though. Saddam couldn’t see anyway short of fighting the Soviet Union where he could keep what he had in Iran. There was no solution to be found. He gave in, bitterly and swearing revenge, but still folded in the face of the realisation that this wasn’t a fight which he could win. Iraqi forces would start leaving Iran in January. Before then though, anything left of value which had already not been removed from Iran would be taken now.
Elsewhere in the world, the reaction from the Iraqi invasion of Kuwait continued. Oil prices had stabilised somewhat though still remained higher than they had been beforehand. There were armies in the desert and more on their way there. A huge military stand-off was occurring and the threat of a bigger war was still there. Worries were present that Iraq was soon to go to war with the Saudis and the Gulf Arab Monarchies – diplomatic tensions with Iran and the Soviets were not known publicly – in the end. Those countries had their troops in the Saudi desert and then there was the movement of Egyptian troops across the Red Sea and into Saudi Arabia too. It was a defensive measure, the world was told, as one Arab nation helped out another. Questions were asked by outsiders over the attitude of Israel to this. What did they think of the Egyptian Army moving like this? From Tel Aviv, there came only silence. Israel had nothing to say in public about this matter, nothing at all in fact. It was clear that they did have an opinion but it wasn’t one which they wished to share with the rest of the world. That opinion was that they were happy to see it. Saddam was just as much a threat to Israel as he was to his Arab neighbours. If they wanted to work together to oppose him, Israel wasn’t about to object. Pakistan’s ruling generals also gave their nod of approval to that Egyptian move plus the Gulf Arab Monarchies working with the Saudis too. Pakistani officially-sanctioned mercenaries were soon numbering in the (low) thousands within the army of the United Arab Emirates, an army which was up near the Kuwaiti border. The Arabs and their friends in Pakistan were all working together to defend Saudi Arabia because the belief among them was that Saddam would be sending his tanks southwards. He wasn’t yet they didn’t know that.
The oil crisis over the summer had brought those market reactions yet also political developments. The Americans – who hadn’t been buying neither Iraqi nor Kuwaiti oil – started to look at a deal with Mexico alongside further expansion of domestic sources. The Mexican oil industry was booming and there was growth to be had at home too. Kennedy was more welcoming to such a future for American energy needs rather than seeing domestic economic problems brought about by such issues as one Arab dictatorship threatening to fight another (his view on the Saudis had hardened due to their ongoing diplomatic behaviour and how their lobbyists had worked with his opponents in Congress) therefore hurting American consumers. France and Italy bought some Soviet oil when they cut off Iraq though were also looking elsewhere in the world, to non-OPEC nations especially for France which had no wish to be beholden to such a dysfunctional organisation. Britain and Norway started to plan for further expansion of production of North Sea oil. The West Germans government, led by an embattled Chancellor Schmidt, speculated about further nuclear power enhancements at home; that was the same across in Japan too. The 1981 Oil Crisis, followed on the back of those in ’73 then ’79, was changing thinking across the West. Maybe there might not be concrete results in the end, but oil from the Middle East had once again shown how unreliable and troublesome it was. There had to be something better than that.
December 1981:
Gromyko and Mondale met once again, this time in Beirut. The two of them were present among other foreign ministers during on conference on ending the ongoing conflict there in Lebanon. Soviet backing of Assad had been met by support for Israel coming from Kennedy. Who spoke for the Lebanese, caught up in the middle of the deadly proxy war within their nation? Few did. There were different points of view between the Soviet and United States delegations upon a solution to the problem in Lebanon which had led to some polite but firm exchanges of opinions. Each side had allies to support and there were claims that the other’s proxy was doing something that was denied by their backers. Regardless of that issue, Gromyko and Mondale returned to the issue of a summit between their heads of state as talked about when they had achieved cooperation in Vienna. Setting that up had been stalled by various factors but it was seen as desirable for Andropov and Kennedy to meet. There were ideas exchanged between the two senior diplomats in Beirut on first where & when to have that summit and then what it should cover. Gromyko proposed that the American president should visit the Soviet Union: maybe Leningrad if not Moscow. Wasn’t Kennedy going to Western Europe early next year for a series of visits? Perhaps he would like to come to the Soviet Union too? Mondale said that he would put that to the president yet the State Department would much prefer it if a meeting took place in Western Europe instead. Kennedy was going to West Berlin: would Andropov like to hold a summit with him there? Neyt, said Mister Neyt. Gromyko suggested East Berlin instead, an idea which Mondale poured cold water on. However, several hours later when they spoke again, after Mondale had been in touch with Washington, he came back to Gromyko and agreed to the idea of a summit in East Berlin during mid-February. His president would fit a visit there into his schedule. Three days in East Berlin it would be during the time agreed.
They moved onto the subjects of discussion during the summit. By that time, Gromyko pointed out that there should be verifiable evidence that the Soviet Union was sticking to the agreement thrashed out in Vienna where SS-20 missiles would be removed from all of Eastern Europe – not just East Germany – and back inside Soviet borders. Mondale confirmed that the United States was aware of that without saying anything about how that redeployment had been verified; he also spoke of the United States keeping its word on no GLCM deployment. Other missiles and further nuclear weapons would be what Andropov and Kennedy would discuss; their foreign ministers agreed to that being a subject though during the intervening time between Beirut and East Berlin, what weapons their leaders would talk of removing would be considered. Gromyko pointed out that the Soviet position would concern the weapons systems of his country’s allies too. None of the Warsaw Pact nations operated nuclear weapons but they had long-range missiles systems. He told Mondale that with such a thing arranged – naturally, those sovereign and independent nations would have to agree – by the Soviet Union, his country would expect the United States to come to an agreement with its NATO allies on something similar. Mondale admitted to Gromyko that such a thing would be difficult and told his Soviet counterpart that his president would have to take that under consideration. What else would be up for discussion in East Berlin would be matters outside of Europe east and west. There was the ongoing situation in both Guatemala and Nicaragua with the revolutionary governments that the United States wished to discuss with the Soviet Union; the Soviets would want to talk about the United States arming the Mexican Army and making aggressive actions towards those two Central American nations as well as Cuba which was supporting fraternal socialist regimes. Iraq, an ally of the Soviet Union, had invaded and annexed Kuwait against the will of the international community with a UN Security Council resolution against Iraq vetoed by the Soviet ambassador at the UN. Mondale’s position on that was met with Gromyko’s counter of the United States suddenly arming large parts of the Middle East – the Saudi’s especially – with what the Soviet Union regarded as offensive military equipment which was destabilising for the region. Like Central America, the Middle East would be a subject of discussion come February and East Berlin.
What wasn’t going to be discussed in that summit would be other matters which Gromyko and Mondale couldn’t agree to get on the agenda where progress might be made. Those matters included Soviet military expansion in conventional weapons, Soviet military basing at the head of Persian Gulf in Iran’s port of Bandar Abbas, United States support for Israel’s continued occupation of the territory of Egypt and cooperation between America & China that the Soviet Union was opposed to. On so many matters, the two nations were at an impasse: these being the primary ones at the moment. Other agreement could come, such had been the new hope so pushed for by Kennedy in US-Soviet relations, if the two superpowers worked together. Maybe later they could turn to some of them though not in their summit in two months time.
After Beirut, Gromyko went home to Moscow. Mondale went straight to Panama City where the US secretary of state met with the new president of Panama: the now-retired general who was Omar Torrijos. No longer was Torrijos a serving military officer nor the Maximum Leader of the Panamanian Revolution. Instead, he was the President of Panama. That was long a role reserved for figurehead puppets put in-place by military strongmen such as Torrijos; now he had taken that position after an (apparently democratic) nationwide vote where three quarters of the Panamanian people had voted him into office. That election wasn’t free and fair by most international standards though it was freer than many worldwide. Torrijos was still popular in Panama and while not seventy-six point eight percent popular, he had certainly won a majority of votes: the State Department estimated the true number to be sixty to sixty five percent. Either way, Torrijos had done what he had been privately told beforehand when in the United States ahead of last year’s presidential election where it was said that if he wanted a Kennedy Administration to talk to Panama about returning the Canal Zone to them, Panama would have to be a (sort-of) democracy. He was a civilian now with the rule of law supposedly in Panama. There had been arrests of drug-smugglers and corruption crackdowns. Panamanian foreign policy might not have been pro-US recently, but it wasn’t markedly anti-American like it had been during the last year of the Ford Administration. A Torrijos-led Panama was ready to negotiate with the United States about a return of the Panama Canal to his country.
Mondale sat Torrijos down and explained what it would take for the United States to fulfil Panama’s national goal – his host’s words – on ultimate Panamanian full sovereignty over the disputed region. There would have to be long and detailed official negotiations on the matter. The United States would want guarantees of military access to the Panama Canal in wartime because the canal was an asset of geo-strategic importance for Mondale’s nation. Those negotiations would have to be conducted in good faith. Should a deal be reached, the transfer of sovereignty would have to come to an agreement on United States military facilities within the Canal Zone as well. A treaty would then have to be agreed to, one to international standards and therefore involatile by changes in government in either nation. The transfer would take several years going through stages where if there were hold-ups at each point, full transfer would be delayed or even cancelled if a breech was that serious. All those conditions would have to be met before Mondale’s president could give his support to it. Afterwards would come the really difficult bit: the US Senate would have to ratify such a treaty. Torrijos nodded and nodded. Yes, yes, yes. He agreed to all that Mondale said. He was eager to get on with things. When, he asked, could the negotiations start?
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 24, 2018 18:56:01 GMT
Chapter Five – Give Peace A Chance
January 1982:
Kennedy’s first State of the Union Address was a big deal. Congress was packed with members and guests while the speech was carried live on the radio and the television: tens of millions of Americans heard and saw what the president had to say. The staged managed event in Washington was the focus of much of the country: it had a relevance abroad too. Kennedy spoke for an hour though, as was usually the case, there were many interruptions of applause. He had a lot to talk about. There was a domestic focus at the beginning of the speech where he spoke of the first signs of recovery in the economy under his administration before he moved to the key elements of his legislative agenda. There was mention made of progress on social security and the DC voting rights bill though the stalling of universal free healthcare. The president urged Congress to bring that latter bill into law so that Americans could benefit from it: what he deemed ‘vested interests’ were against that, lobbyists for the medical insurance companies. There was a focus on women’s rights too with the and how he wanted to see the equal rights bill passed by the individual states to become the next constitutional amendment. The passionate liberal which was Ted Kennedy spoke about what he cared much about domestically before he turned to foreign affairs.
The President talked about his plans for a new wave of diplomatic initiatives in the Middle East. He hoped that by giving peace a chance, by working with all sides, the current conflicts could be brought to an end. The Sinai, the West Bank & Jerusalem, Lebanon and Kuwait were all conflicts he wanted to see solved. Kennedy asked rhetorically if it was too much to hope for. If it was thought to be, he aimed to change that perception. Elsewhere in the world, the president spoke of how it was no longer the case that the United States was supporting undemocratic regimes where there were serious cases of human rights abuses. He told his audience that he was proud of this in the face of opposition to such a ‘bold approach’. The country’s dependence on foreign energy sources, of which had caused so much economic damage to America and hurt the American people, was something which he was seeking to lessen. Kennedy admitted that he wasn’t too fond of oil and other hydrocarbon extraction yet the drilling in Alaska and through the American West was being monitored heavily by the Environmental Protection Agency. In addition, it meant jobs for American workers and money in the pockets of Americans. He made mention of one of his primary opponents who was in the audience in Congress for his speech, his invited guest which was Governor Brown from California. California was leading the way in environmentally-friendly energy production: if that was followed nationwide, within the next few decades the whole country could be ‘free’ of foreign energy dependence.
Finally, he moved to the Soviet Union and diplomatic relations with Moscow. Kennedy was proud of how he was having his administration engage with the Soviets. The ever-present threat of nuclear warfare was being reduced with those diplomatic exchanges. Kennedy said that American national security neither at home nor aboard was being endangered by what was being done. Understandings had been reached with the Soviets and achievements already made. He looked forward to more of those agreements with Moscow, so should all Americans. No one wanted war and his aim was to make sure that the risk of that starting was being lowered. A dream of his was to one day see the complete elimination of nuclear weapons, those aimed at cities and civilians.
Following the speech, there was an official reply made by the Republican leadership in a bit of a damp squid of a response. Far fewer Americans were witness to the coverage of that and the relevance wasn’t there in the minds of the American people. What Kennedy had to say was important. Those who agreed with him usually did so after his speech. Those who opposed him continued to do so. Those caught in the middle of opinions on Kennedy went either way. Kennedy remained divisive across the country. The Kennedy Magic didn’t work on everyone and those who hated the man’s politics were committed to that. A week before the speech, at a protest against Kennedy when he was attending an event up in Philadelphia, there had been signs raised by those protesters: ‘Remember Mary Jo’ and ‘Soviet Stooge’ had been some of the more prominent writings.
Kennedy still had many strong opponents within his own party inside Congress too. A year into his presidency, those opponents hadn’t given in. They were watching the polling numbers for the upcoming mid-term elections and saw that there was a good chance that as the president’s party, the Democrats were going to take a beating come November. Backing away from the president for the time being was good electoral sense for some. Other opponents had a more determined opposition rather than a temporary one. They were the ones who’d long opposed Kennedy, back during the primaries when they started two years ago, as someone who was the wrong man for the presidency, especially when it came to foreign affairs. Some of them were noted fellow liberals; others certainly not. All could agree though that after a year of him in the White House, they were absolutely correct on this. Having to rely on the Republicans (who were certain to get their act together soon enough after the shock of Reagan’s defeat) to oppose Kennedy wasn’t for them: they carried on doing so themselves. Kennedy wasn’t going to get everything his own way. Further deals with the Soviets would be opposed and so too would the cutting of relations with further allies which didn’t suit the president’s political tastes. Foreign aid, defence appropriations and support for US intelligence agencies remained in Congressional hands. There was a belief that the worst excesses of Kennedy could be stopped by Congress. They’d find out if they were right or wrong in that belief come the summit which the president was off to next month.
February 1982:
Before the summit with Andropov in East Berlin, Kennedy made visits through early February to Paris, the Republic of Ireland and then Stockholm. After East Berlin in the middle of the month, the president was due to go to Bonn then Rome & the Vatican City (meeting the new Pope in the latter) before heading to Israel as the last stop on his trip. The crowds came out in the French capital to see Kennedy as he made an official state visit there; France and its people loved him. In Ireland, Kennedy went to his family’s historic ancestral home in County Wexford before meetings with the Irish Government. There was no trip up to Ulster for him though: the British Government had vetoed that idea late last year when it was mooted and that decision would cost London harshly come April for Kennedy took that blocking of his travel personally. Then it was Stockholm where the American president attended several official events before meeting with the Soviet leader afterwards down in the East German capital. Rome was a pleasant trip for Kennedy along with his meeting with the new Pope; Israel too was somewhere else he enjoyed with visits to Tel Aviv, Jerusalem and the Negev. The three days in East Berlin were the most important part of the itinerary for the president though.
The press called it the ‘Valentine’s Summit’. Such a name had a nice ring to it for them and was pushed by the American media crews who covered the summit once they were inside the East German capital. As was expected, the activities of them were monitored and controlled by the authorities who didn’t want them wandering. Bad weather and multiple off-the-record briefings by Kennedy’s entourage kept them away from doing what the East Germans feared anyway and telling the world the story of life behind the Iron Curtain that they didn’t want told. Kennedy himself spoke several times to the media as well. He had a series of four meetings in total with Andropov, quite a large number in such a short space of time. Interpreters and advisers were present throughout. Kennedy was treated with the respect that a head of state should expect and was rather comfortable while in East Berlin. He got very comfortable his second night there in fact. A French journalist, a woman whom he’d met when in Paris who’d covered his tour of the French capital, was snuck into his room by his aides when the Secret Service agents looked the other way. Not once did the concept of a HONEYTRAP enter his mind.
At the end of the summit, Andropov and Kennedy came to several agreements on a wide range of matters. Both were to work to support the establishment of peaceful settlements to the conflicts in the Middle East with regard to Israel, Egypt and the Sinai as well as Lebanon; other areas of conflict there would need more work but agreed to have them discussed by Gromyko and Mondale. They discussed strategic missile restrictions on the arsenals of each of their countries and thrashed out cooperation for working towards a SALT III treaty several years hence. There was agreement too on both sides aiming to stop the spread of conflict in Central American nations though nothing specific there away from a commitment to try to achieve an end to ongoing fighting across several countries by non-interference. That was a bit of a mess when it came to the Kennedy Administration having to explain to the press what that meant; Andropov didn’t have to worry about media questions and criticism from home. Gromyko was at the press event on the last day of the summit and was he not Andropov who then surprised the world with an announcement which the Valentine’s Summit would long be remembered for. Kennedy knew what was coming and took pride in making sure that nothing was leaked from his entourage on what the Soviets were going to do. He wanted the affect to be strong at home in the United States and believed that would be best done if nothing was leaked.
Before the end of 1982, the Soviet Union would be removing twenty-five percent of its troops from East Germany. The following year would see another twenty-five percent would leave East Germany too. Gromyko informed the world that the Soviet Union and its people only wanted peace. What better way to achieve this than showing Soviet faith in the American president’s promises that he only wanted peace too? Should the United States and NATO nations wish to match the troop withdrawal of their own from West Germany nor or in the future, the Soviet Union would welcome that. This withdrawal of theirs was unconditional though. The Soviet soldiers would leave regardless of what NATO did or didn’t do. Gromyko told the press that the Soviet Union was beginning the process of a hoped-for reduction in forward-deployed military forces across all of Europe. Furthermore, also leaving East Germany within the next ten months to add to this reduction would be nuclear weapons inside Eastern Europe further then East Germany. He left that details of that statement unsaid.
Kennedy stood to the side, with Andropov between him and Gromyko, beaming for the cameras. Just look at his success in negotiations with the Soviets to secure peace, something which his domestic and foreign detractors said couldn’t be done. He knew exactly what he was doing, didn’t he?
February 1982:
World attention was focused on the fallout from the superpower summit in East Berlin. What It All Means was what everyone was trying to figure out. A certainty of peace was what many said. That might have been true with relations between the Soviet Union and the United States. However, elsewhere there was an uneasy peace about to be broken in Central America. Inside Belize, a British crown colony on the verge of independence, late-February saw the beginnings of a bigger conflict begin. Small groups of Guatemalan soldiers were infiltrated over the border into what Guatemala – when under various governments; this revolutionary communist one the latest – claimed was rightfully theirs. Whether the territory to their east was called by others British Honduras, the colony of Belize or an independent Belize, Guatemala regarded it as part of Guatemala. It was historically theirs. It belonged to them. The troops dispatched were under orders to establish a presence inside this stolen land and help with a revolt among the ordinary people so they could finally throw off the shackles of foreign imperialism and join with the new Guatemala being built across to the west. The poor exploited peasants (the opinion of Guatemala’s leaders, not those inside Belize) across in Belize would be encouraged to join in with the continuing revolution sweeping through Central America. They wouldn’t be the last ‘encouraged to join’ either.
Those soldiers inside Belize soon found themselves engaged in combat. The Guatemalans fought with troops serving in the Belize Defence Force (BDF), an organisation raised by and supported by the British authorities in Belize City. This was an army meant to take over the defence of the country when – whenever that might be – the British left Belize. The clashes between them and the invading Guatemalans were isolated events involving groups of no more than a dozen, maybe a dozen and a half at sites separated by many miles over the period of the last week of February. The BDF was responding to intelligence reports from locals of armed groups active in the jungle and on the edges of border villages. They stumbled into the Guatemalans on the first few occasions and then hunted for them afterwards. Those opponents of the BDF had failed in their mission to keep their presence hidden from the BDF and inciting an uprising. The Guatemalans soon found themselves fighting instead. Those localised infantry clashes between the two sides were short and violent affairs with civilians caught up in them. Both sides lost men killed, wounded and captured. There came withdrawals from the Guatemalans, deeper into the jungle, and chases made by the BDF after them. The BDF soldiers identified who they were chasing and aimed to kill them while also recovering the comrades dragged away as prisoners by an enemy who wouldn’t stand and fight but rather run away. The fighting continued after each initial clash with pursuits turning into more exchanges of fire. More BDF troops flooded into the area and they soon weren’t alone either: British forces inside Belize joined them.
The UK was eager for Belize to gain its independence and for the then country to join the Commonwealth and other international organisations. Diplomatic problems had caused a delay though 1982 was meant to be the year that Belize became a sovereign nation… no matter what Guatemala had to say. Guatemala had long had a lot to say on the issue of Belize. Since Guatemalan aggression had begun back in 1972, Britain had been forced to keep military forces inside Belize to deter Guatemala from invading and annexing the territory. Such an action would be against the wishes of the people in Belize, British interests and international law. Guatemala regularly intimidated that they were about to do that and therefore a garrison of troops supported by aircraft and helicopters was inside Belize. During early 1982, that British force to support the local BDF consisted of a stronger detachment than in recent years due to Guatemala’s revolution and public claims made of Guatemalan sovereignty over Belize. The British Army had a regular infantry battalion – 1st Battalion, Royal Regiment of Wales – in Belize along with the majority of a battalion of Gurkhas too which had been sent from Brunei late last year: that latter unit being the 2nd Battalion, 2nd Gurkha Rifles. The RAF had aircraft in Belize in the form of half a dozen Harrier attack-fighters organised into a flight (a partial squadron) and another flight of multi-role Puma helicopters. There were British citizens in Belize and British interests to protect, though the official mission was supporting the Belizeans themselves as they got ready for independence. When confirmed that Guatemalan troops were inside Belize, and fighting the BDF, British forces moved to respond. There were deployments to the border of part of that garrison and readiness increased across the rest ready to defend the country from further border-crossings. The men on the ground were ready to fight. They waited on word from London.
London would make a big mistake with the initial reaction to the sudden conflict in Belize. When what became the Belize War fully got going some time after the February clashes, there would be a major domestic political dispute. Resignations would come with some accepted and others deferred until after that conflict. War with Guatemala was a few months away though. When the reports came of border fighting by isolated groups of Guatemalan soldiers inside Belize, the British Government made the decision not to inflame tensions any more than necessary. Those Guatemalans inside Belize were to be engaged. The BDF would be supported in doing so by British forces inside Belize there to defend the country. There was no hesitancy in that approach, one which was regarded at that point as being proportional. Meanwhile, diplomacy was the main approach taken. Guatemala was to be given the sternest message of British resolve to support Belize during its path to independence and told that Belize was still British territory in the meantime. Further border incursions would be met with force, not limited to just inside Belize either. This decision came from the top of the British Government with a certainty that the Guatemalans would listen. There was no military reinforcement of the garrison in Belize though. What was there was believed to be able to handle any more incursions, especially since the BDF had made a fine showing of itself already. Diplomacy and the implied threat of force, such was what London decided. However, the real decisions on how the conflict in Belize would go weren’t being made in London though: they were being decided in Guatemala City… and Havana too.
March 1982:
Before the overthrow of the last right-wing military dictatorship to hold power in Guatemala, the position of many of the allies of the new Guatemala which was now led by a left-wing military dictatorship when it came to Belize was that Belize should have its independence. Cuba, the Sandinistas before they took power and Panama were all then opposed to the idea that Belize belonged to Guatemala. That position had recently been reversed. Belize belonged to Guatemala, it always had! From Havana, Managua and Panama City, there came statements that Belize had been stolen from Guatemala in an imperialist theft. The colonial rule there by British was yet another historic injustice in Latin America that needed to be righted. There came only lies from Belize where the British said that the people in that territory wanted to become independent as a nation. In fact, Belizeans wanted to join with Guatemala.
The Cubans and the Nicaraguans had been saying this since last year with Panama now joining the chorus of claims of sovereignty being Guatemalan over the little stretch of land which lay between that country and the Caribbean Sea. Each nation had their own reasons for doing what they did in making these official public statements and engaging in diplomatic lobbying within international organisations. The Cubans were strengthening their alliance with their new allies by showing that there was full support from Cuba for Guatemala, Nicaragua and any other regime which might take power in the region that wanted to bring their country into the Havana-led Bloc of socialist nations. In addition, the Cubans were also upset at British ‘colonial interference’ in Grenada where there was a lot of Cuban activity and so sought to humble the British elsewhere in the region by having the Guatemalans get their way. Nicaragua was building stronger ties with Guatemala because Borge and the Ortegas were looking at the continuing counter-revolutionary problem on their northern border with Honduras: Guatemala lay on Honduras’ other border and Nicaragua wanted to squeeze that regime to bring the armed cross-border attacks to an end. Guatemala could help with that by threatening Honduras from the rear. Torrijos was out to portray Panama as a regional power and thought that he could read the way that the wind was blowing across the region: there was a winning side which he wanted to join. Moreover, Guatemala had a claim to Belize like his country had to the Canal Zone.
Cuba led the way in encouraging Guatemala to press its claim on Belize and to be prepared to enforce that if necessary. This was done by the diplomatic moves made abroad while along the frontier with that colony run from London, Guatemala started to deploy troops. Cuban aid was given in both: supporting the diplomacy and assisting with the logistics of the military build-up which took place through March. There were Cuban aircraft and helicopters inside Guatemala moving around soldiers and supplies. Furthermore, Cuba helped Guatemala conceal much of what was being done too. Nicaragua sent ‘volunteers’ to Guatemala starting in the middle of the month: these were serving military personnel who came under Guatemalan command. On the eastern side of the border, the troop build-up moved at breakneck pace with thousands of soldiers deploying into the jungle. There were further Guatemalan and Nicaraguan troops, special commando units, gathered around Puerto Barrios, which was Guatemala’s window on the Caribbean.
Britain believed that the military action in February and the strong diplomatic statements made would cause the Guatemalans to back off with their designs on Belize. They had thought that Britain wasn’t paying attention, such was the thinking in London, but once proved wrong, the Guatemalans would give up like they had so many times before when it came to Belize. London was heavily-focused on NATO affairs at this time yet there was still effort made to make sure that Guatemala understood. When motions were put at the UN, Britain quickly ensured that there was limited support for Guatemala. Many UN countries were involved in the effort to bring about Belizean independence and Britain had been working for that with what most saw as honest intentions. Guatemala’s threats towards Belize, to subsume it as well against the wishes of the people there, curried no favour with most of the international community. British Forces Belize and the BDF stayed on alert but there was a belief that Guatemala wasn’t going to act. If they were about to, the British Government believed that they would spot the preparations and have enough time to fly reinforcements to Belize. There was too the belief that the Guatemalans had to know that Britain would retake territory lost because the country had that capability.
This reading of the situation from London should have been correct. It wasn’t though. Castro was told by Andropov that if Guatemala invaded Belize, Moscow would have no objection. Active support wouldn’t necessary be forthcoming in public, but there would be no hostile measures from the Soviet Union. That lack of objection from Moscow made the Belize War of 1982 inevitable. Castro in turn gave the nod to Guatemala: restore the rightful claim to Belize for the Guatemalan people. In Havana, there was a belief that while there would be some heavy fighting, Britain would be unable to stop Guatemala from successfully invading annexing Belize. Cuba would act to help stop a British response too, anything short of actual war with the United Kingdom would be done on Castro’s orders. Neither Nicaragua nor Panama were aware of what Moscow had said and the approval given from Havana.
Guatemalan troops would attack come the beginning of April.
March 1982:
As was the intention, Gromyko’s statement on a Soviet withdrawal of troops from East Germany and nuclear weapons from across Eastern Europe at the end of the Andropov-Kennedy summit in East Berlin threw NATO into chaos. Politicians and diplomats had been stunned by what had been said. There were questions asked on whether this would actually happen. There was speculation was on whether this was all some great maskirovka. Comments were made on the details of the numbers: 25% of all soldiers or just combat soldiers, did that include military equipment and was the 25% figure for the following year relevant to the current number or the number at that point after the first withdrawals? When it came to the nuclear weapons, which ones and how was that all to be verified? Gromyko hadn’t been specific in his public statement and Andropov wasn’t the type of leader to take questions from interested parties. All the NATO countries could do was to wait to see what the Soviets were going to do, whether they were serious. Kennedy was confident that Andropov was going to keep his word: everyone else, including many of his fellow Americans, were convinced he was wrong and would be shown to be the fool that they were sure he was.
NATO had a series of meetings throughout March where heads of governments, foreign & defence ministers and NATO committees met to discuss what had occurred in East Berlin. The message which came out to the public at-large was that NATO wasn’t going to be matching this apparent Soviet withdrawal with their own, especially not at once. NATO’s strength was its defensive capability of West Germany and the wider NATO countries and there was no reason to lessen it. The US, the UK and France all had troops inside West Germany – and West Berlin too – separate from any NATO agreement. The West Germans wanted NATO troops to remain in their country and nuclear weapons as well: on that latter point, Chancellor Schmid expended a lot of his shaky political capital on that point, something to regret later. The Soviet statement was unprecedented but it was being dealt with: that was the message put out. There were rumblings behind the scenes of the American president having a different view to other NATO leaders as well as to what his vice president had to say when Glenn came to Western Europe at the end of the month. There were no splits at the top level of the United States government on this issue, everyone was assured, though that left out saying what the actual position was in the White House over the long-term if the Soviets did as they promised.
The Soviets kept their word. Four weeks after Gromyko’s shock announcement, they started to begin the process of doing what their foreign minister said they would: withdraw troops from East Germany. Going through communications channels left over from World War Two and the Allies Powers of that conflict, under whose legality Germany east and west was still occupied, the Soviets informed American, British and French military liaison teams of the first of those withdrawals. The USMLM, BRIXMIS and FMLM stations across East Germany – home to intelligence officers free(-ish) to spy across that country – were told about Military Unit # 60654. This was an infantry division which NATO had identified as being the 35th Motorised Rifle Division. It’s strength was of two hundred tanks, four hundred other armoured vehicles, one hundred and forty plus pieces of artillery & rocket launchers and almost thirteen thousand men. From its garrisons near to Potsdam, the formation was at the beginning of the process of withdrawing from East Germany. The spies were invited to watch the redeployment of Soviet soldiers returning home to the Motherland.
It had begun. What was said wasn’t going to happen, or if it did it would only be a sham, actually started to occur. That division from Potsdam wouldn’t be the first to depart. Soldiers and combat troops, plus equipment too, started to leave East Germany. This was one division of nineteen in East Germany. There were two more of them in Poland, another five in Czechoslovakia and four more in Hungary. Those being withdrawn weren’t going far: the Motherland wasn’t that far away. Out of East Germany this one division would move starting at the end of March and through into April. Other units, combat and non-combat, would follow. Those others might not being going all the way back inside the USSR’s borders and instead elsewhere in Eastern Europe. There was no word yet on Soviet nuclear weapons which Gromyko had spoken of being removed too.
While Soviet soldiers moved out of their barracks and the long convoys started heading eastwards, NATO would continue to have ‘heated debates’ – arguments in fact – over the sincerity of this behaviour from the Kremlin. Further strong discussions would follow in the months ahead upon how to react. Was it all a trick or was Andropov really sincere? Had Kennedy pulled off a masterstroke?
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 24, 2018 19:12:28 GMT
April 1982:
April 2nd saw Guatemala invade the neighbouring territory of Belize. The subsequent Belize War thus commenced with Guatemala engaged in open warfare with the United Kingdom afterwards. The Guatemalans should have waited much longer to be more organised though they were prodded to strike when they did by their foreign support. A major post-revolution military reformation was taking place with the armed forces of Guatemala at the time of the invasion and that was something that wasn’t planned to be completed before the end of the year at the earliest. Regardless, Guatemalan troops were sent over the border. Belize was to be liberated from foreign colonial rule and then annexed into the new Guatemala being built here in Central America. Guatemala went to war when it wasn’t ready, though the question had to be would it ever be truly ready for what was to come during the war that was started with Britain over a little stretch of land which most of the world had never heard of before let alone could find on a map?
The invasion commenced with two main attacks: one in the front and one in the rear. Cuban advisers planned this out for the Guatemalans though let them get on with it themselves. That frontal attack took place when the Brigada de Independencia struck across the frontier on land with a combined arms assault to cross into Belize, engage British and BDF troops which they would encounter and then push onto the colonial capital in the planned city of Belmopan. There was an unfinished road which was meant to link Guatemala to Belize City on the coast when it was finished – the road had been a matter long of contention due to its incompleteness – and that was meant to be the invasion corridor for the Independence Brigade to use to get up to Belmopan and then on towards to the former capital on the Caribbean shoreline. The Guatemalans focused on following that natural route deep into Belize despite it being the most obvious way: there was no other course to follow though. Armoured vehicles and a lot of infantry moved into Belize in this frontal attack. They engaged British and local Belize forces. Both the Gurkhas and the BDF fought a fighting withdrawal near the border and conducted flank attacks too. Guatemalan artillery had woken them up when the invasion commenced though had terrible accuracy. MiG-23 jets in the sky wearing the markings of Guatemala though flown by Cuban advisers (in Guatemalan uniform) were present as well, dropping bombs and making strafing runs. This external firepower was in support of the drive on Belmopan made by the Independence Brigade who pushed deep into Belize on that first day of the war. They took the defenders by surprise though that was a surprise which didn’t last very long. Parts of Belize came under Guatemalan occupation. Yet the Guatemalans paid dear for it. The defenders had their own artillery and air support too. There wasn’t much of it but it was put to use. The RAF Harriers were in action though events back in Belize City saw the need for them to relocate away from there: it brought them closer to the frontlines where they could bomb and strafe the Guatemalans. Soldiers from the Royal Regiment of Wales, a British Army infantry battle-group, fought alongside the Gurkhas and BDF. They had support from a detachment of armoured vehicles of their own though the two infantry companies fighting out of the forward base in Belmopan did have a tough time. Those MiG-23s improved their accuracy as the day went on. One was shot down by a Harrier and another lost to a Javelin missile fired from the ground, but the others caused a lot of death and destruction on the ground: they killed a lot of young Welshmen far from home. The Guatemalans were far short of Belmopan when darkness fell though had penetrated deep into Belize and pushed the defenders back and out of the way. The commander of the Independence Brigade was ordered to hold his position overnight and attack again in the morning. That night was a bloody one for those invaders as the defenders – tired but very motivated – engaged in attacks against a static force throughout the hours of darkness while at the same time guiding in more Harrier strikes from the three – of initially six – aircraft left available for combat operations.
The Harriers (assigned to No.1417 Flight) were flying from outside of Belmopan because Belize City had been assaulted by the Brigada Revolucionaria. This was another ad hoc unit with the Revolutionary Brigade being a merger of many different smaller formations all for their one mission. They made an assault on the Caribbean coast of Belize when the border attack commenced though arrived throughout the day using various means of travel and sustaining many losses in fighting to take over Belize City. The assault commenced with the arrival at the civilian airport of an aircraft supposedly coming up on a civil flight from Panama: the Cuban An-26 military transport (with Guatemalan markings) had come from much closer though. Once on the ground and with the airport authorities quick to alert the BDF, those passengers inside that aircraft were even quicker. Guatemalan commandos – plus their Cuban and Nicaraguan trainers wearing the ‘correct’ uniforms – poured out of the aircraft. There was a company of seventy men all of whom were supposed to undertake a brilliantly successful mission here to capture the airport intact… and then launch an attack into Belize City itself. That was quite the ask. Once the men were out, without clearance the An-26 took off and headed back to Guatemala. More aircraft were meant to be coming in afterwards bringing in what parts of the Revolutionary Brigade not being brought by sealift. At the airport and then on the edges of Belize City, the Guatemalans fought with the BDF. There was a counterattack made towards the airport but man-portable heavy weapons brought with the commandos drove back to BDF. British troops – the rest of the Royal Regiment of Wales – then arrived. This third company from that battalion group stationed in Belize had been on alert and while the Guatemalan strike was quite something, they forestalled the attempted rushing of Belize City. The platoon-sized detachment sent forward was stopped cold by British bullets. A counterattack was then made towards the airport by superior numbers – Welshmen covering the BDF – yet there were more aircraft in the sky. A pair of MiG-23s turned up and while one was shot down by a Harrier that had got airborne, the other destroyed that RAF aircraft with a missile shot and then bombed the defenders on the ground. More aircraft were coming in too, this time further transports from up out of Guatemala and they consisted of a wide variety of civilian aircraft pressed into military service and laden with invading troops. Two Harriers had meanwhile flown westwards towards the border but another Harrier came up to intercept this airborne flotilla. Unfortunately, before there could be a turkey shoot, a man-portable missile came up from the ground and blew the starboard wing off that aircraft: the pilot ejected from his doomed aircraft. Air support for the British was thus cancelled.
Over the next few hours, hundreds of Guatemalans arrived at the airport. More then came in by sea with small freighters arriving at the port. There was no set-piece amphibious assault across defended or undefended beaches, just troops getting off ships which arrived in the harbour. The BDF was run all over the city trying to fight them off and also support the company of British regular infantry which fell back from the airport first towards the city then away to the south when the numbers of invaders were appreciated. 1417 Flight had to abandon its facilities and one Harrier was unable to get off the ground due to a major maintenance issue: it was blown up to deny it to the Guatemalans. The Revolutionary Brigade engaged in urban fights with the local defenders, men who covered the British retreat yet also fought to defend their own nation. The Guatemalans were hampered by lack of serious heavy weapons and an opponent who knew the ground. Still, the city was occupied by nightfall. As to the airport, it was bombed by a Harrier doing some damage yet a lot of it was left intact for further Guatemalan use. That An-26 which had brought in the first men made two more flights in and out again. Leaving for the last time, it came under attack seconds after wheels-up. A BDF infantryman fired his M72 rocket-launcher straight upwards as the aircraft flew above him over the city. The unguided 66mm shell – designed to take out tanks (though out of date now) – exploded on contact with that Cuban aircraft and brought it down, letting the An-26 crash into the water just offshore. It was a lucky shot and one of the final acts of resistance by the last of the BDF scattered elements caught in Belize City as it finally fell.
Half a world away, a lion was about to roar in response. The defenders of Belize weren’t finished but they were cut off, left holding much ground and still capable of fighting. Britain was going to have to be fast to save them and stop all of Belize being taken though. Help from allies would be needed in doing so.
April 1982:
The British Government didn’t find out about the invasion of Belize from the BBC, certainty not from Radio Havana either. That was an urban myth in later years and a silly one at that. Yes, there was a government minister who was telephoned by BBC News asking if he was aware that Guatemala had gone to war with Britain by invading its territory, after the BBC had picked that up from Radio Havana who were first to declare to the world that the ‘liberation of Belize’ was underway. That minister did react with surprise and say something off-guard to the journalist, but the government already knew: he was at home unwell and had missed the call from his ministry. Regardless, that was not how the news reached London. The MOD knew before the Cuban media made their announcement as the reports of fighting had fast come there and the top level of the British Government was already assembling. Thatcher called in her Cabinet to an emergency meeting in Downing Street along with the service chiefs and intelligence officials. Further details came that the initial reports coming out of Belize were true. This wasn’t a border incursion but a full-scale invasion. Belizean soldiers and civilians were dead, so too were British service personnel. Belize was being flooded with Guatemalan troops who were bombing and shelling the country. What wasn’t supposed to happen, after Guatemala had been warned to back off, was happening.
The scale of the attack and the reports of the many deaths concentrated minds. This was no ordinary political crisis. The Cabinet was informed that as they met, more British and Belizean lives were certainly being lost. No one was in the mood to propose that anything less than a full response should be given to this. The country was at war. This wasn’t one chosen nor wanted yet one that Britain had got. Many things needed to be done. The Guatemalan advance had to be stopped and Belize freed of foreign occupation. Britain would need help from her allies. There would need to be domestic political moves made to unify the country’s leadership at a time like this. Those British troops still fighting, who were under quite the assault to overcome them, needed immediate support. The military officers and intelligence officials worked with the politicians to thrash out an immediate response pending one for the long term. Defence Secretary Nott came under pressure from his colleagues and failed to respond adequately; after the Cabinet meeting, the prime minister would ask for his resignation. It had been Nott who had strongly argued against a reinforcement of Belize last month when there had come February’s border incursions. Lord Carrington, the foreign secretary, had sided with Nott over others in Cabinet though he wasn’t asked to fall on his sword: he had more friends in Cabinet nor been so convinced that the Guatemalans wouldn’t act like they eventually had done.
Thatcher went to Buckingham Palace afterwards and had a meeting with the Queen. It was then to the House of Commons where in the early afternoon, she made a statement to her fellow MPs in a hastily-arranged gathering. There was silence as British politicians listened at first to how the attack was described as being without warning and then the reports coming of a lot of deaths. Once the prime minister told them that Britain wouldn’t stand for this, the House solemnly nodded in support before giving a ‘hear-hear’. There came cheers afterwards when Thatcher told them that the invasion would be repulsed, British forces would push the Guatemalans back and the Belize would be freed of foreign occupation. Almost all of the MPs present were with the government on this: the dissenters, there were always those, were few and far between plus chose this moment to shut up. The leaders of the opposition parties at once offered full support for the government’s choice of action and asked for the House to remember those lives lost already. Party politics weren’t shelved, just put aside on a day like this. There would come questions in the coming days, many questions on how this all happened and a lot of finger-pointing would also occur. That was afterwards though. Thatcher had a private meeting with those opposition leaders where as Privy Council members, there was more that they were informed about than was openly said in the House. Afterwards, it was back to Downing Street. A War Cabinet was being formed – technically a ‘crisis committee’ whose membership would fluctuate – and there would be a new defence secretary present: Leon Brittan. Those promises made to the House (carried on the BBC News’ afternoon broadcast to the wider country) about Belize needed to be acted upon. The troops fighting in Belize needed support and relief while there would at once have to a major effort to direct British military attention into the Caribbean.
Belize wasn’t in the area covered by the North Atlantic Treaty which formed the basis of NATO. There was no serious discussion among Cabinet of Britain calling upon NATO allies either for help to take an active role in the fighting against Guatemala that the government knew was going to be no easy task. British forces would do that themselves. Other, indirect support was needed though with logistics and basing for military moves while intelligence support would be invaluable too. Britain had island possessions in the Caribbean and so too did her NATO allies France and the Netherlands. Both countries were asked for assistance in getting British reinforcements to Belize and supporting the war through their islands. The Dutch gave a favourable answer as long as their island nations weren’t used for the purpose of attacks directly: staging of transportation and refuelling was fine, especially as all costs were to be covered by London. With France, Britain had a stroke of luck… though the French didn’t see it that way. President Mitterrand offered full French support with bases, logistics and to use French military forces to temporary cover NATO roles vacated by British forces moving towards the Caribbean. The generous offer came because Paris was informed that the French consulate in Belmopan had been bombed by Guatemalan aircraft on attack missions over the territory’s capital. Naturally, the Guatemalans hadn’t been targeted that building and the damage hadn’t been that major nor any French lives lost, but it was enough for Mitterrand. The facilities which France could offer Britain to use in the Caribbean were plentiful and in excellent condition. The reassignment to NATO role by French forces on the eastern side of the Atlantic was a bonus too for it freed up British forces with immediate effect.
Commonwealth countries from island nations in the Caribbean to the bigger Anglosphere ones had been involved (in different ways) when it came to the upcoming Belizean independence in the face of Guatemalan diplomatic opposition. The outrage of the Guatemalan attack brought about a good response for the British side. The little countries of Antigua & Barbuda, Barbados, Dominica, St. Lucia and St. Vincent & the Grenadines had all been involved in Belizean independence preparations as well as expressing joint concerns with regards to the situation in their neighbouring Commonwealth country Grenada to Britain recently as well. They were willing to open their airports and seaports, all for non-combat missions. Australia, Canada and New Zealand, further Commonwealth nations and also members of various security and intelligence alliances with Britain, gave affirmation of a localised increase in intelligence support through the Caribbean. Canada copied the French offer of replacing British forces in NATO roles for the duration of the conflict in Belize. In addition, the Canadians informed London that they were sending a warship down to the Caribbean with an active role in cooperation with Britain to be worked out later.
Support from the United States, Britain’s supposed biggest ally, was quite the complicated matter. Very quickly, London found out that Washington was going to be difficult when it came to the matter of Belize and Britain’s war with Guatemala. The Kennedy Administration had ‘concerns’ about the need for open warfare in Central America. There was no taking of Guatemala’s side, nothing like that, but instead a call for talks to be had if a ceasefire could be called in Belize. A ceasefire? Negotiations? When Thatcher’s Cabinet heard these things spoken of, there was an immediate anger as well as a realisation of why this was the case. Kennedy was getting his own back for events last year where Anglo-American relations had been strained. He was out for petty revenge and was willing to see British lives lost and British territory subsumed by a foreign nation just because he could. Britain wanted logistical and intelligence support from the United States, no more than that. Kennedy spoke though of seeing an end to the fighting. He was willing to see talks commence which would leave Guatemala with what they had taken already and in a position to gobble up the rest of Belize afterwards. No, no and no again. That wasn’t going to be allowed to happen. Britain pushed ahead regardless with the official requests made for that assistance, waiting on a formal response beyond Kennedy’s opening comments made through Mondale and Muskie. Glenn took part in a trans-Atlantic phone call with Thatcher and informed her of his president’s position on wanting to see an end to the fighting before it spread beyond Belize. Thatcher informed him that London wanted the same thing: an end to the fighting in Belize. That could only be achieved by Guatemalan troops leaving Belize, either of their own accord or after being driven out of the territory. Either way, Britain had been the victim of an intentional attack with lives lost and internationally-recognised territory invaded. There would be a fight made to restore the status quo ante, nothing more.
Within days of the invasion, as Britain worked with some allies and argued with another, it became apparent how deeply involved Cuba was in the war. It was Cuba which had toppled the former regime in Guatemala City after before eliminating Somoza’s rule down in Nicaragua. While Castro had done so, Ford had sat on his hands and done nothing. Kennedy was now willing to let Guatemala do what they were in Belize with the remark made that Britain was being ‘unreasonable’: a comment made to the Canadian ambassador when he was trying to impress upon the president of the need for American involvement. To say London was furious when that was heard would be quite the understatement. As to Cuba, that island nation was shipping arms across Central America and supporting the regime over in Grenada too with more weapons. The ongoing, low-level guerrilla activity in both El Salvador and Honduras was Cuban-backed too. The United States knew this, Britain knew this. Cuba was doing all of this and the Kennedy Administration wasn’t lifting a finger to stop them. The president was focused on his relationship with Moscow and seemingly out to see an end to the Cold War that way. Who was it who supplied Cuba and kept the country afloat? That was the Soviet Union. Kennedy was being told by many in his own country that Cuba had to be stopped and that they were using Guatemala as a proxy in their own aims to take over all of Central America but he wouldn’t go along with that line of thinking.
Britain continued on regardless of the lack of American support, using their own resources and getting help from other allies, while in the meantime Kennedy was still talking of a negotiated settlement and giving peace a chance. Cuba called upon the United States to allow for the ‘liberation’ of Belize by Guatemalan troops. Gromyko was at the UN and claiming that too Belizeans wanted to be liberated from British colonial rule. Kennedy eventually gave the nod for intelligence support to assist the British, including much help given behind the scenes in forestalling Cuban deniable operations to interfere with that. A UN move to censure Guatemala was passed without American opposition in the end too: Kennedy had considered doing so, pushing for his ideas of some sort of negotiation, but Britain had too much support from Commonwealth allies and then Western European nations as well. No resolution from the security Council came though because the Soviets made it clear one would be vetoed so Britain pressed ahead without one being stopped like that. All while Britain was still fighting and the alliance with the United States had come under its biggest strain since 1956.
Down in Belize, the Belmopan Pocket was forming. Through the first week of April and into the second too, British forces in Belize fell back to an inland position that was slowly being surrounded. Help was on the way and those there just had to hold. The Guatemalans pushed onwards with their Independence Brigade towards the capital city while the rest of the Revolutionary Brigade arrived along the coast with more men landing at Belize City and others to the southeast at Punta Gorda too. Those fighting were in trouble though not yet beaten. Superior numbers and then a lack of air cover pushed them into the defensive position which they had to take up: the Harriers which hadn’t been destroyed by enemy action were grounded due to the loss of their base with refuelling, rearming and repair facilities in the sudden way that had come. The Belmopan Pocket was crammed with soldiers, British and Belizean alike, but also civilians. Ammunition wouldn’t last forever and nor would the ability to resist when the casualties kept mounting. Guatemalan artillery remained poorly-directed but their Cuban-flown MiGs relentlessly attacked the ever-shrinking pocket.
Help was coming. Hold, the defenders were told, just hold for a little while longer. The Royal Navy was coming, the Royal Air Force was on its way. The British Army was sending men and so too were the Royal Marines. Soon, very soon, the defenders would get that assistance.
April 1982:
Operation WATERFALL was the codename given for British Armed Forces operations in Belize and the Caribbean; the name chosen at random using MOD computers. Where WATERFALL was written on all orders and taskings, be they combat or logistical, full priority above everything else was given. WATERFALL was partially based on existing plans for a reinforcement mission to Belize based upon the long-standing Guatemalan threat to the territory, though that all needed a sudden upgrade in all areas following what had happened. The previous plans had been based on a cross-border threat. What the Guatemalans had done was go further than that and secure the coastline of Belize therefore trapping British forces inside the country within the interior. Moreover, it was very soon clear that Cuban interference of the non-combat kind – though with the possibility of that expanding further needing to be considered into everything – was making WATERFALL even more difficult to achieve. Regardless of all difficulties encountered, diplomatic and militarily, WATERFALL went ahead. Belize wasn’t going to be lost nor the service personnel still fighting there abandoned.
The Royal Navy was at the forefront of WATERFALL operations. When the invasion took place, part of the Fleet was on exercises spread from the Gibraltar Straits down to the Spanish Canary Islands. The annual Springtrain exercises were taking place with missile firings and anti-submarine warfare practice. Many of the ships were diverted at once to the Caribbean, sent from training for warfare to the real thing. Those destroyers and frigates there were joined by more ships and submarines coming out of Britain. There was a major rush on with some things done in haste which needed later correction in terms of the supply situation for those ships. Both aircraft carriers that the Royal Navy had in service, the older HMS Hermes and the newer HMS Invincible, were to be joined by a couple of dozen further vessels. There were warships, support ships, amphibious ships and submarines. These came from bases across the country: Devonport & Portsmouth on the South Coast and the Clyde & Rosyth up in Scotland. Aircraft for the carriers joined them – plenty of Sea Harriers – along with many helicopters. The destination for the Fleet would be the Caribbean with vessels going in several waves to follow those Springtrain ships out ahead.
The Royal Air Force had a major NATO role and out of all of the British Armed Forces, there was less of a focus for the RAF on ‘out of area’ operations. Nonetheless, under WATERFALL, the RAF was called upon to deploy. There were combat units and non-combat units assigned to move to the Caribbean. They were sent to several islands across the region with independence nations and European colonial possessions being those where they would be stationed throughout the conflict or as jumping off points. Harriers, Jaguars and Phantoms formed the combat force; joined later by Vulcan bombers. For surveillance and intelligence there were some Canberras and Nimrods. Hercules’ and VC10s provided transport, with the VC10s used alongside Victors for airborne refuelling missions. The RAF sent many helicopters with Chinooks, Pumas and Wessexs also deployed. Getting all of these aircraft to the region was quite the challenge, sustaining them in-theatre was going to be more. The aircraft came with men and other equipment to support their flight operations then there were the issues of fuel, armaments and so much more to be addressed too. WATERFALL was a big deal for the RAF and the deployment of quite a bit of the RAF left gaps in NATO defences which had to be covered by the militaries of other nations.
5th Infantry Brigade was a new unit only stood up earlier in the year for the British Army. It was assigned for the out of area role beyond NATO though in a general war scenario would see action on NATO’s flanks. For the WATERFALL mission, the brigade was given the task of fulfilling the main British Army contribution to the fighting on land in Belize. The brigade was assigned large combat support and service support elements for its mission alongside a major combat contingent: in reality, it was oversized for the task eventually with all that was added. The 2nd & 3rd battalions of the Parachute Regiment were assigned at once, the latter unit being held at a high state of readiness as the Spearhead Battalion. They were joined by the 3rd battalion of the Royal Anglian Regiment (which was due to go to Belize next month for a six-month deployment and nearly ready before the invasion) and the 1st battalion of the 7th Gurkhas. The four infantry battalions were within 5th Brigade along with a squadron – a company-sized unit – of armoured vehicles from the Blues and Royals: Scorpions and Scimitars.
The Royal Marines were sent to the Caribbean too with the 3rd Commando Brigade assigned for the mission. Their brigade was assigned a British Army battalion of Foot Guards – 1st battalion of the Welsh Guards –, a unit which had just been replaced in that Spearhead role by Paras and was available for immediate action. Three battalion-sized units of Royal Marines formed the bulk of the 3rd Brigade: 40 Commando, 41 Commando and 42 Commando. 40 & 42 were fully-regular units with 41 being a formation stood down temporarily last year before being revived to act as a part-reserve unit in the face of a difficult international situation. That battalion was added too fast with reservists, plus regulars drawn from 45 Commando which was to stay in Scotland and not deploy as part of WATERFALL (they were pretty miffed to be left out as a whole unit), and the 3rd Brigade was complete. Both the British Army and Royal Marines brigades were brought under a non-divisional command headquarters in the form of Land Forces Belize as together they effectively formed a small division; there were those already on the ground in Belize which could reasonable called a third, smaller brigade too which were also brought under this headquarters. All of these troops were drawn from the best-trained units available for taking the fight to the Guatemalans: an opponent which wasn’t nowhere near as well-trained in comparison to those meant to one day fight in NATO missions. There were equipment shortages for the British – ‘the borrowers’ they were often known as – but when it came to taking on the Guatemalans, even when supported by Cuban and Nicaraguan volunteer attachments, they were believed capable of winning. Land Forces Belize was also given a large contingent of SAS and SBS special forces attachments to show the Guatemalans what commando operations were really about.
The Belmopan Pocket continued to hold out and did so in time for the British to start arriving in the Caribbean. The Guatemalans hadn’t necessarily shot their bolt following the immediate attack but their advances had slowed. They couldn’t get anywhere near the colonial capital in the middle of the territory and seemed content to shell and bomb those caught in the encirclement while meanwhile securing the coast. The Gurkhas, the Royal Welsh Regiment and the BDF units caught in the middle carried on the fighting. There was an airstrip which they had control over too, something that fast became their lifeline. Guatemalan A-37 Dragonfly attack aircraft bombed it and then the Guatemalan Independence Brigade tried to advance towards it but it remained in British hands. It was through there that the first reinforcements within the WATERFALL mission started to arrive come April 10th: eight long days after the invasion started. RAF Hercules transports, staging out of Jamaica (which offered conditional support to what was called a Commonwealth effort to defend Belize though in reality a British one), couldn’t land there for the airstrip wasn’t big enough, but several of them made low and slow passes above with supplies dropped on that first day: ammunition especially. Another Hercules dropped SAS men outside. These were combat missions which the Hercules’ undertook because their flights faced interference from the Guatemalans and those MiGs flown by their Cuban allies. That interference was countered by a lead detachment of RAF Phantoms flying out of George Town’s airport across in the Cayman Islands. The Guatemalans were informed by the Cubans of the appearance of those Phantoms across in the Caymans and ‘their’ MiGs were supposed to be ready for the Phantoms. They weren’t. A total of three MiG-23s went down on the first day, two shot down directly and one which crashed trying to make a landing back over in Guatemala. All those were lost for zero RAF losses. Those losses were unsustainable for the Guatemalans. The Cubans had only deployed ten to support the liberation of Belize and had already lost two during the invasion. Half of the force was now gone. A whole squadron of Phantoms was on its way to the Caymans while there were Sea Harriers on the pair of Royal Navy carriers. There were Cuban MiG-21s also being ‘transferred’ to Guatemalan service and the Cubans still had more aircraft in their own service. Nonetheless, it was a very bad start to air operations over Belize for the Cubans who’d felt confident that they could control the skies.
Early the next morning, the Hercules’ returned to Belizean skies. This time they made airdrops of soldiers and supplies rather than just supplies and special forces. Two companies from 3 PARA were flown into the Belmopan Pocket. There were some parachute engineers as well: British Army and RAF men who were fast in setting about getting work started on the airstrip at Belmopan. MiGs were spotted on the edge of radar coverage from the Phantoms but this time they didn’t intervene. The backing off was unexpected yet welcome. Thousands of British troops (many being non-combat soldiers) were arriving across the Caribbean at islands stretching from the Caymans & Jamaica to Antigua & Barbados & Dominica & St. Lucia to the French-controlled Guadeloupe & Martinique to Aruba & Curacao under Dutch administration. They all had to get to Belize eventually. Some in through the airhead to be established at Belmopan, others through the means of an amphibious operation in the early stages of development. The Royal Navy had ships through the Caribbean now as well with the majority of the Fleet steaming westwards. Cuban aircraft first out of Grenada were present in the skies and then more came from mainland Cuba. The possibility of ‘an accident’ occurring was fresh in the minds of the British and there was a readiness to respond to that should it occur. HMS Coventry, a Royal Navy destroyer, was near to the Caymans as British forces arrived there to help remind the Cubans that those islands was British territory and would be defended from any attack no matter who any attackers disguised themselves as. Fighting continued inside Belize while the wait was on with those Paras helping to secure the perimeter of the Belmopan Pocket and the SAS men – selected from those who knew Belize very well – raiding out into the jungle. A pair of A-37s showed up later that day where the MiGs didn’t dare and paid for that with both being downed as the Phantoms continued to make their presence known. The following days – April 12th through to April 15th – saw a major reinforcement of what was on the ground in Belize. The rest of 3 PARA, followed by 2 PARA and then many 5th Brigade assets, arrived and made certain that the Belmopan Pocket wasn’t about to fall. The Hercules’ kept coming and making their airdrops at low altitude of men, supplies and equipment: meanwhile the efforts to hastily expand their airstrip went on unabated so it could soon see them landing and making proper use of it.
At sea and in the air, the war stepped up a gear. The French naval base at Fort Saint-Louis in Martinique had been made available to the British and that was an excellent staging point for Royal Navy in-theatre making their progress towards combat easier. The Fleet built with the pair of carriers as their centrepiece closed in upon Belize to link up with those Springtrain ships already in the area but not too close without direct air cover. Once the Hermes and the Invincible arrived, their Sea Harriers were in the skies off the coast of Belize and covered the forward movement of other warships that went close. They protected the frigates HMS Yarmouth and then HMS Argonaut from Guatemalan air attack when the two of them were out seeking Guatemalan war shipping coming up from Guatemala’s Caribbean coast to Belize City. The Harriers got a lone MiG-23 and then a pair of MiG-21s. These further losses of aircraft and the Cuban pilots who flew them, for no gain at all, were a disaster for the Guatemalans who were unable to secure the skies even with all that Cuba had sent to help them. Those British warships, joined by a submarine beneath the water, were busy cutting the maritime supply route into Belize and leaving those on the Belizean coast on their own. From out of the Caymans, the Phantoms there covered the movement into Belize of RAF Harriers. These had made the long journey from Britain to the Caribbean first by ship and then later island-hopping from friendly base to friendly base. Now they would have a new base: inside Belize. Soon enough, they would be in action flying from the Belmopan Pocket. The Jaguars and the detachment of Vulcan bombers in the region had yet to see action but they would soon enough. There was still the need to set up the necessary infrastructure for them: it had been less than two weeks after all. There was still a lot that needed to be ready for other operations as well. The hurry in the mass deployment had seen problems crop up which were now being slowly fixed once in-theatre. The rest of the 5th Brigade needed to be put into Belize and the 3rd Brigade with its Royal Marines were making ready for an amphibious assault on the coast: the Royal Navy ships ahead, plus that submarine, were making ready for that but these things couldn’t be done overnight. Cuban attempts at intimidation continued as well with there being the detection of one of their submarines near the Fleet plus air activity of theirs as well. Strong words were being exchanged by diplomats on that matter yet the main focus for Britain was retaking what was theirs and getting the Guatemalans out of Belize. Talk of giving peace a chance, coming from Havana and Moscow, even Washington, no longer mattered now that the serious fighting had started. Through the rest of April and into May, the Belize War could continue.
April 1982:
Kennedy had been out of step on his initial reaction to the Belize War. He realised this… eventually. There was a political and public mood domestically within America in favour of the conflict from a British point of view. The UK was doing what the United States should be: engaging proxies for Cuban aggression in Central America and the Caribbean. A few isolated voices had shouted loud at first about colonialism and Redcoats but they were drowned out. This was Guatemala, a country which had just recently turned communist and was in league with Havana and thus Moscow. There’d been some American nuns who’d disappeared – presumed dead – down in El Salvador right before Belize was invaded and while that was a different conflict, it was generally all the same in the minds of many. Communist aggression in America’s backyard upset the US public and brought forth strong reactions from many politicians. When Kennedy had come out in favour of a peaceful settlement to the conflict, that flew in the face of what the American people were hearing about Guatemalan atrocities in Belize – some true, others not so much – and how those were all linked towards Castro down in Cuba. Western Europe and Canada took Britain’s side. The Soviets joined with Cuba in calling for an end to the fighting. Kennedy found himself perceived to be on the side of Moscow and Havana. That was something that wasn’t helped by criticism of his actions whereas British support in their fight to defend Belize was at first refused by the White House. The president didn’t want to give in on this matter, he moved beyond the actual issues to a matter of principle (his pride in reality) but events were overtaking him. The British took the war to the Guatemalans and it was revealed that some of those Guatemalans in their aircraft were actually Cubans. Britain was doing what many in the United States said their country should be doing: fighting the Cubans. The prophecies of doom for the country pushed by a few influential think-tanks that had many supporters, those which said that there was a grand Soviet plan for Central America where one day soon the whole region would turn red and therefore the United States would be isolated from South America, ideas mocked by the Kennedy Administration, suddenly looked a bit less crazy.
Kennedy didn’t reverse track and throw his full support behind Britain, but he cut out his opposition. British access of American military facilities on Bermuda – a British administered island – were opened up to them and there was also the refuelling of their ships (plus a Canadian one heading down to the Caribbean) suddenly allowed in Puerto Rico. These were done behind the scenes and along with United States diplomatic action, this all helped shift American official support from active neutrality, even opposition, to the Belize War to one of indirect support. The damage had already been done though. Paradoxically, in the coming years when the United States was in trouble, Britain would take a pragmatic approach and get over what Kennedy had done when realising that their security was tied to that of his country; other nations not so much when they saw just what kind of ally the United States actually was under the thirty-ninth president. Regardless, that was in the future. At the moment, the Belize War continued.
The airstrip inside the Belmopan Pocket was open to receive Hercules’. In they came laden with men and gear. The turn-around times for the transport aircraft were quick as they arrived from Jamaica and the Caymans before flying back out again. There were Harriers armed with Sidewinders flying out of the overworked airstrip too but the transports were still covered by Phantoms flying from the Caymans and now Sea Harriers from the Royal Navy carriers off-shore. No more MiG-23s showed up to try and influence this but there were high-speed, low-level runs made by the nimble MiG-21s which Cuba had sent to Guatemala. Air defences for British forces on the ground in Belize were still rather ad hoc with radars and missiles being set up and coverage patchy. That showed. One of the Hercules’ was hit by a MiG which managed to escape afterwards; the Hercules crashed into the jungle in a fireball killing all of those aboard. The 5th Brigade was still in the process of arriving and needed to be brought in by air: such an attack, if repeated, which it probably would be now the Guatemalans were getting desperate, put all that under threat. Back in London, the War Cabinet authorised direct action to put those MiG-21s out of business. A strike would take place inside Guatemala whereas before the war had been limited to Belize. Intelligence information had been passed on from the Americans (the intelligence sharing was working) as to where those MiGs were flying from. There were Jaguars in-theatre, tactical strike aircraft so far unused, but the distance was long and would require a lot of air refuelling making the mission dependent upon nothing going wrong. There were some other RAF strike aircraft chosen instead to hit the airbase at Santa Elena in northern Guatemala. Those were Vulcan bombers. The Vulcans flew from Barbados and were given tanker support by Victors flying from Aruba (the Dutch wouldn’t allow for a combat mission from their island but had no issue with in-flight refuelling) as they proceeded westwards, crossing above Belize first and then towards Santa Elena. Four bombers located the airbase and dropped their payloads of twenty-one high-explosive 1000lb bombs atop of it. Accuracy was good, not brilliant, but enough to do immense damage. That was the end of the MiG threat from Santa Elena for a while. A second attack was carried out simultaneously and to the south from where the four remaining MiG-23s were flying from, down near Puerto Barrios. This time it was Sea Harriers from the Invincible with SBS men on the ground nearby as well. The Sea Harriers flew in low, dropped their bombs and flew back to their carrier. The SBS went in afterwards, among the chaos post-attack with sniping done against key officers identified as trying to sort out the mess and the use too of an anti-material rifle to take shots against a Guatemalan A-37 getting ready to lift-off and chase after those Sea Harriers (that would have been a short flight / fight indeed), causing it to explode on the runaway when its fuel tank was hit.
There came a push out from the Belmopan Pocket as the month ended. The Paras and Gurkhas (the latter including those in Belize before the invasion and joined by further men arriving) went with the company of armoured vehicles brought in for use by the Blues and Royals on the offensive. The Guatemalans with their Independence Brigade couldn’t hold back the tide of oncoming the British attack, not when the British had control of the air. An advance began to drive the Guatemalans back westwards, further out from Belmopan. The SAS were busy raiding through the jungle meanwhile and while they had some bad luck trying to ambush the headquarters of that opposition brigade, they did manage to shoot-up a helicopter park hidden in the jungle. American-supplied UH-1 Hueys (sent during the Sixties) and Cuban-supplied Mi-24s (more recent transfers) were caught on the ground and especially were their aircrews. The jungle was left littered with bodies and the burning wrecks of helicopters destroyed. 5th Brigade pushed onwards, rolling through the Guatemalans. Night attacks by British infantry were favoured as in the dark they fought best. Things didn’t always go to plan and there were some set-backs, but when they did work, they worked excellently. The Independence Brigade was taken apart. A retreat was started, a ‘temporary retrograde manoeuvre in light of the current tactical situation’ according to their commander. He’d survive the war, evading British SAS efforts to kill him, only to be shot afterwards by his own side for this clear retreat. There were some Cubans and Nicaraguans among those who fought the British in this fighting in Central Belize. Some of those advisors died alongside the Guatemalans while others were instrumental in helping organise the retreat which took place. Two others ended up captured: one from each nation. The Cuban was wounded and despite all efforts to save him, he died in the jungle. The Nicaraguan captain captured by the Gurkhas – given a scare by the threat of their horrid-looking little knives – talked there upon capture and then later when in British captivity. He knew a lot about his own country’s involvement in the Belize War and that of the Cubans too. Along the Belizean coast, the Royal Navy had ships sailing up and down among the barrier reef offshore. There were already SBS men on the ground doing silent beach reconnaissance work but surveying had to be done first over the water. The natural environment was looked at and so too whether the Guatemalans had mined the few approaches for sea-going vessels to get into Belize. What was found was suitable. 3rd Brigade was on its way and the Royal Marines could be coming late to the party which the Paras & Gurkhas were already having but they would be coming in-strength. Guatemalan air interference had ceased and from out of the Caymans there was plenty of RAF air coverage along with what the Royal Navy carriers had to offer. Ashore, the Guatemalans with their Revolutionary Brigade were dug-in across some sites though left others wide open. This wouldn’t be a Normandy. There was no needed to send Royal Marines charging into prepared defences with machine guns, barbed wire and beach mines ready for them. An open, undefended site was chosen instead. At the beginning of May, the 3rd Brigade would be making their landing. Before then, there was naval gunfire too be done and aerial bombardment as well. The Guatemalans were no longer able to stop this. Some voices back in Guatemala City were already speculating about possibly getting out of this war but those voices were few. The way the war was going was out of their hands: others would decide when it would be over.
May 1982:
The Royal Marines arrived in Belize on May Day. Their landing was done right before the rainy season began in this tropical country. They needed to get ashore in amphibious operation now and start their assault on their opponents rather than wait for the weather to get too difficult to operate in. There were few locations for the assault planners to select: few that didn’t have good access from the sea, weren’t immediately surrounded by difficult-to-pass jungle and where there was little Guatemalan military presence. Exploitation inland from the beachhead was another consideration factored in because taking a bit of shoreline and then being able to do nothing afterwards would rather negate the point of the entry into Belize of the 3rd Commando Brigade. Those Royal Marines landed just south of Belize City, in behind the headland on which that city sat. The Western Highway, the inland road which linked the former territorial capital on the coast to Belmopan Pocket within the interior, was right behind the landing site. The city’s port was close by too, the bigger commercial port and not the smaller historical harbour in the older parts of Belize City. 40 Commando made the initial landing: there was only enough room in the selected area for just one of the battalion-sized units within the brigade at once. They came in landing craft from the amphibious ship HMS Fearless and were guided in by SBS men on the beaches ahead plus within the jungle on the flanks. It was a silent approach, one without the aid of naval gunfire, and made in the early hours long before dawn. The Royal Marines hit the beach and moved inland, turning to the north where the port was in their advance. 42 Commando, coming from HMS Intrepid, were right behind them with the second battalion landing less than an hour later. There were some issues with communication and navigation with the second wave – one company landed pretty far south and nowhere near where they were meant to be – but was important was that the Guatemalans didn’t oppose them. Once 42 Commando had joined 40 Commando ashore, then the silent attack became noisy. 40 Commando made a landward attack on the port, coming from behind when the Guatemalan defences were pointed seaward; 42 Commando (minus their ‘missing’ company) struck inland and hit troops from the Revolutionary Brigade stationed inland who were supposedly in a reinforcement role for those around Belize City. The noisy attack came with the Royal Marines using heavy crew-served weapons such as man-portable rocket-launchers, mortars and machine guns. Moreover, the skies were filled with incoming shells from warships offshore – the Canadian destroyer HMCS Iroquois with its five-inch gun included among the gun-line of Royal Navy ships –, Sea Harriers dropping bombs and fire support from some Fleet Air Arm helicopters too.
41 Commando and 1 Welsh Guards would follow the lead elements of the 3rd Brigade in arriving into Belize through the rest of the day. The Foot Guards were meant to go into Belize City itself and had been training for that (as much as can be done while aboard ship anyway) leaving Royal Marines to fight outside. 40 Commando was unfortunately dragged into fighting on the edge of the city after taking the port when they couldn’t defeat the Guatemalans by pinning them down. A withdrawal was made and the Royal Marines followed them. The brigade commander allowed that to continue because the port facilities were secure with only partial demolition done when the majority of pre-placed charges had been eliminated by SBS underwater engineers and he sent the 1 Welsh Guards in early. Guatemalan soldiers were engaged through the southern part of the city with the British being as careful as they could to avoid civilian casualties. The Guatemalans weren’t dug in but if left alone, they surely would soon be. During the day, as the last of them were hunted down before they could get to the crossings over the Belize River which cut through the centre of the city, those troops pursuing them would discover signs of what had been going on during the month-long occupation of Belize City. The Guatemalans had been committing atrocities. Rape and pillage was one thing, organised massacres were something else. There was an ethnic dimension to it more than anything else. The British knew that the Guatemalans had been killed ‘guerrillas’ due to communications intercepts but not on the scale which was discovered. The men who’d done this were those serving in an army meant to be different from the one it had replaced. A lot of the men, be they once rebels or government soldiers under Montt, had experience of doing this to civilians. There were hotly-contested allegations afterwards that some of those Guatemalans who died while trying to escape from British custody might have been shot by British soldiers and marines whose blood was up at what they had seen. There was a lot of fighting in the city and Guatemalans lost their lives in many ways. Others decided to run into the jungle, try to hide within Belize City or surrender. In the heat of battle, things can happen where there doesn’t need to be a full answer. That first day ashore for 3rd Brigade saw about a third of the city recaptured and a lot of progress made inland. 41 Commando moved northwards, avoiding Belize City, and heading for the distant airport: Guatemalan troops were trying to direct attention inwards away from their outward defences all the while under shelling and air attack. 42 Commando cut off the coastal regions from the interior and reached the town of Hattieville where there was a crossroads and nearly halfway to the most distant positions of the 5th Brigade in the Belmopan Pocket.
The Guatemalans were finished inside Belize. Most of the Independence Brigade was withdrawing back to the border and the Revolutionary Brigade was being beaten back from Belize City. May 3rd saw the airport taken, the following day saw the town of Ladyville on the coast fall. What was left of Guatemalan troops who’d been in control of Belize City beforehand were trapped against the shore. The skies were under complete British control and so was the sea. The Belmopan Pocket was no longer an encircled gathering of near-beaten British and BDF troops but rather the base of the drive back towards the border from where the 5th Brigade was racing to get there. The War Cabinet back in London vetoed a planned operation to send part of 3 PARA forward in helicopters to the border town at Benque Viejo to cut them off. It sounded too risky in terms of casualties (many had already been incurred) and an operation not thought out properly with proper reconnaissance done. They were correct: a helicopter assault on Benque Viejo would have been a bloodbath with the Guatemalans having moved their Brigada de la Libertad there complete with many anti-aircraft guns and armoured vehicles. Nonetheless, Guatemala’s war to ‘liberate’ Belize was over with that retreat ongoing in the jungle and the troops near the sea ready to give in.
The last-ditch move by the Guatemalans with their Freedom Brigade was the final independent decision made in the Belize War by the revolutionary government in Guatemalan City. It was sent to ‘correct’ the situation in Belize. Should it have advanced – and not ran into those Paras just inside the border –, the British were prepared to unleash a lot of aerial fire power upon it. The RAF had their Harriers and Jaguars and even Vulcan strikes were planned with bomb-runs made over the jungle. The Freedom Brigade didn’t move beyond Benque Viejo though for on May 5th, Cuba ended the war. Castro had started the Belize War and saw it as his decision to bring it to a conclusion. Things hadn’t gone as planned and Cuba’s interests were being endangered. Too much international attention was being paid to Cuba’s role in the conflict already and if it continued, that could make things very difficult. Andropov and the Soviets were telling him that Kennedy was weak and wouldn’t do anything. Maybe they were right, maybe they were wrong. Cuba had an intelligence network inside the United States. It was a small one, nothing like what the Soviets had, but one Castro was proud of for it kept tabs on Cubans exiles in America. It was them, those in that infernal Miami, who he worried about when it came to their sudden upsurge in activity in trying to shape American public opinion against Cuba’s proxy war in Belize using Guatemala. Kennedy was engaged in another dispute with Congress, as before back with his healthcare bill. Castro feared that as had been seen in the recent past, when the president faced domestic problems at home he did something abroad. The Soviets told Havana that Kennedy wouldn’t do that with Cuba as he had staked his position on opposing the Belize War but Castro didn’t want to risk it. He was wrong, dead wrong on this, but didn’t know that. He pulled the rug from out under the Guatemalans and instructed a government reshuffle in Guatemalan City where the few and isolated voices calling for Guatemala to get out of the war suddenly had influence. The Committee for the Revolution removed key people and the rump council took a vote. Mexico was used as a conduit to pass the word to the British that Guatemala wanted a ceasefire and was prepared to pull out the last of its troops.
Difficulties held up the start of the ceasefire for almost a day and a half but then it came. The Belize War was over. There would be withdrawals made of Guatemalan troops and the surrender of others in-place. Prisoners on both sides would need to be exchanged: the Guatemalans had many Britons and also Belizeans, all of whom Britain wanted back. Guatemala would want its POWs too and would ask for the transfer to them of ‘volunteers from aboard’ in something that would cause many issues. Diplomacy took over. First Mexico, then Costa Rica were involved in that. Britain had won a decisive victory. It had come at a cost though, one in the immediate term and in the long-term. Military casualties for Britain totalled over five hundred with one hundred and twenty-eight dead and the rest wounded in various manners. Belize suffered almost seven hundred soldiers dead along with four times as many wounded; civilian losses – including the missing; rotting in the jungle of thrown into the sea – were more than two and a half thousand. Britain would end up with an expensive and extensive military commitment post-war to Belize and the Caribbean too.
May 1982:
The Belize War was over and everything was meant to return to normal again. There was none of that normality which came once the fighting stopped following the British victory over Guatemala. Castro got his wish, the one which he wanted when he gave the nod to Guatemala back in March, though it came in an unforeseen manner. Cuba would end up achieving its geo-political goals across Central America and parts of the Caribbean region too, just not following the sequence he had at first anticipated.
During the conflict, there had been protest marches across several countries in support of Guatemalan ‘liberation’ of Belize along with denunciations of both ‘British imperialism’ and ‘Yankee interference’. Those had taken place in nations ranging from Honduras across Nicaragua, down to Panama and over in Grenada too. Following the defeat suffered by Guatemala, there came violence with these. The effects and causes of them were different from country to country but there was the hand of Cuba in each of them. Honduras was supposedly a stable country where the right-wing military regime had control: they certainly didn’t when a big march in Tegucigalpa heading towards the British Embassy erupted into violence. The diplomatic compound was left untouched as the protesters instead rampaged through parts of the city burning, looting and killing. Honduras was led by General Paz García, a man whose regime was in trouble without American aid (Kennedy had cut that off last year) and beholden to Columbian drug cartels linked in ways which the Hondurans couldn’t put their finger on with the regime in Panama. The riot in the country’s capital kicked off a week of violence with hundreds of deaths. It was the start of the country’s civil war too. Managua saw a series of organised marches, ones controlled by Nicaragua’s Sandinista regime, take place where there were there was no violence but a government-sponsored effort to protest against the embassies of Britain and the United States. It was pretty much the same in Panama though with only the British targeted for protests organised by the regime and the waving of Guatemalan flags done plentiful. Over in Grenada, the New Jewel Movement regime brought out its youth wing. The High Commission was targeted with mass demonstrations throughout the war and afterwards. Grenada remained a Commonwealth nation with a Governor-General representing Britain but the country no longer resembled anything like it had once been. There was gunfire in the crowd the day the news came that Guatemala had been defeated with bullets hitting the High Commission (thankfully without any casualties). At the big airport on the island which Cuba had kindly built for Grenada, Cuban troops there exercised throughout the conflict with Grenadian forces as they prepared to defend the country from ‘imperialist aggression’.
The day after Guatemala requested a ceasefire using Mexican intermediaries, there was a tense military stand-off near to the Cayman Islands which was out of the public eye. A pair of Cuban warships were offshore and HMS Coventry, the Royal Navy destroyer which had been near to the Caymans throughout the conflict, moved to escort them outside of the twelve-mile limit which they crossed. When the Cubans engaged in clear hostile manoeuvres, Coventry’s captain – aware of his orders from the Admiralty not to escalate tensions yet with concern over what the Cubans were up to – called for air support. RAF Phantoms flew low passes in the sky. Cuban MiGs came south and then there was the arrival too of Sea Harriers from HMS Hermes. There were plenty of military assets, all armed, in a small area of sea and sky. In addition, a Soviet spy ship (a Balzam-class intelligence ship) festering with antenna was present too just to complicate matters. The Cubans eventually sailed out of the territorial waters of the Cayman Islands and their aircraft all went back to where they had come from. Cuban intentions were unknown here but they had shown their willingness to push out from their own country with warships and aircraft once again towards a British territory. The ‘Caymans Incident’ as became known came ahead of a major discussion back in London, beyond the disbanding War Cabinet, over what to do in the future with regards with Belize. The deaths and the destruction inside Belize were immense and that included the disappearances of many prominent political figures. The BDF had fought well but been outclassed and would need a rebuild. Military facilities had been fought over and taken immense damage. Belize City had no running water and no electricity while the small capital city which was Belmopan had been bombed during the conflict as well as having seen sporadic shelling done there. In the following weeks, while London was watching with alarm the situation in Grenada, hasty reports were filled from experts sent out to assess the immediate future for Belize. Independence was going to have to be delayed. A significant amount of aid was going to be needed to uplift Belize. There would remain a military threat from Guatemala too: the border had been crossed once and could be crossed again. The simultaneous Guatemalan attack during their invasion where they captured the coast – recognised as the work of Cuban planners – was something studied (and silently admired for its ingenuity) as it could be repeated again. Britain was going to be tied to the defence of Belize for some time now and probably to other territorial possessions in the Caribbean as well in the face of Cuban aggression. That was all going to cost money, lots of it. Those elements of the British Armed Forces which had fought in the Belize War would need to be rotated out and others brought in. This commitment was going to have to be made less the Guatemalans wait six months or so and come back again, this time making sure any attempt to dislodge them would be far more difficult than it had been the first time around. Groans came from HM Treasury: money, it was always about money.
Across back in Central America, as Honduras started on its path to a devastating civil war where left-wing guerrillas suddenly started to get an influx of weapons from abroad, neighbouring El Salvador followed the same course with violence taking place. General Romero was long thought to have a handle on things in his little country. He had replaced the foreign backing removed from the Kennedy Administration with that of other Latin American powers such as Argentina, Chile and Venezuela. Those countries were partners down in South America with (among others) undertaking Operación Cóndor in one giant intelligence cooperation that transcended national borders and ignored the little matters of human rights and the rule of law. Chile was more committed to El Salvador than Argentina was, with Venezuela on the fringes, and it was General Pinochet down in Santiago who was keeping Romero in power (Chile hadn’t had its US aid cut though was pushing the envelope on what it was up to as far as Mondale was concerned). Pinochet foresaw the toppling of dominos after Nicaragua and then Guatemala had been lost to the hated communists. El Salvador was far away, yes, but it was a domino he helped to keep propped up fearing what would come afterwards and downwards towards Chile. Forced disappearances and the dropping of bodies over the ocean (Argentina helped with those) were the done thing in recent years. Come late-May and re-entering into the scene was the former US Ambassador to El Salvador, a man fired by the Kennedy Administration in its first days. John Negroponte made a visit to the capital San Salvador. It was unofficial and to do with cultural interests supposedly: he was a private citizen, no longer ambassador nor with the State Department. Cóndor’s involvement with El Salvador and the DINA & SIDE intelligence operatives in the country were linked to his year-long ambassadorship though, one of the primary reasons why Secretary of State Mondale had been fast to get rid of him. Negroponte arrived in San Salvador, met with Romero and other Salvadorans, supposedly innocent meetings though all held in secret as Negroponte wasn’t declared to be in-country, and then went to out to dinner with some friends from Argentina and Chile. He never made the dinner. Gunfire raked his car and killed him plus the DINA-supplied bodyguards for this private citizen. Someone had talked and someone had decided to act. Pinochet would have the Salvadorans crack down in response, not so much for Negroponte nor his own intelligence agents, but because the rebels in El Salvador had put their head above the parapet. And what would follow would be the Salvador Civil War, one to make the one starting in Honduras, and others preceding it elsewhere in Latin America, look innocent in comparison. Hondurans and Salvador rebels would be getting overt help from Cuba within months to follow the covert support.
Kennedy was briefed on the Negroponte assassination afterwards. As said, Negroponte was now a private citizen. He’d been cleared out of the State Department by Mondale just as others had been banished from Langley by his appointment as Director of Central Intelligence in the form of Cyrus Vance. Vance came to the White House and met with the president in addition to both Mondale and National Security Adviser Admiral Stansfield Turner. Negroponte’s targeted killing, made so openly, was important enough to have such a meeting of these men with the president. However, Kennedy was distracted at that time. He heard what they said about the possibility (it turned out to be the reality) of mass unrest in El Salvador, but didn’t follow the line of thinking as to how it all would go. How could the death of one, unimportant man change things like his top officials said it would? He didn’t see it. He didn’t think it all possible about those dominos. That distraction was foremost in his mind anyway: a front-page story in the supermarket tabloid the National Enquirer. That rag, a hive of muck-raking gutter journalism in his opinion, had been on his back throughout his presidential campaign and into his presidency. There had been Chappaquiddick lies dressed up as new revelations and dark hints that he and his wife were living separate lives. Now, the National Enquirer had a new splash. There was a picture on the cover of the young wife of the current Canadian Prime Minister and allegations that back in the Seventies, Kennedy and Margaret Trudeau (one news wire service had mistakenly said Margaret Thatcher when reporting on the story!) had had an extramarital affair. This was all kicking up quite the domestic storm for him.
June 1982:
After the East Berlin summit between Andropov and Kennedy, it had been said by many that Soviet troop withdrawals from East Germany would never happen. They had already begun. Even if they did, such had been further remarks, they would be a sham, a maskirovka. The withdrawals were real. They were ongoing too. First it had been a motorised rifle division followed by an artillery brigade of self-propelled heavy guns. Now it was a tank division being removed from East Germany as the Soviet Group of Forces Germany cut back significantly and openly on offensive strength. As was the case before, NATO was ignored by the Soviets as they made contact with the military missions inside East Germany from the Western Allies of World War Two to notify them of the withdrawals and thus invite them to watch and verify. This time it was Military Unit #59308: a formation that NATO intelligence had correctly long-identified as being the 16th Guards Tank Division. T-62 tanks, BMP-1 infantry combat vehicles and BTR-60 armoured personnel carriers along with thousands of soldiers started leaving their garrisons across the northeastern part of East Germany. American, British and French military intelligence officers watched them go. An overfly by an American satellite a week later caught sight of the advance elements of what was pulled out – this was hardly something done overnight but rather a process which took several months – at a staging area in northern Poland. Whether that 16th Guards was going any further east than Poland, no one knew. Regardless, it was pulling out of East Germany just as Gromyko had told the world that the Soviets would do. NATO intelligence was trying to work out which Soviet units would be next. Another tank division or a motorised rifle division? Another artillery brigade or maybe the transfer out of one of the independent air defence regiments? Of nuclear-tipped tactical missiles talked about in East Berlin too back at that summit, there was no sign yet of them moving though NATO wasn’t sure that they would know if they were gone or not gone even if the Soviets gave them pointers… which they might or might not. No one knew for certain. All that was known was that Andropov clearly wanted the West to know that he was doing what he had had his foreign minister said. Speculation was rife that this could be causing friction back in Moscow and maybe Andropov’s position would be imperilled as some might say he was threatening the security of the Motherland. That was something else unknown. It was, in the words of the former US Defence Secretary Donald Rumsfeld, who was in Western Europe during June at several unofficial speaking engagements on NATO’s future, a ‘known unknown’.
Out of East Germany continued the passage of Soviet troops, pressing towards the apparent twenty-five percent mark set by Gromyko. Was that four or five divisions? It depended: the Soviets would answer that question. While it was taking place, as was the case from the moment it was announced back in February, the uproar inside NATO continued. There were those who continued to deny it was really happening and called it all a clever lie. Others reminded everyone that the Soviets weren’t going far. There were those who asked where those missing troops would soon end up and said that NATO needed to worry about that. Comments were made that no matter what, even if every Soviet soldier eventually left East Germany – Gromyko hadn’t said anything like that –, there shouldn’t be the reduction of a single soldier in the service of NATO. That view was contrasted by those saying that NATO should start to talk about, not actually do yet, their own troop withdrawals. No, no, no! Several governments were quietly looking at the possibility of using their funding for troop numbers elsewhere if NATO matched the Soviets in a pull-out of their own troops from West Germany. Other government reacted with speculation on increasing defence budgets in response to all of this. NATO lacked leadership on the issue. The Secretary General and the North Atlantic Council were answerable to politicians. Those politicians were divided. An alliance of so many members had many opinions, many different characters. Things were said in public were often different to what was said in private. Effort was made to put a united front on alliance-wide that the Soviet troop withdrawal was welcome but that NATO wasn’t considering matching this. That position was a compromise agreement, a diplomatic fudge and no one was happy with it.
In West Germany, Chancellor Schmidt was trying to weather this diplomatic crisis. His country was a major member of the alliance and its frontline in combined defence of the Continent. West Germany had large numbers of troops and was a major contributor to NATO. There were NATO troops on West German soil… but many of them were legally there due to post-war agreements made back in the Forties. Schmidt did not want NATO to withdraw troops from his country nor cut back on commitments to send troops to West Germany in crisis or war. He was of the opinion that the Soviets were up to something and this was a time to be wary, not blissfully ignorant of Soviet behaviour elsewhere in the world and for everyone to be deluding themselves that those men in Moscow were full of honest intentions. This was a position shared by many West Germans: the public and many in government. Schmidt’s problem though was that there were those openly clashing with him over such an approach while at the same time agreeing with him. They wanted Schmidt’s position on this matter just without Schmidt. He was the leader of the country’s Social Democratic Party (SPD) in a parliamentary alliance with the Free Democratic Party (FDP). This partnership was strong because the FDP liked being in government and Schmidt had led the country well through the past eight years where it mattered: economically. West Germany had done better than others in Western Europe when oil shocks from the Middle East had come and recession had reared its ugly head. His economic policies had kept him in power with support from the people. However, when it came to certain elements of foreign policy and other domestic matters, Schmidt had made mis-steps that were now coming back to bite him. He had supported Ford and his GLCM deployment, pushed for it in fact. Kennedy had then cancelled that and Schmidt had talked with the French about a pan-European deal with nuclear missiles: the leaks of those talks distorted what Schmidt wanted and made it look like he was eager to turn Germany – West and East – into a nuclear battlefield. Oil shocks, including the most recent with first Iran and the Iraq-Kuwait, had led Schmidt to push for a major increase in domestic nuclear power which had given rise to protests and the electoral polling rise of the Greens that had alarming levels of public support and there were many allegations of foreign financial support (none of which could be proved) too. Schmidt was held responsible by many for the rise in attacks made by the Red Army Faction. The FDP leadership was with him, but his own party establishment believed him to be out of touch with what the public wanted. He was being seen as warlike, especially since the issue with Soviet troop withdrawals begun. Schmidt had no idea that he was on shaky ground domestically.
Relations with the Kennedy Administration had got off to a bad start for Schmidt. Soon after Kennedy took office, Schmidt had been in the Middle East. He made some remarks while in Saudi Arabia about Israel and how West Germany shouldn’t keep silent on the Palestinian issue. Israel had hit back hard: the Israeli Prime Minister spoke of Schmidt’s war record and how he had served in the Nazi regime’s army. This had caught the attention of Kennedy with Israel long being an issue he was passionate on. He had taken an instant disliking to Schmidt as the new president had sided with Israel. There had been the Ulster issue as well where Kennedy saw West Germany chancellor as working with Britain to undermine him there – flights of fancy in the president’s mind – but, more-importantly, there had been the unilateral decision from Washington to cancel the GLCM deployment without saying anything to West Germany first. Bonn had raged at the mistake and Kennedy hadn’t been best pleased. Who did the West Germans think they were? East Berlin earlier this year had then happened. Kennedy had gone to East Berlin first before travelling to Bonn, not the other way around. Schmidt had been unimpressed and let Washington know. Kennedy had made some un-presidential remarks about Schmidt which had got back to Bonn. Schmidt had decided to not hit back, to be the bigger man and for the sake of his country, say nothing more, but that had rankled him. When Kennedy had refused to publicly back the position of Schmidt over NATO’s continued strength in unity by not allowing open talk of withdrawing troops out of West Germany, Schmidt had snapped. He had his ambassador in Washington tell Mondale that the United States had the responsibility as the leader of the Free World to act with that leadership. West Germany, Western Europe and the West all looked to the United States for leadership when opposed by what Schmidt said were Soviet tricks. Kennedy had been duped and he needed to support West Germany by making it clear that there would be no withdrawals of American troops from his country. When that was relayed to Kennedy, there was a heated exchange of words during a telephone call between Washington and Bonn. During June, as more Soviet troops left East Germany and there came no encouraging words still from Kennedy that he wasn’t about to match those withdrawals of his own sometime in the future, Schmidt started to get worried. The White House wasn’t saying anything on this, making no commitment. He again started to talk with fellow leaders across Western Europe about a joint position on this where all of them would make Kennedy understand that he needed to commit to NATO in public. Schmidt started to try to push the American president into doing something that he wouldn’t want to do. Domestically, Schmidt believed he was secure with his party behind him, his parliamentary coalition partners in the FDP with him, even the opposition CDU & CSU parties as well. The Greens were a nuisance and ignored. West Germany would take the lead and get a commitment from Washington with Schmidt certain he knew what he was doing. He was about to make another mis-step.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 24, 2018 19:30:04 GMT
July 1982:
An attempt was made to kill President Kennedy on Independence Day. Shots were fired at the president during an official event on July 4th by a lone gunman. The wannabe assassin missed the president but his bullets struck four others: a White House staffer, the military aide (a US Marines officer carrying the nuclear briefcase), a Secret Service agent and a civilian. Kennedy was unharmed and swiftly taken to safety. The gunman was pinned down by agents and then dragged away… partly for his own safety as the Secret Service didn’t want to see him killed. Of those four shot instead of the president, the captain in the shiny uniform of the Marine Corps was killed and the civilian – a young woman – would be left in a coma; the other two who were hit were left with life-changing injuries. The bullets had been explosive-tipped: Devastators, legal and lethal. Kennedy spoke to the nation later that night and offered his condolences for the family of the dead and his prayers for the wounded. A couple of nights later, on a major television network, a comedian made a joke about the attempted assassination. He said that the president should check if the man who tried to kill him had recently paid a visit to see the Canadian Prime Minister. It got a laugh from the audience and the show’s producers signed off on the broadcast later that night. The comedian was fired the next day after an extraordinary backlash. Kennedy was divisive and there were many who might have wished him dead, but he was the president. The office was respected by the overwhelming majority of Americans even if the occupant wasn’t. Added into this the killing of that military aide and the hospitalisation of three others, the comedian was shown the door. He was apologetic in a statement made – he had a career to think of – but didn’t think he had done anything wrong. Yet, his network had received an unprecedented barrage of complains. Before the shooting, there had been many jokes made about the president’s ‘relations with Canada’ but in the aftermath of an attempt to kill the president, the mood rapidly shifted. Kennedy’s approval ratings went up afterwards. That brought comments from conspiracy theorists – there were many of them when it came to Kennedy’s presidency – that it had all been staged. Such comments weren’t broadcast on any major network who were fearful of the public backlash.
Mondale was in Mexico City a fortnight later and while there in the Mexican capital, Mexican security agents for their president shot and killed a man who came too near to their charge but also the visiting US secretary of state. This man was no assassin. It was an unfortunate incident and wouldn’t have usually happened with the Mexicans being so jumpy if it hadn’t been for the recent attempt on Kennedy’s life. Moreover, it came at a time when there had been shootings in Mexico City. The country was getting rich selling oil – which was what Mondale was in Mexico to talk about – and with that brought corruption which Mexico’s elite had down to a fine art. The corruption also came with violence though, something rather unexpected but which should have been foreseen when spill-over from Guatemala had seen many illegal weapons enter Mexico to end up in criminal’s hands. Mexico’s elite were getting wealthier while the majority of the people got poorer: there was nothing new there. Some of the latter were prepared to use much violence to get what the privileged few had and were using guns to do it, even in the better parts of the country’s capital. The security agents had been jumpy and overreacted regardless of all this yet it was a strange time in Mexico. When that shooting happened, Mondale was fast escorted away and then soon afterwards met with President López Portillo along with officials and trade delegates from both sides of the Rio Grande. There were deals to be signed, cooperation to be sought. More oil would soon be flowing northwards and heading south was money meant to be spent on infrastructure improvements throughout the country but especially the neighbouring parts of the country a-joining Texas and California. That infrastructure being roads, ports and pipelines. Plenty of that money was soon to be stolen by those who treated the Mexican state oil industry as their personal cash cow. Let the good times roll! In addition to all of that, Mondale joined with López Portillo in making a joint statement calling for the end to the recent (and escalating) violence in El Salvador. The shocking number of deaths which recent reports recorded coming from that little country were worth mentioning. Though El Salvador and Mexico didn’t share a direct border, it was one of the Central American nations south of Mexico where López Portillo had recently paid a major interest too. First it had been Guatemala with the last & lethal stage of its civil war before the Belize War and now the eruption of what certainly looked like civil war in El Salvador. Give peace a chance was the message from both men.
No one was listening to them down in El Salvador. General Romero took the fight to the rebels, urged on by his Argentinean and Chilean backers. There were massacres aplenty in the countryside, where the rebels were sought by government forces. It was in the cities where the rebels hit back. El Salvador’s not-so-communist guerrillas had ideological differences with those from Cuba, Guatemala and Nicaragua who had previously tried to tell them what to do but they had listened when it had come to urban fighting. San Salvador and Santa Ana were hit with shootings, bombings and kidnappings. The brutality of the government was starting to be matched by the guerrillas too. They were arguing among themselves and not united and therefore there was some effort made by individual groups to go further than the other in hitting back against Romero’s regime. One groups targeted innocent civilians in high-profile urban establishments (banks and large shops etc) with random gunfire while another group snatched & killed family members of regime figures before sending body parts back to the remainder of the family. The intention was to destabilise the regime and allow for victory for the rebels with each arguing that they had the best interests of the people at heart. Such outrages, combined with other less-severe strikes, only hardened the regime’s resolve. The army was ordered to kill more rebels. If rebels couldn’t be found, then civilians in the countryside who supported the rebels. How would the army know which civilians supported the rebels? Well… most of them did so kill as many as you need to so that the guerrilla problem is eliminated: such came the word from Romero, a man becoming more and more desperate as rebel attacks intensified. Noriega, Panama’s #2 strongman, came to San Salvador in the middle of the month and met with certain members of the military. He had connections in El Salvador among important officers. He’d return home afterwards to tell Torrijos that no matter what the outcome, El Salvador was a lost cause and Panama’s role there – supporting the government with arms, independent of Argentina and Chile – should cease. It was a mess and Panama could gain nothing from any further role. Noriega had connections with the CIA as well, ones which his president knew about but didn’t know about too. He told the CIA that the government in El Salvador could hold the line against the rebels. And Noriega had connections too with the Cubans. He told them that the rebels in El Salvador stood a chance of winning and overturning Romero’s regime. Noriega: friend to many and someone none of them – Torrijos, the CIA and Cuba – should trust. Yet trust him they did.
Over in Honduras (where Noriega dared not go with Paz García having recently being the smartest man south of the Rio Grande and realizing Noriega’s dishonesty), the restart of unrest following events after the Belize War was giving Honduras’ neighbours grave worries. Guatemala was still smarting after being defeated in that conflict and there had come attacks over the border from rebels fighting the regime in Guatemala City. The Hondurans had been unable to stop this like they had previously had much success at. Guatemala’s leadership was coming more and more under Cuba’s thumb and attention was directed towards Honduras as a base of operations for rebels against Havana’s new forcefully-adopted child. The Nicaraguan regime was angry at events in Honduras too. They shared a border with Honduras as well, one which, when major civil disturbances and then internal conflict erupted in Honduras, suddenly destabilized that frontier. Anti-Sandinista rebels struck into Nicaragua with a series of armed attacks. Borge and the Ortega brothers were united in their opposition to Paz García and his previous attitude towards allowing for those opposed to Nicaragua to operate inside his country. Now Paz García had no control over his borders, the border with their country. The Sandinista leadership made the decision that the ‘cocaine general’ – cocaine had been behind the fallout between Paz García and Noriega – was a threat to them. Cuba was focused internally at home, talking to the Soviets about getting shiny new weapons after some of their toys had done so bad against the British. Castro was reorganizing his military too while his spooks reorganized Guatemala. The Nicaraguan leadership was told that while Havana had a concern over Honduras, it wasn’t seen as the right time to do anything about that. The troika in Managua weren’t so sure. Maybe this was the right time. Cuba was thinking of itself, so should Nicaragua. Nicaragua was upon its feet now, thinking independently of Cuba and soon ready to start acting independently too. It wasn’t like anyone would stop them acting in Honduras if they chose to, was it?
Down in Panama, Torrijos was pleased that the first series of official meetings with the Americans over a future transfer of sovereignty over the Canal Zone started in July. State Department officials were in-country meeting with his men from the Panamanian Foreign Ministry. Mondale wasn’t due to visit nor was Torrijos due to attend these meetings. They were for diplomats to discuss things. Torrijos would be informed of everything though. He’d been told this would be a long process – how true that was turning out to be! – but the talks had finally started. Conflicts in El Salvador and Honduras, making money for the regime through the passage of Columbia’s most-famous export and any other regional distractions for Panama were now cancelled for the foreseeable future. Torrijos would keep Panama on its best behaviour and not antagonise the Americans like he had long been doing to get them to this stage. The low-level terrorism and the public protests against American control over rightful Panamanian territory were at an end. He was a civilian now, a democratically-elected leader. Panama was a respectable democracy and would be treated equally by the United States while these negotiations would occur. He had a plan to see all of this through to the end, where Panama got what it deserved: full sovereignty over the Canal Zone. No distractions, he had told Noriega, none at all while this was going on for nothing else mattered.
August 1982:
Saddam was back. To be honest, he had never really gone away. International attention shone upon him and his actions once again and Iraqi’s leader didn’t shy away from it. He was eager to get back in Moscow’s good books. They had turned on him and he had sworn revenge… yet was secretly frightened that they should really turn on him. He wanted to please them, to do something so favour would be shown again from Moscow. Nonetheless, Saddam’s own survival and his own ambitions remained paramount throughout. It had been a difficult couple of months for Saddam with economic troubles biting hard due to the sanctions on Iraqi oil from the West. There was a lot of smuggling going on and Iraq was making some money, just nothing like it had been before. Saddam needed a fix to that issue though he been distracted by the actions of Israel. The Zionists had attacked Iraq! They sent their fighter-bombers, gifted to them by the Americans, to blast apart his nuclear reactor. Osirak was left a ruin. The French had long gone – they had stopped supplying him with arms too – and the Israeli F-16s smashed apart his reactor. Saddam had raged at them and threatened Israel with a ‘sea of fire’. There had been an attempt by one of his ministers, a fussy little man, to suggest to others in the Iraqi government that maybe Saddam’s time was up. The Iraqi health minister had been dealt with, brutally. His conspiracy had spread though and needed violent suppression to keep everyone else in line. Finished with that matter, and still looking to Moscow for a nod of appreciation plus to Israel for vengeance, Saddam turned northwards. The Arabisation campaign against Iraqi minorities – Kurds, Assyrians, Yezidis and others – had been stalled by problems in Iran, the Kuwaiti invasion and domestic issues. It was now back on. Saddam unleased his security forces against them, paramilitary units loyal to his regime. The Iraqi Army was kept back from direct fighting and when the People’s Army got into trouble, the army used their artillery and rocket launchers from afar. The Iraqi Air Force fielded Soviet-supplied MiG-23s and Sukhoi-22s (Saddam only had a few Mirage F-1s in service before the French arms embargo hit) and these were used as well against dug-in rebels. Iraq was for all Iraqis, all Iraqis united under Saddam’s guided rule. Those who wished to be separate within the country would face his wrath. There was small and selective use of chemical weapons as well: Saddam used them as a terror weapon against some of the most stubborn resistance to Arabisation.
Iraq’s minorities fled if they were able. They went into the mountains high-up in northern Iraq but also across the borders. Communist Iran turned them back better than Assad-led Syria could with the latter border being more leaky than the former. Then there was the Turkish border, over which most of the refugees escaping Saddam’s war on them fled to. Turkey was as unwelcoming to them as Iran and Syria were. These people, especially the Kurds, weren’t wanted in Turkey. They came though, fleeing what they believed was certain death if they stayed. Those Kurds arrived in Kurdish areas of the Turkish state and right into the middle of a long-simmering ethnic problem in southeastern Turkey. Some of those Kurds from Iraq joined with Turkish Kurds – according to the government in Ankara, there were no Kurds, only Turks – in fighting against the Turkish government. In terms of scale, it was nothing like it was back over the border in Iraq. Still, at a local level, the fighting was brutal. Turkish Kurds used the Iraqi Kurds as cannon-fodder where possible to soak up government bullets and give them some breathing space. They also sent some Iraqi Kurds to Istanbul using the underground network throughout the country to move them that far. Such men met up with a cut-out in Turkey’s biggest city and were given guns. A mini-bus drove them to a marketplace and then drove off. A horrible little massacre occurred. As can be imagined, Turkey was furious. There was a civilian government in Ankara, one put in-place by the military (which had previously taken power in a coup only to hand that back over to placate the West). Those civilians were the right sort for the Turkish Armed Forces to accept as leaders of the country and who understood that if they went wrong, the military would remove them. When Iraqi refugees came over the border – Iraqi’s, not Kurds because Kurds don’t exist! –, the government had ordered the border closed. After the massacre of innocent civilians in Istanbul, the government cracked down hard nationwide, especially in the country’s southeast where Kurdish rebels were taught a lesson they wouldn’t forget for some time. Their actions got a thumbs-up from the military. There were still more Iraqi refugees coming over the border though, driven onwards by Saddam’s actions. Turkey’s generals were briefed by Israeli contacts – the two countries shared much intelligence and had secret military ties too – that Saddam was doing this on behalf of the Soviet Union. The Israelis said they had Saddam doing this to destabilise Turkey. That wasn’t true: Saddam was doing on its own and the Soviets weren’t involved, just later to benefit from it. Regardless, the Turkish generals believed this faulty intelligence. It made sense to them. It played into the narrative of what else the Soviets were up to.
Turkey was in the same position as West Germany was. The country was on the frontlines in the Cold War, with the Soviet Army pushed right up against Turkey’s borders. The Soviets were actually almost surrounding them too with their own border plus the Black Sea being neighbours then Bulgaria, Iran, Iraq & Syria all Soviet allies and sharing land borders with Turkey. Soviet military exercises in Bulgaria, the Black Sea and Iran concerned Turkey. Then there was Greece. The Greeks had withdrawn from NATO by activating Article 13 of the North Atlantic Treaty. At first, Turkey had celebrated. Greece – the foremost enemy of Turkey, even beyond the Russians / Soviets – had shot itself in the foot turning its back on its allies in the manner that it did. But then the Turkish generals started to look again at the map. Many of them got it into their heads that Greece would align itself with the Soviet Union: Greece and Russia were historic allies. That made sense if you were a xenophobic, militaristic nationalist: in other words, most of the Turkish General Staff. Greece as a Soviet ally meant Soviet naval access to Souda Bay naval base in Crete and then Soviet troops & aircraft on Cyprus too. Turkey would truly be surrounded! The Soviets were doing none of this, but the Turkish generals were convinced that they could see the future. A Soviet oil deal struck with Greece was the first sign, the first positive proof of the coming Athens-Moscow axis. Turkey’s real rulers were certain of this. They linked it to their Armenian terrorist issue as well. For many years now, Turkish diplomats and officials had been murdered abroad while bombings had occurred of Turkish interests. These had happened throughout Western Europe and into the United States as well. The attacks, by two main groups, were carried out by the Armenian Diaspora spread globally. Where was Armenia though? That’s correct, inside the Soviet Union and on Turkey’s frontier. Those terrorists claimed that they were independent of Soviet control and had nothing to do with Soviet Armenia. To the Turkish generals, that was a lie. Of course the KGB had an influence with the terrorists… even if the terrorists didn’t always know it. Further attacks took place throughout 1982 including one the day after the massacre in Istanbul where the Turkish ambassador and his wife in the Netherlands were both shot and killed. The Dutch, a fellow NATO ally, were fast to act and caught the gunman. He would be tried and jailed, the Dutch said. Turkey wanted him brought back to Turkey to be tried in Turkish courts and given the death penalty. The Netherlands wouldn’t do that and, to be honest, due to past experience with Western European governments on similar matters, this time the Turks didn’t push that effort really hard despite saying in public they were. What they did was have the prime minister and foreign minister – both given the military stamp of approval – go to the Americans. Like West Germany, Turkey formally approached the United States seeking help and support against their woes. The aim was to convince Kennedy of the Soviet threat to their country. Turkey considered itself in a good position as a strong and firm ally. Moreover, recent Turkish good relations with Israel – one country which always had Kennedy’s cast iron support – were made use of in the approach too. Those generals who were making the decisions for Turkey’s secure future believed, like Chancellor Schmidt from West Germany did, that Kennedy was reasonable and naturally see their point of view once it was carefully explained to him. The fools.
September 1982:
During early September, Andropov was still on vacation. He had been in the Crimea at Foros, down on the Black Sea coast, all summer and planned to stay for another week or two. He wasn’t feeling himself. His doctors pretended that they knew what was going on with his health and everything was okay. Andropov banished them from his summer residence, his gosdacha by the sea, and remained there with his wife. The warm weather would be good for him, she said. Being down at Foros when everyone else was returning to Moscow meant that Andropov believed that he would get an extension to his break from the hustle and bustle of leadership of the superpower state which he led. He was wrong. He had visitors with important business. The bodyguards he had – loyal men, long in his service through his time as KGB Chairman and now General Secretary – only allowed those on approved lists to come see him. The gosdacha (state dacha) was comfortable and as nice as another one available for Andropov to use in the Lenin Hills near to Moscow. There was no extravagance though for that wasn’t something which Andropov wouldn’t abide by. A KGB-manned patrol boat, with missiles and guns, was offshore while the KGB Ninth Chief Directorate bodyguards were all around Foros. That one week in September when he remained down in the Crimea before finally going back to Moscow would be truly instrumental for the future of the Soviet Union, bringing about later events long after Andropov had departed from the world.
He was first visited by the Ukrainian party boss, Shcherbytsky, who was a rival from the Politburo, someone who dreamed of having Andropov’s role. Shcherbytsky came to deliver good news in person. The reports of the coming harvest across the breadbasket of the Soviet Union which was the Ukraine were showing that a bumper harvest would be brought in this year. The weather had been good but more than that there had been some remarkable wonder in some areas with high crop yields when it came to those treated with some of the new, post-experimental bio-engineered chemicals. Full reports for the Politburo would come later but for now, Shcherbytsky was in Foros to tell Andropov in person that Andropov had done the right thing in giving approval last year to the use of such chemicals to not just control pests but increase growth too. Andropov was wary of all that was said by Shcherbytsky yet couldn’t help but be pleased. He knew he had been correct on such a matter. The Soviet Union had the technical know-how to create such chemicals and the controlled laboratory tests had proved that there was no danger. He made up his mind there and then that afternoon that when he returned to Moscow and the Politburo discussed the issue, approval would be given for a major expansion of chemical treatment of crops next year. More crops, especially wheat, grown at home meant less to spend foreign currency reserves on buying from abroad in the capitalist West where they used their own chemicals. As in so many areas of technology, the Soviet Union would catch up with and surpass the West. Andropov hoped to see that before the end of his rule, hopefully many long years off… if his health held out.
After Shcherbytsky, Andropov was then seen by Chebrikov. He didn’t have good news to bring. The head of the KGB came down to the Crimea and brought with him some reports of his own. These concerned yet-to-be-released economic numbers that Chebrikov brought to Andropov’s attention first before such a matter would be discussed by the Politburo when they next formally met. They showed a further downturn in the bringing in of those valuable foreign currency reserves – US Dollars, Pound Sterling, Deutschmark and Yen – coming from oil sales to the West. Those exports were down less than two percent this year… seemingly a minor figure. It equated to a lot of money though, money that was no longer coming into state coffers to spend abroad where Rubles weren’t as viable as a currency for many countries. At the end of last year, there had been a downturn of half a percent; Chebrikov had with him too economic forecasts (not ones for release) that showed that next year the downturn on the high of 1980 might be as much as five percent. Five percent! Oil, lots of it, plus plenty of natural gas too, was being sold to the West and would continue to be. That wasn’t going to stop. Iranian oil remained at a trickle of pre-revolution / pre-invasion figures while Iraqi (and thus Kuwaiti) oil was embargoed. From elsewhere in the world though there was more oil than before being made available on the international markets. The price of a lot of that was falling. In addition, oil extraction from the North Sea, Alaska and Mexico was closer to the valuable markets from where it was being exported to. Politics was another factor with some voices of influence in the West unwilling to allow for the mass purchase of Soviet oil by their countries to go unprotested. Added atop of this, he and Chebrikov had previously discussed the rise of environmentalist ideas for energy in parts of the West (pure insanity in their shared view) and also the continued expansion of nuclear power in other Western countries too. Long-term threats they might be, but their presence now, especially the nuclear power side of that was troubling: how it went cap-in-hand with environmentalism was no longer only found somewhat amusing between the two men in Foros.
Chebrikov remained in the Crimea overnight at a nearby gosdacha and spoke with Andropov the next day. One thing that Chebrikov didn’t mention in all that time was Andropov’s health. He knew more about that than Andropov did. Information is power, especially in an issue of eventual succession. What they discussed was something long in the works between the two of them and how there was an opportunity for it now to be brought forward. It was something that the Politburo would normally have to approve… but maybe there was a case to be made that the rest of them shouldn’t be informed. Andropov and Chebrikov decided to keep this to themselves. The pair of Chekists didn’t need to hear the concerns of others. West Germany was one of those countries which was buying Soviet oil but also starting to plan for the expansion of domestic nuclear power. It was led by a man regarded as a serious opponent of the Soviet Union in the form of Chancellor Schmidt. Chebrikov had intelligence that said Schmidt’s recent effort to get a commitment from Kennedy on NATO troop numbers in his country had failed while at home Schmidt was in trouble with his own party. In West Germany there was a growing environmentalist movement who were opposed to nuclear power like they were nuclear weapons; the latter were something tied in the public’s mind to Schmidt’s government. This was quite the opportunity for the Soviet Union. An active measure had been what Andropov and Chebrikov had discussed before, something bigger than what had been done in Greece and the secretive funding of anti-nuclear marches in West Germany. Could it, Andropov asked, bring about the downfall of Schmidt? No, Chebrikov told him, not on its own. However, if combined with another active measure, then yes, it was possible. Schmidt would fall and Soviet economic, geo-political and security goals would benefit. It would be a win-win situation. Andropov wanted no Soviet fingerprints on either of the two covert actions taken. They were to be carried out and overseen by others; Chebrikov nodded. So it would be done. There would be an accident at a sensitive place and a killing of someone allied to Schmidt. Both men returned to Moscow the next day. Their minions and those unknowing working for the KGB would act on what was discussed in the peaceful surrounding of the Black Sea resort with violence and terror.
October 1982:
The Red Army Faction assassinated Hans-Dietrich Genscher on October 16th. They had long targeted him – alongside many others – with a near miss against West Germany’s vice chancellor & foreign minister, and leader of the coalition party FDP, occurring earlier in the year. With their success back in 1979 of getting the American general Al Haig, the terrorist group were intending to build upon that propaganda coup by eliminating Genscher. The Stasi contact with the cell who carried out the assassination was out of West Germany before it took place. He had done his job – with orders coming from Moscow initially though without him knowing that – and passed on details about how and where Genscher could be got at. Genscher was well-protected but there were always holes in any protection. The KGB had eyes on Genscher… well, ears anyway – they were bugging his phone and some conversations – and an opening had been found. That was exploited. A small Commando of the Red Army Faction (their designation for their hit squad) consisting of three men and a woman opened fire upon him and his bodyguards with stolen MP-5 sub-machine guns. Genscher was killed instantly along with three of those with him and another two security personnel left badly-injured. The terrorists got away clean and escaped to a safe-house. They waited there, hiding from the massive police operation underway to track them down. One of them became ill the next day, a stomach bug that turned serious, and then the other trio were ill by the following day. On the third, each of them was dead. Someone had poisoned them with a lethal substance and made sure that they wouldn’t be talking. They barely knew much anyway, especially not who was really behind Genscher’s assassination.
October 21st saw a trio of explosions occur at the Unterweser nuclear power plant in the northwestern part of West Germany. There was a small blast and then a really big blast. A man was shot in Unterweser’s security office and another stabbed; a third fled there and then – in an outrageous breach of security – got out of power plant’s grounds when there were alarms wailing and a lock-down meant to be taking place. A third and final explosion took place, this one not caused by a bomb but by the build-up of air pressure. That was the one which everyone would afterwards be really concerned about. It occurred in the reactor hall. Now there really was an emergency situation at Unterweser. There was a leak of radiation into the atmosphere before everything could be sealed off. More radiation could leak at any moment. Specialist emergency teams descended upon Unterweser first from across West Germany then from elsewhere in Western Europe following inter-government cooperation. A herculean effort was underway to stop a real disaster from happening beyond what already had. There were civilian evacuations in an organised fashion but also a lot of panic. Rumours were spread and brought further uncontrollable panic. Many West Germans followed official instructions and believed what they were told that the initial leak was minor and the risk of a further one was small. Other West Germans didn’t believe what they heard from the government at all. As to the missing man who’d got out of Unterweser, there was soon a nationwide hunt for him which turned into a Continent-wide hunt when there was a lead he had been through Maastricht heading to either the Netherlands, Belgium or France… maybe further. Police in Calais found a body near to the port on the last day of the month which matched the Interpol alert: the senior safety engineer missing from Unterweser – wanted for attempted murder, murder, terrorism and probably espionage too – had apparently hung himself in a motel room in France the night before he was going to board a ferry to Britain.
November 1982:
The 1982 US mid-term elections saw the Democrats take a beating. In Senate, Congressional, Governor and state races, the Republicans picked up seats across the board. This wasn’t that unexpected: the Democrats held the White House and control over both Houses of Congress. However, the scale of the losses in some places was surprising. The Republicans managed to take control of the Senate and that was the real big news. They ended up with a two-seat majority there. Fault would be apportioned afterwards by many to Kennedy yet he wasn’t a really unpopular president just divisive nationwide. The party in power always takes a beating during the mid-terms, Kennedy’s supporters said. The president has lost us the Senate, said Kennedy’s detractors, and will cost us the House in ’84. Newly-elected politicians wouldn’t take their seats across the country until New Year though the repercussions were immediate.
The Senate Majority Leader announced he would step down come January – so he wouldn’t be the Minority Leader – and in the House there were moves afoot to replace members of the Democratic leadership too as some of the blame, that not directed at Kennedy, was transferred to certain figures who it was said had run a bad national campaign. Many eyes were on the new Congress for a variety of reasons where the newly-elected members plus the changes made would bring about shifts in political direction. The Republicans were certainly going to be in a stronger position now to better hold the president to account on many issues, foreign affairs especially. In addition, there in the Senate on that matter, many of the Democrats opposed to Kennedy’s actions as well at once felt emboldened to do so further come January after several pro-Kennedy senators lost their seats. ‘Interesting times’ were coming for just what the president would be able to do and what he wouldn’t be able to do.
Several weeks later, there was a regional security conference held in Jamaica at Montego Bay. This had been in the works for many months now where several Central American and Caribbean nations had been pushing for a united effort to work together to stop conflict across the whole region using diplomacy. The Montego Bay Conference was organised by the nations of Mexico, Panama, Venezuela, Jamaica and Barbados. There had been help in getting this done from abroad with leading participation from the Swedish Prime Minister in pushing for it to push for a Latin American Diplomatic Group (LADG). Those national leaders came to Montego Bay to meet and representatives from other nations, inside and outside the region, were invited to attend as well. Cuba declined though Nicaragua sent Borge while the United States was represented by Mondale and Palme came from Stockholm as well. When in Montego Bay and during a private discussion away from the main events, Mondale informed Torrijos of the implications of the US mid-terms when it came to the US-Panama talks on the Canal Zone. The new Senate was very unlikely to approve any treaty. Naturally, there might be some misunderstanding of the outlook of some of the new senators when it came to the Panama Canal, but that body as a whole was not going to approve a transfer of sovereignty for the foreseeable future. The treaty negotiations – still in their early stages – were already a major political football in the United States and the new make-up of the Senate almost guaranteed that once the talks were complete and an agreement reached, no matter what it said, a treaty would be blocked by the new Senate. It was just going to be impossible to get anything done on the issue. Mondale was apologetic. Torrijos spoke of betrayal and walked out of their private meeting.
Away from that drama, when the major players got together, they discussed what they were in Jamaica to talk about: stopping the civil wars and external conflicts raging across the region. The civil wars underway in El Salvador and Honduras, both with extreme brutality being shown and gross abuses of human rights occurring, were talked about with calls from everyone for them to cease. The suggestion from Venezuela’s president that there were Nicaraguan troops in Honduras, fighting an illegal and undeclared war there, were met with denials from Borge and given support from Torrijos. This early break in the apparent unity and harmony of the new LADG was fast a sign of things to come when Mondale clashed with Borge over United States support for ‘arming British Imperialists’ in Belize. The outsiders had derailed the party! There had recently been an agreement struck where Phantom fighter-bombers would be sent to the RAF in Britain from American reserve stocks to free up other Phantoms to be transferred from the UK mainland to maintain an increased British military presence in Belize. The founding members of the LADG were talking about Belize with regards to support for coming future independence for the British territory and to get that back on track after the Belize War. Nicaragua and the United States wanted to argue over a side issue when the main point was to be support for independence. When Jamaica’s prime minister tried to calm the dispute, Borge moved to point out the support given by Jamaica, and Barbados too, for Britain’s role in the Belize War where ‘Guatemala was attacked’. Venezuela made mention of Nicaraguan involvement in that conflict on the side of Guatemala. Palme was joined by Mexico’s López Portillo – on his last foreign visit before he handed over domestic power to Javier García Paniagua – in calling for calm. They were here to discuss solutions. They were here to bring about peace. Score-settling and finger-pointing was not what the LADG was all about. But it had already gone too far. Sides had been picked and animosity expressed.
The concept of a weapons embargo to stop arms going to El Salvador and Honduras so that the killing could stop in those countries was derailed like everything else by the same thing. Rather than talk about ways to achieve that, Barbados’ prime minister objected to arms shipments by Cuba made to Grenada and said that those should be stopped too. Cuba wasn’t here to speak for itself but in came Borge again – a man who had spent so long in Cuba and knew that without Cuban help Somoza wouldn’t have been overthrown in his native Nicaragua – who complained that his fellow socialist nations were under attack in this LADG conference. Venezuela accused Cuba of sending arms to Guatemala and Nicaragua as well, arms which now included a lot of tanks and advanced combat aircraft since the Belize War and with the Soviets sending more-modern military equipment to Cuba to replace what was being sent to Central America. When Torrijos questioned how much of that was true but also defended the right of sovereign countries to arm themselves, Mondale stated that the United States had proof of these weapons transfers taking place and had already raised the issue with the Soviet Union. Borge denied the right of the United States to interfere like they were doing once again in the affairs of Nicaragua. When Palme asked for superpower disputes to be left out of the discussions that the LADG were having, making what he saw as a reasonable request, he found that everyone else looked at him like he was crazy. That was an insane concept! The whole region was affected by US-Soviet interference, active and passive. It would be nice if these matters could be settled by Central American and Caribbean countries but outsiders were the ones who sent those weapons initially. Torrijos pointed to how much the United States had recently armed Mexico while Cuban weapons which were being sent onwards came from Soviet factories. As long as both of those nations continued to arm others, then the region would be full of weapons.
Such was the first, and as it turned out the last, meeting of the LADG. There was no agreement to act to do anything. Everyone just wanted to argue. The outsiders had played far too big of a role than anyone had believed that they would. The opportunity to give peace a chance in the region that might have come from Montego Bay had been lost. 1983 and especially 1984 would see the fears of those behind the LADG come to fruition as conflict spread.
December 1982:
The passing of Suslov was the end of an era. The Second Secretary of the Soviet Union, the long-serving ideological chief and the king-maker for the role of General Secretary, died of heart disease after fighting against that illness all year with some of the very best medical attention given to him. Suslov had lasted in his position of power for decades. He had survived Stalin and the Second World War. His heart gave in when the end came, physically but not metaphorically. To the very end, Suslov remained a committed communist with a surety that the cause he championed would be shown to be correct by history. He had hoped to see that validation before he died. Alas, that hadn’t come. He was buried and eulogies given; officially, he would be mourned. Andropov, who owed everything to Suslov, was silently relieved by his passing. He wasn’t alone among his Politburo colleagues in this. Many were glad that Suslov was gone though for reasons which varied and didn’t match with Andropov’s. Suslov was the last of the truly ‘old guard’. He represented the past and not the future. Andropov had brought them into the present and after he was gone, the future would belong to those who no longer came from the era when what Suslov thought was relevant was but back then and not now. He had stood in opposition to the appointment of fresh new blood, younger men, to the Politburo and opposed what he had seen as the weakening of the ‘frontline defences against a resurgence in fascism’ in Europe by the strategy of making troop withdrawals to encourage American troop withdrawals. Adventurism abroad was something else which Suslov had stood in the way of too. He had been waiting for the one day when the masses of the working class in Western Europe and elsewhere in the world would spontaneously rise up in revolt and therefore refused to accept the idea that maybe some encouragement might be needed. Winning his favour had been hard for so many on the Politburo and keeping it more difficult. No more Suslov meant that they no longer had to fear him turning on them and thus a fall from their power and position. Goodbye Comrade Suslov, we won’t miss you.
Andropov had been to see his own doctors again. By now they knew what was wrong with him: kidney disease. Could his life be saved? No. Could he hold on for some time like Suslov had done? Yes. How long? They didn’t know. How long!? A year, maybe a year and a half. He’d taken it better than he would have done years beforehand. Every man was mortal, Andropov knew that. His time on this earth would come to an end. Before that there was much to do. Before he passed on, he would see what he wanted done to be done. He wouldn’t go out like Suslov did with his vision for the future unfulfilled. Andropov would see the security of the state assured for the future by making sure he selected his successor, someone who shared his vision. He wanted someone whom he could rely upon to not drag the Soviet Union into a major war nor allow it to collapse due to pressures exerted from aboard. Many men would want to succeed him when he was gone though the trick was for them to not find out that he was dying until as late as possible. Andropov thought that no one knew how ill he really was: he had no idea that Chebrikov already knew and had already told others. Among the Politburo, there were many of those who could eventually succeed Andropov when he died. These ranged from men like Chebrikov and Ustinov to Grishin and Romanov to Ligachev and even the young pup Gorbachev. Some of those ‘ethnics’ (non-Russians) brought into the Politburo recently, more of that young blood, in the form of Aliyev, Fedorchuk and Shevardnadze could possibly replace him as well. Andropov told himself that he would be the one to anoint such a successor: he really believed that he would be able to.
Away from Moscow, through the final month of the year came the last of the first round of Soviet troop withdrawals out of East Germany. The 14th Guards Motorised Rifle Division followed the process of redeployment out of that country that had been preceded by three more combat divisions beforehand: the 35th Motorised Rifle, the 16th Guards Tank and the 25th Tank. Smaller formations, combat and combat support, had been removed throughout the year. Twenty-five percent of Soviet troops in East Germany had been removed, just as Gromyko had said in East Berlin that they would be. The undertaking had been huge and costly. The soldiers had been far easier to move than their equipment. Done it had been though with the withdrawn formations sitting in holding camps across Czechoslovakia and Poland. NATO intelligence agencies had verified the withdrawals too when the majority of their governments had been convinced that they wouldn’t happen.
As both the GRU and the KGB monitored Western Europe on that issue, they also observed how the West dealt with the Genscher assassination and the Unterweser explosion. There came the hunts for the perpetrators of those responsible for each and the finding of their bodies. The fall-out from Unterweser – the drama not the small about of radiation leaked – was interesting to watch where how panic set in and rumours were spread. The KGB had used up a valuable asset to attack Unterweser but no further in-place spies were called up to assist in creating chaos where there was at first a temptation to do that. West Germans did that themselves. There was blame apportioned to the Soviet Union for each attack from the usual sources who declared that the attacks and then the deaths of the perpetrators were clear signs of state involvement. However, more voices screamed conspiracy louder in a mad frenzy. The reasoning was that if both attacks had been the work of the KGB, then surely they wouldn’t have killed those who carried out the attacks because that wouldn’t make sense if they wanted to get away with what they had done. That made sense, yes? Someone must be framing the Soviet Union. Someone must be framing the Red Army Faction too because why would they want to blow up a nuclear power station in West Germany (in the minds of many, the two events must have been done by the same group because they were so close together). It was all crazy, quite the insanity. The Soviets couldn’t have planned this better. The real after-effects were what Moscow was waiting for now: what would happen with the anti-nuclear movement in West Germany and the stability of the West German government without Genscher?
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Mar 30, 2018 11:23:39 GMT
Chapter Six – Hermanos en Brazos (Brothers in Arms)
January 1983:
Raúl Castro informed General Noriega that his camarada had been taken for a fool by the United States. Noriega and Torrijos, whom the former had said were hermanos en brazos as Fidel and Raúl were too, had been tricked by Washington and would continue to be so. The President of Panama would go running back to them soon enough and they would play him again for their own ends. Again and again, Torrijos would do harm to Panama because the norteamericanos were masters at such a game of deception. Panama would never get the Canal Zone through diplomacy… like Cuba would never regain Guantanamo Bay by talking to them either. President Kennedy was like his own dead brothers when it came to Latin America: he would keep those in the region down. If Noriega wanted a Panama free, he should turn his mind to thinking of a Panama no longer with Torrijos at the helm.
While he was in Cuba, Noriega was treated to a display of Cuban military power. In the western province of Pindar del Rio there was a large military exercise which took place put on not for him but for another foreign guest in the country at the time: Marshal of the Soviet Union Nikolai Ogarkov. They two of them joined Raúl in watching aircraft, tanks and soldiers take part in a combined arms assault using live ammunition. It went on throughout a full morning and was quite the treat. Ogarkov explained to Noriega that this was all Soviet weaponry on show and not even the latest of gear being sent to Cuba under a newly-signed agreement between Havana and Moscow. With what Cuba had, and what more was on its way, Cuba would be able to defend its interests at home and abroad too. Noriega was no fool. If he had been, he wouldn’t have long been playing the game that he had where he had connections with Cuba and the CIA as well as maintaining Torrijos’ trust. He was aware of what Raúl was doing in hinting at a Panama without Torrijos to him. The presence in Cuba of the Soviet Chief of the General Staff in the country when he was invited here, witnessing a major show of military might, was no coincidence. He was being wooed. Noriega decided that there was no harm in listening further to what the Cubans had to say, was there?
Noriega met with Fidel and the former spy chief Manuel Piñeiro. The pair of Cubans discussed a future for Latin America where it was free of United States domination. The norteamericanos would go home, back to their own country. Guantanamo Bay, the Canal Zone, Puerto Rico and other US-administered islands would all be no longer under their control. Other countries friendly to the United States would turn their favour elsewhere in international relations but, more-importantly, would have governments which listened to their people. Fidel spoke of this ‘freedom’ stretching from the Rio Grande to Barbados to Cape Horn. From Piñeiro, Noriega was told of an idea on how to do just that: having the governments listen to their people. This was all very interesting. Noriega knew how his CIA contacts would love to know of what was said in this meeting he had. He could also imagine what Torrijos would say when he was told of how Cuba wanted governments to listen to their people… if the Panamanian people had a say, Torrijos might be out of power! But then, in all honesty, so might Fidel and his brother if the Cuban people had their way. That was all an aside though. Talk like that, of revolution and liberation, was just talk. It was only about Panama’s future which Noriega cared about, Panama’s future without Torrijos and him in charge as suggested at when he was here in Cuba. He turned the conversation that way: no longer was he just listening, now he was directing the conversation.
Panama needed a strong leader. Noriega told Fidel and Piñeiro that the Panamanian people demanded that their leader was strong. Even with a strong leader holding power, Panama was still at the whim of United States’ meddling though. What could a hypothetical new leader of Panama do about Washington? Fidel said that only by regional countries working together could anything be done. It would be though. The norteamericanos could be forced out. The first step for Panama in seeing that happen, would be to have someone new in charge who understood the new way of thinking. Such a man would have to step up and take action.
February 1983:
President Nixon had gone to China; his successor President Ford had done the same. President Kennedy was due to go to China later this year. Since Nixon had opened a new page in Sino-American relations in 1972, those relations had been strengthened. China was eager to expand them like the United States was though with each side still apprehensive of the other at the same time. Both Beijing and Washington worried over the other suddenly improving relations with the Soviets over them and in Beijing, Deng had been concerned that just that was happening with Kennedy’s recent dealings with Andropov. Still, while the Americans and the Soviets were talking about troop numbers and nuclear weapons in Europe, relations between the mutual adversaries of Moscow in the form of China and the United States remained strong. These were of the nature of intelligence-sharing and diplomacy in facing off against the Soviet Union though there was too a slow increase in trade links. This had started in the last years of Ford’s presidency and were unaffected by the ’79 war between China and Soviet-backed Vietnam which had forced Chinese-Soviet relations to a nadir. The trans-Pacific trade was small but growing; so too were the recently-established travel links where commercial air passenger services were slowly being opened up between the two countries. It had started with a bi-weekly service between Beijing and Washington with extensions made to Shanghai, San Francisco and New York afterwards. Two American and one Chinese airlines made these flights. They weren’t exactly always full and were thus rather expensive for passengers. Few Chinese had reason to go to the United States (they needed a state-sanctioned one too) and while there were more Americans going to China, the opportunities for business there weren’t that great. Chinese protectionism was only slowly easing up. One of the US-based airlines was soon to cut their service unless things picked up. Business decisions didn’t affect the Chinese government-owned airline which was to fly to America regardless of passenger numbers: that was a political decision.
CAAC Airlines flew a mix of aircraft purchased from Britain, the Soviet Union and the United States for long-range overseas journeys. February 6th 1983 saw one of those shot out of the sky: a Boeing-707 heading from Beijing to San Francisco by way of Alaska. A navigation error saw the aircraft veer too far northwest when over the Sea of Japan and that continued as the flight kept on heading for distant Anchorage. The Boeing-707 kept flying onwards but its course took it over the Sea of Okhotsk rather than direct over the Pacific. The Kuril Islands should have been off the port wing but instead they were off the starboard wing. Flying high and in the darkness, with the initial navigational error continuously getting worse, the Chinese aircraft flew through skies considered by the Soviet Union to be their own without knowing that. The Sea of Okhotsk was only Soviet territorial waters in part along with elements of the air space above. Only Moscow recognised this, not Beijing. The aircraft hadn’t intended to be there but even when it was, there was nothing illegal nor aggressive in this. The Soviets watched the Boeing-707 heading for the Kamchatka Peninsula. This was an area full of closed towns and many sensitive military bases. The civilian airliner didn’t respond to stern warnings to not approach and it was regarded by those on the ground as being a spy aircraft: there had been those before over the Sea of Okhotsk. A pilot sent up in his Sukhoi-15 interceptor made a visual identification of the aircraft as a civilian airliner. He told those on the ground he could see the lights coming from the passenger windows. The orders still came. This was a spy flight and it had ignored warnings to leave Soviet sovereign air space. It was to be shot down. The Su-15 put a pair of air-to-air missiles into the Boeing-707. They hit and down when the airliner: it made impact with the Sea of Okhotsk far below. One hundred and fourteen passengers and crew were aboard: twenty-eight of whom were American citizens.
It was winter in North East Asia. The Sea of Okhotsk wasn’t an area for much civilian shipping nor commercial flying. The only witness to the shoot down was the interceptor pilot. He was isolated from the rest of his comrades in his regiment when he returned to base and flown to the Far Eastern Military District headquarters – from where the shoot-down order came – at Khabarovsk for a debriefing. That wasn’t going to be a fun experience for him. Soviet radar operators and ground control officers who witnessed on radar screens and through radio channels of what happened were taken off duty as well for less-intensive debriefings. For the first two days following the shoot down, there was no comment from the Soviet Armed Forces nor the Foreign Ministry about the missing airliner. Elsewhere, there was plenty being said. The civilian jet missed a communications check soon after it crashed into the ocean with air traffic controllers in Japan and then with those in Alaska. No one responded to the many radio calls. An emergency was declared by both the Japanese and the Americans beginning with civilian authorities. The Chinese were informed that one of their aircraft might have had an accident. The Soviets were asked for help as well. The problem was that no one was sure where the missing aircraft went down. It was meant to be over the northeastern reaches of the Pacific and so that was where a search began to look for wreckage and hopefully survivors too.
The DIA and NSA – two American intelligence agencies – operated undeclared listening stations within China. They were focused on gathering intelligence from within the Soviet Union with their locations being priceless. Everything had to be shared with the Chinese (though not everything actually was) for them to continue to operate from Chinese soil. The radio transmissions concerning the Chinese airliner, from the warnings to leave Soviet air space to open fire on the aircraft to confirmation that it was down, were picked up and then work went on decoding them. Those who did so had no idea until afterwards what they had because their job was just to decode anything and everything. What they did end up having was proof that the Soviets had shot down an unarmed airliner and not said anything about it. There was actually a pretence made that there could be Soviet help given to search for the aircraft out in the Pacific when they knew that it had been purposely brought down over the Sea of Okhotsk. This information was passed to governments in Beijing and Washington. Deng called it ‘air piracy’ and ‘murder’; Kennedy made a statement deeming it an ‘outrage’ and called for an international investigation. The Soviets denied everything. The recordings of intercepted radio transmissions (sources unrevealed) were made available to the media. A forgery, said Gromyko, and an attempt to frame the Soviet Union for something it hadn’t done. There was a stream of allegations and counter-allegations between national capitals. All the while, the bodies of those aboard remained inside the broken Boeing-707 at the bottom of the sea with only the Soviets having an idea of where they were located… but having sent so-called rescue ships out into the Pacific instead.
Deng considered the whole thing a deliberate act. The Americans told him that shooting down the airliner was done on purpose but it appeared to be a decision made by local commanders and not authorised by Moscow. That was foolish, Deng believed. He was certain that the whole thing had been arranged in Moscow and stage-managed throughout. Somehow that airliner had been tricked into flying where it had and then carefully shot down. His conspiracy theory was a bit much for the Americans yet they weren’t looking at the whole thing like Deng was when considering the bigger picture. The Soviets had done this to tell China to back off. Back off with putting pressure on Vietnam to withdraw from Cambodia. Back off supplying Pakistan with weapons to be pointed at Soviet-friendly India & Soviet-dominated Afghanistan. Back off with the People’s Liberation Army sitting right on the border with the Soviet Union. Back off working with the Americans to not just spy on the Soviet Union but help to try to encircle the country too. Deng wouldn’t back off. He wasn’t one to give into intimidation. The Americans politely asked him to re-consider his conspiracy theory but he won’t. They didn’t see what he did. Everything the Soviets did was carefully planned out a long time ahead with desired end results.
February 1983:
Ten days after the crash of the Chinese airliner in North East Asia, a smaller aircraft went down in the Caribbean. This was a Panamanian military aircraft, a VIP-configured transport. It was carrying the President of Panama and the Interior Minister (and de facto foreign affairs spokesman too) of Nicaragua who were on their way to the UN up in New York. The aircraft had left Panama City carrying Omar Torrijos and made a stop in Nicaragua to collect Tomás Borge. From there, it flew onwards heading for a refuelling stop in Atlanta and then the final destination being La Guardia Airport. It never made it to the United States. There had been inspections for explosive devices made in Panama and at Managua which had found nothing. The whole aircraft was one big bomb though. When over the Caribbean, the internal fuel was ignited by a small charge inside the main tank and there was an almighty blast in the sky. The aircraft was blown apart mid-air. Torrijos and Borge, along with nine others, were killed. The Panamanian president wouldn’t be making his speech at the UN where he would talk about his vision for Latin America; the man behind the Red Terror which had struck Nicaragua when it had fallen to the Sandinistas wouldn’t be able to question allegations stating that the Soviets had shot down that airliner and instead direct blame towards the United States. The false flag assertion would be made afterwards elsewhere with his death instead. A US Navy destroyer which would several days later find wreckage on the sea’s surface and body parts, but wouldn’t be able to locate any survivors.
There was outrage among the people in Panama. Torrijos’ death (quite pre-emptively) was announced by the authorities and there was a deliberate effort made by the government to spread the rumour that he had been killed by the United States. This was the work of the CIA! Rioting spread across the Canal Zone, an area under American control but full of Panamanian civilians. US military personnel and families were kept inside secure areas while outside the Panamanian authorities did little to stop the smashing of glass, vehicles being overturned and burning of American flags. It was a serious situation though direct violence against US military forces didn’t occur because at the first hint of that, that was when the Panamanian police stepped in. Up in Nicaragua, there was calm. The news about Borge was carefully released to the people. His two fellow leaders in the now-broken troika, the Ortega brothers Daniel and Humberto, had no desire to see the crowds in Managua come out into the streets for the fear that they might not be able to control them should they be whipped up. The allegations coming from Panama that the disappearance of that aircraft had been the work of the CIA weren’t openly repeated in Managua by the state-controlled media though there were hints towards that with an investigation by the government promised. Borge was a hero of the revolution, the people were told, and he was feared dead with the belief that he had been slain as a martyr alongside Torrijos by enemies of the Nicaraguan Revolution.
It was Noriega who had killed Torrijos and Borge. He had help, help which had come from the Cuban DGI. A Cuban team had helped Noriega’s own people in rigging that aircraft into the flying bomb which it was and making sure that the work couldn’t be detected. Why did Noriega murder his camarada and the others on that aircraft including such a senior Nicaraguan leader? The reasons were many. For him personally, Noriega wanted the power that Torrijos had. There was a lot to that in terms of nuance, but that was the long and short of it. He wanted to be the man running Panama and was sure that he could do a far better job. Torrijos was in his way and the only way to get rid of him was to kill him. Blaming it on someone else was more than convenient: it had to be done unless Torrijos’ supporters – many soon to disappear – turned on him afterwards. Torrijos was also starting to question the actions of Noriega as well. There was the issue with cocaine trafficking which had come to an almost complete stop via Panama as Torrijos had wanted to clean up the country’s image to get the Americans to hand over the Canal Zone. Noriega liked the money he earned from allowing it to take place. Torrijos had once liked the money too, then he had decided that he no longer did and would rather become a ‘serious politician’. Noriega had kept on moving some drugs, sending them northwards towards the United States, poisoning millions with the powder, but not enough. The drug cartels down in Colombia – dangerous people – were soon to cut him off completely if he didn’t do something about Torrijos’ moral high ground. Torrijos had people looking into Noriega’s continued deals. When in Cuba last month and being told by Fidel how Torrijos was no longer valuable to them, the Cubans hadn’t spoken a word about any objections to cocaine trafficking: Noriega took that as being given tacit approval to re-start that… he was wrong but just didn’t know that yet. As to the Cubans, it was they who wanted Borge to die. Noriega had been told what he needed to be when it came to that man who he knew was always close to Cuba and who had only months ago defended Cuba’s actions when at that summit in Jamaica. That Borge had done, but he was also someone whom Fidel and his brother Raúl saw as restricting their influence in the region. Borge was the one of the three in-charge in Nicaragua who had tried to affirm Nicaragua’s position as independent of Cuban control: an ally, not a client state. He had limited Nicaragua’s role supporting Guatemala in the Belize War and then raised serious misgivings after Fidel had got the Ortegas to send troops into Honduras to fight in the undeclared war going on there. That man was working against Cuban interests even without purposely intending to. Cuba wanted him gone and in exchange for their assistance in getting rid of Torrijos, they wanted to make sure that Borge was killed he had been alongside Torrijos. A bond made in blood between Havana and Panama City had thus been forged. Blaming it all on the Americans was perfect cover for all involved too; who would really believe that the twin assassinations were the work of Cuba and Noriega acting in concert?
March 1983:
Over the Christmas break at the end of 1982, Chancellor Helmut Schmidt had announced that he would be resigning as leader of the West German SPD party before the upcoming federal elections called for March ’83. He had intended to lead his party into them to secure a new mandate from the electorate but internal pressures from within the SPD forced his resignation. There was no legal requirement for an election until the following year because, with the FDP in a parliamentary coalition, Schmidt had the votes in the Bundestag to maintain power… in theory. However, the new FDP leader replacing the slain Genscher, in the form of Otto Graf Lambsdorff, had told him that such support couldn’t continue without going to the people for legitimacy. Rather than see the FDP walk out and side with the opposition CDU, making Helmut Kohl the new chancellor in a CDU-FDP tie-in, Schmidt had moved forward with planned elections. His own position had come under attack from within though and eventually he gave in to that pressure. The terror attacks from the Red Army Faction and the Unterweser nuclear accident, but more so long-standing issues over Schmidt’s so-called militarism and domestic economic & labour problems, had all combined to bring about his downfall. Genscher had been a rock too, one which Lambsdorff certainly wasn’t. Replacing Schmidt to take the party into the election was Hans-Jochen Vogel. He led the SPD campaign where the party officially set out to win a majority yet privately expected to form a coalition once again with the FDP. Vogel and Lambsdorff would work together and keep Kohl out of office. This was the plan. More of the same but with different faces on it. West German voters went to cast their ballots on March 6th.
The SPD won the most seats, that wasn’t expected. Coming second was the CDU, neither was that expected. In third place of seats in the Bundestag wasn’t the FDP as everyone knew it would be but instead The Greens took that position. That pesky, chaotic little ecologist party who everyone laughed at took votes from the communists (and other small parties) but more so from the FDP who saw their share of the vote collapse by almost forty percent overall but more in key areas where they lost seats to The Greens. From having zero seats at the last election in ’80, The Greens now had fifty-seven. Seats in the Bundestag were granted on constituency/district basis as well as from party lists. The Greens had been expected to win seats but all from the party list basis: ten, maybe a dozen at best so said the experts. They took more than ten percent of those available including fifteen constituency seats: all the latter from the FDP. The turnout for the election was massive – West Germans liked to do their patriotic duty and vote – with polling stations inundated with voters. It was quite the shock. The FDP were long the party with which coalitions in the Bundestag were formed but they were left with just eighteen seats and when the numbers were crunched, it was The Greens which mattered. Neither the SPD nor the CDU could form a government on their own nor with the FDP. They could work together but that they wouldn’t: both Vogel and Kohl would be thrown out of their party leadership positions for trying to do so. Each approached The Greens and their collective leadership fronted by Petra Kelly. She put it to her colleagues: they all agreed that there couldn’t be any deal struck with the CDU and it would be the SPD to whom they would align themselves with in the Bundestag. Once that was agreed internally, The Greens then approached Vogel and told him what would be the price of their participation in the government. Vogel wasn’t impressed but things could have been worse, far worse. The Greens in their collective leadership weren’t demanding the unthinkable – unilateral disarmament, joining the Warsaw Pact, booting the Americans out on their behinds; none of that silliness –, just some reforms made and their voices really heard. A deal was struck. Kelly and her colleagues would join a parliamentary coalition with the SPD leaving the CDU and the fallen FDP both in opposition… Kelly’s colleagues being men like Rudolf Bahro, Gert Bastian and Joschka Fischer. West Germany’s new future was now to be written by those whose ideas they really hadn’t voted for.
April 1983:
Mexico had become a kleptocracy. The institutions of the state were one big giant excuse for so many to get rich, filthy rich, and steal from anyone and everyone. A lot of those involved didn’t even see what they did as theft. It was the way things were done. They deserved the money which they took because… well… they were the ones who really ran Mexico. Others didn’t delude themselves into thinking that it was their right: they knew full well what they were doing was wrong and they would be in trouble if ever caught. None of those on the take, in a set-up which would make a Mafioso chieftain proud, ever thought that the good times would come to an end. There would always be more money, the money tap would never be turned off. They were going to steal every penny if they could too for no one was ever going to stop them. Two of the biggest state organisations were intricately linked in the whole thing: the ruling PRI party – the party of government in a fully-rigged system – and the state oil company PEMEX. Senior officials, executives, politicians and managers were the ones who ended up with money which wasn’t meant to be theirs but rather belonged to the state and thus the Mexican people. Officially, most of the money stolen actually remained with the state treasury too: the figures were fiddled and no one was meant to be none the wiser. The scale of the theft in terms of the money taken, not how widespread it actually was, had increased dramatically in recent years. The country’s oil boom had made Mexico rich on paper as a nation state while the bank accounts of those stealing what they could were inflated dramatically alongside that: accounts held abroad too. Mexico sold oil overseas and received export revenues for that oil, much of which came in valuable foreign currency. That income wasn’t then spent on further oil extraction infrastructure as would be expected, to grow the industry even further, but instead used for the needs of the state and to balance the budget. The oil industry kept on growing though: the vast majority of Mexico’s exports were its cheap oil. This was financed instead by loans from foreign banks, loans which charged a rather high rate of interest. Mexico had been doing this for years. By April 1983, Mexico had run up a foreign debt to banks in the United States, Western Europe and Japan of almost twenty billion US Dollars. Servicing that debt with interest payments was staggering thirty percent of all of that oil export revenue. As to all this money coming in and out, and with the oil going out, that was where the theft took place. There was so much money going here & there & everywhere, little real regulation and a lot of people who behaved as they had always done when it came to taking their cut of the state’s money. There was graft, there were high-paying no-show jobs, there were under-the-counter oil sales (as well as some interesting ‘From Mexico’ labels attached to Iraqi oil on the international market). Money was going all over the place. The Peso was valued higher than it had ever been and not all of the foreign currency brought in from oil sales were spent on imports of good because Mexico’s own currency was valued by some. On paper, it all looked fine. Almost all of those in senior positions within the PRI, PEMEX and the Mexican Treasury were taking their cut out of the big pie, every day trying to figure out how to steal more. The good times would never come to an end. However, it was one big house of cards waiting for a strong breeze to bring Mexico’s oil boom and afterwards the whole national economy down.
A quarter of the population were out of work. There were ongoing infrastructure projects with transport links, oil extraction & pipelines and planned expansions to education & healthcare but still millions of Mexicans were unemployed. There had been fighting on Mexico’s southern border where the last stage of the Guatemalan Civil War had spilled over in places. More money was earmarked to buy weapons from the United States to allow Mexico to defend itself in a region growing increasingly volatile. Ethnic tension in the Chiapas region with the Mayan people – joined by half a million refugees from Guatemala – was rife and had seen violence. There was other violence elsewhere in the nation with a rise in gun crime. There had been troubles with the unions, the established ones for the oil industry and the new ones which had sprung up for all of the construction workers hired to build infrastructure: the government tried to restrict their growing power with intimidation and violence used against them. President President Javier García Paniagua had taken over from López Portillo back in December. He had been gifted his position by the outgoing president – a tradition in the PRI, like the stuffing of the ballot boxes – and had at once increased his predecessor’s domestic spending. He had been chosen over the economic technocrat who was Miguel de la Madrid Hurtado because López Portillo had believed that he had left the country in good financial hands; with García Paniagua, Mexico would have a bigger international role as well as seeing internal improvements brought on by a (supposedly) gifted political populist. It was García Paniagua who was in power for less than five months when, all of a sudden, the markets in the West and then those banks to which Mexico owed all of that money suddenly turned on his country with an apparent fury.
García Paniagua would declare that he would ‘defend the Peso like a rabid dog’ when it came under attack. He dramatically addressed the Mexican people in a manner to suggest that what happened when international currency speculators started short-selling the Peso was an intentional act by the rest of the world. It really wasn’t. The Peso was overvalued. That was corrected first by speculators and then by the rest of the world markets. Everyone could see it once the cloud of long-term delusion was lifted… once someone else was willing to admit it first. The stock market in Mexico City plunged with that. The state treasury was ordered to do just as García Paniagua said he would and defend the Peso: the honour of the Mexican people was at stake. That was done by using up the country’s foreign currency reserves to try and sure up the national currency. There was a problem there though: the money wasn’t where it was supposed to be. On paper it was, but in reality so much of it was elsewhere with those who weren’t supposed to have it. US Dollars, Pound Sterling, West German Marks and Japanese Yen had been stolen. That was what the more greedy took in the massive ongoing theft rather than Pesos for the less able. Until it was far too late, this inability to use money supposed to be there but what really wasn’t where it was meant to be was realized.
The attack on the Peso was only the beginning. Mexico’s economy was shown to be weak. There were those with nefarious motives who moved to take advantage but also those with responsibility to their institutions as lenders who all saw what in a terrible place Mexico was at this time. They all made their moves. The speculators started short-selling oil futures and made a killing as they started a crescendo of further short-selling by those worried about their own investments. Then there were the banks to which Mexico owed money and then further banks owed money by those banks. All had a stake in Mexico’s economic future. Maybe they could have helped prop it all up… but they didn’t. No one wanted to be the last one left with Mexican debt. There was the ever-growing American domestic oil extraction going on where recent promising news had come and needed to be considered: Mexico had grown rich by supplying the United States when the Arabs were seen as causing problems but now the Americans had so much more of their own oil coming on-line. When one big US oil company cancelled a contract at the last minute with PEMEX – concerned over the currency collapse and willing to take the contractual fines because half of those were in Pesos – that was the key for the utter failure in confidence with those banks. Mexico was seen as possibly at risk of losing its biggest oil market if this continued. Unwillingly, that was to be caused by those fearing it would happen. The banks started to look at their balance sheets with the loan amounts, the interest payments and the Peso hitting the floor when strangely the Mexicans weren’t spending the foreign currency reserves like they had been. It was almost as if they didn’t have that money like they were supposed to… International bankers didn’t like what they saw. One bank let it be known that in May they would be calling for repayment of their massive loan. Other banks started to do the same. The news got out and the currency speculators now sent the Peso through the floor. Mexico had nothing to prop their currency up with and nothing to fall back on in terms of currency reserves. This was all pretty bad. Worse was to come next month, much worse.
May 1983:
The Peso had been sent crashing to the floor. Then through it. Afterwards it was pushed down into the basement and to the foundations. The international markets didn’t give up. The pounding which Mexico’s currency took was extraordinary. For so long everyone had been willing to go along with the lie over what it was worth and the underpinning of that with Mexico’s supposedly good economic situation. That lie no longer held water. When Mexico was unable to defend the Peso, abruptly ceasing using foreign currency reserves, more of which it was supposed to have but seemingly didn’t, and that told the speculators everything. They were followed by anyone who had any Pesos not yet sold who decided that the only thing to do was to get rid of what they had and do it now. The foreign debt crisis got worse too. Those Western banks which said they would call in their debts kept their word and did so. We want our money back, please. Mexico didn’t have it to give. President García Paniagua tried to get other governments to stop their banks from doing this though with very little success made. That really wasn’t the source of the follow-up problem that came though. Those banks could demand all they wanted but there was no money to give. Mexico couldn’t get its hands on any money because the state’s money wasn’t there and then came the massive departure of private money from Mexico. Some capital flight had come at the end of April; most came at the beginning of May. Savers and investors pulled their money from Mexico’s banks before the government could use that money to save Mexico’s economy from the freefall it was in. The money went abroad… apart from the Pesos held by private individuals and companies who sold those dirt cheap and really fast only adding to the bonfire which was Mexico’s national currency. Hundreds of millions of foreign currency was transferred out of Mexico, starting first with a lot of stolen money held by those who didn’t want to face the questions which would come as to why it was there and not with the state where it belonged. Following that came the legally-held money. It went all over the world, anywhere but remaining in Mexico. At the last minute, far too late, and urged on from sources domestic and foreign, García Paniagua tried to stop that but to no avail. Only the very foolish left their money behind and there were few of those left after they had witnessed the events of the past few weeks.
Mexico’s stock market was bottomed-out. The Peso was useful only as toilet paper (well… that was how it was seen anyway). There was no money in the state treasury and the banks were empty of private money. García Paniagua had spent the past couple of weeks angry, distraught, raging at foreign conspiracies and in tears at his own ability to stop what happened. Despite all of that, life in Mexico continued. These events didn’t have an immediate effect upon ordinary Mexicans. The newspapers were full of the details though for most people, that was someone else’s problem. Currency speculation, currency overvaluation and capital flight were terms not terrible confusing but what it all meant for the ordinary Mexican wasn’t understood. They would find out soon enough. Mexico still had bills to pay. Those banks in the West with their demands were one thing but there were other things that the sate had to pay for from aboard. Domestically, there were bills to pay too. All that oil, loads of it, was still there and Mexico was ready to sell it and therefore those bills could be paid. That appeared to be a simple way out of the situation. But it really wasn’t that easy. The international markets didn’t work that way. Mexico was tainted at the moment. Some speculators cast envious eyes on what Mexico had to offer and pondered over whether there would be a fire sale. The oil industry might be up for grabs and other national assets too. It depended on whether García Paniagua was prepared to do that or try to figure another way out of this crisis. He was running out of time. He would have to make a decision on what to do with only terrible options. Default on all the country’s debts and face years of repercussions or have a fire sale where everything was up for grabs? Or… do nothing and hope for a miracle?
A lot of the capital flight went to Panama (some to stay, the rest to move on) and this especially came through the work of one particular bank to get private money – legally and illegally obtained – out of Mexico before the state could get its hands on it. That bank was BCCI, an international bank and quite the notorious outfit. BCCI specialised in ‘hot money’. It held accounts for criminals, drug traffickers, terrorists and intelligence organisations including both the CIA and the KGB: the latter had last year used money funneled through BCCI and then Stasi-controlled cut-outs to help fund the West German anti-nuclear movement. The bank asked few questions about the money from Mexican sources. When it all arrived in Panama, the money came into a country where General Noriega had just finished ‘cleaning house’. Torrijos’ demise had seen him afterwards secure his position. A puppet president was installed – a civilian fully under Noriega’s control – while behind the scenes, Noriega took out key supporters of Torrijos. Some vanished, others were murdered and more were arrested on trumped up charges. A hell of a lot of corruption was uncovered by the state’s officials and Panama acted like a responsible nation in arresting those who’d been committing financial crimes and stealing money belonging to the people (incoming Mexican money was untouched though). However, much of that got diverted in transit to BCCI accounts held by Noriega, some in Panama and others overseas.
El jefe – as Noriega was being referred to by others – was busy not just at home. He was looking at meddling further abroad than he had been before. The Cubans directly asked for nothing but they wanted his help. The American contacts of Noriega’s with the CIA came calling seeking his favour as well, just like they always did. Noriega would continue to play them both of against each other, just like he had always done. Torrijos’ dream of regaining the Canal Zone wasn’t one which Noriega had always been fully behind but as el jefe, he knew that his predecessor had got the people behind that. He would work towards carrying on with that where Torrijos left off for the sake of public opinion but at the same time still convinced by what Fidel had told him: the Americans would never give that up without a fight. That was a fight which Noriega was sure he’d lose, especially on his own and even if Panama had Cuba behind it. No, elsewhere would get his attention. He had interests and motivations in neighbouring countries. They would become those of Panama now Noriega led his country. The civil wars continued in their brutal fashion across El Salvador and Honduras: el jefe would become involved in them both.
June 1983:
June saw many Mexicans lose their jobs. There were those laid off from the financial industry and the connecting commercial support sectors affected by those first lay-offs. These were some of the best-paying jobs in Mexico, all concentrated in Mexico City. Elsewhere in the country, many reasonably well-paid construction jobs in the oil infrastructure and transportation building sectors (the latter including those new roads going north) were laid off too. They were paid until the end of the month but let go at once. The latter were non-unionized workers, easier to get rid of. Find work elsewhere, they were told, for construction work was temporarily cancelled for now on orders from the government. At that point, the Peso still had much of its domestic value and food could be bought and rent paid. There were protests from unionized workers in the same labour industries though when they were told that starting from next month, their wages would be cut by half. Again, that decision came from Mexico City without any consideration of the affects it would have. García Paniagua was acting without thinking. He was making decisions without looking at the consequences beyond the here and now. Another one of those decisions was his chosen approach when it came to dealing with the foreign banks and their loans that they had called in. With no help coming from abroad – the United States had refused to help like they had done back in 1976: Treasury Secretary Birch Bayh said no because he knew what had happened back in ’76 with that bailout wasted & stolen –, the Mexican president told those banks that there would be a suspension of payments on the debt for the time being and when Mexico was able to, it would again service the debt as it was before. That wasn’t what had been demanded from abroad though. Even if the banks were willing to do anything like what García Paniagua said he was going to do, there was no chance of that. Debt interest payments would always be wanted in US Dollars and none were available now nor in the foreseeable future. But the banks weren’t willing to listen. From Mexico City came more of those allegations that the bankers were working together in one giant conspiracy against the Mexican people.
The president was defending the nation. These attacks from abroad would stop, he declared to his people. But they didn’t. Others wanted American currency that Mexico didn’t have access to as well. The country was a major importer of food from aboard. Wastage on a grand scale and also illegal ‘land reform’ – peasants stealing farmland –, the latter which had happened under López Portillo without the former president doing anything to stop that, had made Mexico dependent upon foreign sources of basic foodstuffs for its people and animals. No dollars, no food. Those exporters had watched as Mexico’s economy collapsed and started asking for immediate payment-on-delivery, not payment-later. When the first payments weren’t made, word got out. Other suppliers wouldn’t send food to Mexico if it wasn’t going to be paid for. Like the bankers, those food suppliers were international concerns and paid attention to the Mexican president. News which was coming out of the office of García Paniagua (some true, some not) concerned them gravely. The president was acting as if he was in control but he wasn’t. He was firing staff and others were resigning. The rest of the government was having similar problems with chaos seemingly everywhere. Sending goods to Mexico at this time when it looked like it wasn’t going to be paid for wasn’t a good idea. The food deliveries started to dry up. Mexican people needed to eat like they needed jobs but both were being taken away from them. García Paniagua made a big speech towards the end of the month where he again trotted out the patriotic slogans and made allegations about foreign conspiracies. He was nationalizing Mexican banks. He said that Mexico would recover. He said he had a plan to fix the problem. The president kept on talking, saying a lot, but nothing was being done to reverse what had already happened and stop what was coming.
Quite ironically, when García Paniagua had spoken of international conspiracies against Mexico’s economy, some of what he had said was true. Part of what was going on, especially through June and long after the initial events had happened, was one of those which actually took place. KGB Chairman Chebrikov set into motion an operation to do further damage to the Mexican economy. He didn’t have approval from Andropov – who was getting increasingly ill; why bother him, this was what he would have done – nor the rest of the Politburo yet he did what he did believing that once he later told them, after it worked as he was sure it would, they would understand that it was necessary and crown him as the next general secretary when Andropov departed from this world. A fool he was with that, a deluded fool, but not with his financial scheme. Those KGB bank accounts in the BBCI bank’s Latin American division along with elsewhere in the world such as Austria and Switzerland. These were made use of to buy up Mexican debt and then sell it onwards to those who would really turn the screws on Mexico more than big commercial banking institutions. The KGB operating fund would make a profit too. It was just a matter of certain people buying then selling. Those involved in the transactions weren’t Soviet nationals and nor were many KGB operatives: bankers worked for the Soviet Union without knowing it and without seeing the bigger picture either. There was commission to be made and what did they care if Mexico was being fed to the sharks. One of those bankers, an Austrian citizen working for a private Swiss bank, had long been siphoning off small amounts from the accounts he controlled: a little here, a little there. These were used for arms sales by what he thought were Middle Eastern interests. He spent a lot of the money on fast cars, exotic women and party drugs. He was suddenly given access to a ton of money. Greed hit him when the temptation came. He stole what wasn’t his, transferring six million US Dollars out of a business account with a holding company in Switzerland off to another in Italy and then sending it further onwards. The money eventually arrived in French Polynesia. The banker set off after it, abandoning his job and exciting life in Switzerland. The KGB would chase him to the end of the earth for stealing from them even without knowing it was them he took that money from. All told though, it was a drop in the ocean when it came to the amount involved in the KGB’s Mexican operation… but still, he would get his punishment.
What was Chebrikov up to? He was doing what Andropov wanted and strengthening Soviet security by making sure that the United States would have a long-term problem in Latin America to focus on for the future. Since Ford had let Nicaragua and then Guatemala fall, and despite the relations he had in public with Kennedy, Andropov had been having this occur. The Cubans were the main front man in the operation, doing what they did for their own ends. It was all a careful strategy helped too by circumstance. However, Andropov was too ill to control day to-to-day operations anymore. Chebrikov had known about his illness long before he nor anyone else did and was eager to replace him. He oversaw the work of his First Chief Directorate head in the form of Kryuchkov who was intimately involved though had told Kryuchkov that the Politburo knew and approved. Assuming that the ambitious younger man wouldn’t eventually confirm that was another one of Chebrikov’s mistakes which would come to bite him in the behind in the end. That aside, the Mexican debt buy-up and sell-on made that profit and saddled Mexico with difficult creditors. Chebrikov saw further Mexican economic disasters as a good thing elsewhere too besides hurting American interests. Those newly-elected Greens in West Germany were making sure that further nuclear power development there was to be cancelled and talks (just talks) started on a future with tidal & wind power… while in the meantime Soviet oil and gas would be bought. Mexican oil was going to be out of the picture for some time coming, all making Soviet oil more sought after by the West because of shortages elsewhere.
The money from the Mexican operation which was earned as profit – less that money shot off to the South Pacific – was then used elsewhere in Latin America. BCCI was again involved in being the go-to bank for operations in the region where arms were bought and sold to be funneled to the fighting taking place in El Salvador and Honduras. Both Cuba and Nicaragua had their own things going on with more visible actions while the KGB acted from behind the scenes sending weapons to those fighting the governments in San Salvador and Tegucigalpa. Argentina and Venezuela had recently stepped away from the fight in El Salvador, leaving Chile alone to help Romero’s regime; Honduras was friendless. Everything with what Chebrikov was up to was all inter-connected. It was all for his own personal gain as well. When Andropov was gone, he intended to take his place and that would come after his victory in Central America… he was sure of that. In the meantime, if there needed to be tens of thousands of deaths and economic collapses of several nations, then so be it. The chase for power was intoxicating for Chebrikov.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Apr 7, 2018 18:30:26 GMT
July 1983:
Kennedy was in the Middle East where he made visits to Israel, Jordan and then Egypt. He came on a mission of peace with the first two visits made ahead of a summit long arranged in Egypt. This had been something which he had been long working on and not one of his often flights of fancy in foreign affairs. The president’s reputation as a friend of Israel was well-known but he had put the effort in to trying to get the Egyptians and the Jordanians to understand that he came as an honest deal-breaker regardless. It was peace which he was trying to bring to the region, a long-term one which while it would never settle all of the issues, would help settle some. Ambitious it was and something which had caused him problems back home with the Jewish Lobby in the United States, but Kennedy was able to use his credentials as an established friend of Israel to silence much of that. Prime Minister Begin, King Hussein and President Sadat met in Port Said with Kennedy at the beginning of the month. Security was tight with threats to the summit and the participants regarded as high. They talked among themselves and with the other secondary participants at the summit with the intention of thrashing out a deal. The main priorities were to have the Sinai returned to Egyptian control and an Israeli-Jordanian understanding on the West Bank. Other regional matters involving each of the countries were discussed as well though ranging from Lebanon, the role of Syria in a peaceful regional future, Iraq and across to Libya. One of those external participants was Gromyko with the Soviet foreign minister representing his country’s interests in the region away from matters directly at-hand when it came to Israeli-Egyptian and Israeli-Jordanian matters. Mondale had come with Kennedy to Egypt and he met with Gromyko where they made another one of their later-to-be-infamous informal deals. This one concerned Syria and how the Soviet Union would make sure that Syria stayed out of Lebanon; Mondale agreed that the United States would work towards having Israel keep out of the same small country. This was a private deal and one where, once again, the United States came away from an agreement with the Soviet Union feeling as if it had gotten more than it had given away. Vienna and East Berlin had shown this happen before and now Port Said would join that list. Kennedy and his secretary of state really seemed to have a good understanding of how to strike deals with the Soviets and get good ones too: there was no sigh in any previous agreement of Soviet duplicity and none was expected with the Lebanon issue. During that side talk, Mondale had diplomatically enquired after the health of the Soviet general secretary. Andropov was in good health, he was told, just busy with affairs of state; he sent his good wishes to President Kennedy. Well that was one big fat stinking lie, wasn’t it?
The main talks came away with success too. It took some time and Kennedy ended up staying an extra day in Egypt but he achieved something worthwhile. Begin and Sadat struck a deal on the eventual Israeli withdrawal from the Sinai. Israel’s long military occupation would end; the settlements would go too. The end result would be a demilitarization of the Sinai leaving the peninsula free of Egyptian and Israeli soldiers. The intention was to get a UN force in afterwards to monitor the ground too. Begin and King Hussein couldn’t get to an agreement on the West Bank but they had fruitful talks, talks which would recommence again in the coming months with Kennedy inviting them both to the United States to talk there. There was a press event with cautious handshakes and Kennedy in the middle of it all. From elsewhere in the region, neighbouring hostile countries, there came screams of outrage. Iraq and Libya condemned the Port Said Summit where King Hussein had ‘betrayed the Palestinian people’ and Sadat had ‘betrayed the Arab people’. Aggression from these two countries had been talked about at the summit, especially the still ongoing illegal occupation of Kuwait by Iraq, but nothing had come of that.
Kennedy went home afterwards, aiming to bask in the glory when he returned to Washington. He had been briefed before he went to the Middle East and when there about the continuing dire situation Mexico was in along with increases in the fighting with both the Salvadoran and Honduran civil wars. He was informed too about arms shipments recently tracked, now not just guns anymore but tanks and MiGs being transferred from Cuba to Guatemala and Nicaragua as the Cubans got newer weapons of their own from the Soviets. This was all serious and Kennedy took it all aboard. The Cubans were building armies for their puppets but all Kennedy and his advisers dismissed that as being a money sink for them. What would a motorised rifle division or a tank regiment do in Central America? At the same time, it was just more of the same as before. Latin America was a headache to Kennedy and one which he had sworn off getting involved throughout his presidency. This was breeding ground for his domestic opponents, who whined about the supposed threat those socialist nations posed and how he ignored it, but Kennedy knew best. What were the Cubans and their puppets going to do? Invade Mexico? He was focused on the bigger picture, sorting that problem at the cause anyway. The weapons, the money and the ultimate motivation for problems in Latin America came from the Soviet Union. It was with the Soviets who he focused his attention on with relations with them improving all of the time, hence the latest agreement on Lebanon being another small step. Mexico’s financial problems were explained to him but neither he nor anyone else could see what was coming next: this month, the following months and next year. If someone could see the future and tried to convince anyone of that, they would be locked up with the key taken away!
July 1983:
Among the core group of remaining Sandinistas, those who had fought the long fight and were still alive in post-revolutionary Nicaragua, there was a Mexican national named Victor Manuel Tirado López. Tirado López was a committed communist and someone to whom the Mexican government was unfriendly towards. Only last year, pushed by the DGI and against the objections of Borge, the Ortega brothers had sent him up to his native land using a different identity. His trip had been to assess the political situation there. Upon his return, Tirado López had told the Ortegas that there had been no real change in Mexico. The country was in no way ready for a revolution nor armed conflict to push Mexico towards one. He had only reinforced his own opinion in what he had seen, but that still didn’t mean that he didn’t return with the truth. Mexico wasn’t fertile ground for anything like what had happened in Nicaragua & Guatemala in previous years and what was occurring now in El Salvador & Honduras. Only a fool would think otherwise. The economic situation wasn’t desperate for the poor and the government wasn’t overtly oppressive. Mexico’s leaders showed no sign of turning the people against them. None of the factors which created the civil wars in Central America were apparent up in Mexico. He would like his native land to see justice, freedom and everything else that communism could bring, but that wasn’t to be. It was just impossible. The report from Tirado López which was sent onto the Cubans was read by the KGB too; the feeling in Moscow was that any sign of serious trouble in Mexico would rain down fire and fury from across the Rio Grande too. It would be a country too far, Andropov had said, and a serious geo-political error. The beliefs of Andropov and the observations from Tirado López would stand in stark contrast to what was about to happen. Andropov would be pushing up daisies before the end to that story came while Tirado López himself would be in Mexico City ruling over a nation up in arms. That was in the future though, the short-term future yes, but not what was going on right now.
The economic crisis started to bite home hard across Mexico. The problems moved from the (destroyed) financial centre down to the workers, especially those in the cities and big towns to where so many Mexicans in recent years had moved to find work. The lay-offs continued and the price of food skyrocketed. From the government, when criticism in the media started to get too strong, blaming not just President García Paniagua but the PRI party as a whole for decades of foolishness, there came a crackdown there with newspapers, radio and television muzzled. Big announcements were made that things were going to be fixed. None of that stopped the protests which took place from those made unemployed and with families to feed. It didn’t stop the strikes by government workers (directly or indirectly employed) about the coming lay-offs and the immediate wages cuts to them too. There was rioting in places which came with the protests and the strikes and things got out of hand in a few instances. The police, national and local forces, were ineffective in following orders coming straight from the top to put a stop to those. They were in the same position as those whose heads which they were supposed to bash: caught up in this economic crisis which was now affecting all Mexicans. Mexico City was gripped by a massive riot which spun out of control and spread from the slums to the very centre of the capital city. García Paniagua decided that the only thing to do was to call upon the military where the police had failed. The Mexican Army had well-trained and numerous military police detachments and they brought and end to that riot with García Paniagua pleased at the results… he pretended that he didn’t hear the casualty numbers because he was more focused on parts of the city burning. Where elsewhere there was trouble too with rioting, coming from protests which seemed to fast lose all sense of purpose – it was about jobs and food but became an orgy of destruction –, the president decided that only military force would be effective. He saw the resignation of several of his ministers in response to this fateful decision but firmly believed he was doing what was best for Mexico. How could foreign capital and investment be persuaded to return to Mexico if the country was alight?
The Mexican Army was small but in the absence of a serious foreign threat to the country nor any worldwide commitments, that size was long deemed suitable for Mexico. The majority of the professional and mobile units of the army, including most of the military police units, were based around Mexico City though able to deploy nationwide from there. The brigades of infantry were always designed to reinforce smaller, local units in times of trouble: such was the military deployment structure in the country. This had recently been done with the army’s brigade of paratroopers joining another two of infantry in going down to Chiapas and the Guatemalan border area and staying there to work with locally-based forces to enforce order in that southern region. Further units from around the capital, including almost all of the military police detachments, were now deployed in presidential orders nationwide as rioting continued throughout the country. Murders and deliberate arson had taken place across cities such as Chihuahua, Guadalajara, Monterrey, Juarez and Puebla. Reliable military units from the Mexico City area, joined by local forces, would move in to put an end to this. Orders from the government were just the same as those which had been issued in the capital: civilians were to be detained and the violence ended, there was to be no unnecessary shooting of the people. As had been the case in Mexico City, that was all fine in theory but not in practice. Soldiers carrying live weaponry sent into unfamiliar areas where there is chaos and enraged population never mix well.
This mix saw massacres take place. None of it was intentional. It was preventable though. The soldiers should never have been sent on such missions. Many of them lost their lives too, killed by the mob when they were dragged away from their comrades during urban conflict. The worse of the violence came in Guadalajara and Puebla where things really got out of hand. In addition, when the soldiers came under attack and responded with reasonable force to maintain law and order (the official line), there was some interference from the local police in several instances where shots might or might not have been fired at the soldiers from those who also had weapons but refused to use them against their fellow civilians. Details on that were fuzzy, a lot had been going on. Overall though, the Mexican Army had fought against the people. The anger in response, by those who knew their history of oppressive governments in the past especially, was widespread throughout the country. García Paniagua refused to listen to the pleas from others in his broken and demoralised government to pull the soldiers back. He alone commanded the Mexican Army. He declared a state of emergency and vowed to put down what he deemed ‘insurrection’. He would save Mexico, from itself if necessary. A senior Mexican Army officer, a man known as el coronel (the colonel) despite now being a general officer – he’d long been legendary in that former rank –, put a stop to that madness. He put a bullet in the head of García Paniagua.
El coronel took power in Mexico for what was supposed to be a short period. He would restore order and punish those responsible for what had recently gone on. When he addressed the Mexican people on television, dressed in his full military regalia and surrounded by his fellow generals, the country’s supposed interim leader promised justice. There would be food, there would be jobs and there would be no more violence. Elections would be coming soon as well, fair ones at that. Cynics at home and abroad asked themselves whether any military cabal which had taken power forcefully from a civilian government had ever willingly and fast handed power back to civilians before. There was a promise from el coronel that such a thing was to happen though… once the mess created in the past few months had been sorted out.
The image of a general taking powering in a violent coup d’état, where the country’s civilian president had been killed, didn’t go over very well up in Washington. Latin America was full of military governments and none of them were personally liked by Kennedy. The president was informed by Mondale – who spoke with el coronel when Kennedy refused to on a point of principle – that Mexico’s new leader was appealing to the United States for help. What help did he want? Financial help, lots of it. Like García Paniagua before him, el coronel was begging for money from the American taxpayer. Hell, no. Kennedy was opposed to such an idea on more than just principle: he knew that the American people wouldn’t stand for that. Images on the evening news and reports in the big newspapers had come of the violence in Mexico where soldiers had reported killed hundreds, maybe thousands. The fact that a general had now seized power by killing a civilian president to put a stop to his soldiers killing civilians didn’t play well at all. Kennedy wasn’t going to do it. Next November and his re-election was still some time away, but he was no dummy on an issue like this. He saw it coming back to haunt him next year. Mexico could sort this issue out for themselves. It was an internal Mexican affair. He had been briefed that there was no foreign interference in what had gone on in Mexico and it was all a problem of the Mexican’s own making. The country could and would have to deal with its own mess. There would be no bailout from Washington and no help in other areas until civilian rule, legitimate civilian rule at that, was restored in Mexico City. Kennedy also had other more important matters on his mind following is return from the peace deal he had been behind in the Middle East. Now was the time to deal with a real United States reaction to the ongoing and verified Soviet troop withdrawals from Eastern Europe. The time was coming to respond to that good faith shown by Moscow with good faith coming in return from the Kennedy Administration. He knew it wasn’t going to be easy, but Kennedy believed he was ready for the backlash from those who didn’t see the big picture like he did.
August 1983:
Kennedy had been intending to wait until September before he made his big announcement. His aim was to spend the summer having official contacts made with fellow governments and shoring up domestic support at home for his decision on withdrawing selected American forces from Western Europe. Previous decisions had been unilateral and ended up distracting the prestige he hoped to get. He planned to go ahead regardless of what was said, that was true, but at least give the pretense of listening to the opinions of others and taking that advice aboard etc. However, there had been leaks made and the Washington Post was planning to make revelations. This was a newspaper, like others, which were still sitting on personal stories about him, but the NATO issue was something which they were going to print: the drinking and sex allegations were kept under wraps. Kennedy preempted that release of his NATO plan, scooping them. He did the opposite of what he set out to do in being seen to listen and engage all so that he wouldn’t have to see the media get their story out first. It was almost like he was daring those newspapers to go and print their other revelations, laying down the gauntlet because he liked to live dangerously… What became known as the Kennedy Plan was something in fact drawn up by others at the Pentagon and among independent, outside advisors whom the president called in for their specialist knowledge. Up until the very end, the plan was kept secret. There were hints and rumours but nothing concrete. Official and unofficial statements were made said that there was no plan underway. Well, those were lies. The Kennedy Plan was revealed at the beginning of August and hadn’t come out of the blue.
Troops, combat aircraft and tactical missiles (complete with nuclear warheads) would be removed from Western Europe starting next year. The earlier and ongoing Soviet withdrawals would be matched by American redeployments. Only a portion of United States’ military strength would be leaving and not all of it going back across the North Atlantic too but instead going elsewhere in Western Europe rather than remaining in West Germany. Just as the Soviets had done – pulling six divisions out of East Germany by now, elsewhere into Eastern Europe –, American forces wouldn’t be going far at the moment as long as hosting for them could be found. A wing of US Air Force F-16 multi-role fighter-bombers and another of A-10 attack-fighters would be removed along with the 56th Artillery Brigade from the US Army with their Pershing missiles. Also from the US Army would be combat formations in the form of one full division, two independent brigades and an armoured cavalry regiment; a corps headquarters would be coming out too. With those aircraft and the ground units, the Kennedy Plan called for the ability for those withdrawn forces to immediately return by leaving behind the infrastructure in-place. This meant that while combat forces were shrinking, combat-support (artillery, engineers & helicopters) and service-support elements (maintenance, supply & transportation) were staying behind. That wasn’t the same with the Pershing missiles, they were being fully withdrawn. The withdrawals would start in the New Year.
As can be imagined, this caused quite the uproar. That uproar was in many places among all sorts of different people and institutions. Not all of that was honest too for there was some hint of what was coming due to the rumours coming out but more-importantly Kennedy’s behaviour leading up to his big announcement. There had come words of praise for the Soviets in their actions in pulling out their own forces while at the same time only minor condemnation of such recent events like the Chinese airliner shootdown: previous outrages like the invasion of Iran were forgotten too. Kennedy himself had point-black refused to answer questions on whether he was considering mirroring the troop redeployments out of the divided Germanys and left the denials to others. That too had been seen before with his administration, one which defied so many precedents set by those which had come before. It was the Sinatra Doctrine again, one which had started back in January two years ago when he was inaugurated, where he did things his way. Congress was in recess for the summer though members of both chambers, especially the Senate in Republican hands, made media appearances where there was a promise to take action on this, maybe even block the whole thing if they could. Former senior officials back from the Ford Administration came out in protest, so too did other influential former politicians no longer in Congress. One of those foreign affairs think-tanks – one of the ones which had been constantly issuing those dire warnings that were mocked in off-the-record briefings from the White House – had its spokesman claim that Andropov was ill and soon to die; once he was gone, his successor, whomever that might be, wouldn’t honour agreements made with Kennedy therefore returning Soviet troops and nuclear missiles to East Germany in a hurry leaving Western Europe exposed and open to attack.
The real drama came across on the other side of the Atlantic though. One after another, Western European governments lined up to protest against yet another unilateral decision coming from Washington. None of the NATO members were happy at being left out of any discussions… no… not so much that, but instead ignored like they didn’t matter. NATO was an alliance of equals, the small countries mattered as equally as the big ones. All had a voice which counted the same as everyone else. The Kennedy Administration treated them like they didn’t matter. Initial comments coming from certain American figures that as this involved United States military forces, this was a solely American matter were met with incredulity at first and then outright anger. Kennedy spoke several times with Chancellor Vogel and calmed him somewhat but he was too busy to speak to other leaders such as Thatcher, Mitterrand, Craxi, Lubbers and Martens. Dealing with them was left to Glenn, Mondale and Muskie. Kennedy’s focus was on gaining West German acquiescence for the withdrawals to take place. He had been intending to do this before the announcement was made but ended up starting that process straight after he told the world. The Kennedy-Vogel talks were strained and demanded the president’s attention for some time. Vogel didn’t want US military forces to leave his country, even only in part, and did tell Kennedy that it would only strengthen the hand of domestic opponents-cum-allies of his (temporary allies) in the form of The Greens as they would present this as a victory for them and their people-power protests. Kennedy’s advisers told him that Vogel was taking nonsense – they had their own understanding of domestic politics in West Germany, an understanding surely better than the West German chancellor – and that Vogel was aiming to delay the inevitable in the hope that Kennedy would be voted out of office next year. Such remarks had been made to the president before, mirroring his own thinking when it came to many so-called allies, where they were all waiting for him to go down in flames next November. The Kennedy-Vogel talks (conducted through multiple phone calls) produced no meaningful result: the West Germans were still opposed to the withdrawals, especially in their unilateral manner. If the United States had gone through NATO with this, even government-to-government before a big domestic announcement, then things might have turned out differently. But that Kennedy hadn’t done.
Thatcher came to an agreement with Glenn where the British Prime Minister agreed to host a small element of the withdrawing forces coming out of West Germany at temporary holding points in Britain. The Vice President could only get the UK to take some (space considerations were what it was all about), but it was better than none. He didn’t report back to Kennedy that he was told unofficially, in a nod-and-a-wink fashion by the British that they were banking on Kennedy being voted out of office in fifteen months time: he probably should have, but he didn’t. Mitterrand and Craxi, France’s president and Italy’s brand new prime minister, had a meeting between themselves when they got little of substance from Mondale and Muskie regarding American long-term military commitment to United States defence of Europe. What worried them, and then others later, was that the Americans would eventually remove all American troops from West Germany. The consequences from that didn’t bode well for the future of Western Europe. In one worse case scenario, without taking any casualties of their own in any Soviet invasion limited to West Germany, the United States might decide not to fight. In another hypothetical, without troops to hold the line straight away, the Americans might decide to at once ‘defend’ West Germany with nuclear weapons coming from strikes launched from outside of Western Europe. This didn’t have to happen this year nor this decade, under this president nor the next… but sometime in the future and all coming long after the announcement of the Kennedy Plan. These two leaders started talking about that future. Their talks would eventually, in the coming months, develop significantly away from where they started and be influenced by external events elsewhere in the world. Kennedy had killed NATO as something relevant. He nor anyone else were yet to know that, but the organisation was now on its last legs. Who would have ever thought that would happen starting back with Soviet tanks going east and not west?
August 1983:
Endemic corruption at the top had brought about the situation where Mexico was open to an economic hit like it had done. Politicians and civil servants weren’t all on the take and all of them hadn’t stolen from the state, but so many had. El coronel could find few he trusted to sort out the mess his country was in. His only recourse was to turn to his fellow military officers, those free of the stain of corruption. He appointed dozens of them to senior positions at the federal level to try to repair the damage done. Elsewhere in the country though, he decided that there was enough honest people in positions of power to hold the reins of power there. Mexico was officially known as the United Mexican States. There were thirty-one of those plus the special federal territory in which Mexico City lay. Those states were granted emergency powers by el coronel to sort out the problems within them though were also expected to work together, guided by central authority in the form of him. If he had been trying to create further problems with such a scheme to apparently fix things, he couldn’t have a better job. This was a disaster in the making. Corruption went all the way down to the state level. There were rich states and poor states. There were existing disputes between them. Some had been hit by recent violence while others hadn’t. All Mexicans were meant to be in this together: now el coronel created the conditions to turn them against one another. Federal military forces, apart from those in Chiapas who remained on the Guatemalan border, were withdrawn back to the Mexico City area leaving police and local militia – the Rurales – to reestablish order. The previous violence petered out in most places following the immediate withdrawal of troops. The lightly-armed, locally-recruited and unpaid militia patrolled the streets alongside the police who came back out in most cases despite the outstanding issue of wages.
From Mexico City, el coronel carried on keeping his word on what he would do to fix everything that had gone wrong. There were arrests made of corrupt officials – causing others to begin to flee the country – and a comprehensive action plan announced to make sure that there were food and jobs for all. How would this be paid for? There remained money in Mexico, it was just that it was in what el coronel decided was the wrong places. There needed to be a fair distribution of wealth and then everything would sort itself out. At the US Embassy in the capital, the ambassador heard this and reported to Washington that while that might have sounded like communism, it wasn’t: el coronel was just fumbling in the dark and clutching at straws. Due consideration was given to that analysis at the State Department and there was an agreement that Mexico’s new leader was no communist. What he was though was a fool. The state governments, suddenly given plenty of power, didn’t want to do what they were told by Mexico City. Sharing out what little wealth some had by giving it to others was refused. Others demanded more and that more to come now. Within the state governments themselves there were disagreements. Capital flight had come downwards when it had happened and had hit hard on a local level as well as a national one, hence the violent riots. Everyone needed what they had and needed more in fact, especially right now. Food was one concern but so too were medical supplies and other basic essentials which was no longer coming in from abroad. El coronel lost his temper with several state governments, especially those he saw as infected with corrupt officials linked to the regime which he had taken apart. Nuevo León was one, Sonora another and Tamaulipas a third. They were all northern states and while different in their attitudes and needs, caused him problems. He signed a decree declaring their state governments not fit to rule. This was wholly illegal and the mark of the dictator which he repeatedly said he wasn’t. Those state governments were to be taken control of by military personnel leading civil servants selected for their honesty. Such teams were dispatched.
The Sonoran state government in Hermosillo rolled over; those in Monterrey and Ciudad Victoria refused to give in. Nuevo León and Tamaulipas were not about to be illegally subsumed into federal authority to strip them of what was theirs. When el coronel sent troops to their state capital (the numbers were extremely small and not a real combat force), the Rurales were called upon to face them down. In Monterrey especially but on a smaller scale in Ciudad Victoria, civilians assembled with the Rurales and blocked the passage of federal forces aiming to assert control. Mexicans were pointing guns at Mexicans soon enough and then it just took one mistake, one nervous rifleman, one idiotic troublemaker in the watching crowd. Both state capitals were hit with unplanned violence where federal forces coming up from Mexico City were turned away with bloodshed. Word spread fast despite all efforts of the el coronel and his control over the media to silence the news. This was news that couldn’t be stopped. It was also news which was fast subject to exaggeration by accident or design. Mexico had another Santa Anna, another Porfirio Díaz. That is what many had been expecting to happen and the news which came only confirmed that. State governments further afield which were wary of Mexico City taking what they had or not sending them enough, let alone having a military strongman take charge, reacted accordingly. Baja California, Chihuahua, Sinaloa and Veracruz were foremost among them: each hit with violence beforehand and struggling with the financial collapse more than others. These waited for their recently-given powers to be revoked and planned accordingly to defy such measures coming from Mexico City. There was a lot of honest intention in this, as had been the case in the other states, but also the work of agitators as well.
El coronel saw rebellion. He saw that spreading too. Mexico would collapse into anarchy if he didn’t put it down. He sent out warnings to state governments of retribution for rebellion and then mobilised the Mexican Army again. His focus was on those two states which lay across the Rio Grande from Texas and while he was making many fatal mistakes, he did have the presence of mind to make sure that the Americans were informed less there be any misunderstanding. The ambassador told him not to do it. Dialogue would solve this. El coronel told the ambassador that he didn’t understand Mexico, especially this new Mexico, one created by stock markets and banks in the United States doing what they had to his country. The ambassador shot off an urgent message to Washington saying that Mexico’s leader was out of control. He also included in his message a prophetic message warning of the flight of Mexicans when violence came their way. There was only one place where they would go: to the Rio Grande and across it. As to putting down the rebellions taking place in Nuevo León and Tamaulipas, el coronel sent troops against those in rebellion from afar but also within those states. Local troops which answered to federal control were ordered to come under central command for operations to restore federal authority. Officers in most cases responded positively; some cited delays. Those latter officers were unsure about their men who, like them, lived in those states apparently in rebellion but who knew the truth of the matter.
Federal troops started to take control over the rebellious states of Nuevo León and Tamaulipas. Where they met resistance, the troops overcame this. Civilian volunteers and the Rurales were wholly unable to stop this. Access to weaponry was one problem for those two states but more so lack of organisation and the inability to defend against multi-directional attacks. When fighting took place, civilians fled. The very first refugees, a few thousand who would precede several million within a year, went towards Texas. The anti-rebellion measures went excellent at first and within days, the Mexican Army looked to be wholly victorious. It appeared that nothing could stop them from retaking control. Then the mutinies began. These started small and among selected units based locally in Nuevo León and Tamaulipas now sent to fight civilians and militia from those states. Groups of soldiers wouldn’t fight. They refused to do so. Clashes occurred where an attempt was made to enforce discipline: orders from el coronel said that there must be discipline and while he wouldn’t have wanted to see the men refusing to obey orders, his primary concern had been that soldiers wouldn’t mistreat civilians when he wrote those orders. They were interpreted differently by those at the front. Soldiers who refused to fight were to be shot. Others flocked to their cause. The anti-rebellion offensive, on the cusp of success, was suddenly stalled by fighting in the rear with Mexican Army troops shooting each other. There was score-settling of unpopular officers which took place yet overall the refusal from so many to follow what were the orders from a dictator in Mexico City. Breathing space was given to the embattled state governments of Nuevo León and Tamaulipas to prepare for if the Mexican Army started advancing again. Other state governments, which had been aghast at what was happening, decided that they could no longer sit on the fence: they would have to take sides. News spread across Mexico of what had been going on with the military shooting civilians once again. Mexico’s Revolution now was getting going. Abroad, countries near and far were now really paying attention to the truly unexpected events in Mexico: supposedly a stable country, now one where there was the start of civil war taking place. How the hell had that happened?
September 1983:
Cuba’s armed forces conducted their third big combined arms exercise of the year come September. It was much larger than the preceding war games which had occurred in January and then in May. The former had taken place across western parts of Cuba and the latter had occurred inside Nicaragua. This third one was spread from the island of Cuba, down to Central America and as far out as Grenada too. There were parachute drops made of Cuban soldiers and an amphibious assault made as well. Live-fire exercises took place within the whole series of war games with Cuban aircraft making attack runs overland but also above the Caribbean as well. There were major ground operations inside both Guatemala and Nicaragua with the use of the new armies built for those nations taking place alongside Cuban forces. Cuba and its allies – who were starting to be called ‘LAComs’ (Latin American Communists) up in United States in short-hand form – were showing off not just all of their new military equipment but testing it out in realistic fashion should the situation where it might have to be used. Observers from many friendly nations were present to watch and so too were the training teams from across the Eastern Bloc who watched all their hard work put into practice.
The use of so many Cuban and LACom troops across many different theaters for the September war games wasn’t just to test everything out. There was a political angle too. Nicaragua, just like Grenada and Guatemala, was now firmly back in the Castro camp after a little flirtation with independence from Havana by Managua had seen Borge then killed, apparently by the CIA too (because that made so much sense!). Panamanian military officers from the army which Noriega was slowly building down in his country were watching and Cuba was aiming to impress upon Panama that they could too have access to all of this firepower if Noriega was willing to play the same game as the LAComs were doing. The exercises were also aimed further afield. The Belize War had left Guatemala humiliated but also Cuba too for it had been a Cuban proxy war: Cuban military units ‘transferred’ to Guatemala in the form of combat aircraft had been shot out of the sky by the British. Those were MiG-21s and older versions of the MiG-23; Cuba now had better-quality MiG-23s in service, was seeing the introduction of the MiG-27 and there was also a Soviet training team in Cuba (which didn’t take part in the exercises) with the brand-new MiG-29 aircraft. There were new tanks as well: more Soviet-manufactured equipment. Cuba was receiving upgrades to its T-55s while also getting its hands upon T-72s. Passed down to its allies were Cuban T-54s removed from service going to both Guatemala and Nicaragua while at the same time, Nicaragua was being directly supplied further T-72s by the Soviets. Such military equipment, the high-end visible pieces of gear like this used in the exercises, but also the necessary supporting equipment (the ‘boring’ stuff like trucks, engineering vehicles and signals gear), was being sent as foreign aid. Cuba nor her allies were able to pay for all of this directly even with cash crops being dispatched to the Soviets. Ammunition and military fuel was exchanged for the military equipment though and so Moscow was getting something out of the deal where there was this huge military build-up taking place, but there was still a loss being made with such supplies sent. It went regardless: it wasn’t like anyone in the Soviet Union had to answer to voters or stockholders.
The British with their commitment to Belize watched the exercises and so too did the Americans. Intelligence staffs shared the view that this was all for show and the big exercises were a façade because there was little behind-the-scenes activity. It was all great to have the crash of tank cannons, drop bombs from aircraft and have paratroopers assault the Isle of Pines in a mock assault, but where was the support network to support such armed forces? Cuba and the LAComs were front-loaded, that was how they saw it. There remained a Guatemalan threat to Belize and Cuba was still meddling elsewhere – El Salvador and Honduras were still having their civil wars –, yet there was no serious danger overall to the region from the Cuban / LACom alliance. The dots weren’t being connected though. There was that rear support being built for the LACom armies. Panama wasn’t seen for how Noriega saw the future of his country. And there was the five hundred pound elephant in the room which was Mexico now entering a civil war of its own, one on a far grander scale than the ‘little’ ones in Central America, to distract intelligence services of the West looking at Latin America.
September 1983:
The Mexican states which signed the September Declaration made it clear that they weren’t in rebellion and there was no intention of succession. They were still part of the United Mexican States. Down in Mexico City, the federal government there was illegal and they were standing together in opposition to the usurper who was killing his fellow Mexicans. More states were invited to join them in their formal alliance against el coronel and there was a call for the people to help them get rid of him: ‘the people’ included Mexico’s soldiers. To see the replacement of an illegitimate regime with a legitimate one, the declaration made up in Monterrey and supported at first by eight states – joined later in the month by two more –, called on resistance to come in a non-violent form, if possible. Strike, the people were told; soldiers were called upon to refuse to obey orders to kill fellow Mexicans. However, if el coronel continued to send troops against the people, then fighting would be necessary. From Monterrey, there was a deliberate intent to involve Mexico’s neighbour as well. Not in a military sense – no Mexican wanted that – but to have the Americans cut ties with Mexico City and temporarily transfer diplomatic relations to Monterrey. Quite the collection of politicians, prominent citizens and military officers (local defectors) had gathered there in what they kept saying wasn’t a secessionist government even if it looked like one. The Monterrey Government was a chaotic grouping who couldn’t agree on anything among themselves behind the façade they put on of unity and they certainly weren’t all happy at that state of Nuevo León being suddenly at the centre of power. Arguments raged among them because they had the time to do so. Washington knew this and wouldn’t be sending anyone to Monterrey into that mess; in addition, Mexico City was recognised as the centre of government and the Monterrey Government was seen in the eyes of the United States as secessionist. El coronel took no follow-up action from his late-August offensive against the rebellion where mass munities had broken out. First one then a second state government, those down in the southeast, joined the alliance. There was talk of more coming over to their side. Efforts were made to coerce others on-side. There was hope that the domino effect would see el coronel give in when fifteen, then twenty, then thirty states all signed up. No real military preparations were made by the ten states united and disunited as they were by political squabbles but also geography.
The dictator who didn’t want to be a dictator down in Mexico City had made his own military preparations. The Mexican Army had been hit by shameful mutinies and desertions from locally-based units which were still not solved. He would have wanted to wait, to sort the problems out, but the clear secessionism which he saw forced his hand. The brigades of the regular army were all called-up and sent into action. Monterrey was the heart of the rebellion and it was there that the paratroopers went: a small airborne drop was made though the majority of the men were then flown in to take control of that city and get their hands on those who defied Mexico City. Chihuahua, Sinaloa, Tamaulipas and Veracruz – further states were the rebellion was strongest in the eyes of el coronel – also saw the entry into them of professional troops in mobile columns charging on their state capitals. Everything was thrown at this one effort to finally kill off the last of resistance. Orders were for once again there to be shooting only if necessary. Arrests for rebellion were favoured over killing. If armed units stood in the way, the orders were for them to be bypassed if possible, otherwise they were to be engaged in talks to get them to at least stand aside if they refused to help put down the rebellion. Unlike last time, this second mass offensive didn’t get off to a good start. The states were still unable to properly fight to defend themselves but the Mexican Army was torn once again by mutinies and defections. Once it came down to it, when the reality kicked in of killing their fellow Mexicans for the benefit of a military strongman down in Mexico City, the soldiers in the main wouldn’t do it. There were some who did fight but not many. In addition, of those who initially did, they soon afterwards decided that they didn’t want no more of this. Monterrey was taken by Mexican paratroopers whose commander detained large numbers of the government there before he then declared his allegiance to them. Further Mexican Army units went over to the Monterrey Government or declared their neutrality. The Mexican Army fell apart as an organised force. There was no stomach in them to do as ordered, especially when they were sent into action against their fellow Mexicans. The September Declaration had had the desired effect.
As before, news travelled fast. The rumours did too. Mexico City saw a protest march where the people came out to demonstrate against el coronel. The city’s police stood aside rather than try to stop them. Where were the military police who had put down trouble in Mexico City before? They were elsewhere in the country. This time there was little violence, this wasn’t a riot, but it was a peaceful protest. The police helped redirect traffic as the protesters marched on the centre of the city. The call went up in the crowd for the resignation of the acting president. If el coronel couldn’t resign, they would force him out of office. It all went really fast and those behind the demonstration lost control of it to the mob. Still, it was a non-violent mob. That was until they finally ran into soldiers near the National Palace, which was the centre of the federal government. The crowd was ordered to stop. Rocks were thrown and so were Molotov cocktails. Bullets – live ones – were fired back. Some in the crowd fell down dead, others surged forwards in anger. Panic went down the line of soldiers and some broke ranks to run to the rear. Then the mob was among them. Civilians attacked soldiers, taking out long-held frustration with fists and boots. Shots rang out to the very end but the soldiers lost and most were killed in an uncontrollable event. Then the National Palace was first trashed and looted before a fire started. It went up in flames and no one really knew why there was the need to do that. It was the centre of government but el coronel was using the official residence for Mexico’s presidents elsewhere. That was over at Los Pinos, next to the imposing Chapultepec Castle. Some in the mob headed that way; most of the crowd which had killed the soldiers in front of the National Palace just watched it burn.
El coronel watched the National Palace burn too. He was told of the massive crowds in the city where there were no more soldiers. He decided that he wanted none of this. He hadn’t taken power to oversee what had happened. He loved Mexico and was only trying to save it. The country refused to be saved though. No more could he do it. A helicopter was called and his personal pilot, a long-serving loyal man, arrived. El coronel left for a military airbase near to the city. He would find somewhere to go into exile… probably the United States. Staying and killing his own people wasn’t what he couldn’t face. He’d rather be a coward than a butcher. There was now to be a power vacuum in Mexico City. Plenty of candidates would love to fill it.
September 1983:
The ongoing situation in Mexico and the after-effects of the announcement of the Kennedy Plan when it came to NATO were two entirely separate things. They should have been anyway. But they weren’t once Congress was back in session. In both chambers, the pair of apparently unconnected events were linked by many from both sides of the aisle. The Republicans made a lot of noise though there was a concentration of message from many as the party geared up for a presidential run next year with a candidate still to be chosen to retake the White House from Kennedy. Two early favourites, Senator Dole and Representative Kemp, were gaining support yet the primaries then the general election were a long time off. Meanwhile, in the Senate where the Republicans held a majority and in the House where they were in the minority, the party stayed on-message in attacking the president’s decisions to ‘ignore’ Mexico and ‘cave into the Soviets’ when it came to the defences of Western Europe. More drama, column inches and airtime in the media, came from the Democrats with Kennedy’s own party tearing into him in a different fashion and with confusion being the order of the day when the end result of what was said came to the public. Where the Democrats behind their president or not? Such questions like that made the Republicans rub their hands together with glee. There was hope among them that Kennedy might face a primary challenge from within his own party, someone strong on national security & foreign affairs, to hurt the president next year. It would be denied, but there were plans afoot to encourage someone to do so and for that candidate – whomever it might be – to receive funding from long-term Republican donors without their knowledge. Those who underestimate the ability of politicians to be sneaky bastards should do so at their peril.
Senator Scoop Jackson – Democratic candidate in 1976 and ’80; a noted critic of Kennedy on foreign relations – wasn’t going to be the one to challenge Kennedy in the primary season for his own ends or unwillingly serving the Republicans. Two defeats had been enough for him. Regardless, the Republican party establishment was still affected by his death in mid-September where he had a heart attack on the floor of the Senate and was rushed to hospital. He died before he got there. A long-serving member he was and he was genuinely mourned among his colleagues. He was also missed by his fellow senators because he had been, including at the moment of his heart attack, been laying into the Kennedy Plan rather effectively. People spoke when he listened. He had been warning that not only would the withdrawals – and there would be more, he said, because that was what the president had in mind – leave Western Europe open to Soviet attack, but it was driving the United States and its allies apart. He’d been making an eloquent case before his demise. Others pushed on the same theme though they didn’t have the same standing as Jackson did. Well-known anti-communists from the House, Democrats in the form of Representatives McDonald of Georgia and Wilson of Texas, savaged Kennedy too. Efforts by the House Speaker to stop them failed. Tip O’Neil was an ally of Kennedy with great influence but the president was out of step with too many congressmen in what he had done. Many Democrats kept silent and while they weren’t joining in, that silence was deafening. All that said, in both chambers, the Kennedy Plan still had certain support from selected senators and congressmen. Some on the isolationist-right like it, others on the left who believed that it would relax US-Soviet tensions. Those two polar extremes couldn’t and wouldn’t work together though. Many of their fellow senators and all congressmen were up for election next year. This was a hot-button topic with the media paying attention, and thus voters back home. They made a big deal out of it all when it came to NATO. There was too the lack of a response from the Kennedy Administration to Mexico. Representative Wilson – sometimes known as ‘goodtime Charlie’ (take from that what you will) – went down from his Houston district to Brownsville, right on the Mexican border. Speaking of the situation across Rio Grande, he asked when would the president take notice? Would that be when Cuban tanks came pouring across into Brownsville? Because, as in the case he made, that was what was going to happen when Mexico fell apart: the Cubans would move in, followed next by the KGB and finally the Soviet Army! Furthermore, there would come more refugees first. Who was really listening though?
Republican-controlled Senate committees called both Mondale and Muskie before them to demand that the secretaries of state & defence respectively explain the Kennedy Plan. Moreover, why had nothing been done to work with allies abroad first? The committees had Democratic members and the Republican chairmen let them speak, especially when they went on the attack. Mondale handled himself better than Muskie. It was said in a news report afterwards the Muskie looked ‘like a deer caught in a truck’s headlights’ when before the Armed Services Committee. That was an exaggeration but a story which stuck. His appearance there came at the same time as he was dealing with the resignations of a pair of senior US Army officers in relation to the Kennedy Plan as well. Muskie forced each to retire after comments both had made openly condemning the Kennedy Plan had not just been made in front of allies but reached the press too. Kennedy wanted the higher-ranking member of the two fired rather than allowed to resign yet Muskie defied his president by telling him that would only make things worse and got their resignations first. All of this could combine into Muskie’s own ‘resignation’ the next month when he and the president fell out for good. The two officers were General (four-star) Bernard Rogers and three-star Lieutenant-General John Singlaub. Rogers held the position of SACEUR, field commander of NATO in Europe, and he’d called the Kennedy Plan ‘idiotic’. Singlaub had said that the president was a ‘babe in the woods’ when it came to American national security: he had been commanding the V Corps, whose headquarters was due to leave West Germany along with half of its combat strength. Worse things had been said in Congress, far more cutting remarks had been made in the media. The chain-of-command was clear though and the two of them were asked for their resignation from the US Army’ Chief-of-Staff at Muskie’s behest. If anyone thought that that was the end of the matter, they were very wrong.
High political drama was going on in Moscow at the same time. This was all behind the scenes, not in the spotlight of the media, and concerned something else rather than Mexico or NATO. That something else was food… the soon to be lack of it. All summer there had been warnings coming of something wrong down in the Ukraine, the breadbasket of the Soviet Union. Shcherbytsky had been quashing those rumours. The Ukrainian party boss and high-ranking Politburo member had been busy with better things to do than to have rumourmongers say that there was something wrong with the harvest when it would be brought in. His focus was on securing a higher position for himself after Andropov finally died. While the general secretary remained in the hospital with machines keeping him alive, Shcherbytsky was one of the trio from the Politburo chairing weekly meetings in his absence. Andropov rotated (not equally it must be said) that between him, Chebrikov and Ustinov. He demanded full access to everything from the meetings plus had his own spies among the three he was playing favourites with. Shcherbytsky had barely been back to the Ukraine all year. This had been rather an unfortunate time for Shcherbytsky to be distracted: he forgot his ‘base’ while busy at the big table.
That base was the Ukrainian branch of the Communist Party of the Soviet Union. He was at the top of the pile. The responsibility for everything was his. Shcherbytsky had long claimed credit for everything that had gone right and when things had gone wrong, was an expert at passing the blame elsewhere. In the Soviet Ukraine, like elsewhere in the union, that was how to survive. Shcherbytsky had played this game for many long years. In 1983, it finally caught up with him. There was something which he had championed and put his name on which went very, very wrong. That was that experimental bio-genetic programme when it came to growing corn, grain, rye and wheat. It had been tested beforehand though with results skewed to only show the best outcomes. Crop yields were supposed to be massive and there weren’t going to be any negative side-effects. How wrong that turned out to be. The complicated chemicals not only failed to do their job in increasing yield but killed off the crops themselves. It occurred very late where previously-promising crop fields seemingly overnight died off. It wasn’t a case of that at all. Scientists were busy studying the programme as it went on – filing reports saying THIS IS A BAD IDEA – but Shcherbytsky had quashed those reports because his own people, his yes-men, could see with their own eyes how everything was going swimmingly. Then the die-off happened. It was bad. Thankfully, because Shcherbytsky had so jealously-guarded the whole programme, the crops over in Kazakhstan hadn’t been treated with the same chemicals. The Kazakh party boss, Kunayev, had been eager to have access to this ‘wonder’ treatment beforehand. He was fast to deny that when it became apparent what had happened in the Ukraine. Furthermore, he went to Chebrikov first then the two of them went to see Andropov in his sick bed. The two of them told Andropov what Shcherbytsky had done. It was all down to him. He had pushed for the chemicals, fudged the reports from the scientists and then silenced all those who spoke out through the year. No, they had no idea of why he would have done this, but, surely he must be punished?
Shcherbytsky was given the chop – figuratively; Andropov was no Stalin – and the Politburo met to discuss this. Of course it was bad. It wasn’t the end of the world though. The country had food from elsewhere internally – thankfully Kunayev had had the presence of mind to long swear off this untested technology! – and the shortfall could be made up from buying abroad. Gromyko said that that would help with foreign relations with certain countries. Everyone else agreed that this must be kept secret. Chebrikov would get the word out to those with listening ears that local weather conditions had affected the harvest in the Ukraine though the problem was small. As to those fields across the Ukraine, it was decided to save what was possible from the harvest and then remove the topsoil ready for replanting. The chemicals themselves were to be dumped and the autumn rains would wash away the last traces of those chemicals. They had done their worse. Reports from scientists agreeing with this line of thinking coming from the Politburo were given as proof that this would work; dissenting opinion that again THIS IS A BAD IDEA because there would be soil mutations were hushed up. Their betters knew better. If only those underlings had been listening to…
October 1983:
When he’d taken power, el coronel had literally had the doors barred for the two chambers of Mexico’s federal Congress. Senators and deputies had been told to go home. Many had fled soon enough back to their home states or up to the ones in the north and west which made the September Declaration asserting that el coronel’s government was illegal. Not all of the politicians had left Mexico City though with some staying. A few ended up detained on criminal charges of corruption (trumped-up allegations) while the rest stayed away from their separate meeting places and held non-advertised gatherings where they debated the legitimacy of el coronel and also how they would fix things when the country’s dictator was kind enough to let them return. There had been no real repression of them during the short military rule as el coronel hadn’t declared the Congress illegal nor nullified previous election results. He just had refused to let them meet officially. Their numbers in Mexico City dwindled, especially once the Monterrey Government was set up. Only the dedicated stayed with deputies being far more prominent in numbers than senators. They deemed themselves the only honest men in Mexico. A leader emerged among them – as leaders always do – though there was no real fire in his belly nor among his colleagues to directly challenge el coronel because he had already shown he would use force if necessary… as had been the case with President García Paniagua when he’d been deposed with a pistol shot to the forehead.
Right before el coronel fled for exile up in the United States and on the eve of the start of the riots in Mexico City, the rump of what had once been a total of nearly four hundred and fifty politicians, now down to sixty-one, had been recalled by el coronel. He’d demanded that they return to the Chamber of Deputies (there were only a very few senators among them) and declare the ‘succession’ up in the northern and western states just that. He’d been clutching at straws. What difference would it have made? Well… they didn’t do that. They finally got some fire in their bellies and declared his regime illegal just like the Monterrey Government had done. They also asserted that they, acting as united body, were the only legitimate government of Mexico too. Legally they were correct. In Mexico City, that mattered for naught though when the city was torn apart. First it had been that demonstration which had turned violent after a peaceful start and then the slums all around the city, where Mexicans had poured into through recent years in search of work, were torn apart by gunfire then flames before criminal gangs rampaged across the city. They sought to steal from the rich… anyone who had any possessions in fact while destroying what they couldn’t take. The police cracked down on them as they transferred their authority to the Congress and brought most of it to an end. As September turned to October, the Congress began to finally exert itself. Mexico had to have a government and they were it.
Up in Monterrey, there was a different opinion. Those who had stayed in Mexico City and did the bidding of el coronel (though they actually hadn’t in the end was beside the point) were just as bad as he was. It was the Monterrey Government which had legitimacy, those who had stood firm in opposition all along to el coronel. The state governments acting together represented the people, not that odd collection of politicians down in Mexico City, almost all of whom weren’t even from the ruling PRI party who legally held power according to the results of the last nationwide election. Many in Monterrey – PRI members – were keen to go down to Mexico City and boot those collaborators and pretenders out on their behinds! They didn’t feel safe to go down to the capital though. They waited up in Monterrey for the situation there to calm itself down. The reports which came of a city full of violence and alight from end to end – just a bit of an exaggeration! – worried them. They argued among themselves as well. This was over who would take power once they were down in Mexico City. A few voices said that these arguments should take place in Mexico City not in Monterrey, but they were discarded. The majority of members of the Monterrey Government were federal politicians but state politicians instead. Too many interests clashed. Too many egos were present. And too many rumours came up from Mexico City that it was dangerous there.
There were further distractions which delayed the move down to Mexico City as well. Up in Sonora, where rebellion had been put down before it could be started when el coronel had launched his August offensive, that state government declared itself beholden to the September Declaration and the Monterrey Government: it was one of several that did so in early October. At once, there was trouble in Sonora and around the city of Hermosillo where soldiers still loyal to el coronel – he had buggered off and abandoned them but they didn’t know that – tried to put down that apparent secessionism. The effort failed miserably. As in so many other things, the truth of the matter, how few the numbers were and how little they managed to achieve, was lost in the panic. The Monterrey Government looked at all of the soldiers inside the states under their control. There were organised units which were either loyal to them or still declaring themselves neutral as well as disorganised groups of soldiers all over the place who had deserted and often took their weapons with them. Chaos hit parts of the countryside, especially through the states of Sinaloa in the west and Veracruz in the east with these bandits. The parachute brigade commander who’d gone over to the Monterrey Government rather than fight them, was impressed upon the need to get control over his men and all the others. He and his fellow military officers urged for a move to be made down to Mexico City but they weren’t listened to. El coronel’s actions had poisoned any trust in the Mexican Army for so many. There was a fear among many high-ranking people in the Monterrey Government that the military officers couldn’t be trusted (they’d betrayed one master already) and also that they shouldn’t lead the move down to Mexico City because the people wouldn’t welcome that after all of the killing done nationwide when the Mexican Army had used its guns against civilians. Political developments across in the Yucatan Peninsula were another distraction which kept the Monterrey Government from yet moving down to Mexico City. There were there states there: Campeche, Quintana Roo and Yucatan. Yucatan had been a late signatory to the September Declaration with the two others following later. Geographical distance exasperated by the (short) fighting in Veracruz had isolated the three states. In the city of Merida, representatives from all three had agreed to put on a united front where their voice would be heard as one when they sent delegates to the Monterrey Government. Once in Monterrey, they caused problems. Others from different states had delayed things in Monterrey where they spoke of what they needed to get through the current difficult times but none were as disruptive as the Yucatan Three. They wanted much in terms of promised economic assistance when the federal government was restored and wouldn’t give in. This brought forth demands from others who didn’t want to be left out. In Monterrey they argued amongst themselves and they stayed put. They were going to Mexico City soon, very soon. Just not yet.
Someone else went to Mexico City before them. The Cuban DGI facilitated the entry of Tirado López into the power vacuum which remained open. He’d been in the city of Guadalajara first then moved to the town of Morelia. The state governments of Jalisco and Michoacán hadn’t been part of the Monterrey Government before nor after the fall of el coronel. They had only been theoretically answerable to the rump Congress in Mexico City as well, just like much of the country. In these recently-ignored areas of the country where there had been sudden mass unemployment and food riots, loss of state-level control had come after the federal government focused elsewhere. Charlatans and agitators had gained influence. The rule of the gun wasn’t what brought them temporary power but the ability to whip up the people. Just like in Mexico City, the rest of the country was full of a recent urban population who’d flooded to the cities and big towns when times had been good and there were jobs. Jalisco and Michoacán had been hotbeds of union activity and the violence which came with government efforts to crack down on that. Some of the worse elements of society had gained access to weaponry which came first from the influx that came from border spillover from the end of the civil war in Guatemala and then the desertion of soldiers from the Mexican Army not just in the north but nationwide too… the deserters always left with their rifles but also walked away from guarding armories as well. No one was paying them to keep them under guard and the search for food to feed their families was paramount. Rampaging mobs of the unruly had been brought under control by improvised militias answerable to those with dreams of power. Actual armed combat was rare across these two southern states: intimidation from one side over the other was what happened in most instances.
Tirado López was an outsider but one who when he arrived knew how to engage with the needy and the angry, especially when working a crowd. The message from him wasn’t about restoring the economy and reestablishing Mexico’s international trade. No, instead, it was bread and jobs. The simple message worked well. The romantic notion of a ‘march in Mexico City’ put forth afterwards was a fairytale. There was nothing like that. No Nicaraguans and certainly no Cubans were openly present among his small entourage which went to the capital city either. This was a Mexican-only affair with very few numbers travelling in vehicles from one crowd to another who didn’t end up following the route like the vehicle column did. There was no resistance in Mexico City against such a man as Tirado López and the crowds there which came out to welcome him when he came to the capital. A big public gathering heard him speak, recalling later the emotion rather than any specific words beyond ‘bread’ and ‘jobs’. What more did they need to hear? His crowd was the downtrodden, the forgotten and the desperate. It was all a bluff though. Tirado López could have lost the crowds and the mob which then followed him at any moment. He held them though, mainly because they held themselves together. It was a people power revolution which came to Mexico City in late October. A battalion of troops might have held Tirado López back when he led tens of thousands towards the centre of the city but then maybe not. There was no battalion of troops anyway. The police stepped aside. The politicians from the rump Congress, who were still meeting in the Saint Lazarus Palace and discussing the specific aspects of restoring international trade using tariff cuts and tax incentives, were only informed when the crowds were in Zócalo Square. They left, only for a ‘temporary period’. Tirado López took Mexico City without a shot. The Mexican who had long fought as a guerrilla commander with the Sandinistas down in Nicaragua (winning in the very end due to Cuban overt military assistance rather than on their own) had no need for bullets in his home country. When the politicians representing one of Mexico’s two current governments, and which had been the de jure one as far as international recognition was, ran away fearing for their lives now that someone could really control the people effectively.
From out in the Zócalo, Tirado López – still in shock at how easy it had been – declared the Second Mexican Revolution. The crowds roared in approval, almost none of them knowing what that would truly mean: bread and jobs would be a long way off for them. The country had seen months of civil strife and outbreaks of fighting but Tirado López was about to give his country a real civil war. That would be one which would, just like the others that had taken place across Central America over the past years, drag in other countries too.
October 1983:
The fighting continued in El Salvador and Honduras. It was more bloody and wide-ranging in the former yet in the latter it was just as serious. The regimes in the two small Central American nations, squeezed between Guatemala and Nicaragua, fought to survive the onslaught against them from guerrillas inside backed by those outside. El Salvador continued to have foreign support while Honduras remained friendless. Government forces and those of the rebels each committed further gross violations of human rights against civilians and also captured opponents. For the majority of those involved in the fighting, what it was all about, the cause which they were engaged in, was a side matter when it came to expressing the brutality which they did. There was no reprieve for those caught in the crossfire whether they be in rural or urban areas as it seemed like the fighting stretched across the whole of each nation. Terror was the order of the day for government forces and rebels where they sought to bring the civilian population on-side by either frightening them into supporting them or killing them if they refused to. The two civil wars saw no armies line up opposite each other and fight a full-scale battle where the frontlines were clear and the goals out in the open. No, instead, each were all about multiple clashes day and night between small groups of armed men. There were patrols ambushed and those about to ambush a patrol caught beforehand. Bomb attacks took place against soldiers and guerrillas when they were in the rear. False flag strikes were made against civilian targets so the other side would get the blame as the internal propaganda war was fought. For the people each side fought… and by doing so it was the people whom they killed. Each conflict continued to rage in the two nations with no sign yet that there was any end in sight.
Honduras could hold out because even while alone, the rebels which it faced weren’t that strong. There were several groups fighting the government with varying degrees of success and not coordinated in that fight. President Paz García was able to direct the attention of his security forces against one then another where and when the threat from each intensified without having to worry that this might cause major problems elsewhere. Several of his generals feared that soon enough the rebels would unite and this strategy would backfire but it had yet to do so. Paz García was sure he knew what he was doing as well: that was all that mattered in the end. The strongest rebel groups were the two now receiving significant Nicaraguan support: the Chinchoneres’ and the Zelayas. Each styled themselves as popular and for liberating the people while used the names of long-dead apparent revolutionaries who’d been martyred fighting government oppression etc. They weren’t popular nor fighting to liberate the people. Each would oppress the people the first chance they got at power. Nicaragua was supporting each with weapons, money and a safe base of operations. Advisors were present too, former Sandinista guerrillas who weren’t suited to the new Nicaraguan People’s Army built along Cuban lines and no longer something designed for guerrilla warfare. The skill-set for guerrilla warfare among many Sandinistas remained and, under orders, they were inside Honduras. If the Chinchoneres’ and the Zelayas were to start fighting together, and joined by either some more of the smaller rebel groups or possibly given increased Nicaraguan support, then Paz García and his regime were going to be finished. The rebels were yet to unite though and neither had Nicaragua fully thrown everything it could do against Honduras. No longer was Honduras a safe-haven for anti-Sandinista rebels (Nicaragua’s intent for intervening in Honduras) – they hadn’t lasted that long – and so the situation remained as it was with the innocent dying in Honduras and no one lifting a finger to stop that.
Argentina and Venezuela had pulled their support for El Salvador with General Romero recognised in Buenos Aires and Caracas as being a bloodthirsty maniac. Only Chile remained supporting the little nation. From down in Santiago, General Pinochet kept on seeing his proxy war with Cuba continue. Those two countries both had a stake in the fight for the eventual future of El Salvador. Meanwhile, those on the ground, government forces and guerrillas alike, engaged in their own battles for what they believed would be their eventual full control over their own nation, not to satisfy those from countries so very far away. The rebels in El Salvador were united and they had a friendly base of operations across in Guatemala. Guatemala was still licking its wounds after the Belize War and while there was a new army being built, it wasn’t one destined for the fighting in El Salvador. The rebels were doing that all on their own. They received Cuban help with weapons but it was they who took the fight to their own countrymen, those in uniform and those not. In San Salvador, the capital city rocked by almost daily outbursts of gunfire or the blasts of bombs, Romero threw everything he had at trying to defeat them. He would bring the whole country down before he gave it over to the rebels. Noriega came up once again in October and it was Panama’s leader – a man with long-standing military ties to El Salvador; ones recently frayed it must be said – who urged him to consider the future of the Salvadoran people in what he was doing. Romero would have none of it. No, no, no. The guerrillas and the Cubans wouldn’t have his country! His regime would fight to the very end. Only in total victory, not any form of surrender dressed up as a compromise, would the Salvadoran Civil War end, for one side or the other.
November 1983:
A hand of friendship was offered to Mexico City. Kennedy had Mondale contact the new regime and make an offer to the government led by Tirado López. There would be continued recognition from the United States of the government in Mexico City and the full support for the unity of the Mexican nation. Food aid was offered direct from the United States and the Kennedy Government would also work to solicit more from abroad. What Washington hoped to see in exchange was for the violence in Mexico to end and responsible government to return. Mexico must remember it had its debts and being a responsible government meant that they needed to be addressed.
Such was the official position of the United States. It was one which when heard in Mexico City brought outrage. Tirado López was publicly enraged at what was declared to be the arrogance of the gringos but secretly he was pleased. It helped shore up support for him among the government which he was trying to build among the ashes left by the fall of the old regime. He could point to the usual behaviour of the United States when it came to treating not just Mexico but all Latin American nations. They were demanding that debts to their banks be repaid and that that money came from Mexico in its time of greatest need. The food offer was no more than a bribe to get Mexico to acquiesce to paying all of that money back, money which the Mexican people themselves hadn’t seen. American banks had broke Mexico, now they wanted to continue to keep the country down. No, instead, Mexico would rise. The country was in revolution and was no longer bound to those debts. Tirado López made a well-publicized speech were he rejected the hand of friendship offered: he told the Mexican people that there was a gun in the other hand but it was one which Mexico need not be frightened by. There was a new Mexico to be built and one which rejected the United States.
They were pretty much upset up in Monterrey at how Washington had ignored them and recognised Tirado López down in Mexico City. They were legitimate, not him the mobs which had brought him to power. Still, that anger against Kennedy – who had done nothing for them all along so nothing much had changed there really – was minor in compared to how the Monterrey Government felt about what was a communist from abroad coming into Mexico and taking the capital city from where he declared himself the rightful leader of all Mexicans. Tirado López might as well have been a Nicaraguan, a Cuban… anyone but a Mexican. Despite his place of birth, he was regarded a foreigner. His self-declared regime was nothing more than yet another illegal usurpation of power and one which Monterrey was thoroughly opposed towards, even more so than that of el coronel. The offer of food aid rejected by Mexico City was one which Monterrey asked for instead and there was also the willingness expressed to the United States to accept that Mexico was responsible for its debts. The Monterrey Government had chosen a foreign affairs spokesman among themselves and he was sent with a delegation to Washington. That spokesman was refused a meeting with anyone beyond an assistant secretary of state though, no one higher, and it was an unofficial meeting at that conducted not at the State Department but at an office building in Washington under the auspices of the CIA. The food aid was asked for in person this time but there came only stalling from the Americans. They were waiting on Mexico City to reconsider their rejection. When the news of that came back to Monterrey there was again fury at how the United States was treating them. But, as before, what Tirado López was up to had most of their attention. From what the Monterrey Government was able to gather, he was apparently forming militias for the declared reason of ‘public security’. His revolutionary promises declared that they would ‘reunite Mexicans’. That was coded talk for an army being formed. There was only one place where such an army would be sent: to Monterrey. The Monterrey Government set about forming their own. They saw that they had no choice. Tirado López would bring his revolution to them otherwise and enslave all Mexicans for purposes directed by Havana and Managua.
The hand of friendship offer, before and after its rejection, caused the Kennedy Administration no end of problems. It was actually something which Kennedy hadn’t wanted to do. He had been briefed on Tirado López and what he was all about. The CIA had been remolded in the last couple of years with a new management structure which the president found best served America’s interests – no more secret wars was the key to that; those who had voiced discontent had been shown the door – but while it no longer had the physical reach with as many operatives working aboard, there was still plenty of intelligence gained in other ways. The Operations side of the CIA had taken a politically-driven battering yet Intelligence had grown in responsibility if not capability. Director Vance had the president’s confidence and so Kennedy had listened when it was explained that while Tirado López was distasteful, it was he, not those arguing has-beens in Monterrey, who was the future of Mexico. If the United States wanted a stable Mexico, not one wrecked by civil wars, then it should be Mexico City which was dealt with. Vance had assured Kennedy that Tirado López would be hamstrung for years building his revolution and never get anything done in trying to achieve anything in Mexico. He was the best choice in a series of bad choices, none of which the United States wanted but the only one where there was a future in. Therefore, that offer had been made and Monterrey ignored. Others hadn’t been so sure. Mondale had come around after a period of doubt but others in the Kennedy Administration had questioned the judgement on this matter. From outside the government, there had been fury as the United States prepared to deal with the ‘communists who’d taken over Mexico’. That was nationwide and didn’t come exclusively from those whom might be expected: those well-known anti-communists. Afghanistan, Guatemala and Nicaragua were countries which so many Americans hadn’t heard of; if they did, they knew they were far away and unimportant. Mexico was neither. Mexico was next door, just over the Rio Grande.
Mexico couldn’t be ignored just for that reason too. There were two further factors to consider. It was to banks in the United States which Mexico still owed all of that money in direct and indirect debts. Bayh had had an influence in the details of Kennedy’s offer made to Mexico where the treasury secretary stressed that Mexico had to act responsibly. There had been some worrying speculation in the US Treasury Building about the knock-on effects should Mexico refuse to restart paying interest or at least make noises that it was going to soon enough. In addition, there was the border. Defence Secretary Muskie had just been replaced by Senator Bentsen. The latter, a Texan, was taking flak back in his home state for ‘abandoning’ Texas at this time when coming across the border every day were Mexican nationals who were leaving their country. Some fled from violence which they had seen, most left ahead of the expectation of it. All four border states – Texas plus California, Arizona and New Mexico – had seen Mexican nationals arrive within them. Those who had chosen to make themselves refugees in a foreign land were in the main those who could and were able to leave: they had the financial and physical means to leave. There were family reunions in some places; elsewhere, those refugees were without family but they had savings which they had brought with them and money to live on not in worthless Pesos. What was feared was that they would be followed by many more Mexicans. Bentsen’s critics were unfair as Texas wasn’t struggling. It might do though. Just as they had forecasts at Bayh’s Treasury Department about the economy taking a hit if the markets reacted badly to Mexico’s latest crisis, where Bentsen now was at the Pentagon, worse-case scenarios for Mexico were being drawn-up even ahead of his appointment when Muskie was there. The whole US-Mexico border could be destabilized with continuing conflict in Mexico. The numbers of refugees could increase multiple times. There could be violence north of the Rio Grande among them or from those who might prey upon them; there was the chance that American citizens would sent guns south or go down to Mexico to fight themselves.
None of that was wanted: any economic fall-out or an increase in fighting which could directly affect the United States itself. That was why so much hope was put in the offer of friendship. Initial rejection was seen as a kneejerk reaction and there was a surety in the White House that it would be soon accepted. Others in Washington weren’t so sure. The things they had warned of were coming true. No one had listened to them then and no one was now either.
November 1983:
Anti-communists in the West had this idea of Andropov where he sat on his throne with fingers on all of the buttons controlling everything that was going on with worldwide Soviet Domination. All communists, socialist or left-leaning countries were under his control. Every guerrilla group in each obscure country was answerable directly to him. He was making chess moves as he sought to control the world. The reality was rather different. Machines were keeping the bedridden general secretary alive. He was weak and dying. His mind was as sharp as ever but his power was waning even without him knowing it. He wasn’t aware of all that was going on. He would have objected to much of that attributed to him. But he was kept out of the loop as he lay in his private clinic where despite being given the very best medical attention, his time was coming to an end. In his penultimate month of life, Andropov was still gravely concerned about the future for his country. He had spent a year seriously ill and plotting who his successor would be. The work which he had started must be continued, he had decided, and he would choose who would carry on where he left off. Many names had entered his mind for due consideration as to whom the next general secretary would be: he had determined that his decision would carry weight even after his death among his colleagues. Those names were those from the younger generation, men whom he had brought to Moscow and raised high in the Politburo, men who owed everything to him. Others who had previously been loyal were no longer but he thought that that wouldn’t be the case with others. Wishful thinking this all might have been, but he had held onto that idea. The failures, betrayals even, of those whom he had put his faith in before irked him during his last months too. It was the actions of one of them, someone so loyal in the past and whose disloyalty shocked him, that caused Andropov to reconsider everything come November when it came to a successor and have him change course.
Kryuchkov, head of the KGB’s First Chief Directorate – its foreign intelligence department –, informed Andropov of the KGB’s hand in what had happened in Mexico. Chebrikov had helped assist, not created, the banking crisis which had struck Mexico and then afterwards given the blessing for the Cubans to send Tirado López to Mexico City. Kryuchkov had acted like Andropov knew all of this. Oh, the general secretary didn’t know what the KGB chairman had done? Well… that was strange. Andropov had long considered Kryuchkov untrustworthy and wasn’t fooled by the innocence. He believed that Chebrikov’s subordinate had been waiting for such an opportunity. The meeting actually came when Andropov dragged the career spy to see him so he could give Kryuchkov a dressing-down for long being unawares that the rezident (senior KGB officer) in London was a double agent for the British. Gordievsky had been unmasked by a double agent of the KGB’s own and snatched from London so his brain could be picked apart… and he’d meet a traitor’s end too. There had been self-congratulations from Kryuchkov of his department’s own working in catching the traitor among them but Andropov had done the opposite. How could such a man have been undetected betraying the Rodina for so long? It had then been revealed to Andropov about the KGB’s role with recent events in Mexico.
Mexico was too far. Chebrikov had been told this before. Andropov had made it clear than any move into Mexico would bring ruin among them all. He had in fact told Chebrikov that if any of the Soviet Union’s fraternal allies in the region, Cuba or the new communist nations in Central America, tried to export revolution there, they were to be stopped by the KGB. What had been done had been the opposite of what Andropov had decreed. His reasoning was simple: creating such a situation in Mexico would eventually bring war with the United States. All of his work to weaken the American’s position worldwide hadn’t been done to gain advantage ready for a war but instead to make sure that no war would come. Senior members on the Politburo such as Chebrikov had all agreed to this. The KGB head had then defied that decision. He would bring them war. Andropov was certain that he would be dead before it came but come it would unless he acted now. Chebrikov must be stopped. He was making a play for power with what he had done with Mexico and there were other suspicions which Andropov had when it came to Chebrikov in other matters. The pieces all now fitted into the puzzle. Even in his condition where he couldn’t leave his sick bed and he was physically helpless, Andropov determined that in his last months his full energy would be set to stopping Chebrikov from succeeding him. He could no longer see a younger, less-experienced man replace him and work towards having that long-term goal come to fruition though. It would have to be someone else with enough allies and influence already. Anyone But Chebrikov, a man who would bring an end to the Soviet state, which Andropov had long served and desired to see last long after he was gone.
December 1983:
The second wave of refugees coming from Mexico started to arrive at the US border. There were more of them than the first time, far more. No longer were they middle-class Mexicans but those with less means to support themselves or none at all. The Americans weren’t expecting them. There seemed no reason for them to flee. Flee they did though. They left Mexico and headed for what was seen as safety in the United States. From California through to Arizona across to New Mexico and down to Texas, tens of thousands turned up at ports of entry along the border through early December. Families and single people came in vehicles or on foot. They all wanted to enter the United States. Why? Because Mexico was having its civil war and they wanted no part of it. That civil war erupted with the first armed clashes between the two sides through the early part of the month which intensified fast. Mexico City and Monterrey both had governments claiming to be the sole legitimate one for Mexico: up in the United States, they were respectively called the Communists and the Northern Alliance. Both had spent last month trying to build together armed forces to assert that legitimacy which they claimed and defend themselves from the other. With varying degrees of success, they each had put together the basics though when elements of those clashed, the improvising which had been done showed. The scale of the destruction with the Mexican Army had previously done to themselves with the desertions and munities wasn’t something that could be overcome in a month. Moreover, as was the case especially with Communists which Tirado López led, but also with the Northern Alliance too, there was little real commitment from men forced back into uniform and pushed onwards to fight ‘the enemy’. Mexico’s communist fighters weren’t communists; those fighting for the politicians in Monterrey didn’t have a real cause either. The latter was now being led by the former cabinet financial secretary Jesús Silva Herzog Flores after he’d won a power struggle out over Miguel de la Madrid. Herzog Flores didn’t like the name ‘Northern Alliance’ nor the idea that the Monterrey Government which represented northern and western states of Mexico was anything but the real Mexican government. His regime was still trying to define itself: it wasn’t communist, that was the only certainty.
The armed clashes which drove the refugees towards the United States were small in scale but took place from Sonora across to Chihuahua & Coahuila down to Nuevo León & Tamaulipas plus into Veracruz. There were no frontlines and no big armies on the march. Each side either attacked or defended from the other. Transport routes were the focus in some instances where elsewhere it was big towns and cities. These were the opening moves where the opposing sides were feeling each other out. There had been confidence expressed from on high that the other wouldn’t fight and would roll over once determination was shown. That believe was shown to be right but, conversely, wrong too. What happened was nothing more than a mess. There was death and destruction all over the place for no gain. It wasn’t just soldiers and militias in the service of the two sides who were killed and injured either. Civilians were caught up in this with them suffering. This was the cause of the flight of refugees. Few, very few, had seen any of the fighting. They ran from it instead, long before it came to them. Safety was that way, up in the United States. The Communists and the Northern Alliance were starting to forcibly draft men to fight as well, further driving the flight of civilians to avoid that for themselves. These were people that had witnessed their country collapse in the last several months and where it was now fully at war with itself. There was mass unemployment, no food, violent crime was springing up all over the place and there were closures of schools & hospitals as Mexico came apart. They had to go north, there was no other choice for themselves that so many could see.
Rejection from Mexico City of the hand of friendship was a hard pill to swallow for Washington. The first brush-off hadn’t been taken seriously, Tirado López had to say it many times for the message to get through. Revolutionary Mexico wanted nothing from the United States and the gringos could get lost with their demands that Mexico honour its debts to American banks. He refused to meet with the ambassador when efforts were made from the latter to do so. Finally, Tirado López sent him an angry letter hand-delivered to the embassy. Its contents were rather undiplomatic. The money lent to the former Mexico wasn’t something that the new Mexico recognised. It had been lent in bad faith too, in a manner to leave the Mexican people dependent upon the United States so as to destroy the ‘national soul’ of Mexico. Furthermore, on other matters, Mexico no longer recognised oil contacts signed with the United States either and would be looking elsewhere to sell the ‘property of the Mexican people’ rather than to American companies who claimed future ownership.
A copy of the latter was then released to the media in Mexico City for domestic and foreign consumption. On Wall Street, the banks took notice. So did those aboard elsewhere in Western Europe and the Far East where there were more banks which held Mexican debt. This was something which within weeks was to come to a head.
December 1983:
Two significant international events occurred in the last week of December 1983 which would push the world to war the following September. Without either, the Third World War couldn’t, wouldn’t take place. Even alone, neither would. The two of them, when combined together and playing into so much before and afterwards, would cause that conflict. Only later would they be looked back upon with the significance realized. At the time, the future wasn’t something that could be seen.
The first was the Wall Street Crash of ’83. Just before Christmas, the stock market took a sudden and sharp slump. Billions were wiped off the value of shares in American companies. The follow-up would be no temporary blip as many would say in response: starting in the new year, the United States and then the West would enter a recession following the Crash of ’83. The economic effects would fast spread from Wall Street outwards across the world through nations far afield. It would feel like everyone was affected and that was generally the case too. Countries, companies, workers and pensioners around the world would feel the effects of the financial crash. It occurred on a Thursday morning in New York, though actually began late the previous day in the Far East on the Hong Kong and Tokyo markets. There were Asian banks which were holding a lot of American commercial debt, debt that was owed to them by Mexico and other Latin American nations. It wasn’t going to be paid. Mexico was steadfastly refusing to honour its debts and there was real concern that other countries across the region who said they would honour theirs just weren’t going to be able to either. They had all borrowed heavily to finance infrastructure while not using the money wisely. The realization came that that money was gone. The value of the holdings by Asian banks were corrected in Hong Kong and Tokyo. The next morning, with that in mind, there was an avalanche effect on Wall Street. American traders reacted to what had happened in Asia yet more so they were already gravely concerned over the state of the domestic US economy. The rate of personal savings was too low and personal debt too high. Access to credit was being restricted and inflation was climbing at an alarming rate. The US Treasury and the Federal Reserve had both been trying to dampen the latest figures but there had come a news story the day before where it was alleged that both were doing so due to political pressure from the Kennedy Administration: his re-election campaign next year was to be run on how he had ‘fixed’ the economy. The correction from Asia was met with a correction on Wall Street. Things soon afterwards got out of hand. Other country’s debts were looked at too that morning, those being across Greece and Eastern Europe, so many more countries were there was real or perceived political instability that could cause complete economic collapse within. No one on Wall Street wanted to be the last one holding the debt at home nor abroad. Sell, sell, sell. Keep selling they just did. The New York Stock Exchange was closed early that day. The intention was to give the traders the afternoon off so they could reconsider their actions. The Treasury and the Federal Reserve made announcements about injecting money into the economy while working behind the scenes with key figures. By then though, Western European markets were opening and having crashes of their own. They had long been granting major loans across Eastern Europe – plus Greece, now sent over the edge into complete financial collapse – that all were looking lost. Panic hit Western Europe as well and they had their own market corrections. Too much damage was being done. It was irreversible, in the short-term at least, and would bring about that recession come January.
Andropov died. The general secretary passed away and the country would need a new leader. Fast appointed by his colleagues in what wasn’t a unanimous vote (the way things were usually done) and instead a contentious decision to head-up the Funeral Committee for Andropov, was Marshal Ustinov. Chebrikov had been stopped from succeeding Andropov with the latter going to his grave with that knowledge and believing that he had achieved his goal of avoiding a future war. The alliances and secret agreements in the Politburo had seen upheaval at the last minute where Chebrikov was unable to gain enough support. Once Ustinov had that position to oversee the burial of Andropov, he was guaranteed to succeed his dead comrade as general secretary. That was the way things were done. Ustinov had the votes to assure his reaching of that position and, after the unexpected drama with the funeral decision, other colleagues who had favoured Chebrikov over him would rather see less drama occur when it came to that second decision and vote for Ustinov while urging Chebrikov to take a step back. Unity was what was favoured, not division. The unity would be for a man very different from Andropov. Marshal Dmitri Fyodorovich Ustinov was a military officer who had never served in the military. He wore the uniform and the (many) medals to show service in the armed forces though those had been during World War Two where he had been a military commissar rather than a soldier. He was a technocrat with a long background in the defence industry. Andropov had been an ally, a friend even, and Ustinov had been prepared to follow Andropov’s earlier wishes of supporting a younger candidate for general secretary. When Andropov decided that that wasn’t to be done due to the threat from Chebrikov, he put himself forward. His leadership of the Soviet Union, which would commence in the New Year, was meant to focus upon domestic affairs at home and continuing to ensure security for the state from threats based abroad. Ustinov would continue the military build-up at home but attempt to scale back the course of events in Latin America where Soviet and American interests were colliding. There would be other priorities for his government too such a making sure that issue with the Ukrainian breadbasket was fixed and that Eastern Europe was kept from rebellion. Those were all big challenges. Only the spending on more tanks, more aircraft, more missiles, more warships and so on would succeed. Instead, despite not wanting to, he would be at the helm of the ship of state when there would be complete reversal of all that Andropov had done in improving direct superpower-to-superpower relations with the Americans. Ustinov would lead his country to war with Andropov turning over in his grave at such a mistake.
[End of Part II]
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Apr 21, 2018 14:04:21 GMT
[Part III] Chapter Seven – Two Toughest Kids on the Block
January 1984: The new year in the United States brought with it economic uncertainty. The Wall Street Crash right before Christmas had effects then but more importantly ones which started to be felt domestically in January. The financial sector was hit with lay-offs and some collapses of big institutions which made headlines. Elsewhere though, the average American worker was yet to feel the knock-on effect. The media was full of doom and gloom from some with reports of a recession about to begin while elsewhere in the news there was assurances that this was all a temporary blip from where recovery would soon come. Statements from the White House and the Treasury said that there was no need for immediate concern for the country’s workers and retirees – the latter would seem to be in a BAD situation if the worst came – and that the markets would ‘re-correct’ themselves soon enough. Four years ago, January had been the month when the primary season started for the presidential race. However, in 1984, the Iowa Caucuses and New Hampshire Primary were scheduled to take place back-to-back (eight days apart) in mid to late February. That gave the president breathing space for his re-election campaign. He had no serious opposition from within the Democratic Party though was aware that if there had been a serious challenger, that candidate could have taken advantage should the Iowa contest have taken place in January to sting him or even cause an upset. Kennedy and his advisers were certain that by February things would sort themselves out on the economic front and the low-level challengers which he had would pose no threat. The Republicans tried not to go too far over the events of December and be seen to celebrate when they declared how Kennedy had caused the crash on Wall Street: it was American workers who would be affected, those being voters. Still, they took it to the president and focused on his mishandling of the economy rather than scare-mongering about millions being potentially put out of work. The two main candidates in the race for the Republican nomination, Senator Dole and Congressman Kemp (the latter recently with Reagan’s endorsement), tore into the president and did it with a lot of success. Kennedy had sold himself on his management of the economy and December had been the proof of his failings. Meanwhile, throughout January, there came no signs at all of the markets regaining strength nor any hint of that re-correction talked about. Next month wasn’t going to bring any good news on that front either. Across the Atlantic, January was when the first of the announced partial withdrawals of American troops from West Germany began. The Pentagon press releases kept on using the term ‘redeployments’ rather than withdrawals. Secretary of Defence Bentsen came to Western Europe in the middle of the month when they were underway and was present at a NATO mini-summit held up in Copenhagen before then going across to Britain. It was there, into the UK, where some of those forces being redeployed were going. The British Government was undertaking quite the herculean task in getting ready to take a portion of those withdrawing units into facilities across Britain where they would be based for what was meant to be a temporary period. If there had been room for more, then more would have been accepted. The staging facilities were partially-used military bases which had seen urgent repairs and upgrades made to them at rapid speed using British and US personnel to upgrade them. There would be complaints from American service-personnel about many of the sites and the condition which they were in even after repairs yet what had been done had been in a short space of time. The British Government had the view that it was better than seeing these forces sent across the Atlantic and the Pentagon had agreed too: there would have been accommodation issues back across in the United States for those moving to Britain, issues which would come atop of the already outstanding problem of finding space for others who were returning to the US mainland. Moving into Britain starting this month was the 3rd Brigade of the 2nd Armored Division, the Forward Brigade based in northern West Germany. They were going to sites spread across the Home Countries west of London and stretching out towards the Salisbury Plain. Next month, the 2nd Armored Cavalry Regiment was due to start arriving across the East Midlands – near to the already many US military bases across that part of the country –, while in March the 50th Tactical Fighter Wing with its F-16s were due to transfer to RAF Wethersfield, a standby base for the US Air Force in Essex. This was all a big deal in terms of logistics but one which had also become a political issue in Britain. Despite the complaints from some, those American units with nearly ten thousand soldiers and airmen were moving into Britain. It was all meant to be temporary but there were comments made from certain people that it may be permanent. They were going to be proved wrong yet not for any reason which they might have considered possible. Egypt saw the assassination of its president take place in January. Anwar Sadat was killed by the terrorist organisation Islamic Jihad. They managed to manipulate a small group of radical army officers who had been opposed to Sadat on many issues but centrally since he opened his peace initiative with Israel last year at the behest of the Americans. A trio of those officers were given help to get at Sadat and shoot him dead; those backers within Islamic Jihad had made sure they fast disappeared when it instantly became that while Sadat was dead, the country didn’t fall into chaos allowing for them to step into the power vacuum and take control of Egypt. That was a disappointment for them but they were happy enough to have gotten to Sadat and also given their cause a major propaganda boost. While they were disappointed, their foreign backer was furious. The Sadat assassination had been supported from afar by Egypt’s neighbour Libya in the form of that country’s dictator Colonel Gadhafi. He’d wanted Sadat dead for the betrayal which he saw of the Arab people where Sadat had been working to achieve a long-lasting peace with Israel. Islamic Jihad had been able to kill Sadat but not replace him themselves like they said they would be able to. Rather than erupt in revolution, Egypt was quickly taken over by Sadat’s vice president: Hosni Mubarak. Mubarak was soon given intelligence linking the assassination to Libya. He pondered over what to do about it. A decision would come soon enough on that and conflict would return to the Middle East. The replacement of Andropov with Ustinov saw changes made at the top of the Soviet Government. Among those was the effective job-swap between Chebrikov and Fedorchuk; Chebrikov was moved to the Interior Ministry and Fedorchuk to the head of the KGB. The former had been demoted and the latter promoted. Ustinov would have rather have gotten rid of Chebrikov fully though there were those who Chebrikov still had the support of in the Politburo who, while they had urged him to back out of the succession race which Ustinov had won, refused to see him cut adrift completely. Ustinov didn’t have the support to fully get rid of him, just shuffle him aside. The replacement as KGB Chairman with Fedorchuk was another one of Andropov’s many dying wishes: this was one which Ustinov managed to fulfil. Another one of those was to try to slow down the speed of events in Latin America where the fear was that an eventual clash would take place. Gromyko was sent to the region for an official series of engagements. The Soviet foreign minister went to Havana first and then to Managua. The Cubans and Nicaraguans were told that the intention of Moscow wasn’t to see conflict with the Americans, a conflict which the belief was would come over Mexico. The response in neither country wasn’t promising. Castro nor the Ortega brothers believed that the Mexico Revolution would bring eventual American intervention. Dissatisfied with their responses but still with a mission to fulfil, Gromyko went onwards to Mexico City where he met with Tirado López. Gromyko was not impressed with the leader of Mexico. The man was out of his depth in his understanding of international relations. He was especially dismissive of the idea that the Soviet Union should tell him what to do. In addition, he too joined with the views coming from Havana and Managua that the United States would huff and puff but eventually do nothing when it came to Mexico. He would reunite his country with force of arms, build a socialist state and not be stopped by anyone. Gromyko would leave Mexico the day before when the United States finally showed how serious it was when it came to not ignoring the actions of Tirado López. January 1984: Late in the month there was recognition of the Monterrey Government as the legitimate government of Mexico coming from the United States. That Northern Alliance – Monterrey still hated such a name – administration was given the recognition which was removed from the one down in Mexico City. President Herzog Flores was very welcoming of such a move; Tirado López gave the public impression of not giving a damn. Monterrey was willing to accept that Mexico had debts it was going to have to pay back (one day, certainly not now) and also would accept Mexico’s other international obligations too. Herzog Flores led a government which was democratic. He led a government which wasn’t opposed to the United States either. Monterrey had done everything to get American recognition and it finally paid off. Hard choices had to be made within Monterrey and there had been a lot of internal dispute, but it was all seen as worth it. With the Americans standing behind them, the communist down in Mexico City was doomed. All of the problems in Mexico were meant to be solved now that Washington was on-side. That political decision with diplomatic recognition changed nothing when it came to bringing the fighting to an end and also stopping the flow of refugees heading to & over the US-Mexico border. The civil war still raged and Mexican civilians still fled their nation for safety up in the United States. The numbers of them in December were immense and into January they were even greater. Monterrey was meant to work with the United States to bring this flow to an end, a key element of the switch in recognition. That was going to be quite the challenge. Over in the Border States, from San Diego on the Pacific to Brownsville on the Gulf of Mexico, on the northern side of along that long frontier, there were Mexican refugees which had illegally entered the country. There was no official count of these people. California, Arizona, New Mexico and Texas had been entered by refugees when the US Border Patrol had been overwhelmed with sheer numbers. There were many more heading towards them too. Federal assistance for the Border States hadn’t come despite protestations that it was needed with FEMA asked to be brought in to open refugee camps. The White House said that the news of refugee camps offering support to refugees would only bring the arrival of more. Instead, the Border Patrol was tasked to do more to stop the flow and the Monterrey Government was meant to work to end the numbers on their end. California and Texas were where most refugees went to. Their governors, state legislatures and senators & representatives in Washington were furious with such a lack of federal response. Efforts were underway to provide state aid when Washington was doing nothing though there was plenty of political pressure being applied to reverse that decision on FEMA. Charity groups and other volunteers were flocking to the border too. There were refugee camps opening despite what Washington said on the matter. The Border States were each considering calling out the national guard as well: security was becoming an issue alongside the humanitarian need. This wasn’t something that could be ignored and neither something that the Monterrey Government could do anything about despite it getting that diplomatic recognition. Only the US federal government could resolve the matter. South of the border, there came the first of the civil war’s large battles. The opposing sides were each still hampered in forming an army but the best of what they had was sent into a major fight in the state of San Luis Potosi. North of the city sharing the same name, communist and Northern Alliance military forces clashed. Control over the main highway heading up towards Monterrey was the focus. The Monterrey Government had sent its forces on the attack, heading southwards, and they went up against defending forces answerable to Tirado López. Each side was able to make use of armoured vehicles, artillery and air power in this fight which made it the big engagement which it became. The Battle of San Luis Potosi would see the use of major force when supporting arms were brought into play. No more would the civil war see only confused skirmishes taking place all over the place. The result of the battle was a victory for the forces of the Northern Alliance. A considerable advance was made and communist forces overcome before being forced to flee. A follow-up to take advantage of the initial victory, to go further south, was unable to take place though. It could have been a major rout yet the communists were able to make a staged withdrawal back down to the city behind them with only air interference against their retreat. The Northern Alliance military commanders witnessed once again there being problems within the ranks of discipline and motivation. The fighting men were still proving difficult when it came to getting them to fight, especially for any sustained period. Desertion was still going on with men forcibly conscripted taking the first chance they got to leave the ranks. Herzog Flores refused to allow for any serious mass punishments to take place saying that to do so would see a hostile United States reaction. True that might have been, but all that it did was to allow for discipline to crumble and desertions to increase. There was nothing behind the threats of punishment that the fighting men could see because of that political decision. No change was going to come on this and the later results would show how foolish of a decision that this was. February 1984: Egypt attacked Libya from the air. In response to the involvement in the assassination of the country’s president, and acting under orders of his successor, Egyptian aircraft struck targets in Libya. Soviet-built MiGs and Sukhois, supplied when relations with Moscow had been strong, were sent westwards on attack missions over the desert to hit the Libyans. Military targets across the Cyrenaica region were bombed and strafed with Egyptian aircraft meeting no resistance in the air. There were the firings of SAMs upwards and a lot of anti-aircraft gunfire, but the Libyans were taken by surprise with the attack and their own aircraft stayed on the ground where they were attacked. They shouldn’t have been. Soviet warning had been sent to Colonel Gadhafi yet he had foolishly believed that Egypt was bluffing. Mubarak wasn’t bluffing when he had his jets attack the bases of the Libyan air force and hit army bases too. There was an attack on Benghazi as well, Libya’s second city. Regime targets were what were targeted in the dawn raid there, with information which might or might not have been supplied by the Israelis using a second-hand source. An intelligence centre was where the Egyptians sent their bombs to hit as well as a supposed ‘friendship bureau’ for inter-Arab relations. After two hours, the Egyptians finished their strike. Three aircraft didn’t return home and half a dozen more came home carrying war-wounds. When Libya had managed to get its air defences – missiles and guns, not aircraft of their own – active, Egypt had paid a price. Still, Mubarak was happy with the results. He was shown intelligence information afterwards which pointed to misses in places but perfect hits in others. Everything was what it was meant to be: Libya had been punished. They had lost many aircraft destroyed on the ground, there were hundreds dead and Libya had been shown the anger of the Egyptian state. Using Algeria as a conduit, the message was passed onto Libya that this was a response to the killing of Sadat. Should Libya attempt to harm Egyptian interests again, the skies would once more be full of attacking aircraft. Back off, Gadhafi was told, or we will do this again. Gadhafi had been convinced that Egypt was incapable of attacking him like they did because there would still be internal trouble in Cairo after Sadat’s death but more so, Egypt was still tied up with its military responsibilities in Saudi Arabia facing down Iraq. Saddam had moved troops and aircraft about on the Iraqi-Saudi border, which was meant to keep Egypt distracted. That mistake was shown for what it was when those aircraft had come and done their worst. It was an unpleasant surprise for Gadhafi. He also had to re-evaluate his own military position after the air attacks had come. There was still the ongoing stand-off down in Chad which Libya was involved in that was a drain on Libya’s meagre military resources. The Egyptians followed up their air strike by moving troops of their Western Army around near the border. The Soviets did tell him explicitly that the Egyptian Army wasn’t coming over the border and considering how they had been correct over the air attack, Gadhafi took notice of that. He would set about pondering how to respond. The warning passed on through the Algerians was a threat which wasn’t concerning as it should have been. Gadhafi was certain that he knew exactly what he was doing. The air attacks against Libya had been observed (on radar screens) from the warships of the two superpowers. Both the Soviet Union with their 5th Eskadra and the Sixth Fleet belonging to the US Navy had flotillas in the Mediterranean. The American force was bigger and more capable – they had access to many bases and plenty of experience in these waters – but the smaller Soviet group wasn’t something to be disregarded. Word had come down from the above with each to move closer to the Egyptian and Libyan coastlines though to still maintain a safe distance in case there was an accident. The KGB and the CIA were each aware beforehand of the show about to be put on. Staying out of the way of the attacking Egyptians, but also clear of the areas where there should have been defending Libyans if Gadhafi had listened, the Soviets and the Americans didn’t make much effort to avoid each other. Each monitored the air action and each spied on the other when they were doing so. Planning & targeting officers aboard ships within each flotilla looked at the other side’s dispositions and updated emergency procedures accordingly. Should there be a need to defend themselves – and attack was always the best form of defence, especially in modern naval warfare – then there was a readiness to do so. Officially, relations between Moscow and Washington were still meant to be the best they had been in a long time… though that was before Andropov had died. Regardless of supposed goodwill when it came to some matters, here on the shores of the Mediterranean, allies & proxies of the two superpowers were engaged in warfare with one another. There was always the outside possibility that the 5th Eskadra and the Sixth Fleet could one day end up trading shots with each other over some damn foolish thing in Latin America or maybe East Asia. The Soviets believed they had the advantage in missiles and the Americans highly-rated their own air strength: that opinion was shared by those who targeted the flotillas of the other to keep everything up to date too. What no one knew was that in seven months time, following some damn foolish thing elsewhere in the world, this part of the Mediterranean would see the work of those planners and targeteers put to use. February 1984: The Iowa Caucuses took place on February 20th and on the 28th there came the New Hampshire Primary. The Democratic contests were each won by Kennedy. The president had several challengers but none of any significance beyond a firebrand Southern senator who managed to win eight per cent of the vote in Iowa and five per cent in New Hampshire. His presidency had been hit by repeated attacks from within the party but no strong candidate to primary him had emerged after too many internal arguments over whom that should be resulting in no one serious running against him. Winning was good but there was a weak turnout and enthusiasm was lacklustre. Other concerns were on the minds of many voters and the non-contest which was the Democratic Party non-race wasn’t one of them. Congressmen Kemp beat Senator Dole in both states. The Republican race had more heart to it and more media attention; the voters turned out as well. Kemp stole the show, the young and energetic politician had the star appeal that the former vice president (who’d returned to the Senate in 1982) just didn’t have. Their races were tighter though when it came to numbers despite the seemingly more popularity of Kemp over Dole. Behind the scenes, the Kemp Campaign didn’t mind too much: at least there was drama for the media to pay attention to. During the contests, in each state and within the parties, there had come clashes over the economy and foreign policy. Kennedy had talked tough on Mexico but on Cuba too. Dole and Kemp had done the same yet made sure that everyone knew that it was under Kennedy that Cuba had managed to expand its regional influence to such an extent with Kemp claiming that Castro was responsible for the Mexican Civil War. Dole attacked the president on the economy and hit him hard… though his personal style and mannerisms still left out some of the sting which could have come from such attacks if made by Kemp. The latter candidate would fix that come the many more contests next month. There was still no sign of any sort of economic bounce-back following the Wall Street Crash and some of the gloomy forecasts made were now looking like reality. The president had left himself open on the economy and was going to pay for it. Financial difficulties were starting to slowly hit home across the Atlantic too. Markets in Western Europe – London, Paris, Frankfurt and Milan – had sunk in December and not recovered. Government intervention had taken place and many countries fell back on EEC cooperation. This was all a temporary measure though. Spending was something that was going to have to be cut back soon in most countries and none were looking forward to the domestic political fallout from that. On the other side of the Iron Curtain, where there were no stock markets with futures speculation and all of that capitalism, the economic crash before Christmas in the West was already starting to hurt Eastern Europe more. That shouldn’t have been the case, government across the Eastern Bloc raged, but it was. They owed all of that money to Western banks for infrastructure and developments plus they had their industrial exports went to the West as well which helped keep them afloat by paying interest on debts and for imports. Western Europe would rather see others suffer rather than themselves and what elements of the financial crisis could be transferred East were duly so. Isn’t capitalism so very unfair for communists who want to play the game? East Germany, Czechoslovakia, Poland and Romania were those who found themselves fast in trouble. That wouldn’t be today, but tomorrow. The position for the latter two countries was worse than it was in the former pair. Economic oblivion wasn’t staring Warsaw nor Bucharest in the face yet neither could look forward to a good year when it came to their economies. Western economic slowdown was going to affect the Soviets as well with their oil exports so there was little help going to come from there beyond the basics. Decisions were made by the governments of Poland and Romania that there would have to be restrictions and cutbacks. Prices were going to go up domestically and wages weren’t going to rise with them. Each government had different views on how this would play out domestically with the Romanians far more optimistic that the Poles. Still, each pre-empted any hint of internal trouble before the bite took hold with security measures implemented. The Poles and Romanians started secretly detaining identified potential troublemakers. Neither country was willing to see strikes, protests and counterrevolution occur by being complacent. Bucharest was sure that if trouble did come despite all efforts to forestall it, Romania could handle such events itself. The Warsaw Government was in no way certain of that. They crossed their fingers and hoped for the best. February 1984: The defeat incurred at San Luis Potosi by the communist forces led to a rethink in strategy. Being on the defensive hadn’t worked where the aim of drawing the Northern Alliance into a fight to sap its strength and then counterattacking had not being possible. Military leadership was something which was lacking on the communist side with senior & mid-ranking military officers of the former regime to a man either with the Northern Alliance or having deserted their posts. The rabble which the remaining junior men led – none of those officers seeming to have the right motivation – needed leadership, which was going to be time-consuming to set up. Commissars were already being appointed and new leaders identified but for the meantime, it was decided in Mexico City by Tirado López that an uncomplicated attack was needed. A victory had to be won, preferably with a major propaganda value too. Comrades of his, Nicaraguans he had fought alongside before among the Sandinistas, were present in Mexico City with those former guerrilla commanders (acting on orders from Managua but ultimately Havana) suggesting that that victory could be won at Veracruz on the coast. Northern Alliance controlled territory was narrow and down below the high ground of the interior. Taking Veracruz would provide a mortal psychological blow to Monterrey but also cut the territory it controlled south and east from that city off. Already there was a split in areas controlled by the Northern Alliance up in the north with Baja California and Sinaloa physically on their own: Tabasco and Yucatán could be left alone to be taken later… plus there were all of those ‘neutral’ troops on the Guatemalan border across Chiapas. Break ‘em up and fight ‘em separately was the intention. That was how the war in Nicaragua had been finally won, Tirado López was reminded, though such remarks from his former comrades and now key advisers ignored the fact that the final blows there in that war had actually come from Cuban troops. So to take Veracruz it would be. Through February, an advance was made to overrun the city beside the sea. It was a port and a transport hub, a major source of Northern Alliance strength. They had few available forces to defend it though with too many men sent north and when the communists attacked, they were able to break through and took it on the last day of the month. Northern Alliance units crumbled when attacked. They could have won if they had stood firm. They had so many advantages in the traditional military sense. One of those was missing though, the most-important one: morale. There was none of that. Fight for Veracruz? Who wanted to do that? Too few did. Those who didn’t run and desert would face revolutionary justice too. There was a decree on that recently published in Mexico City for enemies of the people. Veracruz would learn what a Red Terror was. It wouldn’t be hidden either. Mexicans elsewhere would fear the consequences of such a thing happening to them. Further northwards, past the Rio Grande, news of the Red Terror in Veracruz wouldn’t go down well either. Before the news came of the bloody reality of the regime in Mexico City, up in the United States much of that could be imagined already. Some claims which were made were called alarmist and overblown but they would be shown to be true in the end. Congress wasn’t satisfied with the switch in diplomatic recognition to the Monterrey Government. They wanted more, much more. Full support for the legitimate Mexican government was the call, including armed intervention to support them if necessary. A violent and unstable communist state had emerged on America’s borders and it needed to be put down. The same voices which for years had been decried as paranoid fools when the talk came of the socialist tide sweeping Latin America were saying what they always had and now there was almost silence from their detractors. A few brave souls did swim against the tide but they were few. How could anyone defend the regime in Mexico City? How could anyone want it to survive? That wasn’t actually the point of those who stood firm in opposition to the demands for military action as their point was actually a non-violent solution yet that was how it appeared. This went alongside the situation on the border. The Border States worked together when federal assistance wasn’t forthcoming due to the president’s decision not to… another one he’d fast regret. National Guard units moved to the border with California and Texas assisting Arizona and New Mexico (who had smaller numbers of available men) where needed. The governors called them out with a mission on the border of providing humanitarian relief but also security as well. There were again formal requests made for federal assistance in the form of FEMA aid but before then, the mobilisation of the national guard occurred. Some hastily planning work had been done in January though the scale of the situation was quite something more by late February when the national guardsmen started to arrive. They erected tents, opened medical aid stations and started patrolling the border. It was fast seen as too much to do with not enough. No official count had yet to be made when it came to the numbers of refugees. It wasn’t easy to do with many avoiding contact with American state & federal authorities and the continuing movement of people. Nonetheless, an estimate was released on the same day as Veracruz fell and the New Hampshire Primary occurred. The White House would contest the number. That was one hundred thousand plus. More Mexican refugees were on their way to add to that. There were not enough national guardsmen, nor state employees assisting them, to deal with them and the needs which they would have. March 1984: The conflicts in El Salvador and Honduras were intentionally heated up. Outsiders were now fully directing events whereas before they had been influenced by them. The proxy wars were heading towards a finale. With that, as before, it was the innocents who lived in those two small Central American nations who would suffer. Chile was all alone in trying to keep the regime in El Salvador afloat when faced with Cuban interference. Meanwhile, Honduras’ dearth of allies was about to show how influential that was as Guatemala and Nicaragua finally made their moves to finish off the regime there as well. It was all coordinated. No longer were local circumstances dictating the actions of those outside: it was now the other way around. The regimes of Romero and Paz García didn’t have long left. A Cuban missile team, disguised as guerrilla fighters yet who clearly were anything but by how they operated, shot down a Chilean transport aircraft lifting off from a military airfield near San Salvador. A man-portable SAM system was used to hit the C-130 Hercules and blew off much of the port wing. The aircraft came down hard and exploded in a massive fireball right on the edges of the city. It was full of fuel for the long trip home after a run made northwards carrying weapons and ammunition to keep Romero’s regime afloat in terms of being able to fight the guerrillas. Several days later, a Chilean ship which had just arrived at the port of Acajutla suffered an onboard explosion. This vessel was carrying munitions and there was an almighty secondary blast which caused death and destruction all across the harbour area. Acajutla had been targeted by the guerrillas beforehand where they had aimed to disrupt trade and attack the oil refinery but they had never managed to achieve anything like the chaos unleashed when the freighter blew up when stocked with all of that ammunition. It wasn’t the rebels which had hit that ship though like it wasn’t them who had shot down that transport aircraft: once again it was a Cuban attack made under the cover of El Salvador’s guerrillas. Chilean military personnel and sailors died in the twin attacks. Cuba wanted those deaths felt at home back in far off Chile. Castro’s intention was to make sure that Pinochet down in Santiago realised how costly the proxy war he was fighting up in Central America was for him. It was the rebels and not the Cubans who managed to assassinate a high-profile military officer later in the month on the streets of San Salvador though they would have been unable to claim such a scalp as Colonel d’Aubuisson without Cuban intelligence information. Romero and d’Aubuisson had a complicated relationship with the junior man a threat to his rule but still someone very useful in killing fellow Salvadorans for the dictator. That was to be no more. d’Aubuisson and nine others with him were gunned down inside their vehicle column when it was unexpectedly stopped and machine guns opened up from above them. It was a slaughter, something which d’Aubuisson knew all about. Across in Honduras, there were border incidents along the frontier with Nicaragua where the latter country apparently came under attack. Nicaraguan forces, there to defend the country from alleged long-standing aggression from Honduras, where Honduras provided a base of operations for rebels against the regime in Managua, responded. They did so very fast too, almost as if they were ready to strike back against that mortar fire and sniping with the multiple crossings made of infantry backed up by armour. The truth be told, the only rebels in Honduras were native Hondurans fighting their own government and backed by Nicaragua: anti-Sandinista forces had long been eliminated inside Honduras. It was a false flag attack, a crude but effective one. A security zone was established inside Honduras by the Nicaraguan incursion and at points where if Nicaragua wanted to move deeper forward, say to launch a full invasion, they had excellent bridgeheads for that already established. Hundreds of Honduran soldiers were dead with hundreds more captured. The Hondurans had been taken wholly by surprise and routed. A joint demand was issued afterwards coming from Nicaragua joined by Guatemala. Honduras would turn over all citizens of both countries illegally inside Honduras who were engaged in armed rebellion against their homelands. Honduras had two weeks to comply, or else. That ‘or else’ wasn’t specified but there was no misunderstanding in Honduras what that meant. Paz García had no idea how to fulfil the desires of his two neighbours without seeing his country taken apart with Honduran sovereignty stolen. All he could do was refuse and prepare to fight even if that was doomed. There was always the hope that the international community would give a damn and step in to save the day. The chances of that happening? Not likely. March 1984: Libya hit back against Egypt. Colonel Gadhafi responded to military attacks with those of his own. He ordered the launch of Scud missiles – short-range, ballistic weapons with a high-explosive warhead – against the encampments of Egyptian troops just over the border. Mobile launchers, trucks moving across the desert, fired their missiles and moved fast afterwards to get out of the way of retaliation expected to be coming their way. Less than a third of those missiles hit their targets: Libyan-operated Scuds were never going to be very accurate. To follow this up, there was an attack made by Blinder bombers against Mersa Matruh airbase afterwards. It was from there, halfway to Alexandria, that many of the attacking Egyptian jets had flown last month on their attack missions against Libya. The Blinders made low-level runs and dropped bombs across the facility. There was last-minute warning of the incoming air raid and personnel rushed to shelter thus saving the lives of many. As to the Egyptian aircraft, they were all in their own special shelters with the bombs not scratching them: Egypt had learnt the lesson they had been taught at Israeli hands back in 1967. Egypt’s air defence network had been penetrated well though there did come warning in the end of the attack and there was also the defensive fire which the Blinders came under when on their way home. Two of the three bombers sent against Mersa Matruh were brought down. The Egyptians used Soviet-supplied SAMs to eliminate Soviet-supplied aircraft. The missile and bomber attacks brought about an Egyptian response with another big air strike against Libya. Libya would then strike a counterblow with Scuds again plus the use of tactical aircraft. It was again mainly Soviet-supplied weapons being used by both sides with one still an ally of Moscow and another no longer one. Ammunition expenditure was high and so was the rate of high-tech military equipment lost. Along the majority of the long Egyptian-Libyan frontier, there was quiet on the ground. That wasn’t the case up in the north, near to the sea. It was there were British and Italian armies – later those of the Germans led by Rommel – had seen action in World War Two. The area started to resemble the staging ground for World War Three. Libyan cross-border shelling was met with Egypt bringing in heavy artillery and rockets as well. Troops and tanks arrived with Libya sending so much of what it had while Egypt could only deploy part of its army with so much of that still in Saudi Arabia. A real war would benefit neither country, even in victory if such a thing could be won over the other in these circumstances. They were pushing closer and closer towards one though. Their superpower backers overseas were eager for this all to blow over but were unable to bring things to a stop without the fear that to do so might set into action a chain reaction leading to an eventuality which they wouldn’t like in geo-political terms. What was feared across Eastern Europe started in Romania first with Poland following soon enough. The state cutbacks brought forward trouble when the pinch was felt. This was all a long time coming though the growing recession brought on by the Wall Street Crash only accelerated things. Romania saw violence in response to food & energy rationing commence while in Poland it was to do with the increases in prices for food & the announcements that wages were to be cut with the start there not being direct violence but protests and strikes. Industrial sector workers in both countries were at the root of the protests with those in Romania being unorganised and fast to turn to violence. Polish workers did what they had done before, back when they had ‘won’ in 1980, and went on strike. They intended it to be peaceful but soon in came the riot police who were under orders to crack heads. Polish workers had organised resistance to such attacks beforehand and put their planning into practise where they battled the goons of the state. Romania went straight to violence and the blood flowed freely. Kociołek appealed to his people on state media to obey the law and return to work: think of Poland before yourselves. A different approach was tried by Ceausescu where he let the guns in the hands of the security forces do the work. The Romanians got things under control. The Polish Government failed to do so. As can be expected, the Soviets took notice of events in both countries but in Poland especially. Andropov’s move to calm the situation years ago by installing Kociołek had worked then but all that had done had created a situation where the Polish people hated their government even more than before. They’d been waiting for this opportunity. The rioting across Poland also hit the many military-related factories established nationwide in recent years. The Soviet Union had given Poland employment for its workers – good jobs too – making ships, artillery and military-use trucks (the need for high numbers of these exclusively for the needs of the Soviet Armed Forces was shown in Iran). None of these workers were directly affected by the state cutbacks. Favoritism had been shown by Kociołek to these workers so that he wouldn’t upset Moscow. That backfired. They went out in sympathy strikes and shut down production rather than be bribed. The protesters kept coming out even when the riot police attacked each time and arrested hundreds upon hundreds. Banners were raised among the crowds who marched where they carried images of Pope John Paul II – long dead after the Vatican Fire, one which everyone in Poland knew was murder – but also demands for political freedom and an end to oppression. They kept organizing as well even when there were disappearances among their number of key people. Poland was full of Soviet troops, many of them having redeployed from East Germany. There were more Soviet troops inside countries on each of Poland’s borders. None of them were involved in combatting the trouble across the nation. It was an all-Polish affair with even the KGB staying out of it all. The orders from Moscow were that this was an internal Polish affair, for now at least anyway. However, that was the current Soviet opinion on Poland… one which could easily change. March 1984: A meeting of the UN Security Council where the Egypt-Libya conflict was being urgently discussed saw Gromyko and Mondale meet once more for face-to-face talks. Ambassadors to the UN from both countries had done the finger-pointing in public; behind the scenes, the two of them met where there was the expectation that, as before, agreements could be reached when taking this opportunity to talk. That wasn’t to be the case this time. There were clashes between allies of the Soviet Union and the United States in North Africa with the belief that it was down to the other side’s ally not their own. Gromyko and Mondale each said that their ally was the aggrieved party and had the right to defend themselves. They resorted to doing in private what was being done in public and got nowhere with it. Such a beginning led to disagreement on the other matter up for discussion, that being Mexico. It was Cuba and the other Latin American socialist nations who were supporting revolutionary Mexico, Mondale told Gromyko, and without their support, the fighting in Mexico would end. That wasn’t the case came the retort: Mexico was undergoing a revolution and it was an internal matter for Mexico, not the United States nor anyone else. Those countries were the allies of the Soviet Union and would be unable to act like they were in Mexico without the support of the Cubans and others. No, that wasn’t the case: as said, it was an internal Mexico matter. Gromyko added to his response to Mondale there that the language used by the US Government recently when it came to Mexico and Cuba, by President Kennedy, alarmed the Soviet Government. Those were sovereign countries and the threatening comments made against them from Washington should cease. There was a denial from Mondale on that interpretation and also a repeat of his earlier remarks when it came to how the foreign interference in Mexico needed to cease. He ended the meeting by informing Gromyko that the United States wouldn’t sit idly by while the violence in Mexico continued and there was still foreign interference taking place. Mexico was a major concern for the United States and his country would act accordingly. Gromyko’s parting words were those of a warning of the conflict growing should that happen and one which everyone would regret. When Gromyko would return to Moscow and discuss this with the Politburo, he explained how it must be understood that a lot of what was happening in the United States at the moment with the behaviour of their government was to do with their internal economic troubles and the upcoming sham election of theirs. Kennedy needed to talk tough but he was weak and wouldn’t act. There was no need for concern. Cuba and Nicaragua understood that they weren’t to get anymore involved than they had been in Mexico either. Therefore, the strain in relations at the moment was a temporary one. His colleagues discussed therefore how to proceed. Castro and the Ortega brothers would be once again reminded to stay clear of Mexico even if their frontman in the form of Tirado López was eventually forced from power. Mexico in revolution wasn’t what was wanted. No Soviet-supplied arms were to be ‘diverted’ to Mexico and there certainly wouldn’t be any use of Soviet assets to sent troops there either. The Americans with Kennedy acting like he was at the minute might defy all expectations and strike at Cuba. Decades of peace with the West could be shattered with that. The Politburo did agree that they were stronger than the United States in force of arms and that the Americans had put themselves in a bad situation with their relations with allies. If something overtly hostile was done by the Americans against the Soviet Union, then, naturally, they would emerge victorious in the end. Ustinov reminded them of that. He had built that series of strong military defensive forces and the Soviet Armed Forces were unchallengeable. There was no need for conflict though, he said, and avoiding that was key. Chebrikov – still smarting over not getting the crown but with influence remaining – floated an idea for the future: if Kennedy tried to do something stupid and threaten the peace, bully the Soviet Union, there were always other measures that could be enacted to distract him at home and abroad. The decisions made here on how things would go were final as far as the Politburo saw it for they were in control of events. The fighting continued in Mexico. Veracruz was a blow for the Northern Alliance and it was followed by the communists taking Tampico, another port on the Gulf of Mexico. Again, it was the inability of the fighting men of the Northern Alliance to do that, fight, which caused the second defeat on the battlefield. The communists were lucky once again. They shouldn’t have been able to win by overcoming a numerically-stronger force in a good defensive position (the geography for the defenders was excellent), when they had their own internal issues too, but Northern Alliance soldiers abandoned the fight at Tampico like they had done at Veracruz. The communists were able to march onwards. They came across a treasure-trove when going through the positions which their opponents had abandoned after a short exchange of fire. What Northern Alliance soldiers hadn’t deserted had pulled out and left a lot of military equipment behind in their hurry. Supply officers for the communists, who weren’t having a good time before Tampico in trying to equip the army in which they served, finally had something to smile about. Weapons, ammunition and supplies had been left for them to get their hands on. This could all make up for a lot – seeing the enemy run was good for morale too – yet the communist forces remained weak overall. They had their own problems with soldiers oftentimes unwilling to fight unless they were urged on. Being ‘urged on’ had seen the shooting of some men as examples which most often worked though not always. Initial publicising of this to improve discipline – the shootings will continue until morale improves! – was seen as a failure too. It didn’t work. What did work was to keep advancing and attacking forwards. Northern Alliance soldiers had no heart to them. Communist soldiers liked to win. Losing Veracruz and then Tampico were blows from which the Monterrey Government were going to struggle to recover from. They were on the defensive and failing at that. Any hope of serious offensive action was impossible at this time. The alliance of states across the country was physically split into four component parts. Rumours came to Monterrey and President Herzog Flores that those in Sinaloa and Yucatán were discussing the possibility of giving in to Tirado López. His emissaries had been busy promising amnesty. Adding to these woes, Herzog Flores had to deal with the Americans and their demands that he stop the flow of refugees. It was from Northern Alliance territory that those Mexican civilians fled from. Stop them, Washington said. It was explained to the president that the political pressure on Kennedy was immense to act and while not all of that came from the refugee issue, that was a strong factor in that. That couldn’t be done though. The communists couldn’t be stopped from advancing and the refugees couldn’t be stopped from also going north. There was only one solution short of surrendering to the communist usurper. That was to ask the United States for direct military assistance. Herzog Flores would do just that. April 1984: Graciously, the deadline to Honduras had been extended for an extra week (a third) where there was more time given by the two neighbouring nations readying for war. Should the military government of Paz García disband with the general standing down so that free & fair elections be scheduled to take place and the people given a say in how Honduras was run, then Guatemala and Nicaragua wouldn’t feel compelled to invade and restore order in Honduras. That offer was turned down. It did give the Hondurans more time to prepare but the preparations made couldn’t stop what came when the deadline finally expired. Guatemala and Nicaragua launched their joint invasion. They were liberating the Honduran people from oppression and bringing an end to the violence inside Honduras. Regional security was endangered by the civil war inside Honduras and they were bringing that to an end. What a pack of lies that was. It was all about conquest. Guatemala’s armed forces – heavily rebuilt after the disastrous Belize War – struck from the northwest while Nicaragua’s untested but numerous military came up from the south. There was Cuban support though it was rather minimal and focused upon intelligence and supply instead of combat operations. Those were left to the Guatemalans and the Nicaraguans as the two nations entered Honduras to do battle with the regime of Paz García. The Guatemalans made a two-pronged attack where they struck inland but also along the Caribbean coastline. In places, the Guatemalans were held back though not when they brought in air support and unleashed heavy artillery. Hondurans fought to defend their nation and fought well yet were overcome and a retreat started. Those involved in that withdrawal, pulling back deep into the jungle, were harassed by air strikes and also the use of Guatemalan commandos too. The Hondurans were unable to effectively pull away as an organised force ready to return to the battlefield under more favourable circumstances. Tegucigalpa was the focus of the Nicaraguan attack. Two full divisions – copies of Cuban counterparts in almost every way – made a pincer attack upon the Honduran capital from starting points inside Honduras. Tanks and mechanised infantry drove through the defenders in their advance while dismounted infantry then started mopping-up. The Nicaraguans headed for Tegucigalpa where there were Nicaraguan paratroopers – a regiment of them; about twelve hundred men – holding onto the international airport which they overrun in an assault when the invasion commenced. Honduran troops tried to evict them like they tried to stop the Guatemalan and Nicaraguan heavy ground forces: using their standard infantry tactics. Fighting guerrillas was what the Hondurans could do and do well but they were facing an altogether different kind of enemy. Tegucigalpa was reached by the Nicaraguan 2nd Motorised Rifle Division after six days of fighting; the 1st Division arrived the next day. Those paratroopers there had taken heavy losses when pinned down but still held the airport. Transports (small aircraft yet many) started flying in, bringing with them Nicaraguan light units full of urban warfare trained infantry. The Honduran capital may have been taken from the control of organised Honduran resistance but it was alive with ‘enemy activity’: armed Hondurans not in uniform. It would be pacified with brutal force used. Paz García was long gone. Nicaraguan special military intelligence units were all over the city and went through government buildings looking for records of where he might be plus searching for officials who might know. The interrogation methods used were typical of the long dirty wars fought in Central America. Someone who knew something was soon found and it was discovered that the president had left the city right before it fell and headed north into the jungle. Many other regime figures were gone too; those who hadn’t left would regret that decision. Nicaraguan troops moved onwards. The border with El Salvador was reached and there was a link-up made with the Guatemalans in the west. A further joint effort by the armies of the two countries was made over a wide area through the north as they swept forward locating and pounding the last organised Honduran forces available. Many Honduran soldiers had by now abandoned their colours but there were still some left who were fighting for their country where it was being overrun by hostile neighbours. They were keep fighting until the end. Before the end of the month, the Honduran War was over. Paz García was still on the run – hiding somewhere and unable to get out – but his regime was destroyed. The Honduran people had been freed from oppression… to face another kind of oppression. Egypt and Libya spent April continuing their conflict. Air and missile strikes took place while there was also a lot of cross-border shelling which led to cross-border reconnaissance too. The cost for each of them was getting quite something now. Neither country was able to keep this up without going through stocks of ammunition and also taking the casualties (men and equipment) forever. Libya had shot though most of its stocks of Scud missiles while the Egyptians had lost a staggering amount of aircraft to Libyan air defences. The Arab League, plus independent actions from fellow Middle Eastern nations, tried to bring an end to the conflict, an end with or without any necessary formal agreement. There was growing concern over how this conflict was starting to have ripple effects. The Soviets were going to resupply the Libyans with weapons and there was a worry that this would push Colonel Gadhafi further into their camp; Saddam in Iraq had pledged support for Libya and this didn’t play well with the Saudis & the Gulf Arab Monarchies with Egyptian troops in Saudi Arabia defending them against Iraq. Egypt was a well-armed nation but the losses taken weren’t all that could be replaced: bullets could be manufactured domestically yet combat aircraft were something wholly different. Libya found that there were some conditions attached to a Soviet resupply. There was thus an appetite in both Cairo and Tripoli to see an end to their conflict. Each wanted to maintain domestically that they had been in the right and emerged victorious, as well as best possible abroad with that too. The fighting carried on but at a far slower rate. Meanwhile, Mubarak and Gadhafi danced around the idea of ending this with diplomats trying to bring everything to a close. A ceasefire was what was hoped for by almost everyone involved but one where neither side would be seen as having backed down. Romania’s security force had brought an end to the majority of the violence across the country. Flares ups still continued and there were hundreds, maybe up to a thousand, dead but it was generally over with. The same couldn’t be said in Poland. The Poles lost control of the situation when protests and strikes turned to violence returned from the people against the organs of state. Things got out of hand when the workers moved to firmly defend themselves from the overblown violence directed against them by hitting back. They hit back hard too. Veterans of compulsory national service, former conscripts who had industrial jobs from where they were on strike, helped with the basics of fighting with the riot police. Weapons were liberated where possible and then used. Organisation moved from making political demands to launching attacks to pre-empt security operations. Full-scale retaliation nipped some of this in the bud at the start but it spread and the growth in violence couldn’t be stopped. Certain areas of many cities and big towns became no-go areas for the security forces due to sniping as well as the erecting of barricades. Outward attacks were soon started from those areas where the security forces were attacked themselves rather than being on the offensive. Now it wasn’t just factories, shipyards and coal mines which were shut but everything else from commercial premises to the railways. Withdrawals were made from the security forces as they pulled back further and further, surrendering more areas to what was now being called ‘patriotic groups’. A free and fair Poland was what they wanted. The people were in rebellion against the government. Warsaw was still under government control and the majority of the country was too, but major urban areas nationwide weren’t. No longer could the security forces do their job. Kociołek saw that there was only one thing to be done. The Polish Army, which had sat in its barracks with soldiers isolated, was turned to. Readiness was started for troops to be used to restore order. There was unease from several military officers and when they spoke openly about this, the secret police removed them from sight. Others kept their mouths shut, unsure of what happened to their comrades but not willing to risk speaking out. The moral issue of using soldiers against civilians bothered many, so did wariness about whether those troops would fire on their own people. Kociołek, who was where he was because he was the one man trusted by Moscow to deal with his own people effectively – brutally but still effectively –, would solve the crisis which had gripped his country. He was well aware that if he couldn’t, then the Soviet Union would do so. He’d been told that directly by Ustinov. Polish troops prepared to restore order and if they were unable to, it would be Soviet soldiers next. April 1984: After Tampico, Tirado López sent his army northwards again. Their destination was Monterrey, capital of Herzog Flores’ regime, and that was by the way of Ciudad Victoria. That second smaller city had been the site of early political resistance first to García Paniagua, then el coronel and afterwards Tirado López. It was the state capital of Tamaulipas which was one of the two initial states to say NO to Mexico City; neighbouring Nuevo León with Monterrey as its state capital was the other. It was a major transportation hub and along the road heading up to Monterrey on the way from the recent coastal gains made by the communists. To Ciudad Victoria first, such was the plan, and the Monterrey afterwards. Tirado López was certain that once those two cities were taken, the heart would be cut out of the resistance. Sinaloa had come to an agreement with Mexico City and there was belief that Yucatán was about to as well. To victory marched the communist army. Herzog Flores had military officers who could read a map and also understood the basic intentions of their enemy. Taking Ciudad Victoria was what they could do if they were on the offensive in similar circumstances. It made sense in every way. They moved what they could towards that city, which weakened the defences of Torreon to the west (a calculated risk), but allowed them to have faith in the ability to finally hold back the tide. Their troops were well-sited and equipped as best as possible. Morale was still low among the soldiers generally though ahead of Ciudad Victoria, many locals had been forced into the ranks of defenders and assurances given that they were fighting for their city to stop it being sacked by the communists. There were stories spread among the men that that had happened elsewhere. If they didn’t fight for the city, it would be looted and burnt with their families suffering. Stop the communists here! Air power had been a little-used feature of the Mexican civil war. Pre-war, there was a professional but small national air arm which operated in defence of the nation. Recent arms purchases, taking place before the economic crash and subsequent security meltdown, had seen the Mexicans buy from aboard two different types of good quality combat aircraft: F-5 lightweight interceptors from the Americans and Mirage F-1 attack-fighters from the French. Those latter aircraft were fewer in number than the American ones and were actually originally destined for Iraq before the arms embargo had occurred and Iraq was unable to acquire them. Like Kuwaiti Mirage F-1s also held by the French following Iraq’s storming of that country, these aircraft were marketed around the world at low cost. Development costs had already been paid for and France was willing to help integrate them into air forces which might take them. Just over a dozen of these jets were currently operational with the communist forces. They had been grounded for some time but Tirado López had demanded that his army had air cover. The Northern Alliance had their own aircraft operational and no longer would they go unchallenged. To open the offensive to take Ciudad Victoria and clear away its defenders, the Mirage F-1s were sent into action. They were tasked for missions in early April where they made low-level bomb & rocket attacks (munitions not likely to be replaced any time soon) in support of the ground forces. One was downed by a missile shot from an F-5 as the civil war moved to the skies and another badly damaged by anti-aircraft fire. The others were meant to work with the ground forces but the coordination was quite terrible. Those on the ground didn’t make the best use of the air power at-hand: far too many of them were inexperienced and narrowly-focused on the ground fighting for Ciudad Victoria which didn’t go like Veracruz and Tampico. Here the Northern Alliance soldiers held. They didn’t desert en mass nor withdraw. Finally, they stood their ground. A decision was made to use the air support in a more useful manner. Ciudad Victoria was terror-bombed. Eleven aircraft couldn’t drop that many bombs (serviceability was another problem with the French training teams & mechanics having long gone home) but they delivered enough in two missions do cause quite the carnage. The city which they attacked was full of refugees from elsewhere that were caught in the bomb blasts when the ordnance falling from the jets above fell to the ground and blew up. Frighten those in the city to cause anarchy was the aim of the bombing in addition to overawing the city’s defenders outside. It just made the latter fight harder though. There was something else that the communists didn’t foresee: there were American media teams in Ciudad Victoria. Up in Washington, a red line had been seen to have been crossed with this deliberate killing of civilians that this time was witnessed first hand rather than through reports of others. Kennedy had recently set a red line, one forced on him by events and the actions of others, and it was a red line that had been crossed. He would do something demanded of him and intervene… finally. If it would be effective and do any good was a different matter entirely. April 1984: The Pentagon had been putting together strike options for action against the regime in Mexico City for months now. Secretary of Defence Bentsen had authorised that planning; he hadn’t authorised the leak to the New York Times back in February of the scale of that planning where a lot had been revealed. Revision had been done and better security implemented to stop such leaks from reoccurring. No more Vietnams, had been a cry from some – isolationists of different political stripes from the left and right which agreed on the same thing though for different reasons – who had justified what they read to protest against planned military action. The new plans were multiple and varied in scale from full-scale military action to limited attacks. Outright eliminating the entire military capability of the communist forces of Tirado López was at one end of the scale; punishment actions against selected elements of those were at the other. Bentsen had been pushing for Kennedy to take action though not screaming atop his lungs like others in Washington. After news came of the Red Terror which took place first in Veracruz then later in Tampico, his hand was strengthened. Kennedy moved from not wanting to listen to now listening to the idea that the communists needed to be struck at less they take all of the US-recognised Northern Alliance and slaughter thousands more innocents. Furthermore, Bentsen’s concerns were shared by Tip O’Neil from the House: a far bigger influence on Kennedy. O’Neil let the president know how concerned Congress was about not just what the Mexican communists were doing but also the role played in this by Cuba and the LAComs too: Congressional committees were getting CIA briefings. What also motivated Kennedy to eventually start considering military action, something which he was so completely opposed to before for fear of a conflict spreading to war with the Soviet Union in the end, were further domestic issues where his reelection campaign was gravely under threat due to the inaction shown by his administration. Everyone was lining up against him. In the end, his mood shifted. He really hadn’t wanted to budge. The thought of losing in November was not pleasant and was that deciding factor. The terror bombing of Ciudad Victoria was an event where he declared that a red line had been crossed. The Mexican communists had shown their true colours. They were a threat to the security of the United States. His strong words on this matter were delivered to the American people in an address right after Kemp had won a massive victory in the Arizona Primary – Arizona had Mexican refugees – and while Kennedy won the state too, the turnout in the Democratic race was embarrassingly low. Kennedy’s presidential address told the country that the killing of innocents in Mexico would no longer be tolerated; neither would ‘foreign military interference’ in Mexico. On that last note, detractors would point out that Operation Blue Spike was just that: foreign military interference though this time from the United States. Blue Spike was one of three air strike options presented to Kennedy by Bentsen and the Joint Chiefs; Blue Star and Blue Switch were the other two. These were computer-generated codenames from the Pentagon. Kennedy ‘s chief-of-staff complained that the name was uninspiring, especially as it had to be sold to the American people. The codename wasn’t being sold though, Bentsen’s retort came: stopping the ability of Tirado López to launch terror bombing against his own people was the aim. Anyway, it wasn’t Ham Sandwich or Merry Christmas. Blue Star and Blue Switch were plans for stronger, more-damaging air strikes than Blue Spike was. Kennedy went with the latter option. He preferred to let diplomacy do most of the work with Cuba and the Central American countries let know in no uncertain terms that the United States was serious and for his planned contact direct with new General Secretary Ustinov on the matter. The bombs sent south were actually secondary, something in addition to the diplomacy. In a private conversation after Kennedy authorised Blue Spike, Bentsen had to reprimand the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs for off-the-cuff remarks made about Kennedy showing weakness with Blue Spike. This was the president after all, the commander-in-chief. Far worse things were being said elsewhere. On April 16th, Kennedy declared a state of emergency through the Border States which were home to all of those refugees and released federal aid plus signed authorisation for FEMA to move in to assist the national guard forces of the four states along the US-Mexican border. Later that day he had the diplomatic offensive start where other countries were given notice that Mexico was off-limits. To complete what the White House press secretary would go on record as calling ‘strong presidential action’ in response to a ‘matter of serious national concern’, Kennedy sent the US Air Force southwards that night on an attack mission into Mexico. Those Mirage F-1s at Zapopan airbase were targeted by Blue Spike. The strike package to hit the airbase was quite impressive regardless of what was said about Blue Spike. A squadron of F-111s with the 27th Tactical Fighter Wing flying from Cannon AFB in New Mexico struck with laser-guided Paveway bombs. Those 2000lb high-explosive weapons were targeted upon the aircraft and the associated support at Zapopan to keep them flying. Escorting the strike-bombers – to deal with any Mexican air interference when really the F-111s could defend themselves against anything the Mexicans could throw at them – were a squadron of F-15s with the 49th Tactical Fighter Wing also based in New Mexico and this time at Holloman AFB. There were tankers in support, stand-off electronic warfare aircraft, airborne radar aircraft and air-rescue aircraft as well to pick up any downed aircrews. It was a big deal. The US Air Force had the capability to do a lot more than it did with such a force. Those F-111s rained bombs down upon Zapopan while the F-15s circled at a distance (in multiple groups) just itching for the radio call to come that the Mexican communists, maybe even the Cubans somehow, were in the sky. With the airbase being near to the city of Guadalajara, the use of laser-guided bombs was a mission priority and they showed their worth in hitting the right targets and not going anywhere near civilians in that city. Kennedy had personally been involved in that, something which had irked the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs, someone who had no wish to kill civilians either but had been in uniform during Vietnam when there had been political micro-management like that then. The bombs slammed into the airbase one after another blowing it and the aircraft there to pieces. No friendly casualties were taken and the aircraft returned to Cannon and Holloman. Post-strike reconnaissance done by a satellite with its orbit re-tasked showed the mission a full success. Those Mexican aircraft were out of action for good, so too a lot of people who had been at the airbase. High-fives were for everyone involved. At the Pentagon the next morning, Bentsen briefed the press in a big event and then there were one-on-ones with friendly journalists afterwards. Blue Spike showed the intention of the Kennedy Administration not to sit idly by while civilians were massacred. Kennedy gave an interview that evening to ABC News where he spoke of how the warning would be understood elsewhere in the region. He looked serious, he talked tough. Everyone was supposed to take notice at home with the voters and abroad with the governments which he had diplomats talking to. This was the solution to everything. The United States had acted and would do so again too, if that was necessary. But it wasn’t the solution it was believed to be. Fighting continued outside Ciudad Victoria where the two opposing armies carried on shooting at each other. The communists were held here and wouldn’t be taking that city anytime soon. However, in the following days, they did manage to take Torreon though, up in the state of Coahuila and from where the Northern Alliance had pulled fighters from to hold the line at Ciudad Victoria. Tirado López wasn’t intimated by the loss of those aircraft into inaction around Torreon with a full-scale assault to take it and therefore seal the fate of resistance to his regime in Mexico City from Sinaloa away to the west by cutting them off fully. Blue Spike only encouraged him with the weakness he saw in one air strike against a target such as those aircraft that had limited value in real military terms in their current condition. He gave orders – on the advice of those Nicaraguans with him leading his military forces – for the entry of covert teams towards the northern cities of Chihuahua and Saltillo as well to act as a fifth column for later attacks. The Monterrey Government doomed themselves by begging the Americans for aid and his opinion was that once the people under their control realized how the gringos had been called upon to help, his own cause of reuniting his country would be emboldened. In Havana and Managua, Castro and the Ortega brothers took no notice of the warnings / coded threats from Kennedy’s emissaries. Weapons and other support would keep being sent to Tirado López. At home, domestically for Kennedy, Blue Spike wasn’t the answer to the issue of the president’s embattled administration. Congress was still demanding full support for the Monterrey Government with arms transfers and full air support: a naval blockade of Mexico, like what Kennedy’s brother had placed around Cuba in 1962, was demanded by some there. Others almost screamed for Kennedy’s impeachment after what was seen as such a weak response. And the Mexican refugees? They kept heading north, many actually choosing to leave after what they heard – rumours it must be said – of Blue Spike for they feared that the civil war was now only going to get worse now the Americans were involved. Safety for them was up over the border, across in the United States were so many more of their fellow Mexican citizens had already sought that. Each and every intention of Blue Spike saw failure apart from the destruction of some aircraft.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Apr 21, 2018 14:29:08 GMT
May 1984:
The introduction of Polish troops to restore order across the nation was not a decision taken lightly. Kociołek wasn’t someone to baulk at the thought of blood running in the streets when using riot police against civilians. Soldiers were a different matter though. There was an absolute certainty that the violence which would come with their use would be far greater. However, nothing else was going to work. The situation demanded that it be brought under control less the whole country end up in rebellion.
There had been a period of preparation were the troops were given instructions on how to restore order and instructed only to shoot if necessary but they were still combat soldiers going up against civilians. The Polish Army was trained to fight a war on the battlefields of the North German Plain, across the Iron Curtain over in West Germany and up into Denmark. When going up against civilians, their tanks and artillery were left behind though them men still had their armoured vehicles for transport and personal weapons. The plan was for them to be an unstoppable force which when unleashed against those in rebellion against the government, would force those acting against the state to be fast overcome if they stood or to run away in fright. Bash heads, the soldiers were told before they went into action, and drag counterrevolutionaries back to the lines of military police waiting behind. Snipers were expected to engage the soldiers and so counter-sniper measures were to be used: RPGs or a shell from the cannons of one of the armoured vehicles. There were former conscript soldiers among the counterrevolutionaries who knew how to use captured weapons taken from ZOMO riot police and were training others in that: get them first when identified. Don’t stop advancing in the face of stone-throwing, sniping, petrol bombs and even rifle fire: that was the final message given to the soldiers. Something not said to them was for them to think before they opened fire, to be careful in who they shot at. Why an earth would Kociołek and his generals want soldiers to think? If they did that… they might ask themselves if they would rather go into a fight against their fellow Poles. Thinking, decision-making and using judgement was a no-no.
That blood did indeed run in the streets. Polish troops shot their way through protesters… and anyone else standing in their way too. Hundreds died on the first day and hundreds more each and every following day that Polish soldiers were in action against their fellow countrymen. All across the nation, in urban areas, there were massacres which took place when the troops clashed with civilians. Initially, it looked like the forces of the state were going to win. Standing and fighting with combat-trained soldiers wasn’t something that the civilian opposition could achieve. All of their organisation and experience in fighting against riot police couldn’t prepare them for what they came up against. They either died or ran. That brought forth the issue of the soldiers having to root out the last of the counterrevolutionaries though. From above, political instructions were to not destroy factories and infrastructure when the protesters were being eliminated. That would have to be done to effectively finish off the resistance. Orders to do such a thing were refused. Surround them and move in carefully, using caution and avoiding causing destruction were the orders instead. In following these orders, the soldiers took serious casualties and this sunk their morale. It also brought them into close contact with those whom they were fighting. Shooting what they were told who were traitors from afar was very different from engaging them up close and personal. Should those they fought have been in uniform or foreign then the story would have been different. These were their fellow Poles though.
Desertions started. It was individuals at first and then small groups of men. Political officers were fast to get wind and pulled certain units out of the line while ‘removing’ identified troublemakers. That didn’t work. The mutinies begun and they took hold fast. Rifle squads and then whole platoons refused to fight. Many of those who joined would soon reconsider, thinking of retaliation against their families, though once they were in this, they were in this. Other units were brought in to open fire on these further counterrevolutionaries. Some did, others refused to as well. Military discipline across the Polish Armed Forces fell off the metaphorical cliff. Officers started getting shot. The political officers were quick to make a run for it though those who weren’t fast enough suffered the punishment for those who got away. Neutrality was the claim made by many soldiers: neutrality in this fight between the state and counterrevolutionaries. Others went wholescale over to those in rebellion and joined with them. Kociołek’s leading generals – Jaruzelski and Siwicki – were unable to guarantee to him that more troops wouldn’t desert or munity among those already involved in the fighting or yet to be introduced. Polish military counter-intelligence was active alongside the SB state security service in trying to stop all of this from happening but it was too much to give a guarantee that this wouldn’t spread further. As before, all that Kociołek could do was to pull back. The soldiers were withdrawn from what were the frontlines of a Polish civil war. The state had been checkmated. It couldn’t put down the counterrevolution. Someone else would have to.
May 1984:
It took some time, but Arab League mediation eventually brought forth an agreement for Mubarak and Gadhafi to have their representatives meet (not themselves) and discuss an end to their stalled conflict. Gadhafi refused to send anyone to Cairo, the Egyptian capital where the Arab League was headquartered, on the grounds that that would give the appearance of weakness and it was his choice – which Mubarak huffed and puffed about but eventually agreed on – of Tunis as a location for those talks to commence. Egyptian and Libyan diplomats met in the Tunisian capital. Positions were staked out at once with assurances made that these were red lines. Demands were made of the other side which were known to be impossible to fulfil. There was hostility and threats made. It wasn’t going to be a meeting where any agreement was to come, not at the start anyway. The Arab League mediators worked to get each side to backtrack on those firm opening positions and to search for a middle ground. The Libyans claimed once again that they had nothing to do with the assassination of Sadat and tried to turn the Tunis meeting to focus instead of the agreement made between Sadat and the Israelis. Egypt considered the Israeli agreement none of Libya’s business and wanted to discuss an end to the fighting with Libya admitting that it had sponsored the terrorist killing of its former president. Those strong positions were insurmountable at the beginning for the mediators though there was the recognition that each side wanted an end to the fighting. A ceasefire was proposed. Once there came an end to the armed conflict between the two nations, then there could afterwards be talks on a real peace agreement where the principle reasons behind the conflict were sorted out. This was something which the Egyptian and Libyan diplomats would need permission to agree upon from their leaders. They waited in Tunis for that to be agreed to by Mubarak and Gadhafi. That was what each wanted but to agree too fast would be seen as weakness. There was a delay in that approval coming yet it was going to be sent by each right up to the moment that the Gulf of Sirte Incident occurred.
For more than a decade since his ascension to power, Gadhafi had claimed the Gulf of Sirte as Libyan territorial waters. This was an arm of the Mediterranean and according to international law, the twelve-mile limit was in effect with regard to territorial waters. Gadhafi disputed that and declared a ‘line of death’ through the Gulf of Sirte where any aircraft or ship which crossed it faced attack. That had been challenged by President Ford where his administration sent military aircraft and warships across the Line of Death several times since. The Libyans had opened fire on occasion without managing to hit their targets. Kennedy hadn’t changed the United States position on the illegality of Libyan actions though had scaled back what he had seen as ‘provocation’ there: that had been one of the many issues which had brought forth disagreement with former defence secretary Muskie and such a dispute rose with Muskie’s replacement in Bentsen too. The current secretary of defence had authorised the US Navy to undertake Freedom of Navigation exercises through the Gulf of Sirte, past that Line of Death, starting in the New Year. Egypt and Libya had gone to war and there had been a scaling back of this where the focus for the US Sixth Fleet was instead on shadowing the Soviets and their warships in the Mediterranean. When the diplomats started talking in Tunis though, there came a partial return to those Freedom of Navigation exercises. From the aircraft carrier USS John F. Kennedy, flights were conducted by US Navy fighters along with the undertaking of electronic reconnaissance missions. A clash came in the skies, one instigated by the Libyans yet one which wouldn’t have happened if the US Navy hadn’t been present. Flying from Ghardabiya airbase – near to Sirte, Gadhafi’s birthplace – were a pair of MiG-25 interceptors sent to chase away the Americans. The US Navy saw them coming, closing in fast upon the S-3 aircraft on a reconnaissance mission, and put two F-14 Tomcats between that defenceless aircraft and the Libyans. The Libyans shot first. They’d done this before. They did it this time under orders because the position of Gadhafi was that this was a mission conducted by the American aircraft to intimidate him into backing down to Egyptian pressure being exerted in Tunis. The Tomcats got two kills – the calls of ‘Foxbats launching’ were met with the radio calls of ‘Fox Two, Fox Two’ – and returned, like the S-3, to the Kennedy unscathed.
For the second time in two months, during the fourth year of (Ted) Kennedy’s presidency, there had been United States military action where for the preceding years there had been none at all despite all of the apparent provocation. To many, the United States was suddenly getting very aggressive in different areas of the world. Strange it might seem after the years beforehand of inaction but then there was the prevailing view that Kennedy was doing all of this to get himself re-elected. As to those talks in Tunis, they were off when Gadhafi recalled his diplomats and started issuing threats against Egypt and the United States… oh, and the Zionists who were behind all of this. He didn’t forget them in his ranting and raving.
May 1984:
That one single American air strike against that Mexican airbase continued to have no effect upon the civil war. The Mirage F-1s were on their last legs when used to attack Ciudad Victoria and the whole civil war had seen little use of air power in any reasonable way. The fighting was done on the ground between infantry and also in the fields of intelligence operations away from the frontlines too. The former saw Sinaloa eventually fall during May and the latter was the deciding factor where Yucatán was no longer a player in the fighting. The Northern Alliance was starting to fall apart and the loss of these two key factions highlighted the failure of the Monterrey Government and President Herzog Flores to be able to keep every faction onside. Baja California, yet another faction, demanded more be done too in getting further American help to stop the tide of defeat: Monterrey now had to worry that they might break away leaving Northern Alliance forces in the northeast of the country all alone. Despondency hit many in Monterrey especially as there were further military defeats elsewhere.
Sinaloa was on the western coast of Mexico and isolated for some time. Troops which had once fought for el coronel trying to advance down from the mountains to the sea had afterwards answered to Tirado López in continuing that. Eventually, being cut off for so long and faced with a relentless opponent, Sinaloa’s defenders ran out of bullets. Their only supply line was across the Gulf of California to Baja California who had supply problems of their own. Communist troops made a final attack and managed to reach the edges of Culiacán, the state capital. Emissaries had gone forward first under the cover of a white flag and when the attackers approached, no fire came their way. The city surrendered with the defending troops laying down their arms. Culiacán was declared an open city. The politicians, who’d promised there would be a fight to the last bullet, had already fled and headed for La Paz over in Baja California. Days later, resistance around the city of Mazatlán also gave in with similar circumstances and that was the effective end of resistance from Sinaloa. It would take some time to redeploy communist troops, but what would eventually occur would be the ability of Tirado López to start moving them north. Hermosillo up in Sonora was in communist hands but beyond that city, up as far as the US-Mexican border, there was Northern Alliance territory. When the advance would later start from Hermosillo, it would be ostensibly deeper into Sonora and to sever Baja California from the bulk of Northern Alliance territory. That would send them towards that border though. Communist troops on the border of the United States would certainty have interesting political, diplomatic and military effects.
Down in the Yucatán, the defenders at the front, those in Tabasco, were betrayed by their politicians in the rear. The three states across the peninsula had long been working together as one voice within the Northern Alliance and acting increasingly independent since Veracruz’s loss in February had cut them off. From the city of Mérida, there had been public claims that there would be a fight to the end from here. That wasn’t to be the case though. The state governments had some months ago opened secret negotiations with Mexico City and those had been facilitated by the Cuban DGI. Once again, despite everything that was being said in Washington but in also Moscow too, Cuba was involved in the Mexican civil war. They helped bring about a ‘political settlement’ between Mérida and Mexico City. The Yucatán states would stop fighting and leave the Northern Alliance: all ties with the Monterrey Government would be cut. There would be autonomy for the region in the new Mexico which was being built. This move brought forth howls of betrayal from Monterrey: it certainly was. It was also a betrayal of the fourth state in that region, that being Tabasco. The city of Villahermosa was on the frontlines and the switching of sides from Campeche, Quintana Roo and Yucatán behind them left Tabasco high-and-dry. Tabasco would be overcome before the end of the month. Once again, this would see the freeing up of troops for Tirado López to send northwards as well.
Further to the south, the swallowing up of Honduras by Guatemala and Nicaragua last month saw British substantially increase its military commitment inside Belize. The devastation of the Belize War in 1982 had seen independence for the small country delayed but that had eventually come in January of this year. Belize had requested that Britain maintain a garrison in the country to help defend the new nation because Guatemala had showed no sign of discontinuing its aggression. When Guatemala directed that against Honduras instead, this was seen as a clear sign of what was going to return to Belize soon enough. The Belize Defence Forces were called-out and the Britain was called upon to help. There was already a large force in-place though this was increased. Extra warships were re-routed to the Caribbean and the RAF doubled its number of aircraft on the ground in Belize. As to the British Army, there came the activation from paper plans of the 48th Infantry Brigade. The two battalions of troops inside Belize – one of Gurkhas, the other of a line infantry unit – were to be joined by a further two battalions, including another of Gurkhas: these from Brunei in the Far East. The 48th Brigade was stood up due to the need for Britain to maintain its other brigade headquarters elsewhere due to long-standing commitments in other areas of the world: Britain hadn’t withdrawn any troops from West Germany plus had men in Ulster plus more for NATO missions. Finding the troops for Belize was difficult but doable: a brigade headquarters being redeployed would be impossible. The wait was on now for Guatemala to come back again at Belize. It was anticipated that this time, Guatemala would try to do things ‘properly’. So would the defenders of the country being doing things properly when/if that happened for there would no repeat of 1982.
Chile abandoned El Salvador in May. There had been further loses of Chilean military assets trying to support Romero’s collapsing regime and Pinochet could no longer maintain the fight so far aboard with losses mounting. The withdrawal was humiliating for Pinochet. For El Salvador’s ruler, it was fatal. As Chile pulled out, the guerrillas pushed onwards and won several victories outside of San Salvador before then mounting an assault on the capital city. Last month’s strikes inside the city were joined now by further armed actions to distract away from the fighting outside. When things fell apart, they fell apart fast. Romero decided to abandon the capital and fight from elsewhere. As he fled, he was killed when a meet-up with his evacuation escort went wrong after its details were betrayed to the rebels. Guerrilla troops, fighting with Cuban-supplied arms, were all over the capital and took charge. There were shootings and massacres as scores were settled. Romero’s regime came to a bloody end though he wasn’t alive to see it. Yet another Central American nation had fallen to the tide of revolution – all backed by outsiders – which continued sweeping across the region.
June 1984:
Exercise Friendship had been planned all year with a start date of June 2nd where Warsaw Pact military forces across Eastern Europe would take place in large scale war games spread across Czechoslovakia, East Germany and Poland. There would be Soviet participation as well with the lead set by them. Events in Poland had interfered with the exercises. Polish participation was certainty out and there was to be none of the exercises taking place in Poland. Friendship was still meant to take place though. It did… but became Operation Unity instead. The war games became real as Unity saw an invasion – or an intervention as the other countries would claim – of Poland. Soviet forces already inside Poland joined with more coming in from outside of the nation engaged in a civil war alongside other troops from Czechoslovakia and East Germany. Order would be restored in Poland: that was the purpose of Unity. If it meant engaging Polish military units alongside armed counterrevolutionaries, so be it. The rules of engagement were quite lax considering Poland remained an ally and there was last-minute arm-twisting diplomacy where officially Warsaw Pact forces were invited into Poland to provide ‘fraternal military assistance’. Unity was to be a bloodbath but with only one possible outcome: victory for those invading/intervening.
The Polish Armed Forces had their own military counter-intelligence and political security organisation, the Wojskowa Służba Wewnętrzna (WSW). This was an organisation meant to make sure that the military kept political discipline and also that there was no ability for any sort of military coup to take place. The WSW had been busy through the past couple of months arresting officers and enlisted men who were accused of plotting against the state and acting in rebellion. They were no heroes of a free and democratic Poland. They were patriots though. The WSW became aware of the incoming invasion with a couple of days notice. Russian and German troops – the Czechoslovaks weren’t as significant – were once again about to rape Poland. For anyone who loved Poland, to see history repeating itself again like this was enough to cause despair and anger. There came a decision among senior figures at the top of the WSW to stop Unity from achieving its goal of crushing Poland whatever the political motive. If that meant that everything must be sacrificed, then that would be the case. There could be no repeat of the past where the historic enemies of the Polish people and Polish freedom were allowed to carve Poland up once again. On the eve of the incoming Unity operation, forged orders were sent out to Polish military units. These were hand-delivered messages sent with the correct authorization codes and as near to the real thing as possible: no traffic was sent over the airwaves. Those who received the orders were told a version of the truth as the WSW saw it. They were instructed to fight.
Having many troops of their own already inside Poland gave the Soviets an overwhelming advantage in getting Unity underway. The Northern Group of Forces commanded the Twentieth Guards Army – moved out of East Germany the other year – which consisted of five combat divisions plus supporting arms spread across the west and northwest of Poland. These went straight from their barracks into action. Also sent to overcome the armed counterrevolutionaries in Poland was an airborne division and a naval infantry brigade moving from the Baltic Military District, on Poland’s northeastern borders, who went into the Gdansk-Gdynia area. All of these were Soviet formations held at the ‘Ready’ level: what NATO would deem ‘Category A’. Two East German Army divisions along with three Czechoslovak divisions moved up from the south and southwest into Poland and reported to the Czechoslovak First Army. These non-Soviet formations weren’t at full readiness with complete numbers of active soldiers on duty for that would require mobilisation, but they were still all good units regardless. Further Soviet troops, reinforcements readying to form a third field army to operate under Northern Group of Forces command, were partially-mobilised through the Baltic, Belorussian and Carpathian Military Districts: these were ‘Reduced Strength I’ units, NATO-designated ‘Category B’. They actually wouldn’t end up going into Poland and be further mobilised in the months ahead to go somewhere else entirely.
Soviet, Czechoslovak and East German forces went into combat against Polish counterrevolutionaries but also the Polish Armed Forces. The stab in the back, as the Soviets saw it, was a shock though not something completely outrageous and wholly unexpected. The WSW achieved what would be deemed operational surprise rather than strategic surprise with what they did. There had been a belief that the Poles might resist and countermoves made to try and stop that yet the WSW had been quite effective in striking early and striking hard. Still, when Polish troops opened fire on those outsiders involved in Unity, they did do a lot of damage to the operation. Soviet forces were ripped into yet there was even more of an effort made to attack the East Germans as well. Militarily stupid this might have been due to the low numbers of East Germans, but it happened regardless. The price for Poland was heavy. Polish soldiers were slaughtered like Polish civilians were. Polish military actions were uncoordinated and incomplete. The Polish Army wasn’t fighting as one in a joint effort where there had been planning: units were already hit by desertions and munities and now had many refusing to follow the fake orders from the WSW. The Polish Air Force stayed on the ground and the Polish Navy stayed in port. The WSW leadership was eliminated by the actions of the Polish SB plus special KGB Spetsnaz units too. Hostage-taking occurred among the family members of commanders of Polish units engaging Unity forces where they were told those innocents would be killed unless the officers removed their forces from combat. This all combined to smash the ability of the Polish Armed Forces to fight successfully in the defence of their country.
As to Unity’s primary objective, that being to eliminate those deemed counterrevolutionaries, it was fulfilled. It took longer than planned and cost a lot more than foreseen, but the end came for Polish resistance in the face of such a massive combined arms attack. Those Polish factories were destroyed and infrastructure nationwide ruined as well. Tens of thousands, maybe a hundred thousand, lost their lives. Bullets did a lot of that, those fired on the front lines and then in massacres afterwards, but so too did the liberal use of heavy fire-power: artillery, rocket barrages and aerial bombing. All that was before the final ‘security operation’ where captured counterrevolutionaries were then sentenced for betraying the Polish People’s Republic. The Czechoslovaks and East Germans went home before that happened and a lot of Soviet troops returned to their barracks: to kill so many Poles and stuff out the last of resistance came the arrival of special KGB units brought in to do this quietly but at an industrial pace less the flame of resistance be lit any time in the near future. The fear of the WSW where there would be a rape of Poland came true.
June 1984:
The declaration back in April by Kennedy that the Mexican civil war was somewhere off-limits to Cuba and its regional allies had been treated as an idle threat by many. An airbase had been bombed and the American president had used stern words. And that had been that. Communist forces continued to advance in Mexico and there had come the collapse of the regimes in Honduras first then El Salvador next. The forces of socialism, Latin American style, were on the march. No matter what Kennedy said, the last domino, that being Mexico, would topple. From Havana, Castro was determined to see that through. The Soviets had their concerns, which they had expressed, yet they had not threatened to put a stop to what they had encouraged to start. It would continue regardless of what was said in Washington. The Ortega brothers, Guatemala’s leaders and the Grenadian leadership too joined with their Cuban sponsor in giving assistance to the regime in Mexico City in reuniting that country so it could join with them in collective self-defence against the imperialism of the norteamericanos.
Washington was distracted yet there was still attention being paid to Mexico. It couldn’t be ignored, not with all that was going on. There were still refugees arriving in the United States who fled from that civil war and the Northern Alliance was looking like it was soon to collapse as different factions broke away from the Monterrey Government. Herzog Flores came to Washington and met first with Mondale then with Kennedy. While trying to maintain the dignity of a statesman and the president of an independent nation, he pleaded for help nonetheless. Non-communist Mexico wanted weapons and American air strikes to fight communist Mexico. A blockade was requested to stop aircraft and ships bringing in arms and supplies for Tirado López to keep his offensive up. There was too intelligence passed on about the Nicaraguan military advisers who were supporting the communist advance – something which the United States had recently confirmed through its own sources – and unsupported allegations that moving across from Guatemala were Guatemalan & Nicaraguan troops disguised as volunteers. Help us, Herzog Flores plead, of we will fall! Vance and Turner (Kennedy’s Director of Central Intelligence and National Security Adviser respectively) supported much of what the Monterrey Government said when it came to Nicaragua though there was more of a focus on Cuba. It was Cuba that was behind all of this. Little Cuba was punching above its weight with Castro determined to be on a collision course with the United States. Political pressure within the country, in Washington but also among the Border States, had only increased recently. Boots on the ground, was one strong call: American soldiers fighting inside Mexico during the civil war there in a conflict that any sensible person would know would have only the bloodiest of endings. Kemp locked-up the Republican nomination running on his platform of attacking Kennedy’s ‘inaction’, especially when it came to Cuban interference in Mexico. He’s be doing that in November too, that much was certain. Early June saw the invasion of Poland and a lot of attention paid to that but there was heightened Cuban air and naval activity around the Yucatán Peninsula. Weapons were going into Mexico, maybe even Cuban military advisers too.
The June air strike was named Operation Blue Shard. This time it was focused against Cuban forces operating inside Mexico. It was meant to stop Castro and get him to back off. Kennedy was out to teach Havana that he meant business. The US Air Force took to the skies again and went up against an opponent known to be stronger than communist forces in Mexico. Cuban opposition was expected for they were the target. Those targets were located at the air facilities in Cozumel and Mérida as well as the harbours at Campeche and Cancún. Transport aircraft and freighters were bombed. Cuban fighters entered the sky, observed at a distance and then fired upon from afar. These were MiG-21s flying out of Cuba over international waters and when hit by Sparrow missiles fired from F-15s, it was deemed ‘killing baby seals’. The F-15s then got a different warning call coming from their fighter controllers aboard an E-3 while they covered the outbound fight of F-111s. New fighter contacts were in the sky climbing out of Cuba: Fulcrums. The Cubans had themselves some MiG-29s. Could they catch and pursue the departing F-111s? Not likely. Were they a threat to the F-15s who were also going home? It depended upon your view of what was a threat. The rules of engagement for Blue Shard were flexible when it came to Cuban air interference. The MiG-21s had been manoeuvring to defend Cuban air transports over the declared combat zone but the MiG-29s were still out over the Yucatán Channel. There was the chance that they were there to stop an incursion of Cuban air space but maybe they meant to shoot down American fighters and strike aircraft. A judgement call was made on Cuban intentions with their latest and best fighter aircraft: they were hostile and self-defense would be used. The F-15s sent the leading pair down to the waters below using long-range shots from which the Cubans had no defence. If they survived the shootdown, the Cuban pilots were going to have to take their chances with the sharks there.
Cuba and its allies at once denounced the air strikes. Blue Shard was an act of aggression, an illegal undertaking. Mexican sovereign air space had been invaded and war crimes committed. Civilian aircraft and ships had been attacked while delivering food & medical aid to Mexico and also evacuating orphans – war orphans! – too. There had been civilian casualties on the ground in Mexico as well, it was said. Tirado López also had a lot to say, with another one of his big speeches made to adoring crowds in Mexico City – this was all staged managed – proclaiming that this was aggression and it wouldn’t stand. The Mexican people would fight the gringos to defend the revolution! That revolution would continue until it reached Tijuana, Juárez, Monterrey and Matamoros! Onwards, the revolution would go, onwards to victory.
June 1984:
There was absolute outrage across the West when it came to the Soviet invasion of Poland. Governments denounced the entry of troops to fight civilians. Activists and campaigners joined them though using less diplomatic language. There were even protest marches in some countries. No one wanted to listen to, let alone believe, the rubbish that this wasn’t an invasion but a friendly intervention where order was being restored and there were only good intentions etc. Almost no one that was. The useful idiots and the dedicated subversives got busy. Soviet propaganda and disinformation was spread willingly and unwillingly as excuses were made and the waters mudded on the matter: there were claims of ‘fascist counterrevolution’ and ‘Imperialist plots’. When reports came out of Poland of the mass deaths when troops engaged civilians but also the deliberate massacres, there were smears made against those who spoke out against them. Generally, public opinion was with their governments that what the Soviets had done in Poland was an outrage though some of that anger was lost when the voices of those denying that this was the case were given a platform. Britain and West Germany saw the biggest influence of those useful idiots and the subversives; in the UK, the usual suspects were aplenty and they even organised a few counter-protests against the demonstrations which took place in London near to the Soviet Embassy with prominent public speakers getting their voices heard. Across in West Germany, early June saw a NATO military alert take place when Soviet & Warsaw Pact forces attacked Poland. It was a small-scale affair and just precautionary. This came at the same time as one of the biggest anti-nuclear marches in the country in recent times was taking place where nuclear power and nuclear weapons were treated as the same. These had been gaining strength for a long time and had support in the Bundestag from The Greens, who remained in a parliamentary alliance with the ruling SPD. No war came the call from the marchers when Poland was spoken of. That didn’t mean no war with regards to Soviet troops fighting in Poland. It meant no war when it came to rumours spread that NATO would attack eastwards now given an excuse with the apparent ‘lies’ being told about Poland all part of a giant conspiracy to prepare for a hostile war of aggression. It was all absolute rubbish. When it was pointed out to some of those protesting against nuclear power and nuclear weapons, and who decried any criticism of Soviet actions in Poland, that they would be the first in line to be shot should West Germany ever be invaded by those peace-loving Soviet soldiers on internationalist duty, they looked at those who said such silly things with incredulity!
Governments in Western Europe had seen an approach made to them right before the invasion of Poland where the Soviet Union made an offer on access to cheap oil as long as there was an agreement to buy lots of it. There would be a joint financing of pipelines as well to make the transfer easier in the future and further reduce the price. The bribe wasn’t seen exactly for what it was until Poland happened. It was a good deal and one which was rejected despite economic woes. Ties were being cut with the Soviets as well in terms of many non-ambassadorial diplomatic ones plus other trade agreements. The horror of what was being done to Poland was brought home to the West by news smuggled out of that country in the form of witness reports first before photographs and some video footage. Intelligence agencies were able to get more information too. Western Europe was united on this issue of wanting nothing to do with the Soviet Union anymore. Ustinov was a butcher. However, they weren’t united on other matters elsewhere that were taking place at the same time as Poland was going on. American clashes with Cuba weren’t seen in the simple good guys / bad guys fashion. If allegations of serious Cuban involvement in Mexico were true – the if was important there – then it needed to be stopped. However, the way that Kennedy was going about it upset other governments. There was near-zero warning given to NATO allies when it came to American air strikes first in April and then again in June. In all honestly, there didn’t have to be but it would have been the correct thing to do when it came to allies. This unilateralism wasn’t any way to win international support. There was too the issue with Libya where the Americans had traded shots with the Libyans who were engaged in a conflict with Egypt that Western European governments wanted no part of. Libya was in the wrong but Libya was an increasingly prominent oil supplier for some countries following the events in recent years in the Middle East with Iranian and then Iraqi oil cut off. This time there was no unilateral action but there was the position which came afterwards from Kennedy that the United States would do as it must in the Middle East with or without their support. Just as the Soviets saw the matter, Kennedy appeared to Western Europe to be acting like he was internationally to shore up domestic support at home when it was looking increasingly likely every day that he was going to lose in November unless he did something. He was doing something now and not thinking of the consequences.
Consequences were an issue at the same time across in Turkey. Kurdish terrorism continued with further Kurds pushed into Turkey by the regimes in Damascus and Baghdad. Turkey then watched as several Soviet warships made stops in Souda Bay, that former NATO naval base in Crete. The Greeks gave them a welcome and then the ships moved onwards. Those same ships had come through the Turkish Straits first but that was a side issue in how Turkey saw the matter. They had been right all along: Greece was about to enter the Soviet orbit! Following on from this, there came the assassination on Turkish soil of a senior Israeli spymaster with the involvement in that being identified as being Palestinians doing it at the behest of Libya. The victim was Rafi Eitan, a former Mossad man who ran a scientific research group… a spy front for Israeli intelligence-gathering in the west among supposedly friendly countries. Eitan was also an expert on counter-terrorism – his methods were ones which provoked criticism from some – and he was in Turkey to offer polite guidance as to how to deal with the Kurds before Libya had him killed. The Kurdish issue, the Greek issue and the Libya issue were all separate. That was the truth of the matter to outsiders. It wasn’t viewed that way by those Turkish generals who’d been telling the Americans this for several years now and getting nowhere. The hand of Moscow was behind this. No real support for the Turkish view came from Western Europe either as the Kennedy view on Turkey’s woes was mirrored – not shared – among those governments: they had less time for Turkey. The Israelis were displeased at the assassination though fences were mended fast when the gunmen were caught by the Turks and handed over: they belonged to the Abu Nidal Organisation. As to that man himself, he was discovered afterwards to be in Libya. Turkish-Israeli relations had been strengthening for some time and while at first the killing of Eitan strained them a little, the capture and handing over of his killers – they should have been detained in Turkey – improved them. They would only strengthen in the coming months as Turkey found a better friend in Israel than it could in the United States or across Western Europe.
Late June 1984:
There had been a belief with Kennedy that he and Andropov had an understanding. Their relationship had never been one of friends or allies, but of mutual understanding when it came to a wish of peace between them and no desire to see war take place. Kennedy’s critics had accused him of being wilfully blind to Soviet aggression yet he hadn’t been. He hadn’t had friendly relations with the Soviet Union, just non-aggressive ones. Détente had been continued in his opinion with a new hope for better relations brought on by his presidency. He had believed that he knew what he was doing while those critics were ideologically committed to hostility which would lead to a war if their approach was followed. Then Andropov had died to be replaced by Ustinov. The cold shoulder was given by the new general secretary who instructed his foreign minister to turn hostile. Ustinov allowed Cuban expansionism to take place – which could be stopped in an instant if the money tap was turned off – and then he sent his troops into Poland to commit the massacres there. Kennedy saw it as Ustinov purposely doing what he did to antagonise the United States. Maybe he was shoring up his new leadership by acting tough and would soon dial that back? Maybe this was how his leadership would be? Kennedy didn’t know. Others believed that they did: advisers and critics of the president. It was put to Kennedy from inside his administration that the Soviet relationship with its allies might be similar to the one which the United States had with its own allies in the form that they were growing in independence and Moscow couldn’t control them. From the outside, it was said that this was what they had said all along when it came to attempted Soviet Domination of as much of the world as possible. They were bringing the Cold War to a close, it was suggested, and would do so with a Hot War. As president, the buck stopped with him. He had taken his country down this path of engaging with the Soviet Union in the manner which had been done. The threat of nuclear war had been lessened and even conventional conflict made less likely by troop withdrawals too. Cuba’s actions with Mexico and events in Poland threw all of this into doubt as the long-term strategy for relations though. Kennedy came to the view that the two of them were related. Ustinov was allowing this to happen, possibly making it happen.
The question was what to do in response. Kennedy could listen to those in Congress and outside – prominent among the latter in the form of Zbigniew Brzezinski, the Polish-born high-profile academic all over the media – calling for the United States to stand up to the Soviets over Poland and join with Western Europe in cutting ties. On the subject of Mexico, he could listen to those in Congress and governors like Brown & White (Democrats from California & Texas where those refugees were) and do something even stronger than Blue Shard to force Cuba to stop its activities in Mexico. That ‘even stronger’ meant providing arms and air strikes, just as the Monterrey Government wanted. The opposite way was to do nothing and let everything play out. The American voters, who Kennedy answered to, were demanding something else rather than do nothing. He’d seen the polling numbers where his support was collapsing and Kemp’s was rising at an alarming rate. Doing nothing wasn’t an option. Kennedy would have to act, which he knew would increase tension. There was no other choice available to him. Following the ‘advice’ of Brzezinski and his ilk personally offended Kennedy though: they would say they were right, he was wrong but they were glad he – the President of the United States of America, the most-powerful man in the world – was only acting under their guidance.
Decisions were being made in Moscow too. By chance, just a quirk of history, the decision made by the Politburo was on June 22nd: quite the symbolic date for the Soviet Union. That decision was the one to go to war with the United States in just over twelve weeks time.
Kennedy’s increasing aggression in Latin America was at first a concern and then a major danger for the security of the Soviet Union. He had been played for the fool for a long time but no longer was willing to be. Future plans for increasing Soviet security abroad by gaining allies and neutralising threats were at threat by his actions but neither that nor his waking up were the real issue which drove Politburo decision-making. What was the issue was what was foreseen in his actions as he acted in the crazed manner which he was as he struggled to get himself re-elected. In doing so, the view in Moscow was that he would do almost anything. He was power mad. A vain and determined man who thought he knew best was what Kennedy was judged to be… among those who decided this only one (Gromyko) who’d ever met him. Kennedy was eventually going to go to war in Latin America. He’d take on Cuba, Nicaragua and anyone else who stood in his way. Once the Americans started taking casualties, which they inevitably would, they would be drawn in further. Kennedy would use a war in the region to get himself re-elected but carry on afterwards to secure for himself a legacy denied to his slain brothers before him. Every nation in Latin America which stood in his way would be taken down. Soviet forces in the region, those small ones in Cuba, would be in the way and while he wouldn’t directly attack Soviet forces, the would attempt to bully the Soviet Union by threatening them with the ‘accidental’ destruction of those. America would restore subservience across Latin America. From there, who knows where else? That could be improving the United States relationship with China – improving all the time – to eliminate Vietnam. Or through the Middle East where Kennedy had his emotional ties to Israel, an implacable enemy of Soviet regional allies. Further to his own power ambitions, Kennedy would do this to get his country out of its economic woes. That was how in the past, his country had recovered from recession and made sense in how capitalists operated.
The men who decided that this was what would be done could throw their allies in Latin America to the wolves and let Kennedy have his kill. It was the same with Vietnam and Libya & Iraq. None mattered overall when it came to the Soviet Union’s security. Yet… that security depended upon those world allies there to stop American aggression. That frontline of defences would be imperilled when Kennedy was certain to go on his aggressive spree. Evidence had come in his recent action. The future was foreseen. That would have to be stopped. There had been agreement recently among Ustinov and his comrades that they wouldn’t be bullied by Kennedy as he woke up. They were strong, he was weak. Yet there was an understanding that the United States had put itself in such a weak position and could get out of it if chose to. Relations with allies could be repaired – Britain was an example of how that had been (partially) fixed – and military preparation increased. The belief was that would soon be. At the moment though, there was an historic opportunity to act. This was an opportunity never to arise again. The risks of failure were high but the risk of allowing what was foreseen to occur was judged to be worse. One day, the Soviet Union and the United States must fight. The two superpowers must eventually fight it out and now was the time to end this once and for all with a final showdown, one on Soviet terms.
How and where to act was discussed. There had been some thinking done beforehand, authorised back in April. A bold proposal had been set out in speculative planning for a war with the United States. Eyebrows were raised, to put it mildly. To fight in such a manner as suggested on the other side of the world, where the Soviet Union had no practical military experience of, was a challenge. In the manner suggested too… including letting the forces of allies do most of the initial work as well. There would be supporting actions alongside the main effort, again conducted in a different manner for what had long been expected. As to previous expectations for warfare, that being an epic battle in Central Europe, that would be the main missing feature of the planned conflict. Eastern Europe would be defended, not a springboard for an attack west. Twelve weeks was a short time for military preparations; it was a long time for things to change diplomatically on the international scene. The question was raised among the Politburo as to what would happen if Kennedy didn’t do as foreseen and backed down. Naturally, the response came, if that could guaranteed, then the war could be called off. This was a pre-emptive war after all. That was a lie though, a clever one. To achieve the situation which was demanded to allow the start of the war to go as desired, there would have to be things done. A maskirovka would need to commence, a series of deceptions leading to distractions and confusion all to disguise intent. With those crafted events taking place, there would be no stopping what was coming no matter if Kennedy rolled over and played dead. From June 22nd, the world was destined to go to war.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Jan 3, 2019 22:46:09 GMT
Chapter Eight – The Art of the Maskirovka
Late June 1984:
A trio of high-level Soviet military officers arrived in Cuba a few days after the Politburo decision. Marshal Sokolov, Marshal Ogarkov and Colonel-General Yazov flew in with their aides and also Yazov’s advance command staff: Yazov had left his post as head of the Transcaucasian Military District to take charge of the Group of Soviet Forces in Cuba here on this island. The Defence Minister and Chief of the General Staff – Sokolov and Ogarkov respectively – came to meet with assembled notaries from the armed forces of countries across the region. There was no surprise announcement for Raúl Castro, Humberto Ortega plus those from Guatemala and Grenada had already been informed of what was happening. No attendance in Havana came from representatives of neither Mexico, Panama or any Eastern Bloc country in Europe though. There was a great deal of secrecy in the meeting. What these men were to talk about was what was due to happen in less than three months time to the north of them: Operation Red Star, the invasion of the United States.
The draft plan was presented, that being to use both Cuba and Mexico as a springboard for a joint attack into the American homeland. Comments were listened to though what Ogarkov told them – Sokolov said little – was the plan which would be followed subject to only a few changes & additions. This was how the invasion was to be done and the initial stages of the war were to take place. The political masters of the men in the room had already agreed to follow the lead set by their fraternal ally, their big brother from across in Eurasia. This meant that in the coming months, significant numbers of troops from Cuba, Nicaragua and Guatemala would enter Mexico in force to help defend the Mexican Revolution. They would step back from the frontlines but be in a position to defend Mexico against an American incursion. This would be the declared mission and the only truth which everyone apart from those at the very top would know. The scale of their presence would be hidden as best as possible, with Soviet help in that camouflage, yet they could be expected to be detected. There was a good chance that they might face American attack from the air too. Nonetheless, they were to stay in-place. The troop commitment would be increased through July and August and eventually spread across the north of Mexico. There would be no initial overt Soviet military presence in Mexico; that would come into Cuba and Grenada instead. However, in September there would be the very limited entry of selective Soviet forces into Mexico. At the moment of attack, combined arms operations would be launched using Mexico as a springboard for Cuban and Central American forces direct over the border into the United States while Soviet forces would follow them when moving from Cuba into the American homeland through secured access points. It was explained that the Soviet build-up in Cuba was needed to be done there to avoid a different kind of reaction than would come should that be made in Mexico instead. Latin American forces spotted by the Americans in Mexico would mean a defence; Soviet forces would mean an attack. Why spoil the surprise?
Objectives were set out for the attack and then the first few months of the conflict before winter weather set in. The war wasn’t expected to be won before the New Year. If it did, that would welcome yet it wasn’t expected. The conflict was actually anticipated to last up to nine months with an initial fight and then extended combat next year. A far heavier Soviet military commitment would be made for that secondary period. The fighting inside the United States border regions at first would then see a move forward. Red Star called for an operation to strike deep and break up resistance using geographic features: the Rocky Mountains were key to that as they split the western half of the United States in two. Parts of them, especially cross-country access points through the mountains, would be taken to allow for Red Star to work. American resistance would be dealt with piecemeal in the first stage. The second stage would see the defining battles take place east of those mountains, across on the Great Plains, early next year and into the summer months. There and then complete victory would be won. Defeat on the battlefield, complete and utter defeat, would be the end of American organised resistance. As to other resistance, that was expected from the first day with guerrilla actions to be readied for. These would be dealt with, using as much force as possible. Further plans for how to do this would come soon… Ogarkov didn’t say how much of that was going to be guesswork.
The date for X Day was revealed, though that was subject to change. Sokolov interjected that should it, it wouldn’t be by much. That was near firm. He let Ogarkov carry on. Also revealed was the scale of military support in terms of arms and supplies to be sent to the Soviet Union’s allies to help defend against American pre-war offensive action and to assist in the war effort when it came. A headquarters for Red Star would be led by a Cuban military officer to be determined by Fidel’s brother with Yazov as his principle deputy. There would be joint command in many instances. Mention was made too that a maskirovka was already underway to force the Americans to look everywhere and anywhere else as much as possible. When they did see troops in Mexico and in Cuba (which they would), they would be presented as what they wanted to see: hostile defenders, not offensive forces massing for attack. Ogarkov spoke of the high-tech military measures to be employed in concealment then in attack as well. He talked too of the discipline to be employed pre-invasion as Soviet GRU military officers made their presence felt (in other uniforms) to help in that concealment of intent plus once the invasion started to get invading troops to behave and do their duty in fighting.
There was so much which he and Sokolov didn’t discuss with those whom they met with in Havana. The employment of ‘special weapons’ – by Soviet forces only – wasn’t brought up, nor that after this meeting, Sokolov would be off to Panama. There was no discussion with these men of military action to be taken elsewhere in the world, much of that to secure the supply lines running from Eurasia across to Latin America. Geo-political goals of the Soviet Union beyond stopping an expected American attack against them weren’t revealed either. Those which concerned how the plans were for Western Europe to quickly fall under Soviet economic control and the intention to secure with intimidation food supplies from Africa & South America at favourable rates once the war started so Ogarkov’s country could feed itself after everything at home pointed to a famine coming due to the Ukraine poisoning weren’t raised. Those were state secrets, news which was contained among those who needed to know… no one outside of Moscow that was. The political masters of the Latin American military-men had already been told of the riches their countries were promised for supporting the war when they would take what they wanted not just from conquered areas of the United States but from elsewhere so there was no need to bring that up at this meeting either. Furthermore, yet something else not talked about were future plans beyond the medium term to bring the Cold War to a final close in American defeat in the manner foreseen. Ogarkov hadn’t been at that Politburo meeting on June 22nd; Sokolov had and he – a candidate, non-voting member of that body – had witnessed how after deciding to go to war, it was only then that his country’s leaders discussed in detail their justification to each other for doing that. Sokolov was a political soldier though still a soldier foremost. Yet, even he knew that that shouldn’t have been the way things like that were done. The Politburo was full of a quest for power, prestige and domination: just what they had accused Kennedy of having. Who would have thought it?
Early July 1984:
Along the western section of the Korean DMZ, North Korean heavy artillery opened fire for a five minute period. These were the big guns set back from the demilitarised zone which split the Korean Peninsula in half. Howitzers with shell calibres of six and eight inches and even bigger mortar rounds were fired. High-explosive shells flew above the no-man’s land and crashed into South Korea breaking the early morning silence in a horrendous display of firepower. There was a lot of destruction but not too many deaths. Unpopulated areas were hit and it was the positions of South Korean soldiers struck rather than towns and cities. The targeting was off, sometimes by a lot, in many places. The guns hadn’t been used in a long time and the crews not as well-practiced as they should have been. South Korean infantry units, like their American counterparts who were avoided by the shelling, were dug-in well and rode-out the attack with only the unfortunate hit. A second barrage, one lasting a shorter period of three minutes, occurred twenty minutes later. Different guns were used, targeting different South Korean forces. There was no third North Korean artillery barrage that morning. There were other instances of combat though when South Korean artillery fired back in smaller return barrages after authorisation from on high and then a US Army patrol of dismounted infantry came under fire from North Korean commandos deep inside South Korean territory. The ambush was deadly for both sides with the attackers having struck just a moment too early and the Americans being more prepared than they would have been if there hadn’t been the immense shelling. There were deaths on either side and also one American soldier was afterwards reported missing; when a tunnel entrance was found and entered, there were signs he had been dragged back down there and northwards. Pursuit by the US Army, joined by their South Korean comrades, was cut short when demolition charges destroyed sections of the tunnel leaking to a hasty retreat and an inability to follow the North Koreans.
The morning’s events hadn’t come completely out of the blue. The preceding night, there had been a shooting incident at the Joint Security Area (JSA). This was located near Panmunjom – the Truce Village – and where the only contact between the two Koreas took place at infrequent occurrences. The JSA was an armed camp when the intention was that it was for peaceful negotiations to do with the armistice signed three decades ago which had left the two Koreas still at war with one another. A situation had been created by the North Koreans with a stage-managed incident where they had ‘responded to provocation’ using extreme force. Like along the DMZ, lives had been lost here too. There had also been a fire started across in the part of the JSA controlled by the South Koreans where the building known as Freedom House went up in flames. There had been violent incidents in the JSA before, the incident eight years beforehand where American soldiers were hacked to death with axes being the most alarming, but nothing like this. The shooting had eventually stopped and accusation had meet counter-accusation over blame. North Korea’s response to that apparent aggression came the following morning with that artillery barrage. In the JSA, following the firing of those guns and then the armed clash in the DMZ where an American soldier was kidnapped like he was – taken prisoner while illegally crossing into North Korea was what would later be said –, despite all of the shooting and the deliberate arson, it would be there where talks would commence to try and free him in the following days and weeks. Those talks would be forestalled though with each side accusing the other of wrecking them and conducting negotiations in bad faith. One side would be doing that and the other wouldn’t be. The former was preparing for the coming liberation of the latter in the next couple of months. Liberation wouldn’t be what that would be deemed by those on the receiving end of it for it would be done with full-scale war, re-education camps and mass graves full of the bodies of ‘people’s traitors’. Away from the JSA and the wider DMZ, other took notice of these twin events and more which would soon follow. The Soviet-led maskirovka included the Korean Peninsula among many other places. Look here, look there, look anywhere but where you should be.
Early July 1984:
American air strikes recommenced over Mexico. Operation Avid Castle was the codename and this was far bigger in-scale than what was done before with the Blue Spike & Blue Shard limited attacks. The military objectives, plus the political reasoning, was very different from beforehand though and far more controversial too. There had been many loud demands for military action to take place in Mexico; there were many loud demands once it began that it should cease. Kennedy’s speech to the nation on Independence Day – two years since the failed assassination attempt on him in Philadelphia – told the country that they were necessary but there had been a lot of mess in explaining them from the Kennedy Administration with officials and spokesmen fumbling when confronted by questions over what was the ultimate political objective. Warnings were given that this wasn’t going to be universally popular and would certainly be messy.
The first air attacks took place across Sonora. Communist forces freed up from fighting in Sinaloa and using the city of Hermosillo as a springboard, attacked weakly-held Northern Alliance territory between there and the US-Mexican border. They were closing-in on controlling areas a-joining Arizona. Refugees fled ahead of them, among them too forward attacking units using them for cover where possible. US Air Force reconnaissance efforts in such a scenario were difficult but not impossible when it came to discerning where the main body of the attacking army was located away from the refugee columns being used by scouting units getting forward. Outside the town of Santa Ana – a crossroads two thirds of the way between Hermosillo and the Arizonan border town of Nogales – the opening Avid Castle attack took place. F-16s conducted bomb runs against armoured vehicles supporting communist forces moving to take the town late on July 4th. Good hits were achieved and armour knocked out with the attack on the town delayed. Opposition in the air was non-existent and from the ground there came ineffective fire from anti-aircraft guns. It all looked good from the perspective of the Americans although there were some unidentified glimmers of electronic signals coming from the ground in the form of what might or might not have been an air defence acquisition radar. The Mexicans – neither the communists nor the Northern Alliance – had nothing like what might have been detected. Night-time reconnaissance spotted nothing and neither did an F-4G sent into the area on a Wild Weasel mission to try and bluff out any sign of a mobile air defence radar. Proper warning was given to the F-16s when they returned the next day and there were a pair of F-4Gs present just in case. Everything was done as it was meant to be. During the egress of a flight of F-16s which had just completed a strike mission, the urgent warning call of ‘Gecko’ came. A pair of Romb missiles – codenamed SA-8 Gecko in NATO military parlance – were in the air. One blew the starboard wing off a F-16 and sent it spinning towards the ground. The pilot ejected successfully into contested territory with the wreckage of his jet landing nearby.
The American reaction was fast. The Wild Weasels returned, ready to use missiles and bombs to blast apart the offending missile-launcher if it could be found. They were looking for a six-wheeled vehicle which wasn’t that easy to disguise and would hunt visually and using electronic signals. A distant RC-135, far back inside US air space, was doing the same as it scanned for radar and radio contacts. The Gecko wouldn’t be found no matter how hard the looking was done: it was hidden too good. As to the pilot and his plane, a CSAR mission with helicopters lifted him out of danger while another F-16 came in and bombed the smashed-up downed US Air Force strike-fighter to deny any usefulness to anyone else in what could be discovered from it. The hunt continued throughout the day for that missile-launcher with caution taken elsewhere in a second strike against Mexican communist ground forces, this one against their artillery. The Americans were fighting here the sort of war which they were trained for against a near-equal foe on the modern battlefield with air strikes hitting armour and artillery while searching for air defence assets. This was what they were good at, damn good at in fact. However, the Mexican communists were good at infantry fighting and that was what they did when they stormed Santa Ana and took it in a fierce battle from its trapped defenders who stood and fought to the end. Avid Castle had restrictions imposed from the very top, that being the White House. There was to be no bombing of targets such as the infantry battle in a populated area where there were civilians – many were caught in that town with most from far away and too late to reach the border – present. It had been argued against, passionately, but stood. That bombing restriction helped see Santa Ana fall. What Northern Alliance fighters got away repositioned themselves covering the road going northwest, that one heading towards distant Baja California. The road going north, towards Nogales, was open and to be followed. Mexican communist infantry were soon enough out in the open and subject to air attacks.
As to that missile-launcher, it was spotted and struck with a Standard-ARM missile on July 8th. Its operators were spoofed during a mock attack against communist troops moving north from Santa Anna and the disguised vehicle identified for what it was. For good measure, to complement the damage done by that anti-radar missile, the F-4s then dropped a good few bombs as a Wild Weasel mission became an Iron Hand one. The Gecko wasn’t part of the Mexican communist army’s arsenal. It was a Nicaraguan-operated vehicle with the crews of that plus support vehicles (some trucks) being so-called volunteers who came to Mexico with their air defence weapons. They had been in Mexico before the decision was made that there would be war to come in September with this detachment and others spread across Mexico and very far away from the fighting in rear areas on defensive missions. Then there had come the order to go north and operate to give air defence for the Mexicans. That had been a suicide missions as far as the crew had been concerned but they had no choice. They went to Santa Anna to their doom. Others would follow them and not meet such a quick fatal fate.
This Nicaraguan military presence – volunteers, really? – so near to United States was confirmed through eventual radio signals after the launch vehicle’s destruction during unguarded comments made over the airwaves by the support crew. Radio discipline wasn’t followed when it should have been. What had been foreseen, active foreign interference on the ground now in Mexico from the Latin American nations, had been proved correct. Blowing up that offending missile-launcher wasn’t enough. There was a Nicaraguan ship approaching the port of Guaymas, Hermosillo’s access to the Gulf of California. It was (rightly) suspected to be carrying more Nicaraguan weapons either for the use of the Mexicans or other Nicaraguan volunteers. Kennedy ordered it attacked from the air – Avid Castle remained a US Air Force only affair for now: simplification rather than multi-service issues – and it duly was when F-111s set it alight from stern-to-bow with bomb runs made. As to bombing Guaymas, as urged by Bentsen and the Joint Chiefs, that was refused though. There were other ships there with flags and ports of registration from unthreatening but dubious areas of the world which attention was on yet were left unmolested. Down in Managua, the ambassador was ordered to personally convey a stern warning in person to the Nicaraguan government that the United States would respond to Nicaraguan attacks against American forces operating inside Mexico with ‘overwhelming force’. He met with a lower-ranking official rather than anyone senior due to refusals to see him by anyone else. The warning was brushed aside with promises of self-defence. Nicaragua would defend the Mexican Revolution whatever the cost! On the return to the embassy, his official vehicle was rerouted at the last minute by Nicaraguan police at gunpoint – a gross violation of diplomatic protocol – and forced to take a hazardous detour around the edge of a state-organised anti-American protest. The atmosphere in Managua for the United States’ official representative, plus his staff too, was growing very unfriendly.
Early July 1984:
The assassination of Petra Kelly rocked West Germany with shock and outrage felt nationwide. Her killing, the brutal manner of it too, saw one of the country’s most-outspoken and therefore well-known politicians lost to the nation. She was the face of The Greens to many and while not liked by everyone in life, the nation mourned her in death. Who would do such a thing, to a woman as well? Kelly was murdered in Bonn and the next day in that small government city, there came the allegations that her murderer was an American. Local media reported that a United States diplomatic official, who it was claimed was a CIA spy too, had been due to meet with her (for reasons unspecified) and was afterwards seen leaving the building where she was later found dead. His name and the claim that he worked for the CIA were revealed; a picture of him was made public too. There was ‘proof’ that the media had, irrefutable evidence. They ‘why’ was missing but everything else was there. The police and West German government spokesmen refused to comment; no comment came from the US Embassy either. That named man – not a suspect in the eyes of the West German police – left the country as soon as possible. He was being framed and his superiors ordered him pulled out of the country because as a CIA officer, the revealing of his identity put him and the intelligence agency in danger. That was sensible as far as the CIA saw it; others disagreed. It looked like he had run rather than face questions and that the CIA had something to hide. Government-to-government relations weren’t put under strain from this with official contacts smoothing things over though there was a strong public reaction. Elements of the West German media wouldn’t let the story go. Further questions were asked as to why had Kelly been in contact with the CIA (she hadn’t) and what had been the motivation for the CIA to kill her (they hadn’t)? Her real killer, a West German petty criminal, wouldn’t be telling anyone what he did and who told him to do it. The Stasi – acting on Moscow’s orders – cut his throat and dropped his corpse in the Rhine to be found later and not connected with such an assassination.
Kelly was regarded as the de facto spokesperson of The Greens by many West Germans. The party that formed the governing coalition with the SPD was often in chaos with refusals by some to vote along party lines in the Bundestag – making that ‘fun’ for the SPD and Chancellor Vogel – and outrageous statements made in public by others. Alongside Kelly, two more politicians with the party were known to the public as they were often in the news plus had interesting personal histories. Joschka Fischer, the former revolutionary street fighter with alleged ties to domestic terrorists, was one and the Gert Bastian, a retired general, was the other. Fischer was a pragmatist politician and while wild at times, worked often with the SPD as he tried to get things done in the country which would follow the intent of the policies of The Greens if not to the exact manifesto wording. Bastian was one of several Generals for Peace from across West Germany and the Low Countries. They were former senior military officers which spoke out regularly as a group against nuclear weapons based in Germany – both sides of the Iron Curtain – and demanded their removal… the funding of the Generals for Peace had been questioned many times with unproved allegations that that came from across the Iron Curtain. Bastian was also involved in a personal relationship with Kelly; he was separated from his wife and older than her with it being said by some that he was violent & controlling towards her with she resisted strongly. Kelly was known for her strong environmental views – more so than being against nuclear weapons – and also outright opposition to crushing of political dissent and refusals of nations in the Eastern Bloc to follow internationally-agreed behaviour on human rights. She was no friend of East Germany despite efforts by the regime there to make use of The Greens for their own ends and had embarrassed East Germany in public by partaking in a publicised demonstration inside East Berlin about nuclear weapons in their country and also how political prisoners were held in that other Germany. Stasi operations to have The Greens shape West German public opinion & debate for their own ends had been frustrated by Kelly: she refused time and time again to make excuses for their behaviour when others would. She also had recently had questions about East German interference within the party which she was committed to. Others had asked similar things, but none with the prestige and public recognition that Kelly had. She was identified as problem for East German and Soviet maskirovka efforts in West Germany in the lead-up to the war: the plan called for the country to stay neutral and be at the head of many Western European countries doing the same. With her alive, that was deemed to be at risk. Blaming her death on the Americans, and having West Germans themselves do the accusing once they were given the right breadcrumbs, went according to plan. Bastian and Fischer both believed that there was a link to the CIA with her death: many other West Germans would too when new ‘revelations’ later came.
Kelly’s death came when NATO foreign ministers were meeting in Stuttgart: that timing was deliberate on the part of those who had her killed. There was to be a protest march there in that West German city against NATO’s continued raised military alert following that Warsaw Pact invasion of Poland with rumours present that REFORGER & mobilisation might be coming and that also further nuclear weapons were being brought into the country. Neither of those allegations were true and none had come from outside either for once again, the West German peace and anti-nuclear movement – quite the chaotic yet strong force – did a lot of Moscow’s work for them. Bastian wasn’t invited to the meeting; he hosted an ‘alternative summit’ in the city at the same time and ignored remarks that maybe he should have been a little more upset about his partner’s death at this time. Instead, Bastian denounced NATO nuclear militarism in West Germany. Other members of The Greens wanted to talk about Kelly’s murder and the stories of Soviet massacres in Poland but Bastian kept the focus on the allegations of what the politicians were supposedly discussing as they prepared for war. That must be stopped! The West German people needed to stop the coming war!
One thing which NATO ministers certainly weren’t talking about in Stuttgart was doing anything aggressive with regards to what had happened in Poland. No new nuclear weapons were arriving in West Germany and there were no incoming troops. Actually, troops were still leaving the country as the United States continued to remove selected forces which it been planning to for some time and that schedule wasn’t cancelled or even delayed. This caused contention in Stuttgart. The Americans were in the process of removing what they had already said they were – the complete 3rd Armored Division and the forward brigade of the 1st Infantry Division to join what had already left – in the face of Soviet and Warsaw Pact aggression against Poland. There was a further American withdrawal of some military units from Spain, agreed under Ford following Spain’s transition to democracy, and while Spain wasn’t in NATO, this all still mattered. This attitude of the United States where such a process couldn’t be delayed infuriated others. Andropov was dead, Ustinov was invading other countries and there could easily be a delay made. That was put to Mondale but he had instructions from Kennedy on this matter that it was to continue as planned. Some troops had already gone to Britain and these being withdrawn now were going home to the US mainland. There remained strong defensive forces still in West Germany and enough to counter the reduced Soviet military presence in East Germany. That was the position of his country. The feeling from some others – not all though – was that in this time of danger, the Americans were abandoning them. Opinions were voiced by a few that the ‘real’ reason that Kennedy was continuing with his troop withdrawals despite Soviet behaviour was that he wanted to have troops available to invade Mexico and/or Cuba. That might or might not have been true but then came the discussions away from the official summit talks when it came to a NATO-wide position on the worsening situation in Latin America. If the United States went to war with Nicaragua, they would probably go to war with Cuba… and then end up fighting the Soviets too if not directly then indirectly. Should a Soviet action take place in response, a likely reaction, it would probably be in Western Europe. Mondale wouldn’t be drawn on that issue. He asked for diplomatic support from allies over his government’s position on Mexico but didn’t apologise for the previous instances of the United States acting there without consulting allies first. Nor could he promise that wouldn’t happen again. Was the United States purposely trying to antagonise its allies at this time of great strain and looming danger? Because that was how it was looking. Furthermore, was Kennedy soon to drag them all into a war, one which they didn’t want to be part of? As before, away from the official talks, some NATO foreign ministers – under government instructions – were holding preliminary and speculative talks on what to do if that happened. These were meant to be secret, for if they were revealed, and if spun right, the fall-out could be quite dramatic diplomatically.
Mid July 1984:
Colonel Gadhafi had spent the past couple on months lashing out against other countries. None of what he had done had brought him nor Libya any good. He would contest that assertion. To him, Libya was leading the Arab world where others couldn’t and wouldn’t. That had seen him first arrange for the assassination of the Egyptian president for signing a peace agreement – not a treaty – with Israel and then getting into a war with Egypt. It had been the Americans who he had ordered his aircraft to try to attack next and that had seen those jets shot out of the sky. This had been followed up by overseeing the slaying of an Israeli spymaster in Turkey – aggravating two more countries in that endeavour – for no real gain… apart from the appearance over Tripoli soon enough of Israeli strike aircraft. F-15s flew a long strike mission supported by Boeing-707 tankers and hit regime targets in the Libyan capital. Bombs fell among several Gadhafi compounds in the middle of the night and also a facility in the desert south of the city where Libya was hosting Palestinian terrorists in a training camp. Libyan air defences, smashed up already by the Egyptians, were hit with electronic jamming and were wholly ineffective when taken completely by surprise.
The intent on the part of Israel hadn’t been to kill Gadhafi. The cabinet in Tel Aviv which had authorised the strike wouldn’t have shed a tear if they had of but their aim was to punish him and sent him the message that his actions wouldn’t go without response. Israeli bombs came mighty close to killing Gadhafi regardless of intent. He was lucky to escape with his life when one of his palaces was blown partially apart. Gadhafi would later declare that one member of his family – an adopted little girl – had been killed by Israel. Whether she had been, whether she had even existed, that was debatable. Gadhafi claimed too that four Israeli jets had been downed and there was footage which apparently showed the wreckage of these. To the experienced observer, those certainty didn’t look like the remains of F-15s but maybe downed Libyan MiGs that Egyptian MiGs had eliminated the other month. Gadhafi raged on the airwaves as he spoke to his people and the listening world. Israel would be punished. America and Egypt had helped the Zionists and they would be punished too. The Libyan people would have their vengeance. When that punishment and vengeance would occur, nobody knew. The frontier with Egypt, with opposing armies lined up facing each other, remained silent. The unofficial ceasefire of artillery, air strikes and commando attacks carried on. Both sides were rearming with the Egyptians having gone to the Americans and the Libyans to the Soviets. Gadhafi would soon be welcoming a Soviet delegation and they would have something surprising to say to him when he asked for arms and support.
General Noriega had already had that conversation with the Soviets. Panama remained outside the Havana-led Latin American alliance of overt hostility towards the United States as an agreement had been struck exclusively with the Soviet Union for the participation of Panama in the war, a conflict due to begin in two months. Preparation for that was underway as the Panamanian Army – no longer the National Guard since Noriega had assumed power – slowly expanded in side and capability. In doing so, this was observed by the Americans as they watched how outside the Canal Zone, Noriega had his army show off. The Canal Zone was garrisoned by US Army and US Air Force units and the exercises were hard to miss. They watched as the Panamanians practised for what would only be one mission: taking the Canal Zone in a full-scale assault. There was no doubt of that desire on the part of the Panamanians in uniform to do this but whether they would, whether the political will was there, was another matter entirely. Such an action would bring war with the United States. A defence of the Canal Zone would be made with either victory or defeat coming in that: either way, everyone in Panama knew that in the end, Panama would eventually lose a conflict with the United States should it take that step. Well… everyone was supposed to know that.
Outside of the Canal Zone, the strip of territory which cut across the middle of Panama, there were protests against the American presence. These were supposed to be spontaneous demonstrations of patriotic Panamanians. That was entirely false. This was the work of the ruling National Democratic Party (quite the misnomer) who had their supporters out, joined by ordinary civilians coerced into joining in. The protests remained non-violent but they were big. At times, the crowds would surge forward and head towards the Canal Zone driven by behaviour of some inside the demonstrations though they didn’t cross into the Canal Zone. Panama was technically an ally, a friend of the United States. Noriega was meant to be an asset of the CIA. The assessment of the CIA when it came to this recent behaviour, one presented to Kennedy, was that the military exercises and state-organised demonstrations were the newest attempts at Noriega’s ‘diplomacy’ when it came to seeing the Canal Zone returned to Panama. Treaty negotiations were stalled and this was what Noriega now believed would work. How very wrong that assessment was.
Mid July 1984:
In San Francisco, the Democrats had their party convention ahead of November’s election. The primaries and caucuses had been won by Kennedy and he came to California to take the nomination when it was granted to him. That was a formality really but still a big deal. State delegates and national superdelegates came together to vote but also hear speeches and meet with each other. Everyone waited for what the president would have to say in his big speech where he would accept the nomination to fight for re-election against what would certainly be Jack Kemp from the Republicans. There was a small-scale insurrection in San Francisco where certain Democrats moved to have others vote for someone else rather than Kennedy even if that was just a protest vote but the party establishment cracked down on that to make sure it got nowhere. The president’s polling numbers weren’t looking good in a match-up against Kemp. Now was not the time for division when there was the face of unity to be presented. Plenty of attendees had issues with Kennedy’s presidency, including those who browbeat others into not taking part in a contested convention, but they would rather stick with what they had and who the voters had chosen in the recent contests and also four years ago.
Once the vote tallies were in, Kennedy and Glenn were both re-nominated by their party. Negligible opposition came in that with a few protest votes cast – often without the consent of the ‘candidate’ themselves – but nothing serious at all. Once that was done, then Kennedy spoke to those gathered before him and watching on television. He thanked those who had voted for him at the convention and across the country first with the president then turned to state all that he had achieved during his time in the White House. It was quite the boastful affair. Kennedy claimed credit for all that was going good – in his opinion – across the nation though didn’t speak of things that were regarded as going wrong. Civil rights and equal rights were discussed by him with pride along with the progress made towards (not achieved yet) universal free healthcare while he only briefly mentioned how he was working towards overseeing peace and stability abroad in America’s relations with others. However, towards the end of the speech, he did finally turn to the issue of Mexico. Many at the convention thought that he wouldn’t bring it up but they had been mistaken. Kennedy spoke of how the United States was defending democracy in Mexico by undertaking what he called regrettable military action. He talked too of foreign interference from other countries in the Mexican civil war. Then he made a declaration. There were no Soviet troops in Mexico, he said, and there never would be under a Kennedy Administration.
The next morning, on July 20th, Nogales fell to the Mexican communists. This was the Mexican town of Nogales, not the American Nogales on the other side of the border. There was the raising of a flag from one of the highest buildings in Nogales and that was the red flag adopted by the regime of Tirado López. Avid Castle air strikes had slowed down the advance through Sonora but not stopped it. The communists reached the US-Mexican border and took control of the port of entry leading into Arizona beyond.
Ahead of them, and watched by television news crews in the American Nogales, came thousands of Mexican civilians and soldiers from Mexican Nogales. Northern Alliance troops fled into the United States alongside refugees from all across Mexico who had made it as far as the border but had been stopped there by those soldiers on the orders of Monterrey and pushed into a refugee camp (not a pleasant place) just across from Arizona. They had been desperate to leave and more had constantly joined them. When communist troops arrived, despite further US air attacks made from on-high, the soldiers previously stopping them entering the United States went with them that way. The rush of people overwhelmed US Border Patrol and Arizona National Guard personnel who would only have been able to stop the crowd by firing their weapons. They didn’t. They had orders not to shoot civilians and what soldiers there were (a couple of hundred) were mixed in with the civilians and not exactly invaders. Over the border came about six thousand Mexicans who fled in terror. They ran from stories which they had heard about the communist soldiers: some of those true and others not. Into Mexican Nogales came a select team of soldiers given that task of raising a specially-made flag. There was a media team sent from Mexico City who would broadcast images similar to but different as well from what the American media would show about that lone flag which was unfurled and then hung in the wind. The images of that would be the defining image for many Americans of the Mexican civil war. Air strikes weren’t working, the Monterrey Government was going the way of Saigon in 1975 and there were communists on the southern border of America.
Mid July 1984:
What were the North Koreans up to? The military command staffs of the South Koreans and United States Forces Korea couldn’t work out what was the aim of Kim Il-sung’s behaviour. It didn’t make sense. The staged attack at the Joint Security Area and then the border shelling, to be followed by that commando action from a tunnel, had given North Korea nothing. The then intentional delays in setting up talks to recover the prisoner taken by the North Korea were pointless. That too didn’t make sense. Finally, neither did the series of further overt military activity which began again in the middle of July. There was shelling which took place once again followed by the entry across the DMZ from tunnels of more commando groups. Unlike before, South Korean and US forces were on full alert and ready to hit back. Shelling was met with counter-shelling. There were defending troops out who engaged with commandos appearing from out of the ground who when detected failed to make any successful raids anywhere. Away from the DMZ itself, in coastal waters both sides of the Korean Peninsula, more commandos tried to enter South Korea from mini-subs off-shore. The invaders were detected soon enough and cut down either on their way in, going out or within those mini-subs. Some of the North Korean artillery, those big guns set back across the border, had been blasted apart as well by well-directed counter-fire against them and therefore, along with the loses of so many of their commandos, what had the North Koreans achieved? What was the point of what they were doing? The military alert level across South Korea was at an all time high leading to clashes every time the North Koreans showed up with men and shells. If this was a political move to gain some sort of diplomatic concession over something, then that surely wasn’t going to work due to the aggressive nature of everything and the deaths incurred. As he often did, Kim left those looking north trying to discover the hidden meanings of his intentions left clueless as to them.
Combined Forces Command was the senior headquarters in South Korea. Headed by a US Army general officer, it led all American and South Korean forces in-country. The South Koreans were under American command, as they always had been, despite the large disparity in numbers. In response to the ‘enemy activity’ (the North Koreans were regarded as such), that headquarters was a hive of activity. Defensive operations were supervised from there along with intelligence-gathering efforts too. The commander had his staff put together an official summary from Combined Forces Command rather than all of the unofficial comments being made to political leaders and military officials in both countries. That summary stated that a North Korean conventional military attack wasn’t something foreseen at this time. There was no build-up spotted across the DMZ indicating that, yet of more importance was the manner in which the North Koreans had been acting meant that any surprise they might hope to have in any attack was long gone. It had always been agreed that only with a bolt from the blue strike would the North Koreans have any chance of getting far in an invasion before a massive US-led counterattack drove such an invasion back. There was no way in which that could be achieved at this time. No request was made for any reinforcing US troops from back home and the South Koreans were only going to partially mobilise some of their massed reserves, mainly in rear areas to free up forward forces. As to whether the North Koreans would continue their limited but lethal attacks southwards, Combined Forces Command wasn’t sure. It would be costing them dear maintaining such a scale of activity. Should they go on though, and especially increase in strength, Command Forces Command was willing to see more South Koreans mobilised and also the reinforcement coming of American forces. That was only if the North Koreans did something more than they already were doing. It would make no sense for them to do so and the thinking was that soon enough, Kim would order them to cease for they were pointless and he had to know that.
Kim knew exactly what he was doing. He was preparing for war. He would continue to order artillery attacks and commando actions. That was going alongside the slow, painful slow, movement into position of his army. Right under the noses of the reconnaissance efforts directed northwards, the North Korean Army was deploying ready to strike. The build-up was something that was going to take time yet when complete he would have his troops in-place to liberate the southern half of the peninsula. That attack would take place when there were further American troops in South Korea supporting mobilised reserves from the bandits on the other side of the DMZ. His activities were what Moscow wanted in order to draw American troops out of their own country ahead of a war in their homeland. The opposition for his army would therefore be stronger when the attack would come but there would be no further reinforcements for them once the war got underway. He had been apprehensive of that plan when it was put to him and had wanted to follow his instinct and launch a surprise attack to liberate the south when the war started in North America, but the Soviets wanted to do things this way. In exchange, full support would be given for the war in the Korean Peninsula. Kim told Moscow he didn’t need Soviet troops though air and naval support from his country’s fraternal allies would be useful. That was promised. He just had to draw American attention towards the DMZ so they would bring their troops. That would occur soon enough as the scale of attacks southwards was ordered to be stepped up.
Late July 1984:
Operation Avid Castle started causing American casualties. Not many, very few in fact, but more than none. The air intervention wasn’t designed to see that occur as far as the White House was concerned. The Pentagon had told the president that lives would be lost because that was inevitable. When that happened, there was anger from the White House that deaths had occurred among American servicemen. That was really quite unfair. Combat missions were being flown and losses from those had to be expected; to be angry at that was plain stupid. The losses came during when US Air Force aircraft were engaged in and returning from their air strikes over Mexico. First, there was an F-15 returning to New Mexico after taking part in fighter escort (in the face of zero enemy air activity) which saw an in-flight emergency take place with the sudden and loss of power to the fighter’s engines. The pilot thought he had everything under control when making an emergency landing but didn’t. He crashed his F-15 and lost his life. Next was a further firing of surface-to-air missiles – from Guatemalan ‘volunteers’ with the Mexican communists – which managed to hit an F-4 above Tamaulipas and bring it down. The pilot and weapons officer both ejected and landed near to the fighting around Soto la Marina. American aircraft went hunting for that missile-launcher which had taken down the F-4 but the focus for others was on getting the aircrew out. A rescue mission was undertaken with a HC-130 coordinating that and incoming HH-3 helicopters laden with a CSAR team. There were signals coming from the weapons officer’s beacon but not that of the pilot. One of the Jolly Green Giants came under small arms fire when pulling out the F-4 back-seater it located but emerged with him alive and no casualties aboard. In trying to find the downed pilot, the other helicopter came under far serious attack. Soto la Marina was where communist and Northern Alliance forces were fighting out as the former were on the attack heading up the coastal plain and towards the Texas border, outflanking the strong defensive position of the latter away inland at Ciudad Victoria. There were troops from both sides all over the wide area and those who engaged the second HH3 first were actually Northern Alliance soldiers. This was an accident: they thought it was a communist helicopter donated by another country. What was needed, Kennedy had been told, were liaison officers on the ground in Mexico. He’d refused that and everything was being run from back in the United States apart from a tiny commitment of military personnel attached to the embassy in Monterrey and who were not allowed to leave that city. This political decision cost the lives of seven men aboard the Jolly Green Giant when a M-72 LAW rocket (designed to knock out armoured vehicles) hit it when it was hovering low over the ground. Others aboard, plus that pilot, were rescued afterwards by another helicopter. Apologies were made and explanations given. It was an accident, nothing deliberate. People were still dead though, killed by their allies.
There was fighting elsewhere too away from in that part of Tamaulipas. The communists were pushing on Saltillo with the aim of taking that city to afterwards move down out of the mountains and on to Monterrey afterwards. Northern Alliance troops were falling back despite US air strikes assisting them. They couldn’t hold back the advance and either made tactical withdrawals closer and closer to the city or deserted. Desertions in number hadn’t happened in a while but they did now near to Saltillo. In came American aircraft dropping bombs and they did make a difference in part. However, this didn’t stop, just slow down, the communist attack. Saltillo was approached and the sound of gunfire outside of it could be heard by those inside. Many residents had already left but now more did and they headed towards Monterrey. Defending soldiers watched them go and that helped influence those who decided to run. Saltillo would still be in Northern Alliance hands by the end of the month yet communist troops were right on its edges and had pushed men around the city on the northern side, eventually cutting the road to Monterrey. They lacked the strength to push on… for now anyway.
Elsewhere, those guerrillas previously inserted into the city of Chihuahua commenced armed attacks when fighting came close. They killed many innocents and few Northern Alliance soldiers with their only achievement being to take lives before their own were taken. Not wearing uniform when they conducted their attacks, made them terrorists rather than soldiers. Such was the position of the local military commander inside the city. He had the survivors of the several armed groups (who’d been operating in a cell structure ahead of their attacks) shot and in public too. This was something witnessed by many in Chihuahua and included some Americans at the airport. There were CIA officers along with military personnel who were present not to fight but to oversee the delivery of weapons to the Monterrey Government. Mexico’s recognised regime was being granted aid in the form of ammunition for small arms as well as rifles & machine guns too. They wanted heavier weapons but this was what they got. The supplies were at once off-loaded from the aircraft which had brought them in and then sent off to their destinations outside of Chihuahua. Several columns got diverted with cargo lost in transport due to ‘enemy action’. Weapons and ammunition was stolen and sold on rather than forcibly taken by the communists. The Northern Alliance didn’t consist of people all of whom were dedicated to defending the Monterrey Government. There were some who were in this for themselves, not either side in the civil war. What they stole would end up all over the place: some sent back to the United States to be used by criminals, other pieces sent overseas to be used in different conflicts. This incident was just a blatant example of what had been going on all months where there was theft of other weapons sent and also money too. Many within the Northern Alliance were realising that things were falling apart and would rather sort out their personal nest egg aboard for when, not if, that came.
Fighting around the little town of Caborca in Sonora saw communist troops which had fought and lost earlier at Santa Ana overrun the defenders there. No American air attacks had taken place to assist the Northern Alliance troops taking part with assets assigned to Avid Castle assigned on missions elsewhere at the crucial moment. Caborca was the last major populated town before the Sonoran Desert behind the town and Baja California beyond. Baja California (the two state governments in that peninsula acting as one) was now truly cut off from the rest of the Northern Alliance because after Caborca, they had no forward position from where to close the gap which had already opened up across Sonora between and the rest of Northern Alliance territory away to the east. That physical split led to a political split. From Tijuana, there came the decision that they could no longer work with the Monterrey Government. There was no going over to the side of Mexico City and the ‘foreign’ communists there but neither could Baja California be part of the disaster that they saw as how the Northern Alliance had been fighting the war. Monterrey had swallowed up all the resources which it could – American air support, troops from Baja California and everything else – and wasted all of that. President Herzog Flores in Monterrey was going to lose the fight against the communists but Baja California would fight on. That fight would also see the relaxation of the rules of warfare where necessary on the part of Baja California: the shootings in Chihuahua aside, the Northern Alliance had generally tried to fight an honourable war when the communists hadn’t been. Baja California would do what needed to be done. There was an expectation that the Americans wouldn’t be happy but a feeling that they would soon back Tijuana when Monterrey was eventually lost as it was sure to be soon enough. Promising friendship yet independence in action, Baja California made the announcement of its breakaway. They were still part of the United Mexican States, the legitimate and legal organisation for the country, so those in Tijuana said, just no longer would Baja California be following the lead set by Monterrey. The political and diplomatic position there was confusing for outsiders and best explained by the term ‘breaking away from Monterrey’. As Baja California did this, at the bottom of that peninsula, there came the landing around Cabo & San Lucas of communist troops at the airport and onto the famous beaches. Nicaraguan aircraft and ships, defying all American threats, brought troops across the Gulf of California from Sinaloa. Baja California would soon be under attack from two directions.
Late July 1984:
American intelligence and reconnaissance efforts were being stretched to the limit during a period which was unofficially in many circles as being referred to as a time of crisis. There were multiple ongoing areas of concern worldwide for United States geo-political interests and across each of them, there was a pressing need to provide information to decision-makers at the top: senior officials and politicians. Pressure was being put on those down below to get results and to get them now. The right results were wanted too, those that often fitted the desires of their bosses but also the highest level of government. Satellite passes, air overflights, electronic listening and the work of field agents was all undertaken and what they found delivered to analysts to put together reports to move high up the chain-of-command. Among this, there was urgency yet also a lot of covering of one’s behind by so many of those involved. Intelligence agencies were full of real people who had careers and personal responsibilities to think of. No one wanted to make a mistake which would cost them their job. If something went wrong, it couldn’t be their fault. Adding into this the demands that what was discovered fitted the preconceptions of those at the very top, brought about what would arguably become the greatest intelligence failure of the twentieth century. No one wanted to make the mistake that they did. Afterwards, when the error was revealed for what it was, rather than be fired, so many of those involved actually lost their lives instead and didn’t have to face the responsibility for the failure. Seeing as they were conveniently dead, that was helpful for the survivors who would later shift all blame upon them. That was some time away. For now, the intelligence work and reconnaissance effort continued. The maskirovka was underway and so the Americans weren’t understanding just what they were seeing: this occurred in Eastern Europe, the Middle East, East Asia and, in particular, through Latin America.
Moving into the south of Mexico came Guatemalan and Nicaraguan military forces in number. Thousands of soldiers were spotted arriving in Mexico after coming up from Central America. There were efforts to hide their movement yet their presence was still detected when many sources of information were collated and analysed. It was first thought that this might be a new wave of ‘volunteers’ to fight for the Mexican communists. That interpretation was revised when from the White House there came the idea that that these might be organised defensive forces to protect Mexico from US military intervention beyond air strikes. Both the CIA and the DIA revised their initial summaries on that to fit the political view. Yes, it did now look like these were defensive forces. It wasn’t just soldiers either but what looked like a field army of several combat divisions containing tanks and armoured vehicles. This was the force which had overcome Honduras and it was now inside Mexico after coming across from Guatemala. Onwards the LACom force moved, heading past Mexico City and beyond. They didn’t just move on land but also by air and sea as well. There were aircraft and ships involved which were supposedly Guatemalan & Nicaraguan. That was a lie and one seen through by the Americans. Where had those two little countries suddenly got themselves such transportation? From Cuba, that was where.
Coming across from Cuba, there was no sign yet that Castro was sending Cuban troops to Mexico. His aircraft and ships were involved with his allies though not anywhere near to the Yucatán where they had previously been attacked by the US Air Force. Instead it was through Central America – including El Salvador and Honduras now – that the Cubans were active as well as up the long Pacific coast of Mexico. This wasn’t beyond the range of the Americans should they chose to attack again, and certainly not something which their reconnaissance efforts couldn’t detect, yet quite far away from where air strikes over Mexico were taking place. A high-level meeting at the CIA headquarters concluded that Castro had taken the lesson to heart when his forces had been attacked like they had over the Yucatán and wouldn’t dare act there or in the Gulf of Mexico again. Clearly, he hadn’t been put off in his quest to challenge the United States, but he was trying to be less obvious with it. That analysis was passed onto the White House. It was factually correct yet conversely plain wrong at the same time.
Cuban forces weren’t moving out of Cuba from what the Americans could see though there was the arrival into the country of a significant amount of military equipment coming from the Soviet Union. Aircraft and ships arrived laden with weapons, ammunition and supplies. The number of arrivals was quite significant and more ships were spotted as being on their way through chokepoints worldwide. The transport aircraft and seagoing freighters were from the Soviet Union (their merchant marine was quite the organisation) and from the Eastern Bloc too. Cuba was being reequipped with military gear, so ran the DIA assessment passed on, as the Soviets shipped them plenty to be able to defend themselves against an attack by the United States. When the vast majority of this was observed being stored near to airports and seaports rather than moved off elsewhere, the DIA also concluded that this was a case of Castro having too much sent to him to be used at once and there must be internal Cuba inadequacy in getting it further dispatched. That made sense, sort of anyway. A follow-up, separate analysis – an outlier theory – at the DIA was that maybe it was instead being kept in Cuba ready to be transferred to Central America for use there. Both ideas were incorrect. What was already in Cuba and what was coming, all of that military equipment and supplies, wasn’t for the Cubans to use. No, instead it was for Soviet forces: Soviet forces not to be based in Cuba, just to soon start arriving to use Cuba as a jumping-off point for operations in September. Those Soviet forces would report to three major commands for upcoming wartime operations, those being the Eighth Tank Army, the Twenty–Eighth Combined Arms Army and the Twenty–Fourth Air Army. American intelligence was again seeing what the political directives were telling them to see. The whole idea of what was really going on was just too fanciful to imagine.
|
|